Volume 4 Tab 02 135200 Catalog
28288-Attachment 28288-Attachment 28288-Attachment 786685 Batch5 unilog cesco-content
109824-Catalog 109824-Catalog 109824-Catalog 786685 Batch7 unilog cesco-content
115410-Attachment 115410-Attachment 115410-Attachment 786679 Batch7 unilog cesco-content
120675-Attachment 120675-Attachment 120675-Attachment 786679 Batch7 unilog cesco-content
120940-Attachment 120940-Attachment 120940-Attachment 786685 Batch7 unilog cesco-content
2014-07-05
: Pdf 135200-Catalog 135200-Catalog 782116 Batch5 unilog
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 419
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Circuit Breakers 2.1 Introduction Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series G in Eaton Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series C in Eaton Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Series G ® Globally Accepted Breakers Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 Series 2.6 V4-T2-121 V4-T2-122 V4-T2-123 V4-T2-126 V4-T2-140 V4-T2-157 V4-T2-165 V4-T2-192 V4-T2-218 V4-T2-229 V4-T2-244 V4-T2-263 V4-T2-274 V4-T2-276 V4-T2-277 V4-T2-281 V4-T2-312 V4-T2-345 V4-T2-352 Specialty Specialty Breakers Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Current Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2 Mining Service Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Classic Mining Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVGard™ Solar Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Learn Online V4-T2-355 V4-T2-361 V4-T2-374 V4-T2-397 V4-T2-411 V4-T2-414 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Drawings Online Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2 2 Metering and Communications Power Monitoring and Metering with Modbus RTU PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 Definite Purpose Optimized solution for HVAC/R and Pumping Applications. Definite Purpose Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 V4-T2-4 V4-T2-6 V4-T2-7 V4-T2-9 V4-T2-14 V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-45 V4-T2-61 V4-T2-70 V4-T2-80 V4-T2-84 V4-T2-87 V4-T2-91 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-99 V4-T2-106 V4-T2-108 V4-T2-109 V4-T2-110 V4-T2-111 V4-T2-114 V4-T2-120 C® North American Standards and Special Application Breakers Product Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 V4-T2-2 V4-T2-2 V4-T2-3 V4-T2-3 2 V4-T2-1 2.1 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Introduction Series G E-Frame and Series C F-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers Contents Description 2 Page Introduction Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definite Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PM3 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specialty Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 Learn Online 2 V4-T2-4 V4-T2-121 V4-T2-345 V4-T2-352 V4-T2-355 Drawings Online 2 2 2 2 2 Product Overview Application Description 2 Series G vs. Series C Eaton molded case circuit breakers cover the widest range of applications in the industry: 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Eaton’s Electrical Sector, under the Eaton brand, offers the widest variety of molded case circuit breakers available today. Designed for electrical and machinery OEMs serving a range of industries and applications, these proven designs incorporate the latest in innovation with the high reliability that has been our hallmark since the advent of the circuit breaker in the 1920s. The Series C family ranges from 15–2500 amperes, and includes thermal-magnetic breakers, electronic trip breakers, molded case switches, motor circuit protectors, and specially designed breakers for engine generator, DC and mining applications. The new Series G line features an average 35% size reduction, common field-installable internal accessories, and advanced trip unit functionality that eliminates the need for rating plugs. These breakers meet the requirements of UL®, CSA®, IEC, CCC and CE, allowing the OEM to standardize on a design that meets the needs of their global customer base. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Electrical OEMs Machinery OEMs Navy breakers: ● UL 489 Supplement SB ● MIL-C-17588 ● MIL-C-17361 ● ABS/NVR Mining breakers up to 1100 Vac Earth leakage DC breakers 125–750 Vdc Engine generator breakers 15–1200 amperes Current limiting breakers Feeder Pillars In distribution systems to provide main and branch circuit protection. Individual Enclosures Completely assembled in enclosures to meet specific customer requirements. Switchgear In distribution systems to provide main and branch circuit protection up to 2500 amperes (RG-Frame). Additional Applications Special versions of each Eaton frame are available to provide safe equipment control and protection in mining and other applications. Contact your Eaton agent or distributor for additional information. Busbar Trunking Tap-Offs In busbar trunking tap-offs to provide circuit protection. Typical Eaton Applications Typical Applications Machine Tool Control Panels and Motor Control Centers Designed for these equipment requirements, including new world-class accessories. Panelboard Panelboards As both main and branch circuit protection devices. Individual Circuit Breaker Enclosure Busbar Trunking Tap-Off Machine Tool Control Panel Switchboard 2 V4-T2-2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Introduction Eaton Molded Case Circuit Breakers in Assemblies 2 Series G Panelboards 2 Switchboards Motor Control Centers Frame Ampere Range 1A 2A 3A 4 5P PRL-C IFS Freedom IT. Enclosed Control Bus Plugs Enclosed Breaker EG 15–160 1 — — — — — — — ■ ■ ■ — — JG 20–250 — — — — — — — — — — — — LG 100–630 2 — — — ■ — ■ ■ — — — — ■ NG 400–1600 3 — — — — — — — ■ ■ — — ■ RG 800–2500 — — — — — — — ■ ■ — — — Bus Plugs Enclosed Breaker 2 2 2 2 2 2 Series C Panelboards Frame 2 Switchboards Motor Control Centers Ampere Range 1A 2A 3A 4 5P PRL-C IFS Freedom IT. Enclosed Control FD/ED 15–225 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ JD 70–250 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ KD 70–400 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ LD 400–600 — — — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ MDL 300–800 — — — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ND 400–1200 — — — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ RD 800–2500 — — — — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ — — — 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 125 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for EG. 2 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for LG. 3 1200 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for NG. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-3 2.2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Series G, 15–2500 Amperes for UL, CSA and IEC Applications Contents Description 2 Page Series G Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Learn Online V4-T2-5 V4-T2-6 V4-T2-7 V4-T2-9 V4-T2-14 V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-45 V4-T2-61 V4-T2-70 V4-T2-80 V4-T2-84 V4-T2-87 V4-T2-91 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-99 V4-T2-106 V4-T2-108 V4-T2-109 V4-T2-110 Drawings Online 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Product Overview Series G, 15–2500 Amperes for UL, CSA and IEC Applications Eaton Series G molded case circuit breakers provide increased performance in considerably less space than standard circuit breakers or comparable fusible devices. The “G” signifies global applications: Series G circuit breakers are marked with UL, CSA, CE, IEC and KEMA KEUR listings. Other advantages include: ● ● ● ● ● Field-fit accessories Common accessories through 630 amperes Electronic trip units from 20 to 2500 amperes UL-listed and IEC-rated, 30 mA ground fault/earth leakage modules Built-in ground fault protection down to 20 amperes The EG, JG and LG frames are designed around space-saving footprints. The NG and RG use the proven Eaton Series C ND and RD designs. The Series G family includes five frame sizes in ratings from 15 to 2500 amperes. Series G offers a choice of several interrupting capacities up to 200 kA at 480 volts AC (200 kA at 240 volts AC). Standard calibration is 40°C. For applications in high ambient temperature conditions, 50°C factory calibration is available on thermal-magnetic breakers (not UL). The Most Logically Designed Contact Assembly The flexibility and outstanding performance characteristics of Eaton circuit breakers are made possible by the best contact designs in circuit breaker history. Our technology creates a highspeed “blow-open” action using the electromechanical forces produced by high-level fault currents. Eaton circuit breakers are operated by a toggle-type mechanism that is mechanically trip-free from the handle so that the contacts cannot be held closed against short circuit currents. Tripping due to overload or short circuits is clearly indicated by the position on the handle. This remarkably fast and dependable contact action is designed to enhance safety. Thorough In-Plant Testing The quality, dependability and reliability of every Eaton Circuit Breaker is ensured by a thorough program of inplant testing. Two calibration tests are conducted on every pole of every circuit breaker to verify the trip mechanism, operating mechanism, continuity and accuracy. 2 V4-T2-4 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Current Limiting Characteristics Circuit breakers are current limiting because of their high repulsion contact arrangement and use of state-of-the-art arc extinguishing technology. Eaton offers one of the most complete lines of current limiting breakers in the industry. The industrial breakers are available in current limiting versions with interrupting capacities up to 200 kA at 480V without fuses in the same physical size as standard and high interrupting capacity breakers. 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Operating Mechanisms Eaton circuit breakers have a toggle handle operating mechanism, which also serves as a switching position indicator. The indicator shows the positions of: ON, OFF and TRIPPED. The toggle handle snaps into the TRIPPED position if the breaker is tripped by one of its overcurrent, short circuit, shunt or undervoltage releases. Before the circuit breaker can be reclosed following a trip-out, the toggle handle must be brought beyond the OFF position (RESET). The circuit breaker can then be reclosed. As an additional switching position indicator for EG- to RG-Frame circuit breakers, there are two windows on the right and on the left of the toggle handle, in which the switching state is indicated by means of the colors red, green and white corresponding to the ON, OFF and TRIPPED positions respectively. Positions of the Toggle Handle Drive OFF Reset ON Tripped ● ● Japanese T-Mark standard molded case circuit breakers 2 2 2 Global Third-Party Certification Molded case circuit breakers from Eaton are designed to conform with the following international standards: ● 2 2 Eaton Series G circuit breakers meet applicable UL 489 and IEC 60947-2 standards. Australian Standard AS 2184 and AS 3947-2 molded case circuit breakers British Standards Institution Standard EN60947.2 International Electromechanical Commission Recommendations IEC 60947.2 circuit breakers 2 2 Standards and Certifications ● 2 ● ● ● National Electrical Manufacturers Association Standards Publication No. AB1-1993 molded case circuit breakers South African Bureau of Standards, Standard SANS 156, Standard Specification for molded case circuit breakers Swiss Electro-Technical Association Standard SEV 947.2, Safety Regulations for circuit breakers ● ● Union Technique de l’Electricite Standard NF C 63-120, low voltage switchgear and control gear circuit breaker requirements Verband Deutscher Elektrotechnike (Association of German Electrical Engineers) Standard VDE 0660, low voltage switchgear and control gear, circuit breakers Certification marks ensure product compliance with the total standard via the third party witnessing of tests by globally recognized independent certification organizations. KEMA is a highly recognized, independent international organization that offers certification and inspection facilities for equipment in many industries. The KEMAKEUR mark is the highest certification an electrical product can receive from KEMA. Our IEC 60947-2 molded case circuit breakers are KEMA tested and certified. These breakers are also listed in accordance with UL 489, as well as CSA C22.2 No. 5-02. KEMA, UL and CSA provide ongoing follow-up testing and inspections to ensure that Eaton molded case circuit breakers continue to meet their exacting standards. ISO Certification Eaton circuit breakers are manufactured in ISO® certified facilities. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-5 2.2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Product Selection Overview Electronic Trip Units (Digitrip RMS Trip Units)—Multi-Function Electronic Trip Units for All Applications True rms Sensing Digitrip rms trip units use Eaton’s microprocessor-based intelligence to provide true rms sensing, permitting increased accuracy and reliable system protection. True rms sensing is not susceptible to nuisance tripping when waveforms containing high harmonic currents are present. Digitrip RMS 310+ Digitrip RMS 310+ electronic trip units are available with Eaton circuit breakers JG, LG, NG and RG. They are selectable long time delay (tLD) and pickup settings (Ir). A rating plug is not required. The Digitrip 310+ offers true rms sensing, is front adjustable and has an optional local display of current and cause of trip. Rating Plugs If rating plugs are needed for the R-Frame, they are marked for 50/60 Hz applications. Both fixed and adjustable rating plugs are available, providing further flexibility when applied to selectively coordinated systems. Curve Shaping When selectively coordinated systems are called for, Digitrip RMS 310+ will provide a cost-effective solution for a variety of applications. The standard Digitrip RMS 310+ includes an adjustable short time pickup setting encompassing an I2t ramp function that provides the basic LS curve shaping function. JG-, LG-, NG- and RG-Frames have an adjustable long time delay. JG-, LG-, NG- and RG-Frames have selectable long time delay (tLD) and pickup settings (Ir). A rating plug is not required. 2 2 2 2 The optional Digitrip RMS 310+ provides additional flat response short time delay adjustments on an instantaneous setting to provide LSI curve shaping capability. Digitrip RMS 310+ trip units are available with ground fault pickup and flat response ground fault delay, which provides the trip unit with full function LSG and LSIG curve shaping flexibility. Digitrip RMS 310+ trip units can effectively coordinate with both sophisticated upstream power breakers as well as downstream thermalmagnetic breakers, making Digitrip RMS 310+ trip units the cost-effective reliable choice for selectively coordinated systems. Thermal Memory All Digitrip RMS trip units incorporate a long delay. Thermal memory prevents the system from cumulative overheating due to repeated overcurrent events that may occur in quick succession. Field Testing A field test kit is available for Digitrip RMS 310+ trip units. Arcflash Reduction Maintenance Mode (ARMS) ARMS is an available feature on the LG- and NG-Frame with 310+ electronic trip units. This feature increases worker safety by providing an accelerated instantaneous trip unit to reduce arc flash. Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 trip units are available with Eaton R-Frame circuit breakers 800 through 2500 amperes. Digitrip 610 and 910 trip units provide unparalleled system protection with the added convenience of a local display. Curve Shaping Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 trip units are available with up to nine curve shaping choices achieved by adjusting up to seven switches on the front of the unit for optimum system coordination. Maximum curve shaping flexibility is provided by dependent long and short delay adjustments that are long delay pickup (Ir) based, depicted on the front of the unit by the blue portion of the time-current curve. Additional coordination capability can be provided by utilizing the short delay and ground fault zone selective interlocking features available on these trip units. System Diagnostics Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 models of trip units provide long delay, short delay, instantaneous, and ground fault cause of trip LEDs on the front of the unit. Their display shows a magnitude of trip information, as well as remote signal contacts, for improved system alarming. System Monitoring Digitrip 610 and 910 trip units have the capability to monitor phase currents, as well as neutral or ground currents. This information is displayed on a large digital display mounted on the unit. 2 V4-T2-6 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Digitrip RMS 910 trip units can also provide the user with power and energy monitoring capability. Peak power demand, present power demand, and total energy, as well as forward and reverse energy can be monitored with this unit. Digitrip RMS 910 trip units have the additional capability of monitoring line-to-line voltage, as well as system power factor. Both parameters are displayed in the digital display window and are supported by LEDs to indicate which parameter is being displayed. Harmonics Monitoring Digitrip RMS 910 trip units are capable of displaying values of current harmonics in the digital display window. Percentage of harmonic content can be monitored for each phase, up to the 27th harmonic. Additionally, a total harmonic distortion value can be calculated and displayed. Communications Digitrip RMS 910 units have built-in communications options to allow all protection, monitoring, and control information to be transmitted back to a central location via the Eaton PowerNet™ system. Field Testing Integral field testing capability is provided on all 610 and 910 trip units. No additional test set is needed to perform both trip and no trip field testing. 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Product Selection Guide 2 Electronic Trip Units 2 Digitrip—RMS 310+, 610 and 910 RMS 310+ RMS 610 2 RMS 910 2 JG 2 2 LG/NG RG 2 Breaker Type 2 Eaton frame(s) JG-, LG-, NG- and RG-Frames RG-Frame RG-Frame Ampere rating 20–2500A 800–2500A 800–2500A Interrupting rating at 415V 35, 70, 100 kA 70, 100 kA 70, 100 kA 2 Yes Yes Yes 2 LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG Trip Unit Sensing rms sensing Protection and Coordination Protection Long delay Short delay Instantaneous Ground fault Ordering options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG Fixed rating plug (In) 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Overtemperature trip Yes Yes Yes Yes Adjustable rating plug (ln) 1 Yes Yes No No Long delay setting 0.5–1.0 (ln) 2 0.5–1.0 (ln) 2 0.5–1.0 x (ln) 0.5–1.0 x (ln) Long delay time I2t at 6x 10 seconds 2 10 seconds 2 2–24 seconds 2–24 seconds Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes Yes Yes High load alarm No No 0.85 x Ir 0.85 x Ir 2 2 VAR/frame 3 VAR/frame 3 200–600% S1 and S2 x (Ir) 200–600% S1 and S2 x (Ir) Short delay time I2t 100 ms No 100, 300, 500 ms 100, 300, 500 ms Short delay time flat No I–300 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms Short delay time ZSI No No Yes Yes Instantaneous setting No 200–800% x (ln) 4 200–600% M1 and M2 x (ln) 200–600% M1 and M2 x (ln) Discriminator No No Yes 5 Yes 5 Instantaneous override Yes Yes Yes Yes Ground fault setting VAR/Frame 6 VAR/Frame 6 25–100% x (ln) 6 25–100% x (ln) 6 Ground fault delay I2t at 0.62x No No 100, 300, 500 ms 100, 300, 500 ms Ground fault delay flat I–500 ms 7 I–500 ms 7 100–500 ms 100–500 ms No No Yes Yes Ground fault thermal memory No No Yes Yes 2 3 4 5 6 7 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes In = Rating plug rating. Ir = Long delay setting. 1 2 2 Short delay setting Ground fault ZSI 2 2 JG- and LG-Frames have selectable settings instead of a rating plug. JG-, LG- and NG-Frames have adjustable long delay times of 2–24 seconds. JG/LG: 2X–14X (In); NG: 2X–8X (In); RG: 2X–8X (In); 2500 ampere RG-Frame 200–600% x (In). JG-Frame also has a 14X setting. LS, LSG only. Not to exceed 1200 amperes. JG- and LG-Frames are Instantaneous, 120 ms. NG- and RG-Frames are Instantaneous, 100, 300 and 500 ms. 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-7 2.2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Digitrip—RMS 310+, 610 and 910, continued RMS 310+ RMS 610 RMS 910 LSI, LSIG, LSIG (A) LSI (A), LSIG 2 JG 2 2 2 2 RG LS, LSG LG/NG LSI, LSIG System Diagnostics 2 Cause of trip LEDs Yes 1 No Yes Yes 2 Magnitude of trip information No No Yes Yes Remote signal contacts No No Yes Yes Yes 2 System Monitoring Digital display Yes 2 No Yes 2 Current Yes 2 No Yes Yes Voltage Yes 2 No No Yes 2 Power and energy Yes 2 No No Yes 2 Power quality—harmonics No No No Yes Power factor No No No Yes No No No Yes Test set Test set Integral Integral 2 System Communications 2 Field Testing 2 2 PowerNet Testing method Notes 1 Using cause of trip module (catalog number TRIP-LED). 2 Using ammeter or remote ammeter/cause of trip display (catalog number DIGIVIEW and DIGIVIEWR06). 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-8 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Technical Data and Specifications 2 Ratings 2 Frames EG, JG and LG EG JG 2 LG 2 2 2 Maximum rated current (amperes) 125, 160 1 Breaker type 3 B B Number of poles 1 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 1 S S H H C E 2 400, 630 2 250 E S H C U X E S H C U X 2, 3, 4 1 2, 3, 4 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 2 2 Breaker Capacity (kA rms) Vac 50–60 Hz NEMA®, UL, CSA 240 Vac 25 25 35 85 85 100 100 200 65 85 100 200 200 200 65 85 100 200 200 200 480 Vac — 18 25 — 35 — 65 100 25 35 65 100 150 200 35 50 65 100 150 200 600 Vac 4 — — 18 — 22 — 25 35 18 18 25 35 50 50 18 25 35 50 65 65 10 6 10 10 35 6 35 42 6 42 42 10 22 22 42 50 50 22 22 42 42 50 50 IEC 60947-2 220–240 Vac 125/250 Vdc 5 Icu 25 25 35 85 85 100 100 200 65 85 100 200 200 200 65 85 100 200 200 200 Ics 25 25 35 43 43 50 50 200 65 85 100 200 200 200 65 85 100 200 200 200 380–415 Vac Icu — 18 25 — 40 — 70 100 25 40 70 100 150 200 35 50 70 100 150 200 Ics — 18 25 — 30 — 35 100 25 40 70 100 150 200 35 50 53 100 150 200 Icu — — — — — — — — 12 12 14 16 18 18 12 20 25 30 35 35 Ics — — — — — — — — 6 6 7 12 14 14 6 10 13 15 18 18 Icu 10 6 10 10 35 6 35 42 6 42 42 10 22 22 42 50 50 22 22 42 42 50 50 Ics 10 6 10 10 35 6 35 42 6 42 42 10 22 22 42 50 50 22 22 42 42 50 50 660–690 Vac 125/250 Vdc 5 Ampere range 15–160A 1 20–250A 100–630A 2 Trip Units F = Fixed A = Adjustable T = Thermal M = Magnetic FT-FM AT-FM FT-AM AT-AM Electronic (Digitrip RMS 310) FT-AM AT-AM Electronic (Digitrip RMS 310) Thermal magnetic Electronic RMS 7 — — — — — — — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Built-in ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Fixed thermal ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Adjustable thermal ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Magnetic Fixed LS — ■5 ■5 ■5 ■ — — — — — — ■ ■ Adjustable ■ ■ ■ ■ ■5 ■5 5 LSI — — — — — — — — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■5 ■5 ■5 ■5 ■5 ■ 5 LSG — — — — — — — — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■5 ■5 ■5 ■5 ■5 ■ 5 LSIG — — — — — — — — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■5 ■5 ■5 ■5 ■5 ■ 5 Utilization category A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 125 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the EG. 2 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG. 3 Breaker type C, U and X are current limiting per UL 489. 4 EG breaker rated 600/347 Vac. 5 Two poles in series. 6 125 Vdc only for single-pole breakers. 7 Not suitable for DC application. Four-pole ground fault not available. Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2 2 — — 2 2 Interchangeable Adjustable 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-9 2.2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Frames NG and RG NG RG 2 2 2 2 1600 1 800 1600, 2000, 2500 1600, 2000, 2500 H C 2 S U H C2 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 3 3 3, 4 3, 4 240 Vac 85 100 200 — 200 125 200 480 Vac 50 65 100 — 150 65 100 600 Vac 25 35 65 — 65 50 65 Icu 85 100 200 85 — 135 200 Ics 85 100 100 85 — 100 100 Icu 50 70 100 50 — 70 100 Ics 50 50 50 50 — 50 50 Icu 20 3 25 3 35 20 3 — 25 3 35 3 Ics 10 13 18 10 — 13 18 Icu — — — — — — — Maximum rated current (amperes) 800, 1200 2 Breaker type S 2 Number of poles Breaker Capacity (kA rms) AC 50–60 Hz 2 NEMA, UL, CSA 2 2 IEC 60947-2 2 220–240 Vac 380–415 Vac 2 660–690 Vac 2 250 Vdc 2 2 Ics 800, 1200 800, 1200 — — — — — — — Ampere range 400–1200A 400–1200A 400–1200A 1600A 800A 800–2500A 800–2500A Trip units Electronic (Digitrip RMS 310+) 2 Electronic (Digitrip RMS 310+, 610 and 910) Interchangeable — — — — — — — Built-in ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ LI — — — — — ■5 ■5 2 LS ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ LSI ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 2 LIG — — — — — ■5 ■5 LSG ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 2 LSIG ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 2 ALSI ■ ■ ■ ■ — ■ ■ ALSIG ■ ■ ■ ■ — ■ ■ A A A A A A A 2 2 2 2 2 Electronic 4 Utilization category Notes 1 NG 1600 ampere frame is not UL or CSA listed. 2 Not KEMA-KEUR listed. 3 IEC 60947-2 H.5 Annex H is not KEMA-KEUR tested. 4 Not suitable for DC application. Four-pole ground fault not available. 5 Available only on Digitrip 610 and 910 trip units. 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-10 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G General Specifications 2 All Series G Frames 2 EG JG LG NG RG 160A 1 250A 400, 630A 2 800, 1200, 1600A 3 1600, 2000, 2500A Main conducting paths 500 Vac 750 Vac 750 Vac 750 Vac 750 Vac Auxiliary circuits 500 Vac 690 Vac 690 Vac 690 Vac 690 Vac Main conducting paths 6 kV 8 kV 8 kV 8 kV 8 kV Auxiliary circuits 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV IEC 415 Vac 690 Vac 690 Vac 690 Vac 690 Vac NEMA Maximum rated current In depending on the version Rated insulation voltage U, according to IEC 60947-2 2 2 2 Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 2 2 Rated operational voltage Ue 2 600Y/347 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac UL and CSA listed Yes 1 Yes Yes 2 Yes 3 Yes Permissible ambient temperature –20° to 70°C –5° to 60°C –5° to 60°C Permissible load for various ambient temperatures close to the circuit breaker, related to the rated current of the circuit breaker 4 5 4 5 4 5 — — At 40°C 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% At 50°C 96% 92% 96% 94% 96% 91% 91% 91% At 55°C 93% 87% 94% 90% 93% 86% 85% 85% At 60°C 91% 83% 92% 87% 90% 82% 81% 81% At 70°C 86% 73% 88% 80% 84% 70% — — 2 2 –20° to 70°C –20° to 70°C 2 2 2 Circuit breakers for plant protection 2 2 Circuit breakers for motor protection At 40°C — 100% 100% — — At 50°C — 100% 100% — — At 55°C — 100% 100% — — At 60°C — 100% 100% — — At 70°C — 90% 90% — — 2 2 2 Circuit breakers for starter combinations and isolating circuit breakers 2 At 40°C 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% At 50°C 100% 100% 100% 91% 91% At 55°C 96% 96% 95% 85% 85% At 60°C 91% 82% 90% 81% 81% At 70°C 86% 88% 84% — — 42 kA max. 42 kA max. 42 kA max. 6 6 2 42 kA max. 6 6 2 2 2 2 Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (DC) Not for circuit breakers for motor protection (Time constant t = 10 rms) Two conducting paths in series For EG to LG up to 250 Vdc NEMA (time constant t = 8 rms) Two conducting paths in series 250 Vdc 42 kA max. 42 kA max. 2 Notes 1 125 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the EG. 2 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG. 3 1200 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the NG. 4 Thermal overload release set to the lower value. 5 Thermal overload release set to the upper value. 6 Not suitable for DC switching. 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-11 2.2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G All Series G Frames, continued EG JG LG NG RG Yes Yes Yes Yes 2 Main switch characteristics according to IEC 60947-2 in combination with lockable rotary drives Yes 2 Rated short circuit breaking capacity according to IEC 60947-2 (at AC 50/60 Hz) For rated short circuit breaking capacity, see Page V4-T2-9. 2 Endurance (operating cycles) 10,000 10,000 8,000 3,000 3,000 Maximum switching frequency 300 1/h 240 1/h 240 1/h 60 1/h 60 1/h Conductor cross sections and terminal types for main conductors Box terminals Box terminals Box terminals Flat bar terminals Flat bar terminals Flat bar terminals Solid or stranded 2.5 to 95 mm2 50 to 150 mm2 95 to 240 mm2 — — — Finely stranded with end sleeve 2.5 to 50/70 mm2 35 to 120 mm2 70 to 150 mm2 — — — 2 2 2 — — — 600A Optional Optional 2 Tightening torque for box terminals 5.6 Nm 20 Nm 42 Nm 31 Nm 31 Nm — Tightening torque for busbar connection pieces 5.6 Nm 15 Nm 30 Nm 6 Nm 50 Nm 20 Nm 2 Conductor cross sections for auxiliary circuits with terminal connection or terminal strip Solid 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 Up to 2x4 mm2 Up to 2x4 mm2 Finely stranded with end sleeve 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 Up to 2x2.5 mm2 Up to 2x2.5 mm2 With brought-out cable ends — 0.82 (AWG 18) mm2 0.82 (AWG 18) mm2 0.82 (AWG 18) mm2 0.82 (AWG 18) mm2 Tightening torque for fitting screws — 0.8 to 1.4 Nm 0.8 to 1.4 Nm 0.8 to 1.4 Nm 0.8 to 1.4 Nm 2 2 2 2 2 2 Power loss per circuit breaker at maximum rated current ln (the power losses of the undervoltage releases (“r” releases) must be observed if necessary) at three-phase symmetrical load) 400A: 600A: For plant protection 40W 45W 65W 120W 87/210W 220/270/400W As isolating circuit breaker 40W 45W 65W 120W 87/210W 220/270/400W For starter combinations 40W 45W 65W 120W — — For motor protection — 45W 65W 120W — — Permissible mounting position 90 90 90 2 90 2 Busbar 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Arc spacing— suitable for reverse-feed applications Yes (except HMCPE) Yes Yes Yes Yes Rated thermal current lth 6A 6A 6A 6A 6A Rated making capacity 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A AC-14 AC-14 AC-14 AC-15 AC-15 Rated operational voltage 230/400/600V 230/400/600V 230/400/600V 600V 600V Rated operational current 6/3/0.25A 6/3/0.25A 6/3/0.25A 6A 6A DC-13 DC-13 Rated operational voltage 125/250V 125/250V 125/250V 125/250V 125/250V Rated operational current 0.5/0.25A Auxiliary Switches 0.5/0.15A 0.5/0.15A 0.5/0.15A 0.5/0.25A Backup fuse 6/4/4A (4) 6/4/4A (4) 6/4/4A (4) 6/4/4A (4) 6/4/4A Miniature circuit breaker 6/4A 6/4A 6/4A 6/4A 6/4A 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-12 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G All Series G Frames, continued EG JG LG NG 2 RG 2 Releases Undervoltage releases (“r” releases) 2 Response voltage: Drop (breaker tripped) Us 35–70% 35–70% 35–70% 35–70% 35–70% Pickup (breaker may be switched on) Us 85–110% 85–110% 85–110% 85–110% 85–110% 2 50/60 Hz 12 Vac — — — 1.9 VA 2.9 VA 2 50/60 Hz 24 Vac 0.72 VA 3.9 VA 3.9 VA 2.4 VA 3.1 VA 50/60 Hz 48–60 Vac 1.15–1.78 VA 2.5–3.8 VA 2.5–3.8 VA 2.3–4.1 VA 3.4–6.0 VA 50/60 Hz 110–127 Vac 0.96–1.25 VA 1.8–2.4 VA 1.8–2.4 VA 3.4–4.2 VA 3.3–3.8 VA 50/60 Hz 208–240 Vac 1.28–1.68 VA 2.7–3.8 VA 2.7–3.8 VA 4.8–6.5 VA 4.2–7.2 VA 50/60 Hz 380–500 Vac 2.2–3.9 VA 3.4–5.8 VA 3.4–5.8 VA 6.8–12.0 VA 3.8–10.0 VA 50/60 Hz 525–600 Vac 3.4–4.3 VA 3.4–4.3 VA 3.4–4.3 VA — — 12 Vdc — — — 2.6W 3.4W Power consumption in continuous operation at: 24 Vdc 0.70W 3.1W 3.1W 3.6W 4.3W 48–60 Vdc 1.12–1.76W 2.0–3.1W 2.0–3.1W 3.5–5.5W 4.8–7.2W 110–125 Vdc 0.94–1.21W 1.6–2.2W 1.6–2.2W 2.9–3.6W 3.3–3.8W 220–250 Vdc Maximum opening time 1.45–1.86W 3.1–4W 3.1–4W 4.8–6.3W 6.6–7.5W 50 ms 50 ms 50 ms 62 ms 62 ms 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Shunt Trips Shunt trips (“f” releases) 2 Response voltage: 70–110% 70–110% 50/60 Hz 24 Vac 10–41 VA 50/60 Hz 48–60 Vac 139–210 VA Pickup (breaker tripped) Us 70–110% 70–110% 70–110% 2 87–405 VA 87–405 VA 710–1105 VA 710–1105 VA 98–475 VA 612 VA 24–50 VA 403–666 VA 2 Power consumption in (short time) at: 2 50/60 Hz 48–127 Vac — — — — — 50/60 Hz 110–240 Vac 83–360 VA 66–432 VA 66–432 VA 67–432 VA 396–1896 VA 50/60 Hz 380–440 Vac — 127–188 VA 127–188 VA 76–110 VA 1596–2156 VA 50/60 Hz 380–600 Vac 418–1080 VA — — — — 50/60 Hz 480–600 Vac — 34–60 VA 34–60 VA 19–42 VA 230–384 VA 12–24 Vdc 29–120W 164–631W 164–631W 145–610W 396W 48–60 Vdc 475–720W 830–1580W 830–1580W 67–102W 341–528W 110–125 Vdc 99–121W 112–150W 112–150W 121–150W 264–350W 220–250 Vdc — 40–58W 40–58W 46–55W 374–475W Maximum load duration Interrupts automatically Interrupts automatically Interrupts automatically Interrupts automatically Interrupts automatically Maximum opening time 50 ms 50 ms 50 ms 62 ms 62 ms 2 2 2 2 2 Molded Case Switch (with High Magnetic Trip) Unfused kAIC at 480 Vac (415 Vac) 65 (70) 65 (70) 65 (70) 65 (70) 65 (70) Self-protected, will trip above 1250 for EG125; 1600 for EG160 2500 4000/6300 12,500 20,000 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-13 2.2 2 2 Series G Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Series G—Frame EG, JG and LG 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers EG Single-pole JG LG H W D H W D H W D 5.50 (139.7) 1.00 (25.4) 2.99 (76.0) — — — — — — Two-pole 5.50 (139.7) 2.00 (50.8) 2.99 (76.0) 7.00 (177.8) 4.13 (105.0) 3.57 (87.4) — — — Three-pole 5.50 (139.7) 3.00 (76.2) 2.99 (76.0) 7.00 (177.8) 4.13 (105.0) 3.57 (87.4) 10.13 (258.0) 5.48 (140.0) 4.09 (104.0) 2 Four-pole 5.50 (139.7) 4.00 (101.6) 2.99 (76.0) 7.00 (177.8) 5.34 (135.6) 3.57 (87.4) 10.13 (258.0) 7.22 (183.0) 4.09 (104.0) 2 Series G—Frame NG and RG 2 NG 2 RG H W D H W D 2 Single-pole — — — — — — Two-pole — — — — — — 2 Three-pole 16.00 (406.0) 8.25 (210.0) 5.50 (140.0) 16.00 (406.0) 15.50 (394.0) 9.75 (229.0) Four-pole 16.00 (406.0) 11.13 (280.0) 5.50 (140.0) 16.00 (406.0) 20.00 (508.0) 9.75 (229.0) 2 2 Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg) 2 Series G—Frame EG, JG and LG EG JG LG NG RG 2 Single-pole 0.85 (0.39) — — — — 2 Two-pole 1.57 (0.71) 11.3 (5.13) — — — Three-pole 2.28 (1.04) 5.06 (2.30) T/M 5.31 (2.41) ETU 12.36 (5.61) T/M 13.04 (5.92) ETU 46.8 (21.3) 103.0 (47.0) Four-pole 2.85 (1.29) 6.76 (3.07) T/M 7.12 (3.23) ETU 16.27 (7.39) T/M 16.92 (7.68) ETU 62.0 (28.3) 118.4 (54.0) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-14 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) 2.2 Contents Description EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page V4-T2-16 V4-T2-17 V4-T2-26 V4-T2-27 V4-T2-27 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-45 V4-T2-61 V4-T2-70 V4-T2-80 V4-T2-84 V4-T2-87 V4-T2-91 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-99 V4-T2-106 V4-T2-108 V4-T2-109 V4-T2-110 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) 2 Product Description 2 EG breaker is HACR rated. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-15 2.2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Catalog Number Selection Series G—EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) E G H 3 015 FF G 2 Frame 2 2 E Amperes 2 2 2 2 2 B E S H C K Performance 600Y/347 480 415 — 18 18 18 25 25 22 35 40 25 65 70 35 100 100 Molded case switch 2 2 2 2 Number of Poles Standard/Application G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA 240 25 35 85 100 200 1 = One 2 = Two 3 = Three 4 = Four—neutral 0% protected 7 = Four—neutral 100% protected 016 1 015 020 025 030 032 1 035 040 045 050 060 063 1 070 080 090 100 110 125 160 1 Notes 1 Cannot be UL rated. 2 Available only as 125 and 160A sizes. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-16 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Terminations/Hardware Terminals Mounting Hardware M = Metric end caps Metric E = Imperial end caps Imperial G = Line/load standard Metric B = Bolt-on — Trip Unit FF = Fixed fixed AF = Adjustable thermal fixed magnetic KS = Molded case switch 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Product Selection 2 Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware) IC Rating at 415/480 Volts EG-Frame 2 EG-Frame—18/18 Single-Pole Two-Pole 2 Four-Pole 3 Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Amps at 40°C 1 Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Catalog Number Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Catalog Number Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Catalog Number Adjustable 2 Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Catalog Number Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Catalog Number Adjustable 2 Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Catalog Number 15 EGB1015FFG EGB2015FFG EGB3015FFG — EGB4015FFG — 16 EGB1016FFG EGB2016FFG EGB3016FFG — EGB4016FFG — 20 EGB1020FFG EGB2020FFG EGB3020FFG — EGB4020FFG EGB4020AFG 25 EGB1025FFG EGB2025FFG EGB3025FFG EGB3025AFG EGB4025FFG EGB4025AFG 30 EGB1030FFG EGB2030FFG EGB3030FFG — EGB4030FFG — 32 EGB1032FFG EGB2032FFG EGB3032FFG EGB3032AFG EGB4032FFG EGB4032AFG 35 EGB1035FFG EGB2035FFG EGB3035FFG — EGB4035FFG — 40 EGB1040FFG EGB2040FFG EGB3040FFG EGB3040AFG EGB4040FFG EGB4040AFG 45 EGB1045FFG EGB2045FFG EGB3045FFG — EGB4045FFG — 50 EGB1050FFG EGB2050FFG EGB3050FFG EGB3050AFG EGB4050FFG EGB4050AFG 60 EGB1060FFG EGB2060FFG EGB3060FFG — EGB4060FFG — 63 EGB1063FFG EGB2063FFG EGB3063FFG EGB3063AFG EGB4063FFG EGB4063AFG 70 EGB1070FFG EGB2070FFG EGB3070FFG — EGB4070FFG — 80 EGB1080FFG EGB2080FFG EGB3080FFG EGB3080AFG EGB4080FFG EGB4080AFG 90 EGB1090FFG EGB2090FFG EGB3090FFG — EGB4090FFG — 100 EGB1100FFG EGB2100FFG EGB3100FFG EGB3100AFG EGB4100FFG EGB4100AFG 125 EGB1125FFG EGB2125FFG EGB3125FFG EGB3125AFG EGB4125FFG EGB4125AFG 160 — — EGB3160FFG EGB3160AFG EGB4160FFG EGB4160AFG 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 16, 32, 63 and 160A are not UL listed ratings. 2 Adjustable thermal are not UL listed. 3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on the LH side. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-17 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2 EG-Frame—25/25 Single-Pole Unavailable 2 EG-Frame EG-Frame—25/25 Two-Pole 2 Four-Pole 3 Three-Pole Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Adjustable 2 Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Maximum Continuous Amps at 40°C 1 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 15 EGE2015FFG EGE3015FFG — EGE4015FFG — 2 16 EGE2016FFG EGE3016FFG — EGE4016FFG — 20 EGE2020FFG EGE3020FFG — EGE4020FFG EGE4020AFG 2 25 EGE2025FFG EGE3025FFG EGE3025AFG EGE4025FFG EGE4025AFG 30 EGE2030FFG EGE3030FFG — EGE4030FFG — 2 32 EGE2032FFG EGE3032FFG EGE3032AFG EGE4032FFG EGE4032AFG 2 35 EGE2035FFG EGE3035FFG — EGE4035FFG — 40 EGE2040FFG EGE3040FFG EGE3040AFG EGE4040FFG EGE4040AFG 2 45 EGE2045FFG EGE3045FFG EGE3050AFG EGE4045FFG — 50 EGE2050FFG EGE3050FFG — EGE4050FFG EGE4050AFG 2 60 EGE2060FFG EGE3060FFG — EGE4060FFG — 63 EGE2063FFG EGE3063FFG EGE3063AFG EGE4063FFG EGE4063AFG 2 70 EGE2070FFG EGE3070FFG — EGE4070FFG — 2 80 EGE2080FFG EGE3080FFG EGE3080AFG EGE4080FFG EGE4080AFG 90 EGE2090FFG EGE3090FFG — EGE4090FFG — 2 100 EGE2100FFG EGE3100FFG EGE3100AFG EGE4100FFG EGE4100AFG 125 EGE2125FFG EGE3125FFG EGE3125AFG EGE4125FFG EGE4125AFG 2 160 — EGE3160FFG EGE3160AFG EGE4160FFG EGE4160AFG 2 Notes 1 16, 32, 63 and 160A are not UL listed ratings. 2 Adjustable thermal are not UL listed. 3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on the LH side. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-18 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Adjustable 2 Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Catalog Number 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G EG-Frame EG-Frame—40/35 Single-Pole Two-Pole 2 Four-Pole 3 Three-Pole 2 2 Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 15 EGS1015FFG EGS2015FFG EGS3015FFG — EGS4015FFG — 16 EGS1016FFG EGS2016FFG EGS3016FFG — EGS4016FFG — 20 EGS1020FFG EGS2020FFG EGS3020FFG — EGS4020FFG EGS4020AFG 25 EGS1025FFG EGS2025FFG EGS3025FFG EGS3025AFG EGS4025FFG EGS4025AFG 30 EGS1030FFG EGS2030FFG EGS3030FFG — EGS4030FFG — 32 EGS1032FFG EGS2032FFG EGS3032FFG EGS3032AFG EGS4032FFG EGS4032AFG 35 EGS1035FFG EGS2035FFG EGS3035FFG — EGS4035FFG — 40 EGS1040FFG EGS2040FFG EGS3040FFG EGS3040AFG EGS4040FFG EGS4040AFG 45 EGS1045FFG EGS2045FFG EGS3045FFG — EGS4045FFG — 50 EGS1050FFG EGS2050FFG EGS3050FFG EGS3050AFG EGS4050FFG EGS4050AFG 60 EGS1060FFG EGS2060FFG EGS3060FFG — EGS4060FFG — 63 EGS1063FFG EGS2063FFG EGS3063FFG EGS3063AFG EGS4063FFG EGS4063AFG 70 EGS1070FFG EGS2070FFG EGS3070FFG — EGS4070FFG — 80 EGS1080FFG EGS2080FFG EGS3080FFG EGS3080AFG EGS4080FFG EGS4080AFG 90 EGS1090FFG EGS2090FFG EGS3090FFG — EGS4090FFG — 100 EGS1100FFG EGS2100FFG EGS3100FFG EGS3100AFG EGS4100FFG EGS4100AFG 125 EGS1125FFG EGS2125FFG EGS3125FFG EGS3125AFG EGS4125FFG EGS4125AFG 160 — — EGS3160FFG EGS3160AFG EGS4160FFG EGS4160AFG Maximum Continuous Amps at 40°C 1 2 2 2 Notes 1 16, 32, 63 and 160A are not UL listed ratings. 2 Adjustable thermal are not UL listed. 3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on the LH side. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-19 2.2 2 EG-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G EG-Frame—70/65 Single-Pole 2 Two-Pole Four-Pole 3 Three-Pole Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Adjustable 2 Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Adjustable 2 Thermal, Fixed Magnetic 2 Maximum Continuous Amps at 40°C 1 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 15 EGH1015FFG EGH2015FFG EGH3015FFG — EGH4015FFG — 2 16 EGH1016FFG EGH2016FFG EGH3016FFG — EGH4016FFG — 20 EGH1020FFG EGH2020FFG EGH3020FFG EGH3020AFG EGH4020FFG EGH4020AFG 2 25 EGH1025FFG EGH2025FFG EGH3025FFG EGH3025AFG EGH4025FFG EGH4025AFG 30 EGH1030FFG EGH2030FFG EGH3030FFG — EGH4030FFG — 2 32 EGH1032FFG EGH2032FFG EGH3032FFG EGH3032AFG EGH4032FFG EGH4032AFG 2 35 EGH1035FFG EGH2035FFG EGH3035FFG — EGH4035FFG — 40 EGH1040FFG EGH2040FFG EGH3040FFG EGH3040AFG EGH4040FFG EGH4040AFG 2 45 EGH1045FFG EGH2045FFG EGH3045FFG — EGH4045FFG EGH4050AFG 50 EGH1050FFG EGH2050FFG EGH3050FFG EGH3050AFG EGH4050FFG — 2 60 EGH1060FFG EGH2060FFG EGH3060FFG — EGH4060FFG — 63 EGH1063FFG EGH2063FFG EGH3063FFG EGH3063AFG EGH4063FFG EGH4063AFG 2 70 EGH1070FFG EGH2070FFG EGH3070FFG — EGH4070FFG — 2 80 EGH1080FFG EGH2080FFG EGH3080FFG EGH3080AFG EGH4080FFG EGH4080AFG 90 EGH1090FFG EGH2090FFG EGH3090FFG — EGH4090FFG — 100 EGH1100FFG EGH2100FFG EGH3100FFG EGH3100AFG EGH4100FFG EGH4100AFG 125 EGH1125FFG EGH2125FFG EGH3125FFG EGH3125AFG EGH4125FFG EGH4125AFG 2 2 Notes 1 16, 32, 63A are not UL listed ratings. 2 Adjustable thermal are not UL listed. 3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on the LH side. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-20 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G EG-Frame—100/100 Current Limiting (Single-Pole and Two-Pole Unavailable) EG-Frame 2 2 EG-Frame—100/100 Four-Pole 0% Protected Neutral 3 Three-Pole Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Adjustable 2 Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Adjustable 2 Thermal, Fixed Magnetic 2 Maximum Continuous Amps at 40°C 1 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 15 EGC3015FFG — EGC7015FFG — 16 EGC3016FFG — EGC7016FFG — 2 20 EGC3020FFG EGC3020AFG EGC7020FFG EGC7020AFG 25 EGC3025FFG EGC3025AFG EGC7025FFG EGC7025AFG 30 EGC3030FFG — EGC7030FFG — 32 EGC3032FFG EGC3032AFG EGC7032FFG EGC7032AFG 35 EGC3035FFG — EGC7035FFG — 40 EGC3040FFG EGC3040AFG EGC7040FFG EGC7040AFG 45 EGC3045FFG — EGC7045FFG — 50 EGC3050FFG EGC3050AFG EGC7050FFG EGC7050AFG 60 EGC3060FFG — EGC7060FFG — 63 EGC3063FFG EGC3063AFG EGC7063FFG EGC7063AFG 70 EGC3070FFG — EGC7070FFG — 80 EGC3080FFG EGC3080AFG EGC7080FFG EGC7080AFG 90 EGC3090FFG — EGC7090FFG — 100 EGC3100FFG EGC3100AFG EGC7100FFG EGC7100AFG 125 EGC3125FFG EGC3125AFG EGC7125FFG EGC7125AFG 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Molded Case Switches 4 2 Catalog Number 2 EGK3125KSG EGK7125KSG 2 EGK3160KSG 2 EGK7160KSG Notes 1 16, 32, 63A are not UL listed ratings. 2 Adjustable thermal is not UL listed. 3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side. 4 Molded case switches may open above 1250A. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-21 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2 EG Bolt-On Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit and Mounting Hardware) 2 EG-Frame EG-Frame—18 kAIC at 480 Vac Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Amps at 40°C Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Catalog Number 1 Catalog Number 2 Catalog Number 3 15 EGB1015FFB EGB2015FFB EGB3015FFB 20 EGB1020FFB EGB2020FFB EGB3020FFB 25 EGB1025FFB EGB2025FFB EGB3025FFB 2 30 EGB1030FFB EGB2030FFB EGB3030FFB 2 35 EGB1035FFB EGB2035FFB EGB3035FFB 40 EGB1040FFB EGB2040FFB EGB3040FFB 2 45 EGB1045FFB EGB2045FFB EGB3045FFB 50 EGB1050FFB EGB2050FFB EGB3050FFB 2 60 EGB1060FFB EGB2060FFB EGB3060FFB 2 70 EGB1070FFB EGB2070FFB EGB3070FFB 80 EGB1080FFB EGB2080FFB EGB3080FFB 2 90 EGB1090FFB EGB2090FFB EGB3090FFB 100 EGB1100FFB EGB2100FFB EGB3100FFB 2 110 EGB1110FFB EGB2110FFB EGB3110FFB 125 EGB1125FFB EGB2125FFB EGB3125FFB 2 2 2 2 2 EG-Frame EG-Frame—35 kAIC at 480 Vac Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Amps at 40°C Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Catalog Number 1 Catalog Number 2 Catalog Number 3 15 EGS1015FFB EGS2015FFB EGS3015FFB 2 20 EGS1020FFB EGS2020FFB EGS3020FFB 2 25 EGS1025FFB EGS2025FFB EGS3025FFB 30 EGS1030FFB EGS2030FFB EGS3030FFB 2 35 EGS1035FFB EGS2035FFB EGS3035FFB 40 EGS1040FFB EGS2040FFB EGS3040FFB 2 45 EGS1045FFB EGS2045FFB EGS3045FFB 2 50 EGS1050FFB EGS2050FFB EGS3050FFB 60 EGS1060FFB EGS2060FFB EGS3060FFB 2 70 EGS1070FFB EGS2070FFB EGS3070FFB 80 EGS1080FFB EGS2080FFB EGS3080FFB 2 90 EGS1090FFB EGS2090FFB EGS3090FFB 100 EGS1100FFB EGS2100FFB EGS3100FFB 110 EGS1110FFB EGS2110FFB EGS3110FFB 125 EGS1125FFB EGS2125FFB EGS3125FFB 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 For bulk pack 24, add suffix BP24 and order quantities of 24. 2 For bulk pack 12, add suffix BP12 and order quantities of 12. 3 For bulk pack 8, add suffix BP8 and order quantities of 8. 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-22 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G EG-Frame 2.2 EG-Frame—65 kAIC at 480 Vac 2 Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Amps at 40°C Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Catalog Number 1 Catalog Number 2 Catalog Number 3 15 EGH1015FFB EGH2015FFB EGH3015FFB 20 EGH1020FFB EGH2020FFB EGH3020FFB 25 EGH1025FFB EGH2025FFB EGH3025FFB 30 EGH1030FFB EGH2030FFB EGH3030FFB 35 EGH1035FFB EGH2035FFB EGH3035FFB 40 EGH1040FFB EGH2040FFB EGH3040FFB 45 EGH1045FFB EGH2045FFB EGH3045FFB 50 EGH1050FFB EGH2050FFB EGH3050FFB 60 EGH1060FFB EGH2060FFB EGH3060FFB 70 EGH1070FFB EGH2070FFB EGH3070FFB 80 EGH1080FFB EGH2080FFB EGH3080FFB 90 EGH1090FFB EGH2090FFB EGH3090FFB 100 EGH1100FFB EGH2100FFB EGH3100FFB 110 EGH1110FFB EGH2110FFB EGH3110FFB 125 EGH1125FFB EGH2125FFB EGH3125FFB 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amps Terminal, Body Material Wire Type Metric Wire Range mm2 AWG Wire Range (Package of Three Terminals) Catalog Number Aluminum Cu/Al 2.5–50 #14–1/0 3TA125EF 60–125 Aluminum Cu/Al 16–70 #6–3/0 3TA150EF 2 2 Standard Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals 15–50 2 2 Notes 1 For bulk pack 24, add suffix BP24 and order quantities of 24. 2 For bulk pack 12, add suffix BP12 and order quantities of 12. 3 For bulk pack 8, add suffix BP8 and order quantities of 8. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-23 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2 Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information 2 EG-Frame 2 2 2 2 2 2 3T125EF 3TA125EF 3TA150EF 3TA160EFK EF2RTWK, Two-Pole–Metric EF3RTWK, Three-Pole–Metric EF4RTWK, Four-Pole–Metric EF2RTDK, Two-Pole–Imperial EF3RTDK, Three-Pole–Imperial EF4RTDK, Four-Pole–Imperial 2 2 2 Line and Load Terminals 2 Maximum Breaker Amps 2 2 2 2 2 2 Terminal Body Material Wire Type Metric Wire Range mm2 AWG Wire Range (Package of Three Terminals) Catalog Number Standard Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals 125 Steel Al 4–6 #12-10 3T125EF 1 125 Steel Cu 2.5–95 #14-3/0 3T125EF 1 125 Aluminum Cu/Al 2.5–50 #14-1/0 3TA125EF 160 Aluminum Cu/Al 16–70 #6-3/0 3TA150EF 160 Aluminum Cu/Al 35–120 #3-250 3TA160EFK 160 Aluminum Cu/Al 35–120 #3-250 4TA160EFK 2 EG-Frame circuit breakers and molded case switches have line and load terminals as standard equipment. 2 Insert collar enclosing conductor as shown. Locate nut on top of conductor and tighten securely with screw and washer. 2 Caution: Collar must surround conductor. 2 2 2 Insert collar enclosing conductor and center on extrusion. Tighten securely with screw and washer. Endcap kits are used on the E-Frame breaker line side to connect busbar or similar electrical connections. Includes hardware. Notes 1 Standard line and load terminals. 2 Four-pole kit with four terminals. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-24 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Control Wire Terminal Kit GCWTK Multiwire Connectors Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Control Wire Terminal Kit Terminal End Covers (Gas Barrier) The terminal end cover is available for three-pole circuit breakers only. Two conductor opening sizes are available. Specify quantity (one per circuit breaker) when ordering. Catalog Number Control wire terminal kit 5652B38G01 Package of 12—priced individually Interphase Barriers Catalog Number EIPBK Package of 12—priced individually The interphase barrier is available for extended insulation between circuit breaker poles. Specify quantity when ordering. Base Mounting Hardware—DIN Rail Mounting Catalog Number DIN rail adapter—single-pole EF1DIN DIN rail adapter—two-pole EGDIN DIN rail adapter—three- or four-pole EF34DIN Metric base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or molded case switch. (Included with breaker.) If required separately, order S/N 8703C80G08. Note: English mounting hardware kit can be supplied separate. Catalog number is BMHE #6–32 x 3 inches for two-, three- and four-pole. Singlepole mounting hardware metric order 8703C80G11. English hardware 8703C80G12. Both sold in quantities of 100. Catalog Number 2 6.35 (0.25) EEC3K 10.41 (0.41) EEC4K 2 Multiwire Connectors Field-installed multiwire connectors for the load side (OFF) end terminals. They are used to distribute the load from the circuit breaker to multiple devices without the use of separate distribution terminal blocks. 3 EFTS3K 4 EFTS4K 2 2 2 Multiwire lug kits include mounting hardware, terminal shield insulators and tin-plated aluminum connectors to replace three mechanical load lugs. UL listed as used on the load side (OFF) end. 2 EG-Frame Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information (Package of 3) 1 2 Maximum Amperes Wires per Terminal Wire Size Range AWG Cu Kit Catalog Number 2 125 3 14–2 3TA125E3K 125 6 14–6 3TA125E6K 2 2 2 Note 1 For four-pole kit, change “3” at beginning of catalog number to “4.” 2 2 2 2 2 2 Terminal Shields—IP30 Protection Catalog Number 2 Conductor Opening Diameter Inches (mm) Terminal Shields The terminal shield is available for line terminal areas in threeand four-pole circuit breakers. Special terminal shields are also available for use when an electrical (solenoid) operator is mounted on the circuit breaker. The standard style number by pole for each terminal shield is for a package of 10 and is priced per each package. Special terminal shields are packaged individually. Number of Poles 2 2 Terminal End Covers For use with steel or stainless steel standard line and load terminals only. Interphase barriers 2.2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-25 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2 Accessories 2 Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. 2 EG-Frame Accessories 2 2 2 2 2 Reference Page Description SinglePole Two-Pole Center Left Right Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral Three-Pole Four-Pole Internal Accessories (Only one internal accessory per pole) Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-104 — — ■ — — ■ — — ■ — Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break) V4-T2-104 — — ■ — — ■ — — ■ — Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-104 — — ■ — — ■ — — ■ — — Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-104 — — ■ — — ■ — — ■ 2 Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T2-104 — — ■ — — ■ — — ■ — Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-104 — — — ■ — — ■ — — — 2 Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T2-105 — — — ■ — — ■ — — — 2 2 External Accessories End cap kit V4-T2-25 — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Control wire terminal kit V4-T2-25 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Multiwire connectors V4-T2-25 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Base mounting hardware V4-T2-25 ● Terminal shields V4-T2-25 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Terminal end covers V4-T2-25 — — — ● ● ● — — — — Interphase barriers V4-T2-25 — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Non-padlockable handle block V4-T2-102 ■ ■ — — ■ — — ■ — — 2 Snap-on padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-102 ■ ■ — — ■ — — ■ — — Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-102 — — ■ ❏ — ❏ ❏ — ❏ — 2 Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-102 — — — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Plug-in adapters V4-T2-102 — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Electrical operator V4-T2-102 — — — ● ● ● — — — — 2 Handle mechanisms V4-T2-110 — — — ● ● ● — — — — Modifications (Refer to Eaton) 2 Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-100 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Marine/naval application, UL 489 Supplement SA and SB — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Legend ■ Applicable in indicated pole position ❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both ● Accessory available/modification available 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-26 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Technical Data and Specifications 2 UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Ratings 2 Volts DC 1 Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles 120 Icu Ics 277 EGB125 1 35 25 25 18 — — — — — — — 2, 3, 4 — 25 25 — — 18 18 18 — — — 220–240 690 2 380–415 347 Icu Ics 480 600Y/ 347 Icu 250 34 125 Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics 10 10 — — — — 10 10 EGE125 2, 3, 4 — 35 35 — — 25 25 25 18 — — — — 10 10 EGS125 1 100 85 43 35 22 — — — — — — 35 35 — — 2, 3, 4 — 85 43 — — 40 30 35 22 — — — — 35 35 EGH125 1 200 100 50 65 30 — — — — — — 42 42 — — 2, 3, 4 — 100 50 — — 70 35 65 25 — — — — 42 42 EGC125 5 3, 4 — 200 200 — — 100 100 100 35 — — — — 42 42 EGB160 2 3, 4 — 25 25 — — 18 18 18 — — — — — 10 10 EGE160 2 3, 4 — 35 35 — — 25 25 25 18 — — — — 10 10 EGS160 2 3, 4 — 85 43 — — 40 30 35 22 — — — — 35 35 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Dimensions and Weights 2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 2 EG-Frame Number of Poles Width Height Depth 1 1.00 (25.4) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9) 2 2.00 (50.8) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9) 3 3.00 (76.2) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9) 4 4.00 (101.6) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9) 2 2 2 2 EG-Frame Front Cover Cutout Front View Three-Pole 2 Side View 2 CL Breaker 1.85 (47.0) 0.14 (3.6) R 0.90 (22.9) 1.30 Dia. (33.0) 0.47 (11.9) 0.94 (23.9) 3.00 (76.2) 2 5.50 (139.7) 3.03 (77.0) CL Handle 2 2 2.77 (70.4) 2 Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg) 2 EG-Frame Breaker Type Number of Poles 1 Breaker Type Number of Poles 3 2 3 4 EGB125 1.5 (0.68) 2.0 (0.91) 3.0 (1.36) 4.9 (1.82) 4 EGB160 3.0 (1.36) 4.9 (1.82) EGC125 1.5 (0.68) 2.0 (0.91) 3.0 (1.36) 4.9 (1.82) EGE160 3.0 (1.36) 4.9 (1.82) EGE125 1.5 (0.68) 2.0 (0.91) 3.0 (1.36) 4.9 (1.82) EGS160 3.0 (1.36) 4.9 (1.82) EGH125 1.5 (0.68) 2.0 (0.91) 3.0 (1.36) 4.9 (1.82) EGS125 1.5 (0.68) 2.0 (0.91) 3.0 (1.36) 4.9 (1.82) 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. 2 IEC only. 3 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. 4 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 42 kA. 5 Current limiting per UL 489. Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2 2 2 V4-T2-27 2.2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G EG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module 10.26 (260.6) 2 4.75 (120.6) 2 0.55 (14.0) 2 1.49 1.00 (37.8) (25.4) 0.50 (12.7) 2 1.50 0.50 (38.1) (12.7) 2 2 4.78 (121.4) 8.59 (218.2) 2 0.90 (22.9) 0.35 (8.9) 2 2 0.09 (2.29) 2 EG-Frame With Current Limiter Module 2 2 0.56 (14.2) 2 2 2 3.01 (76.5) 2.75 (69.9) 0.78 (19.8) 2 2 2.00 (50.8) 0.70 (17.8) 2 2 3-Pole 2.98 (75.7) 1.00 (25.4) 2 1.00 (25.4) 3.00 (76.2) 9.66 (245.4) 4.17 (105.9) 3.61 (91.7) 0.50 1.00 (12.7) (25.4) 1.00 (25.4) 2 2 3.20 (81.3) 2 4.17 (105.9) 2 2 2 2.75 0.09 (69.9) (2.3) 2 0.78 (19.8) 2 0.41 (10.4) 2 V4-T2-28 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 3.98 (101.1) 3.17 (80.5) Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) 2.2 Contents Description EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page V4-T2-15 2 2 V4-T2-30 V4-T2-31 V4-T2-42 V4-T2-43 V4-T2-43 V4-T2-45 V4-T2-61 V4-T2-70 V4-T2-80 V4-T2-84 V4-T2-87 V4-T2-91 2 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-99 V4-T2-106 V4-T2-108 V4-T2-109 V4-T2-110 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) 2 Product Description 2 JG breaker is HACR rated. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-29 2.2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Catalog Number Selection Series G—JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) J G S 3 250 FA G C 2 Frame 2 2 Standard/Application G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA 2 2 E S H C U X K 2 2 2 Performance 600 480 415 18 25 25 18 35 40 25 65 70 35 100 100 50 150 150 50 200 200 Molded case switch Number of Poles 240 65 85 100 200 200 200 2 = Two 3 = Three 4 = Four—Neutral 0% Protected 8 = Four—Neutral 0–60% Protected 9 = Four—Neutral 100% Protected Amperes 050 070 080 090 100 125 150 160 175 200 225 250 2 2 2 2 Rating Blank = 80% rated C = 100% rated F01 = Freeze tested for –70ºF (–57ºC) F02 = Freeze tested for –22ºF (–30ºC) J Terminations/Hardware Terminals Mounting Hardware M = Metric end caps Metric E = Imperial end caps Imperial G = Line/load standard Metric W = Without terminals Trip Unit AA = Adj. adj. FA = Fixed adj. KS = Molded case switch 33 = 310+ electronic LS 32 = 310+ electronic LSI 35 = 310+ electronic LSG 36 = 310+ electronic LSIG NN = Frame only (no trip) Trip Unit JT 4 100 FA 2 Trip 2 JT Number of Poles 2 = Two 3 = Three 4 = Four—Neutral 0% Protected 8 = Four—Neutral 0–60%% Protected 9 = Four—Neutral 100% Protected 2 2 2 2 2 Amperes T/M ETU 080 050 090 100 100 160 110 250 125 150 160 175 200 225 250 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-30 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Trip Unit AA = Adj. adj. FA = Fixed adj. KS = Molded case switch 33 = 310+ electronic LS 32 = 310+ electronic LSI 35 = 310+ electronic LSG 36 = 310+ electronic LSIG NN = Frame only (no trip) 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Product Selection 2 Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware)—IC Rating at 415/480 Volts 2 JG-Frame JG-Frame 2 JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—25/25 Four-Pole 0%2 Two-Pole Three-Pole Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 1 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 1 Maximum Continuous Amperes Magnetic Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 70 350–700 JGE2070FAG JGE3070FAG — JGE4070FAG — 90 450–900 JGE2090FAG JGE3090FAG — JGE4090FAG — 100 500–1000 JGE2100FAG JGE3100FAG JGE3100AAG JGE4100FAG JGE4100AAG 125 625–1250 JGE2125FAG JGE3125FAG JGE3125AAG JGE4125FAG JGE4125AAG 150 750–1550 JGE2150FAG JGE3150FAG — JGE4150FAG — 160 800–1600 — — JGE3160AAG — JGE4160AAG 175 875–1750 JGE2175FAG JGE3175FAG — JGE4175FAG — 200 1000–2000 JGE2200FAG JGE3200FAG JGE3200AAG JGE4200FAG JGE4200AAG 225 1125–2250 JGE2225FAG JGE3225FAG — JGE4225FAG — 250 1250–2500 JGE2250FAG JGE3250FAG JGE3250AAG JGE4250FAG JGE4250AAG 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—40/35, Two-Pole Four-Pole 0%2 Two-Pole Three-Pole Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 1 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 1 Maximum Continuous Amperes Magnetic Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 70 350–700 JGS2070FAG JGS3070FAG — JGS4070FAG — 90 450–900 JGS2090FAG JGS3090FAG — JGS4090FAG — 100 500–1000 JGS2100FAG JGS3100FAG JGS3100AAG JGS4100FAG JGS4100AAG 125 625–1250 JGS2125FAG JGS3125FAG JGS3125AAG JGS4125FAG JGS4125AAG 150 750–1550 JGS2150FAG JGS3150FAG — JGS4150FAG — 160 800–1600 — — JGS3160AAG — JGS4160AAG 175 875–1750 JGS2175FAG JGS3175FAG — JGS4175FAG — 200 1000–2000 JGS2200FAG JGS3200FAG JGS3200AAG JGS4200FAG JGS4200AAG 225 1125–2250 JGS2225FAG JGS3225FAG — JGS4225FAG — 250 1250–2500 JGS2250FAG JGS3250FAG JGS3250AAG JGS4250FAG JGS4250AAG 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 EC-EN 60947-2 only. Adjustment is 0.8 and 1.0. 2 Change the fourth digit to 8 for adjustable 0–60% neutral protection, 9 for 0–100% neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-31 2.2 2 JG-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—70/65 2 Four-Pole 0%2 Two-Pole Three-Pole Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable 1 Magnetic Fixed Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Fixed Magnetic 1 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number — 2 Maximum Continuous Amperes 2 70 350–700 JGH2070FAG JGH3070FAG — JGH4070FAG 90 450–900 JGH2090FAG JGH3090FAG — JGH4090FAG — 100 500–1000 JGH2100FAG JGH3100FAG JGH3100AAG JGH4100FAG JGH4100AAG 125 625–1250 JGH2125FAG JGH3125FAG JGH3125AAG JGH4125FAG JGH4125AAG 150 750–1550 JGH2150FAG JGH3150FAG — JGH4150FAG — 2 160 800–1600 — — JGH3160AAG — JGH4160AAG 2 175 875–1750 JGH2175FAG JGH3175FAG — JGH4175FAG — 200 1000–2000 JGH2200FAG JGH3200FAG JGH3200AAG JGH4200FAG JGH4200AAG 225 1125–2250 JGH2225FAG JGH3225FAG — JGH4225FAG — 250 1250–2500 JGH2250FAG JGH3250FAG JGH3250AAG JGH4250FAG JGH4250AAG 2 2 2 2 Magnetic Range Notes 1 EC-EN 60947-2 only. Adjustment is 0.8 and 1.0. 2 Change the fourth digit to 8 for adjustable 0–60% neutral protection, 9 for 0–100% neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-32 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Two-Pole not available in IEC/CE/UL/CSA 100/100, 150/150 JG-Frame 2 JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—100/100, Current Limiting 2 Four-Pole 0% 2 Three-Pole Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 1 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 1 2 Maximum Continuous Amperes Magnetic Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 70 350–700 JGC3070FAG — JGC4070FAG — 80 400–800 — JGC3080AAG — JGC4080AAG 2 90 450–900 JGC3090FAG — JGC4090FAG — 100 500–1000 JGC3100FAG JGC3100AAG JGC4100FAG JGC4100AAG 125 625–1250 JGC3125FAG JGC3125AAG JGC4125FAG JGC4125AAG 150 750–1550 JGC3150FAG — JGC4150FAG — 160 800–1600 — JGC3160AAG — JGC4160AAG 175 875–1750 JGC3175FAG — JGC4175FAG — 200 1000–2000 JGC3200FAG JGC3200AAG JGC4200FAG JGC4200AAG 225 1125–2250 JGC3225FAG — JGC4225FAG — 250 1250–2500 JGC3250FAG JGC3250AAG JGC4250FAG JGC4250AAG 2 2 2 2 2 2 JG-Frame 2 JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—150/150, Current Limiting Four-Pole 0% 2 Three-Pole Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 1 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 1 2 Magnetic Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 70 350–700 JGU3070FAG — JGU4070FAG — 80 400–800 — JGU3080AAG — JGU4080AAG 2 90 450–900 JGU3090FAG — JGU4090FAG — 100 500–1000 JGU3100FAG JGU3100AAG JGU4100FAG JGU4100AAG 125 625–1250 JGU3125FAG JGU3125AAG JGU4125FAG JGU4125AAG 150 750–1550 JGU3150FAG — JGU4150FAG — 160 800–1600 — JGU3160AAG — JGU4160AAG 175 875–1750 JGU3175FAG — JGU4175FAG — 200 1000–2000 JGU3200FAG JGU3200AAG JGU4200FAG JGU4200AAG 225 1125–2250 JGU3225FAG — JGU4225FAG — 250 1250–2500 JGU3250FAG JGU3250AAG JGU4250FAG JGU4250AAG Maximum Continuous Amperes 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 EC-EN 60947-2 only. Adjustment is 0.8 and 1.0. 2 Change the fourth digit to 8 for adjustable 0–60% neutral protection, 9 for 0–100% neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-33 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2 Two-Pole not available in IEC/CE/UL/CSA 200/200 2 JG-Frame JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA 200/200, Current Limiting Four-Pole 2 Three-Pole 2 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 1 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 1 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Maximum Continuous Amperes Magnetic Range Catalog Number 2 70 350–700 JGX3070FAG — JGX4070FAG — 80 400–800 — JGX3080AAG — JGX4080AAG 2 90 450–900 JGX3090FAG — JGX4090FAG — 100 500–1000 JGX3100FAG JGX3100AAG JGX4100FAG JGX4100AAG 2 125 625–1250 JGX3125FAG JGX3125AAG JGX4125FAG JGX4125AAG 2 150 750–1550 JGX3150FAG — JGX4150FAG — 160 800–1600 — JGX3160AAG — JGX4160AAG 2 175 875–1750 JGX3175FAG — JGX4175FAG — 200 1000–2000 JGX3200FAG JGX3200AAG JGX4200FAG JGX4200AAG 2 225 1125–2250 JGX3225FAG — JGX4225FAG — 250 1250–2500 JGX3250FAG JGX3250AAG JGX4250FAG JGX4250AAG 2 2 2 Molded Case Switches 3 Catalog Number 2 JGK3250KSG 2 JGK7250KSG Notes 1 EC-EN 60947-2 only. Adjustment is 0.8 and 1.0. 2 Change the fourth digit to 8 for adjustable 0–60% neutral protection, 9 for 0–100% neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side. 3 Molded case switches will trip above 2500 amperes. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-34 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 Frame—IC Rating at 415/480 Volts Maximum Amperes Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 0% 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 JGE2250NN JGE3250NN JGE4250NN 2 JGS2250NN JGS3250NN JGS4250NN JGH2250NN JGH3250NN JGH4250NN 2 JGC4250NN 2 25/25 250 2 40/35 250 2 70/65 250 100/100 Current Limiting Per UL 489 250 — JGC3250NN 150/150 Current Limiting Per UL 489 250 — JGU4250NN 2 JGX3250NN JGX4250NN 2 JGE3250NNC — 2 JGS3250NNC — JGH3250NNC — JGU3250NN 200/200 Current Limiting Per UL 489 250 — 25/25 100% Rated Per UL 489 250 2 — 40/35 100% Rated Per UL 489 250 2 2 — 2 70/65 100% Rated Per UL 489 2 250 — 2 2 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Ampere Rating Range Catalog Number Range Catalog Number 70 350–700 JT2070FA JT3070FA — — JT4070FA — 80 400–800 — — JT3080AA 3 64–100 — JT4080AA 3 2 90 450–900 JT2090FA JT3090FA — — JT4090FA — 100 500–1000 JT2100FA JT3100FA JT3100AA 3 80–100 JT4100FA JT4100AA 3 125 625–1250 JT2125FA JT3125FA JT3125AA 3 100–125 JT4125FA JT4125AA 3 150 750–1550 JT2150FA JT3150FA — — JT4150FA — 160 800–1600 — — JT3160AA 3 128–160 — JT4160AA 3 175 875–1750 JT2175FA JT3175FA — — JT4175FA — 200 1000–2000 JT2200FA JT3200FA JT3200AA 3 160–200 JT4200FA JT4200AA 3 225 1125–2250 JT2225FA JT3225FA — — JT4225FA — 250 1250–2500 JT2250FA JT3250FA JT3250AA 3 200–250 JT4250FA JT4250AA 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Standard line and load terminals. 2 Components—100% rated frame. 3 Adjustable thermal trip units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-35 2.2 2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Electronic Trip Units JG Electronic Trip Units Ampere Rating LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 Three-Pole 2 50 JT305033 JT305032 JT305035 JT305036 JGFCT050 100 JT310033 JT310032 JT310035 JT310036 JGFCT100 2 160 JT316033 JT316032 JT316035 JT316036 JGFCT160 250 JT325033 JT325032 JT325035 JT325036 JGFCT250 2 Four-Pole 2 50 JT405033 JT405032 JT405035 JT405036 — 100 JT410033 JT410032 JT410035 JT410036 — 160 JT416033 JT416032 JT416035 JT416036 — 250 JT425033 JT425032 JT425035 JT425036 — 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Plug-In Test Kit Breaker Mount Ammeter Voltage Rating Catalog Number Description 120 Vac MTST120V 230 Vac MTST230V Breaker mount ammeter Catalog Number DIGIVIEW Notes 1 For use on a three-pole breaker used in a four-wire system if ground fault protection for the neutral is required. 2 Neutral protection 4 = 0%, 6 = 60%, 7 = 100% electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable. Long time pickup—selectable via dial setting. 50 ampere settings—50, 45, 40, 32, 30, 25, 20. 100 ampere settings—100, 90, 80, 70, 63, 50, 45, 40. 160 ampere settings—160, 150, 125, 110, 100, 90, 80, 63. 250 ampere settings—250, 225, 200, 175, 160, 150, 125, 100. Adjustable long time delay—2–24 seconds at 6 x lr. Adjustable short time delay—Inst., 120, 300 ms 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-36 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 Complete Breaker with Electronic Trip Units 2 IEC/UL/CSA—25/25 LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 50 JGE305033G JGE305032G JGE305035G JGE305036G JGFCT050 100 JGE310033G JGE310032G JGE310035G JGE310036G JGFCT100 160 JGE316033G JGE316032G JGE316035G JGE316036G JGFCT160 250 JGE325033G JGE325032G JGE325035G JGE325036G JGFCT250 50 JGE405033G JGE405032G JGE405035G JGE405036G — 100 JGE410033G JGE410032G JGE410035G JGE410036G — 160 JGE416033G JGE416032G JGE416035G JGE416036G — 250 JGE425033G JGE425032G JGE425035G JGE425036G — Ampere Rating 2 2 2 Three-Pole 2 2 2 Four-Pole 2 2 2 2 IEC/UL/CSA—40/35 LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 50 JGS305033G JGS305032G JGS305035G JGS305036G JGFCT050 100 JGS310033G JGS310032G JGS310035G JGS310036G JGFCT100 160 JGS316033G JGS316032G JGS316035G JGS316036G JGFCT160 250 JGS325033G JGS325032G JGS325035G JGS325036G JGFCT250 50 JGS405033G JGS405032G JGS405035G JGS405036G — 100 JGS410033G JGS410032G JGS410035G JGS410036G — 160 JGS416033G JGS416032G JGS416035G JGS416036G — 250 JGS425033G JGS425032G JGS425035G JGS425036G — Ampere Rating 2 2 2 Three-Pole 2 2 2 Four-Pole 2 2 2 2 2 IEC/UL/CSA—70/65 LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 50 JGH305033G JGH305032G JGH305035G JGH305036G JGFCT050 100 JGH310033G JGH310032G JGH310035G JGH310036G JGFCT100 160 JGH316033G JGH316032G JGH316035G JGH316036G JGFCT160 250 JGH325033G JGH325032G JGH325035G JGH325036G JGFCT250 50 JGH405033G JGH405032G JGH405035G JGH405036G — 100 JGH410033G JGH410032G JGH410035G JGH410036G — 160 JGH416033G JGH416032G JGH416035G JGH416036G — 250 JGH425033G JGH425032G JGH425035G JGH425036G — Ampere Rating 2 2 Three-Pole 2 2 2 Four-Pole 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required. 2 Neutral protection 4 = 0%, 6 = 60%, 7 = 100% electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable. 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-37 2.2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G IEC/UL/CSA—100/100, Current Limiting Per UL 489 LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 50 JGC305033G JGC305032G JGC305035G JGC305036G JGFCT050 100 JGC310033G JGC310032G JGC310035G JGC310036G JGFCT100 2 160 JGC316033G JGC316032G JGC316035G JGC316036G JGFCT160 2 250 JGC335033G JGC325032G JGC325035G JGC325036G JGFCT250 Four-Pole 2 2 2 2 Ampere Rating Three-Pole 2 50 JGC405033G JGC405032G JGC405035G JGC405036G — 100 JGC410033G JGC410032G JGC410035G JGC410036G — 2 160 JGC416033G JGC416032G JGC416035G JGC416036G — 250 JGC435033G JGC425032G JGC425035G JGC425036G — 2 2 2 2 IEC/UL/CSA—150/150, Current Limiting Per UL 489 Ampere Rating LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Three-Pole 2 50 JGU305033G JGU305032G JGU305035G JGU305036G JGFCT050 2 100 JGU310033G JGU310032G JGU310035G JGU310036G JGFCT100 160 JGU316033G JGU316032G JGU316035G JGU316036G JGFCT160 2 250 JGU335033G JGU325032G JGU325035G JGU325036G JGFCT250 2 50 JGU405033G JGU405032G JGU405035G JGU405036G — 100 JGU410033G JGU410032G JGU410035G JGU410036G — 160 JGU416033G JGU416032G JGU416035G JGU416036G — 250 JGU435033G JGU425032G JGU425035G JGU425036G — 2 2 2 Four-Pole 2 IEC/UL/CSA—200/200, Current Limiting Per UL 489 LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 50 JGX305033G JGX305032G JGX305035G JGX305036G JGFCT050 2 100 JGX310033G JGX310032G JGX310035G JGX310036G JGFCT100 160 JGX316033G JGX316032G JGX316035G JGX316036G JGFCT160 2 250 JGX325033G JGX325032G JGX325035G JGX325036G JGFCT250 2 2 2 Ampere Rating Three-Pole Four-Pole 2 2 50 JGX405033G JGX405032G JGX405035G JGX405036G — 2 100 JGX410033G JGX410032G JGX410035G JGX410036G — 160 JGX416033G JGX416032G JGX416035G JGX416036G — 250 JGX425033G JGX425032G JGX425035G JGX425036G — 2 2 Notes 1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required. 2 Neutral protection 4 = 0%, 6 = 60%, 7 = 100% electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable. 2 2 V4-T2-38 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G JG 100% Rated Circuit Breaker—Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 2 Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware)—IC Rating at 415/480 Volts JG-Frame JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—25/25 JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—70/65 Three-Pole Three-Pole Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Maximum Continuous Amperes Magnetic Range Catalog Number Maximum Continuous Amperes Magnetic Range Catalog Number 70 350–700 JGE3070FAGC 70 350–700 JGH3070FAGC 90 450–900 JGE3090FAGC 90 450–900 JGH3090FAGC 100 500–1000 JGE3100FAGC 100 500–1000 JGH3100FAGC 125 625–1250 JGE3125FAGC 125 625–1250 JGH3125FAGC 150 750–1550 JGE3150FAGC 150 750–1550 JGH3150FAGC 160 800–1600 — 160 800–1600 — 175 875–1750 JGE3175FAGC 175 875–1750 JGH3175FAGC 200 1000–2000 JGE3200FAGC 200 1000–2000 JGH3200FAGC 225 1125–2250 JGE3225FAGC 225 1125–2250 JGH3225FAGC 250 1250–2500 JGE3250FAGC 250 1250–2500 JGH3250FAGC 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 2 Catalog Number 70 350–700 JGS3070FAGC 90 450–900 JGS3090FAGC 100 500–1000 JGS3100FAGC 125 625–1250 JGS3125FAGC 150 750–1550 JGS3150FAGC 160 800–1600 — 175 875–1750 JGS3175FAGC 200 1000–2000 JGS3200FAGC 225 1125–2250 JGS3225FAGC 250 1250–2500 JGS3250FAGC 2 2 Three-Pole Magnetic Range 2 2 JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—40/35 Maximum Continuous Amperes 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-39 2.2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G JG 100% Rated Electronic Trip Unit Circuit Breaker IEC/UL/CSA—25/25 LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 Ampere Rating Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 50 JGE305033GC JGE305032GC JGE305035GC JGE305036GC JGFCT050 2 100 JGE310033GC JGE310032GC JGE310035GC JGE310036GC JGFCT100 160 JGE316033GC JGE316032GC JGE316035GC JGE316036GC JGFCT160 250 JGE325033GC JGE325032GC JGE325035GC JGE325036GC JGFCT250 LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 2 2 2 IEC/UL/CSA—40/35 2 2 Ampere Rating Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 50 JGS305033GC JGS305032GC JGS305035GC JGS305036GC JGFCT050 100 JGS310033GC JGS310032GC JGS310035GC JGS310036GC JGFCT100 2 160 JGS316033GC JGS316032GC JGS316035GC JGS316036GC JGFCT160 250 JGS325033GC JGS325032GC JGS325035GC JGS325036GC JGFCT250 LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 Ampere Rating Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 50 JGH305033GC JGH305032GC JGH305035GC JGH305036GC JGFCT050 2 100 JGH310033GC JGH310032GC JGH310035GC JGH310036GC JGFCT100 2 160 JGH316033GC JGH316032GC JGH316035GC JGH316036GC JGFCT160 250 JGH325033GC JGH325032GC JGH325035GC JGH325036GC JGFCT250 2 2 2 2 2 IEC/UL/CSA—70/65 Note 1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-40 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information 2 JG-Frame 2 2 2 2 2 T250FJ TA250FJ Endcap Kit Control Wire Terminal Kit Multiwire Connectors 2 2 Load and Line Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Wire Type Metric Wire Range mm2 AWG Wire Range/ Number of Conductors Catalog Number 2 2 Standard Pressure Type Terminals 250 Stainless steel Cu 25–185 #4–350 (1) T250FJ 1 250 Aluminum Cu/Al 10–185 #8–350 (1) TA250FJ 12 2 2 JG-Frame circuit breakers include aluminum terminals TA250FJ as standard. When optional stainless steel only terminals are required, order by catalog number. Endcap Kits 2 2 Control Wire Terminal Kit Catalog Number Catalog Number Number of Poles Metric Imperial Description 3 FJ3RTWK FJ3RTDK 4 FJ4RTWK FJ4RTDK Package of 14 (priced individually) Endcap kits are used on J250-Frame breaker to connect busbar or similar electrical connections. Includes hardware. 2 FJCWTK 2 For use with aluminum or copper terminals only. 2 2 Base Mounting Hardware Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or molded case switch. (Included with breaker.) If required separately, order 66A2546G02. 2 Terminal Shields IP30 2 2 Interphase Barriers Location Number of Poles Catalog Number Line or Load 2, 3 FJTS3K 4 FJTS4K Multiwire Connectors Field-installed multiwire connectors for the load side (OFF) end terminals. They are used to distribute the load from the circuit breaker to multiple devices without the use of separate distribution terminal blocks. Multiwire lug kits include terminal shield, mounting hardware, insulators and tin-plated aluminum connectors to replace three mechanical load lugs. UL listed as used on the load side (OFF) end. Number of Poles Catalog Number 3 FJIPBK 3 4 FJIPBK4 3 2 2 2 JG-Frame Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information (Package of 3) 2 Maximum Amperes Wires per Terminal Wire Size Range AWG Cu Kit Catalog Number 2 250 3 14–2 3TA250FJ3 250 6 14–6 3TA250FJ6 2 2 Notes 1 Individually packed. 2 Standard line and load. 3 Individually priced. Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2 2 V4-T2-41 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2 Accessories 2 Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. 2 JG-Frame Accessories 2 Description 2 Internal Accessories (Only one internal accessory per pole) 2 2 Reference Page Two- and Three-Pole Left Four-Pole Center Right Left Center Right Neutral Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-104 — — ■ — — ■ — Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-104 — — ■ — — ■ — Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-104 — — ■ — — ■ — — 2 Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T2-104 — — ■ — — ■ Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-104 ■ — — ■ — — — 2 Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T2-105 ■ — — ■ — — — 2 2 2 2 External Accessories End cap kit V4-T2-41 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Control wire terminal kit V4-T2-41 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Multiwire connectors V4-T2-41 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Base mounting hardware V4-T2-41 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● V4-T2-41 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Interphase barriers Padlockable handle block V4-T2-102 — ■ — — ■ — — Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-102 ❏ — ❏ ❏ — ❏ — Key interlock kit V4-T2-102 ❏ — ❏ ❏ — ❏ — Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-102 ● ● ● — — — — Electrical operator V4-T2-102 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Plug-in adapters V4-T2-102 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Handle mechanisms V4-T2-110 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Earth leakage/ground fault protector V4-T2-87 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Drawout cassette V4-T2-109 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Digitrip 310+ test kit V4-T2-36 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Ammeter/cause of trip display V4-T2-101 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Cause of trip LED module V4-T2-101 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) 2 V4-T2-100 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Marine/naval application, UL 489 supplement SA and SB 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Moisture fungus treatment Legend ■ Applicable in indicated pole position ❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both ● Accessory available/modification available Note 1 Contact Eaton. 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-42 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 Technical Data and Specifications 2 UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Ratings Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC 1 2 250 23 2 Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles JGE250 2, 3, 4 65 65 25 25 25 18 12 6 10 JGS250 2, 3, 4 85 85 40 40 35 18 12 6 22 JGH250 2, 3, 4 100 100 70 70 65 25 14 7 22 JGC250 4 3, 4 200 200 100 100 100 35 16 12 42 JGU250 4 3, 4 200 200 150 150 150 50 18 14 50 JGX250 4 3, 4 200 200 200 200 200 50 18 14 50 220–240 Icu 690 2 380–415 Ics Icu Ics 480 600 Icu Ics 2 2 2 2 2 Dimensions and Weights 2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 JG-Frame Number of Poles Width Height Depth 2, 3 4.13 (104.9) 7.00 (177.8) 3.57 (90.7) 4 5.34 (135.6) 7.00 (177.8) 3.57 (90.7) 2 2 2 JG-Frame Front View Three-Pole Front Cover Cutout 2 Side View CL 0.63 (16.0) Breaker 0.28 (7.1) 3.06 (77.7) 0.50 (12.7) 2 1.25 (31.8) 3.95 (100.3) 0.19 (4.8) R CL Handle 4.00 (101.6) 2 7.00 (177.8) 2.05 (52.1) 2 1.06 (27.0) 4.13 (104.9) 2 3.44 (87.4) 2 Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg) 2 JG-Frame 2 Breaker Type Number of Poles 2, 3 4 JGC 6.00 (2.70) 8.00 (3.60) JGE 6.00 (2.70) 8.00 (3.60) JGH 6.00 (2.70) 8.00 (3.60) JGS 6.00 (2.70) 8.00 (3.60) JGU 6.00 (2.70) 8.00 (3.60) JGX 6.00 (2.70) 8.00 (3.60) 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. 2 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. 3 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA. 4 Current limiting per UL 489. 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-43 2.2 2 4-Pole 5.50 (139.7) 3-Pole 4.13 (104.9) 0.69 2.06 1.38 (17.5) (52.3) (35.1) 2 2 2 Series G JG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers 3.92 (99.6) 5.50 (139.7) 1.25 (31.8) 3.57 (90.7) 3.92 (99.6) 5.50 (139.7) 2 0.63 (16.0) 1.88 (47.8) R 0.19 (4.8) 11.25 (285.8) 6.97 (177.0) 4.93 (125.2) 0.28 (7.1) 7.00 (177.8) 2 2.05 (52.1) 11.25 (285.8) 1.06 (26.9) 0.50 (139.7) 2 2 RESET 2 TEST 3.37 (85.6) 4.25 (108.0) 2 2 3.31 (84.1) 2 3.69 (93.7) 3.57 (90.7) 3.81 (96.8) 4.78 (121.4) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-44 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.05 (52.1) 4.09 (103.9) Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) 2.2 Contents Description EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-46 V4-T2-47 V4-T2-58 V4-T2-59 V4-T2-59 V4-T2-61 V4-T2-70 V4-T2-80 V4-T2-84 V4-T2-87 V4-T2-91 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-99 V4-T2-106 V4-T2-108 V4-T2-109 V4-T2-110 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) 2 Product Description 2 LG breaker is HACR rated. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-45 2.2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Catalog Number Selection Series G—LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) L G S 3 600 FA G C 2 Frame 2 Rating Blank = 80% rated C = 100% rated L 2 Standard/Application G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA 2 2 E S H C U X K 2 2 2 Performance 600 480 415 18 35 35 25 50 50 35 65 70 50 100 100 65 150 150 65 200 200 Molded case switch Number of Poles 240 65 85 100 200 200 200 3 = Three 4 = Four—Neutral 0% protected 6 = Four—Neutral 60% protected 7 = Four—Neutral 100% protected 8 = Four—Neutral 0–60% protected 9 = Four—Neutral 0–100 protected Amperes 250 300 350 400 500 600 630 Trip Unit AA = Adj. adj. FA = Fixed adj. KS = Molded case switch 33 = 310+ electronic LS 32 = 310+ electronic LSI 35 = 310+ electronic LSG 36 = 310+ electronic LSIG 38 = 310+ electronic ALSI 39 = 310+ electronic ALSIG NN = Frame only (no trip) 2 2 2 2 Terminations/Hardware Terminals Mounting Hardware M = Metric end caps Metric E = Imperial end caps Imperial G = Line/load standard Metric W = Without terminals Trip Unit LT 3 600 FA 2 Trip 2 LT Number of Poles 3 = Three 4 = Four—neutral 0% protected 8 = Four—neutral 0/60% protected 9 = Four—neutral 0/100% protected 2 2 2 Amperes 250 300 350 400 500 600 630 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-46 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Trip Unit AA = Adj. adj., thermal-magnetic FA = Fixed adj., thermal-magnetic KS = Molded case switch 33 = 310+ electronic LS 32 = 310+ electronic LSI 35 = 310+ electronic LSG 36 = 310+ electronic LSIG 38 = 310+ electronic ALSI 39 = 310+ electronic ALSIG Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 Product Selection 2 Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware) LG-Frame Three-Pole 2 LG-Frame 2 Four-Pole (0%) 3 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 45 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 45 Ampere Rating Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 250 LGE3250FAG LGE3250AAG LGE4250FAG LGE4250AAG 300 LGE3300FAG — LGE4300FAG — 320 — LGE3320AAG — LGE4320AAG 350 LGE3350FAG — LGE4350FAG — 400 LGE3400FAG LGE3400AAG LGE4400FAG LGE4400AAG 500 LGE3500FAG LGE3500AAG LGE4500FAG LGE4500AAG 600 LGE3600FAG — LGE4600FAG — 630 4 — LGE3630AAG — LGE4630AAG 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA) IC Rating: 50 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1 Three-Pole 2 LG-Frame 2 LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA) IC Rating: 35 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1 2 Four-Pole (0%) 3 2 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 45 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 45 Ampere Rating Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 250 LGS3250FAG LGS3250AAG LGS4250FAG LGS4250AAG 300 LGS3300FAG — LGS4300FAG — 2 320 — LGS3320AAG — LGS4320AAG 350 LGS3350FAG — LGS4350FAG — 400 LGS3400FAG LGS3400AAG LGS4400FAG LGS4400AAG 500 LGS3500FAG LGS3500AAG LGS4500FAG LGS4500AAG 600 LGS3600FAG — LGS4600FAG — 630 4 — LGS3630AAG — LGS4630AAG 2 2 2 2 2 LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA) IC Rating: 70 kAIC at 415, 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 1 Three-Pole 2 2 Four-Pole (0%) 3 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 45 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 45 Ampere Rating Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 250 LGH3250FAG LGH3250AAG LGH4250FAG LGH4250AAG 300 LGH3300FAG — LGH4300FAG — 320 — LGH3320AAG — LGH4320AAG 350 LGH3350FAG — LGH4350FAG — 400 LGH3400FAG LGH3400AAG LGH4400FAG LGH4400AAG 500 LGH3500FAG LGH3500AAG LGH4500FAG LGH4500AAG LGH3600FAG — LGH4600FAG — — LGH3630AAG — LGH4630AAG 600 630 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Replace suffix “G” with “W” for no line and load terminals. 2 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles. 3 Neutral protection is indicated by the fourth character: 4 = 0%, 7 = 100%, 8 = adjustable 0–60% and 9 = 0–100%. Neutral is on LH side. 4 320/630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG. 5 Adjustable thermal units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed. Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2 2 V4-T2-47 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2 Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware) 2 LG-Frame LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA), Current Limiting Per UL 489 IC Rating: 100 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1 2 Three-Pole 2 Four-Pole (0%) 3 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 45 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 45 Ampere Rating Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 250 LGC3250FAG LGC3250AAG LGC4250FAG LGC4250AAG 2 300 LGC3300FAG — LGC4300FAG — 320 — LGC3320AAG — LGC4320AAG 2 350 LGC3350FAG — LGC4350FAG — 400 LGC3400FAG LGC3400AAG LGC4400FAG LGC4400AAG 500 LGC3500FAG LGC3500AAG LGC4500FAG LGC4500AAG 600 LGC3600FAG — LGC4600FAG — — LGC3630AAG — LGC4630AAG 2 2 2 2 630 4 2 2 LG-Frame LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA), Current Limiting Per UL 489 IC Rating: 150 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1 Three-Pole 2 2 Four-Pole (0%) 3 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 45 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 45 Ampere Rating Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 250 LGU3250FAG LGU3250AAG LGU4250FAG LGU4250AAG 2 300 LGU3300FAG — LGU4300FAG — 320 — LGU3320AAG — LGU4320AAG 2 350 LGU3350FAG — LGU4350FAG — 400 LGU3400FAG LGU3400AAG LGU4400FAG LGU4400AAG 2 500 LGU3500FAG LGU3500AAG LGU4500FAG LGU4500AAG 2 600 LGU3600FAG — LGU4600FAG — 630 4 — LGU3630AAG — LGU4630AAG 2 2 2 2 LG-Frame LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA), Current Limiting Per UL 489 IC Rating: 200 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1 Three-Pole 2 2 Four-Pole (0%) 3 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 45 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 45 Ampere Rating Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 250 LGX3250FAG LGX3250AAG LGX4250FAG LGX4250AAG 2 300 LGX3300FAG — LGX4300FAG — 320 — LGX3320AAG — LGX4320AAG 2 350 LGX3350FAG — LGX4350FAG — 400 LGX3400FAG LGX3400AAG LGX4400FAG LGX4400AAG LGX4500AAG 2 2 2 2 2 500 LGX3500FAG LGX3500AAG LGX4500FAG 600 LGX3600FAG — LGX4600FAG — 630 4 — LGX3630AAG — LGX4630AAG Notes 1 Replace suffix “G” with “W” for no line and load terminals. 2 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles. 3 Neutral protection is indicated by the fourth character: 4 = 0%, 7 = 100%, 8 = adjustable 0–60% and 9 = 0–100%. Neutral is on LH side. 4 320/630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG. 5 Adjustable thermal units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed. 2 2 V4-T2-48 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 Molded Case Switches 1 Ampere Rating Number of Poles Catalog Number 400 32 LGK3400KSG 4 LGK4400KSG 630 3 32 LGK3630KSG 4 LGK4630KSG 2 2 2 2 2 Frame—IC Rating at 415/480 Volts Maximum Amperes 3 2 Three-Pole 2 Four-Pole 0% Catalog Number Catalog Number LGE3630NN LGE4630NN LGE3630NNWC — LGS3630NN LGS4630NN LGS3630NNWC — LGH3630NN LGH4630NN LGH3630NNWC — 2 LGC4630NN 2 2 35/35 630 3 2 2 50/50 630 3 2 2 70/53 630 3 100/100 Current Limiting Per UL 489 630 LGC3630NN 2 150/150 Current Limiting Per UL 489 630 LGU3630NN LGU4630NN 2 200/200 Current Limiting 630 LGX3630NN LGX4630NN 2 2 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Three-Pole 2 Four-Pole (0%) 2 5 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 4 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 4 Ampere Rating Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 250 LT3250FA LT3250AA LT4250FA LT4250AA 300 LT3300FA — LT4300FA — 320 — LT3320AA — LT4320AA 350 LT3350FA — LT4350FA — 400 LT3400FA LT3400AA LT4400FA LT4400AA 500 LT3500FA LT3500AA LT4500FA LT4500AA 600 LT3600FA — LT4600FA — 630 — LT3630AA — LT4630AA 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Molded case switches will trip above 6300 amperes. 2 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles. 3 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG. 4 Adjustable thermal, adjustable magnetic trip units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed. 5 Neutral protection is indicated by the third character: 4 = 0%, 7 = 100%, 8 = adjustable 0–60% and 9 = 0–100%. 6 100% rated frame. 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-49 2.2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Electronic Trip Units—Digitrip 310+ LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 250 LT325033 LT325032 LT325035 LT325036 LGFCT250 400 LT340033 LT340032 LT340035 LT340036 LGFCT400 2 600 LT360033 LT360032 LT360035 LT360036 LGFCT600 2 630 2 LT363033 LT363032 LT363035 LT363036 LGFCT600 Four-Pole 3 2 2 2 Ampere Rating Three-Pole 2 250 LT425033 LT425032 LT425035 LT425036 — 400 LT440033 LT440032 LT440035 LT440036 — 2 600 LT460033 LT460032 LT460035 LT460036 — 630 2 LT463033 LT463032 LT463035 LT463036 — 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Plug-In Test Kit 4 Voltage Rating Catalog Number 120 Vac MTST120V 230 Vac MTST230V Notes 1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. 2 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG. 3 Neutral protection: 4= 0%, 6 = 60%, 7 = 100%. Electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable. 4 IL Number is 5721B13. Long time pickup — selectable via dial setting. 630 ampere settings — 630, 600, 500, 400, 350, 315, 300, 250 (315, 630 are IEC ratings only). 600 ampere settings — 600, 500, 450, 400, 350, 315, 300, 250 (315 is IEC rating only). 400 ampere settings — 400, 350, 315, 300, 250, 225, 200, 160 (315 is IEC rating only). 250 ampere settings — 250, 225, 200, 175, 160, 150, 125, 100 (160 is IEC rating only). Adjustable long time delay — 2–24 seconds at 6 x Ir . Adjustable short time delay — Inst., 120, 300 ms. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-50 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 IC Rating at 415/480V Complete LG Breakers with Electronic Trip Unit (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware) 1 2 2 IC Rating: 35 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 2 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 250 LGE325033G LGE325032G LGE325035G LGE325036G LGFCT250 400 LGE340033G LGE340032G LGE340035G LGE340036G LGFCT400 600 LGE360033G LGE360032G LGE360035G LGE360036G LGFCT600 630 4 LGE363033G LGE363032G LGE363035G LGE363036G LGFCT600 2 250 LGE425033G LGE425032G LGE425035G LGE425036G — 2 400 LGE440033G LGE440032G LGE440035G LGE440036G — 600 LGE460033G LGE460032G LGE460035G LGE460036G — 630 4 LGE463033G LGE463032G LGE463035G LGE463036G — Ampere Rating 2 Three-Pole 3 2 Four-Pole 5 2 2 2 IC Rating: 50 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 250 LGS325033G LGS325032G LGS325035G LGS325036G LGFCT250 400 LGS340033G LGS340032G LGS340035G LGS340036G LGFCT400 600 LGS360033G LGS360032G LGS360035G LGS360036G LGFCT600 630 4 LGS363033G LGS363032G LGS363035G LGS363036G LGFCT600 2 250 LGS425033G LGS425032G LGS425035G LGS425036G — 2 400 LGS440033G LGS440032G LGS440035G LGS440036G — 600 LGS460033G LGS460032G LGS460035G LGS460036G — 630 4 LGS463033G LGS463032G LGS463035G LGS463036G — Ampere Rating 2 2 Three-Pole 3 2 2 Four-Pole 5 2 2 2 IC Rating: 70 kAIC at 415 Vac, 65 kAIC at 480 Vac LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 250 LGH325033G LGH325032G LGH325035G LGH325036G LGFCT250 400 LGH340033G LGH340032G LGH340035G LGH340036G LGFCT400 600 LGH360033G LGH360032G LGH360035G LGH360036G LGFCT600 630 4 LGH363033G LGH363032G LGH363035G LGH363036G LGFCT600 250 LGH425033G LGH425032G LGH425035G LGH425036G — 400 LGH440033G LGH440032G LGH440035G LGH440036G — 600 LGH460033G LGH460032G LGH460035G LGH460036G — 630 4 LGH463033G LGH463032G LGH463035G LGH463036G — Ampere Rating 2 2 Three-Pole 3 2 2 2 Four-Pole 5 2 2 2 Notes 1 Replace suffix “G” with “W” for no line and load terminals. 2 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. 3 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles. 4 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG. 5 Neutral protection: 4= 0%, 6 = 60%, 7 = 100%. Electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable. Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2 2 V4-T2-51 2.2 2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G IC Rating at 415/480V Complete LG Breakers with Electronic Trip Unit (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware) 1 IC Rating: 100 kAIC at 415 Vac and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489 2 Ampere Rating 2 Three-Pole 3 LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 250 LGC325033G LGC325032G LGC325035G LGC325036G LGFCT250 400 LGC340033G LGC340032G LGC340035G LGC340036G LGFCT400 2 600 LGC360033G LGC360032G LGC360035G LGC360036G LGFCT600 630 4 LGC363033G LGC363032G LGC363035G LGC363036G LGFCT600 2 Four-Pole 5 250 LGC425033G LGC425032G LGC425035G LGC425036G — 2 400 LGC440033G LGC440032G LGC440035G LGC440036G — 2 600 LGC460033G LGC460032G LGC460035G LGC460036G — 630 4 LGC463033G LGC463032G LGC463035G LGC463036G — 2 2 IC Rating: 150 kAIC at 415 Vac and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489 2 2 2 Ampere Rating LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Three-Pole 3 250 LGU325033G LGU325032G LGU325035G LGU325036G LGFCT250 2 400 LGU340033G LGU340032G LGU340035G LGU340036G LGFCT400 600 LGU360033G LGU360032G LGU360035G LGU360036G LGFCT600 2 630 4 LGU363033G LGU363032G LGU363035G LGU363036G LGFCT600 250 LGU425033G LGU425032G LGU425035G LGU425036G — 2 400 LGU440033G LGU440032G LGU440035G LGU440036G — 600 LGU460033G LGU460032G LGU460035G LGU460036G — 2 630 4 LGU463033G LGU463032G LGU463035G LGU463036G — 2 IC Rating: 200 kAIC at 415 Vac and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489 2 2 2 2 2 2 Four-Pole 5 LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 250 LGX325033G LGX325032G LGX325035G LGX325036G LGFCT250 400 LGX340033G LGX340032G LGX340035G LGX340036G LGFCT400 600 LGX360033G LGX360032G LGX360035G LGX360036G LGFCT600 630 4 LGX363033G LGX363032G LGX363035G LGX363036G LGFCT600 Ampere Rating Three-Pole 3 Four-Pole 5 2 250 LGX425033G LGX425032G LGX425035G LGX425036G — 400 LGX440033G LGX440032G LGX440035G LGX440036G — 2 600 LGX460033G LGX460032G LGX460035G LGX460036G — 630 4 LGX463033G LGX463032G LGX463035G LGX463036G — 2 2 2 Notes 1 Replace suffix “G” with “W” for no line and load terminals. 2 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. 3 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles. 4 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG. 5 Neutral protection: 4= 0%, 6 = 60%, 7 = 100%. Electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable. V4-T2-52 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 LG 100% Rated Circuit Breaker—Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 2 Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware) LG-Frame LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA) IC Rating: 35 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1 LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA) IC Rating: 70 kAIC at 415, 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 1 Three-Pole 2 Three-Pole 2 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Ampere Rating Catalog Number Ampere Rating Catalog Number 250 LGE3250FAGC 250 LGH3250FAGC 300 LGE3300FAGC 300 LGH3300FAGC 320 — 320 — 350 LGE3350FAGC 350 LGH3350FAGC 400 LGE3400FAGC 400 LGH3400FAGC 500 LGE3500FAGC 500 LGH3500FAGC 600 LGE3600FAGC 600 LGH3600FAGC 630 4 — 630 4 — LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA) IC Rating: 50 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1 250 LGS3250FAGC 300 LGS3300FAGC 320 — 350 LGS3350FAGC 400 LGS3400FAGC 500 LGS3500FAGC 600 630 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Replace suffix “G” with “W” for no line and load terminals. 2 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 LGS3600FAGC 4 2 2 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Catalog Number 2 2 Three-Pole 2 Ampere Rating 2 2 — 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-53 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2 LG 100% Rated Electronic Breaker Per UL 489 2 IEC/UL/CSA 35 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 Ampere Rating Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 250 LGE325033GC LGE325032GC LGE325035GC LGE325036GC LGFCT250 2 400 LGE340033GC LGE340032GC LGE340035GC LGE340036GC LGFCT400 600 LGE360033GC LGE360032GC LGE360035GC LGE360036GC LGFCT600 2 630 2 LGE363033GC LGE363032GC LGE363035GC LGE363036GC LGFCT600 2 2 2 IEC/UL/CSA 50 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 2 2 2 2 2 2 LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 Ampere Rating Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 250 LGS325033GC LGS325032GC LGS325035GC LGS325036GC LGFCT250 400 LGS340033GC LGS340032GC LGS340035GC LGS340036GC LGFCT400 600 LGS360033GC LGS360032GC LGS360035GC LGS360036GC LGFCT600 630 2 LGS363033GC LGS363032GC LGS363035GC LGS363036GC LGFCT600 IEC/UL/CSA 70 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 Ampere Rating Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 250 LGH325033GC LGH325032GC LGH325035GC LGH325036GC LGFCT250 2 400 LGH340033GC LGH340032GC LGH340035GC LGH340036GC LGFCT400 600 LGH360033GC LGH360032GC LGH360035GC LGH360036GC LGFCT600 2 630 2 LGH363033GC LGH363032GC LGH363035GC LGH363036GC LGFCT600 2 2 2 Notes 1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required. 2 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-54 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G LG Electronic Breaker with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System Series G LG circuit breakers simple and reliable method to are available with the Arcflash reduce fault clearing time. Reduction Maintenance The Arcflash Reduction System™ integrated into the Maintenance System unit electronic trip units helping to utilizes a separate analog trip improve safety by providing a circuit that provides faster LG with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System interruption times than the standard (digital) “instantaneous” protection. Work locations downstream of a circuit breaker with an Arcflash Reduction 2.2 Maintenance System unit can have a significantly lower incident energy level, reducing arc flash potential to the system. 2 2 2 LG Electronic Breaker with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System Ampere Rating 2 ALSI ALSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 2 IEC/UL/CSA 35 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 250 LGE325038G LGE365039G LGFCT250 400 LGE340038G LGE340039G LGFCT400 600 LGE360038G LGE360039G LGFCT600 630 LGE363038G LGE363039G LGFCT600 2 LGFCT250 2 2 IEC/UL/CSA 50 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 250 LGS325038G LGS365039G 400 LGS340038G LGS340039G LGFCT400 600 LGS360038G LGS360039G LGFCT600 630 LGS363038G LGS363039G LGFCT600 2 2 IEC/UL/CSA 70 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 250 LGH325038G LGH365039G LGFCT250 400 LGH340038G LGH340039G LGFCT400 600 LGH360038G LGH360039G LGFCT600 630 LGH363038G LGH363039G LGFCT600 2 2 2 IEC/UL/CSA 100 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489 250 LGC325038G LGC365039G LGFCT250 400 LGC340038G LGC340039G LGFCT400 600 LGC360038G LGC360039G LGFCT600 630 LGC363038G LGC363039G LGFCT600 2 2 2 IEC/UL/CSA 150 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489 250 LGU325038G LGU365039G LGFCT250 400 LGU340038G LGU340039G LGFCT400 600 LGU360038G LGU360039G LGFCT600 630 LGU363038G LGU363039G LGFCT600 2 2 2 IEC/UL/CSA 200 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489 250 LGX325038G LGX365039G LGFCT250 400 LGX340038G LGX340039G LGFCT400 600 LGX360038G LGX360039G LGFCT600 630 LGX363038G LGX363039G LGFCT600 2 2 2 2 LG Electronic Trip Units with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System ALSI ALSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 Ampere Rating Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 250 LT325038 LT325039 LGFCT250 400 LT340038 LT340039 LGFCT400 600 LT360038 LT360039 LGFCT600 630 LT363038 LT363039 LGFCT600 2 2 2 2 2 Note 1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required. Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-55 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2 Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information 2 Line and Load Terminals 2 Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material 2 400 Wire Type AWG Wire Range/ Number of Conductors Metric Wire Range (mm2) Number of Terminals Included Catalog Number Aluminum Cu/Al 500–750 (1) 240–380 (1) 3 3TA631LK 1 400 Aluminum Cu/Al 500–750 (1) 240–380 (1) 4 4TA631LK 1 400 Copper Cu 500–750 (1) 240–380 (1) 3 3T631LK 1 2 400 Copper Cu 500–750 (1) 240–380 (1) 4 4T631LK 1 630 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 (2) 35–240 (2) 1 TA632L 2 630 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 (2) 35–240 (2) 3 3TA632LK 12 2 630 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 (2) 35–240 (2) 4 4TA632LK 12 630 Copper Cu 2–500 (2) 35–240 (2) 3 3T632LK 1 2 630 Copper Cu 2–500 (2) 35–240 (2) 4 4T632LK 1 400 Aluminum Cu/Al 3–500 (1) 35–240 (1) 1 TA350LK 2 2 400 Copper Cu 3–500 (1) 35–240 (1) 1 T350LK 2 2 2 2 2 Terminal Covers Terminal Spreaders Description Catalog Number Number of Poles Catalog Number Three-pole terminal cover 3 LTS3K 3 LGTEW3 Four-pole terminal cover 3 LTS4K 4 LGTEW4 End Cap Kits (MIO Metric Nuts) Terminal Extensions Number of Poles Catalog Number Number of Poles Catalog Number 3 L3RTWK 3 LGTES3 2 4 L4RTWK 4 LGTES4 2 Control Wire Terminal Kit 2 2 2 2 2 Handle Extension Description Terminal Body Type Catalog Number Description Catalog Number Three-pole kit Aluminum 3TA632LKW Handle extension HEXLG Four-pole kit Aluminum 4TA632LKW Three-pole kit Copper 3T632LKW Four-pole kit Copper 4T632LKW 2 2 Interphase Barrier Package of 2 Catalog Number Interphase barrier IPB3 Notes 1 Includes LTS3K (three-pole) or LTS4K (four-pole) terminal covers. 2 Standard terminal included with complete breaker. 3 Included in TA63IL, T63IL, TA632L kits listed above. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-56 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 Terminals and Terminal Cover for the LG Breaker—Includes LTS3K (Three-Pole) or LTS4K (Four-Pole) Terminal Covers 2 Note: Extended terminal covers add 2.13 inches (54.0 mm) to breaker length. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-57 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2 Accessories 2 Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. 2 2 2 2 LG-Frame Accessories Reference Page Description Three-Pole Left Four-Pole Center Right Left Center Right Neu. Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-104 ■ ■ Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-104 ■ ■ Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-104 ■ ■ Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T2-104 ■ Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-104 ■ ■ 2 Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T2-105 ■ ■ 2 End cap kit V4-T2-56 ● ● Handle extension V4-T2-56 ● ● Terminal cover V4-T2-56 ● ● 2 Padlockable handle block V4-T2-102 2 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-102 ❏ ❏ ❏ Key interlock kit V4-T2-102 ❏ ❏ ❏ Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-102 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Electrical operator V4-T2-102 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Plug-in adapters V4-T2-102 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Rear connecting studs V4-T2-102 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Handle mechanisms V4-T2-110 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Earth leakage/ground fault protector V4-T2-87 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Drawout cassette V4-T2-109 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Digitrip 310+ test kit V4-T2-50 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Ammeter/cause of trip display V4-T2-101 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Cause of trip LED module V4-T2-101 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-100 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Marine/naval application, UL 489 Supplement SA and SB 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ■ External Accessories ■ ■ ❏ ❏ Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Legend ■ Applicable in indicated pole position ❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both ● Accessory available/modification available Note Contact Eaton. 1 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-58 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 Technical Data and Specifications 2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 2 UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 2 Interrupting Capacity (kA rms Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Volts DC 1 Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles 240–240 Icu Ics Icu Ics LGE630 3, 4 65 65 35 35 35 LGS630 3, 4 85 85 50 50 50 LGH630 3, 4 100 100 70 70 LGC630 6 3, 4 200 200 100 100 LGU630 6 3, 4 200 200 150 200 200 LGX630 6 3, 4 200 5 380–415 480 600 690 250 2 23 Icu Ics Icu Ics 18 12 6 22 22 25 20 10 22 22 65 35 25 13 42 42 100 50 30 15 42 42 150 150 65 35 18 50 50 200 200 65 35 18 50 50 2 2 2 2 2 Dimensions and Weights 2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) LG-Frame Number of Poles Width Height Depth 2, 3 5.48 (139.2) 10.13 (257.3) 4.09 (103.9) 4 7.22 (183.4) 10.13 (257.3) 4.09 (103.9) 2 2 2 LG-Frame 2 Note: TA63IL, T63IL, T632L, TA632L terminals add 1.19 inches (30.2 mm) to line or load side of LG. LTS3K or LTS4K terminal covers add 2.13 inches (54.1 mm) to line or load side of LG. 2.43 (61.7) R 0.25 (6.4) CL 2 4.06 (103.1) Breaker 3.16 (80.3) 5.58 (141.7) 2.00 (50.8) 2 2 10.13 (257.3) 2 1.92 (48.8) 2.69 (68.3) 5.38 (136.7) 5.48 (139.2) 2 Four-Pole 2 Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg) 2 LG-Frame Breaker Type Two- and Three-Pole Four-Pole LGE, LGS, LGH, LGC, LGU, LGX 16 (7.3) 20 (9.1) 2 2 Notes 1 DC rating apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. 2 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuits. 3 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at–kA. 4 Three-poles in series. 750 Vdc ratings available (four-pole in series, not UL listed). Contact Eaton. 5 IEC rating is 300 kA at 240 Vac. 6 Current limiting per UL 489. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-59 2.2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G LG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module 4.31 (109.5) 5.16 (131.1) 3.44 (87.4) 1.72 (43.7) 2 2 2 2 4.06 (103.1) 3.98 (101.1) 0.86 (21.8) 5.58 (141.7) 5.58 (141.7) 4.73 (120.1) 2 3.44 (87.4) 1.72 (43.7) 4.73 (120.1) 2 2 8.44 (214.4) 8.44 (214.4) 10.13 (257.3) 2 2 2 15.38 (390.7) 13.69 (347.7) 13.68 (347.5) 15.38 (390.7) 2 2 3-Pole 5.48 (139.2) 2 4-Pole 7.22 (183.4) 2 2 4-Pole 2.75 (69.9) 3-Pole 2.74 (69.6) 3.97 (100.8) 4.30 (109.2) 4.55 (115.6) 5.43 (137.9) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-60 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 4-Pole 7.22 (183.4) 3-Pole 5.48 (139.2) 4-Pole 2.75 (69.9) 3-Pole 2.74 (69.6) Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G NG-Frame (1200 Ampere) 2.2 Contents Description EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Guide and Ordering Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-45 2 2 2 V4-T2-62 2 V4-T2-63 V4-T2-66 V4-T2-67 V4-T2-69 V4-T2-70 V4-T2-80 V4-T2-84 V4-T2-87 V4-T2-91 2 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-99 V4-T2-106 V4-T2-108 V4-T2-109 V4-T2-110 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) 2 Product Description 2 ● ● All Eaton NG-Frame circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed use All NG-Frame circuit breakers are HACR rated 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-61 2.2 2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Catalog Number Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. Circuit Breaker/Frame Catalog Number System NG H 3 080 39 ZG E C 2 2 Rating Frame NG 2 Blank = 80% rated C = 100% rated Performance at 480 Vac S = 50 kAIC H = 65 kAIC C = 100 kAIC U = 150 kAIC 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Amperes 080 = 800 1200 = 1200 Poles 3 = Three 4 = Four; neutral 2 0% protected 7 = Four; neutral 2 100% protected 9 = Four; neutral 2 0/60/100% adjustable protection Trip Unit Terminations 3 310+ Electronic LS 310+ Electronic LSI 310+ Electronic LSG 310+ Electronic LS(A), GFA, no trip 310+ Electronic LSIG 310+ Electronic LSI(A), GFA, no trip 310+ Electronic ALSI w/ Maintenance Mode 39 = 310+ Electronic ALSIG w/ Maintenance Mode 39B22 = 310+ Electronic ALSI(A) w/ Maintenance Mode and GFA, no trip M = Metric tapped line/load conductors E = Imperial tapped line/load conductors 33 32 35 35B22 36 36B22 38 = = = = = = = Notes 1 800A only. 2 Neutral inn left pole on GN; right pole on NG. 3 Breakers do not ship with lugs. Trip units are factory installable only. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-62 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Feature Blank B20 B21 ZG = = = = No feature High load alarm Ground fault Zone selective interlocking 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Product Selection Guide and Ordering Information 2 Type NGS Standard Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 50 kA lcu at 480 Vac or 415 Vac 2 Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit with Imperial Tapped Conductors Maximum Continuous Ampere Number Rating of Poles at 40°C 12 Short Time Range Short Time Delay Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay 800 1200 3 L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup S– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I2t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response) I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat Response) LS LSI LSG LSIG 2–8 x In — — — 2–8 x In I–300 ms — — 2–8 x In — 200–1200A I–500 ms 2–8 x In I–300 ms 200–1200A I–500 ms 2 2 ALSI ALSIG 2–8 x In I–300 ms — — 2–8 x In I–300 ms 200–1200A I–500 ms 3 NGS308033E NGS308032E NGS308035E NGS308036E NGS308038E NGS308039E 44 NGS408033E NGS408032E NGS408035E NGS408036E NGS408038E NGS408039E 45 NGS708033E NGS708032E — — NGS708038E — 46 NGS908033E NGS908032E — — NGS908038E — 3 NGS312033E NGS312032E NGS312035E NGS312036E NGS312038E NGS312039E 44 NGS412033E NGS412032E NGS412035E NGS412036E — NGS412039E 45 NGS712033E NGS712032E — — NGS712038E — 46 NGS912033E NGS912032E — — NGS912038E — 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Type NGS Standard Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 50 kA Icu at 415 Vac Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit with Metric Tapped Conductors Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 12 Number of Poles 2 2 LS LSI LSG LSIG ALSI ALSIG 2–8 x In — — — 2–8 x In I–300 ms — — 2–8 x In — 200–1200A I–500 ms 2–8 x In I–300 ms 200–1200A I–500 ms 2–8 x In I–300 ms — — 2–8 x In I–300 ms 200–1200A I–500 ms 3 NGS316033M NGS316032M NGS316035M NGS316036M NGS316038M NGS316039M 44 NGS416033M NGS416032M NGS416035M NGS416036M NGS416038M NGS416039M 45 NGS716033M NGS716032M — — NGS716038M — 46 NGS916033M NGS916032M — — NGS916038M — Short Time Range Short Time Delay Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay 1600 3 2 L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Rating Plug) S– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I2t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response) I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat Response) 2 2 2 Ue Maximum 690 Vac Three-Pole Catalog Number MCS with Imperial line and load terminals NGS3080KSE 1200 MCS with Imperial line and load terminals 1250 MCS with Imperial line and load terminals 800 2 2 Molded Case Switches 78 Ampere Rating 2 Four-Pole Catalog Number 2 MCS with Imperial line and load terminals NGS4080KSE NGS3120KSE MCS with Imperial line and load terminals NGS4120KSE 2 NGS3125KSE MCS with Imperial line and load terminals NGS43125KSE Notes 1 For AC use only. 2 NG MCCBs are suitable for 40°C or 50°C applications. Order suffix V3 to eliminate standard 40°C labeling. 3 Non-UL listed NG 1250 with 1250 ampere trip unit is also available. 4 Neutral 0% protected. NG, neutral in right pocket; GN, neutral in left pocket. 5 Neutral 100% protected (denoted by 7 in digit four). 6 Neutral 0%/60%/100% adjustable protection (denoted by 9 in digit four). 7 For AC use only. Molded case switch will trip above 14,000 amperes. 8 For two-pole applications, use outer poles of three-pole molded case switch. 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-63 2.2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip Electronic Trip Unit Maximum Continuous Ampere Number Rating of Poles at 40°C 12 Short Time Range Short Time Delay Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay 800 1200 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ALSIG 2–8 x In I–300 ms — — 2–8 x In I–300 ms 200–1200A I–500 ms 2–8 x In I–300 ms — — 2–8 x In — 200–1200A I–500 ms 2–8 x In I–300 ms 200–1200A I–500 ms 3 NGH308033E NGH308032E NGH308035E NGH308036E NGH308038E NGH308039E 43 NGH408033E NGH408032E NGH408035E NGH408036E NGH408038E NGH408039E 44 NGH708033E NGH708032E — — NGH708038E — 45 NGH908033E NGH908032E — — NGH908038E — NGH312039E 3 NGH312033E NGH312032E NGH312035E NGH312036E NGH312038E 43 NGH412033E NGH412032E NGH412035E NGH412036E — NGH412039E 44 NGH712033E NGH712032E — — NGH712038E — 45 NGH912033E NGH912032E — — NGH912038E — Maximum Continuous Ampere Number Rating of Poles at 40°C 12 Short Time Range Short Time Delay Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay 800 1200 3 2 2 ALSI 2–8 x In — — — Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit with Imperial Tapped Conductors 2 2 L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup S– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I2t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response) I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat Response) LS LSI LSG LSIG Type NGC Very High Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 100 kA lcu at 480 Vac or 415 Vac 2 2 Series G Type NGH High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 65 kA lcu at 480 Vac or 415 Vac 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup S– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I2t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response) I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat Response) LS LSI LSG LSIG ALSI ALSIG 2–8 x In — — — 2–8 x In I–300 ms — — 2–8 x In I–300 ms 200–1200A I–500 ms 2–8 x In I–300 ms — — 2–8 x In — 200–1200A I–500 ms 3 NGC308033E NGC308032E NGC308035E NGC308036E NGC308038E NGC308039E 43 NGC408033E NGC408032E NGC408035E NGC408036E NGC408038E NGC408039E 44 NGC708033E NGC708032E — — NGC708038E — 45 NGC908033E NGC908032E — — NGC908038E — 3 NGC312033E NGC312032E NGC312035E NGC312036E NGC312038E NGC312039E 43 NGC412033E NGC412032E NGC412035E NGC412036E — NGC412039E 44 NGC712033E NGC712032E — — NGC712038E — 45 NGC912033E NGC912032E — — NGC912038E — Notes 1 For AC use only. 2 NG MCCBs are suitable for 40°C or 50°C applications. Order suffix V3 to eliminate standard 40°C labeling. 3 Neutral 0% protected. NG, neutral in right pocket; GN, neutral in left pocket. 4 Neutral 100% protected (denoted by 7 in digit four). 5 Neutral 0%/60%/100% adjustable protection (denoted by 9 in digit four). 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-64 2–8 x In I–300 ms 200–1200A I–500 ms Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information 2 Line and Load Terminals N-Frame circuit breakers do not include terminals as standard. When copper or Cu/Al terminals are required, order by catalog number. 2 Line and Load Terminals 2 Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG Wire (Number of Conductors) AWG Wire Catalog Number 1 Metric Wire Range mm2 Metric Catalog Number 1 2 2 Standard Cu/Al Pressure Terminals 700 Aluminum Cu/Al 1–500 (2) TA700NB1 50–240 TA700NB1M 1000 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 (3) TA1000NB1 95–185 TA1000NB1M 1200 Aluminum Cu/Al 4/0–500 (4) TA1200NB1 120–240 TA1200NB1M 1200 Aluminum Cu/Al 500–750 (3) TA1201NB1 300–400 TA1201NB1M 2/0–500 (2) T700NB1 70–240 T700NB1M 2 2 2 Optional Copper and Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals 700 Copper Cu 1000 Copper Cu 3/0–500 (3) T1000NB1 95–240 T1000NB1M 1200 Copper Cu 3/0–400 (4) T1200NB3 95–185 T1200NB3M Base Mounting Hardware Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or molded case switch. Handle Extension Included with breaker. Additional handle extensions are available. Base Mounting Hardware 2 Handle Extension Number of Poles Description Catalog Number Description Catalog Number BMH5 Single handle extension HEX5 Three- and four-pole Imperial hardware: 0.3125–18 x 1.25 pan-head steel screws and lock washers Three- and four-pole Metric hardware: M8 pan-head steel screws BMH5M and lock washers Terminal Shield Terminal Shield Description Catalog Number Three-pole terminal shield NTS3K Conductor Extension Kit Conductor Extension Kit 3 Description Catalog Number Three-pole both ends Metric 5104A24G04 Three-pole both ends English 5104A24G02 2 2 2 2 2 2 Interphase Barriers The interphase barriers provide additional electrical clearance between circuit breaker poles for special termination applications. Barriers are high dielectric insulating plates that are installed in the molded slots between the terminals. (Field installation only.) 2 2 2 2 Interphase Barriers Description Catalog Number 2 Interphase barriers IPB5 2 Notes 1 Single terminals individually packed. 2 Metric hardware included with breaker. 3 Included as standard on 100% rated 800/1200A breakers. 2 2 2 Keeper Nut Not required on NG-Frame. Terminals are threaded. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-65 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2 Accessories 2 Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. 2 2 2 2 NG-Frame Accessories Reference Page Description Three-Pole Left Four-Pole Center Right Left Center Right Neu. Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-104 ● ■ ● ■ 2 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-104 ● ■ ● ■ Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-104 ● ■ ● ■ 2 Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T2-104 ● ■ ● ■ 2 Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-104 ■ ■ Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T2-105 ■ ■ 2 External Accessories Base mounting hardware V4-T2-65 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Interphase barriers V4-T2-65 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Non-padlockable handle block V4-T2-102 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-102 ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ 2 Key interlock kit V4-T2-102 ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-102 ● ● ● 2 Electrical operator V4-T2-102 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Plug-in adapters V4-T2-108 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Rear connecting studs V4-T2-102 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Handle mechanisms V4-T2-110 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Drawout cassette V4-T2-109 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Handle extension V4-T2-65 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Ammeter/cause of trip display V4-T2-101 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Cause of trip LED module V4-T2-101 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Digitrip 310 test kit V4-T2-102 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-100 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Marine/Naval application, UL 489 Supplement SA and SB 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 2 2 2 2 ■ ■ Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Legend ■ Applicable in indicated pole position ❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both ● Accessory available/modification available Note Contact Eaton. 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-66 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 Technical Data and Specifications 2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 2 UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1 2 Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) 2 Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Circuit Breaker Type 220–240 380–415 690 Number of Poles 240 (UL) Icu Ics Icu Ics 480 600 Icu Ics 2, 3, 4 65 85 85 50 50 50 25 20 10 NGH 2, 3, 4 100 100 100 70 50 65 35 25 13 NGC 2, 3, 4 200 200 100 100 50 100 65 35 18 NGS 1 2 2 2 2 NG-Frame Digitrip Specifications 2 Specification Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+ rms sensing Yes 2 2 Breaker Type Frame N Ampere range 320–1200A Interrupting rating at 480 volts 50, 65, 100 (kA) 2 2 Protection 2 Ordering options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG Fixed rated plug (In) No No Overtemperature trip Yes Yes 2 2 Long Delay Protection (L) Adjustable trip setting (In) Yes Yes Long delay pickup 0.5–1.0 (In) 0.5–1.0 (In) Long delay time I2t 12 seconds 12 seconds Long delay time I4t No No Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes High load alarm No No 2 2 2 Short Delay Protection (S) 2 Short delay pickup 200–800% x (In) 200–800% x (In) Short delay time I2t 100 ms No Short delay time flat No Inst–300 ms Short delay time zone selective interlocking Yes Yes 2 2 2 Instantaneous Protection (I) Instantaneous pickup No 200–800% x (In) Discriminator No No Instantaneous override Yes Yes 2 2 Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm Is = Sensor Rating = Rating Plug In = Long Delay Pickup Setting Ir 2 2 Note 1600 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 1200 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for NG. 2 1 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-67 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2 Specifications, continued 2 Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+ LS, LSG LSI, LSIG No Ground Fault Protection (G) 2 Ground fault alarm No 2 Ground fault pickup 1–5 x Ig (160A) 1–5 x Ig (160A) Ground fault delay I2t No No 2 2 Ground fault delay flat Inst–500 ms Inst–500 ms Ground fault zone selective interlocking Yes Yes Ground fault thermal memory Yes Yes System Diagnostics 2 Status LEDs Yes Yes 2 Cause of trip LEDs Yes 1 Yes 1 Magnitude of trip information No No 2 Remote signal contact—ground alarm Yes 2 Yes 2 Local auxiliary and bell alarm contact Optional Optional 2 System Monitoring Yes 3 Yes 3 3 Yes 3 2 Digital display Current Yes 2 Power and energy No No Power quality—harmonics No No 2 Power factor No No No No Test set Test set Communications 2 Eaton PowerNet 2 Testing method 2 2 2 2 2 Testing Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm Is = Sensor Rating In = Rating Plug = Long Delay Pickup Setting Ir Notes With cause of trip LED module (Trip-LED) 2 With separate ground fault alarm unit (GFAU). 3 With cause of trip display (DIGIVIEW or DIGIVIEWR06) 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-68 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 NG-Frame 2 Number of Poles Width Height Depth 3 8.25 (209.6) 16.00 (406.4) 5.50 (139.7) 4 11.13 (282.6) 16.00 (406.4) 5.50 (139.7) 2 2 2 NG-Frame Front View Three-Pole Front Cover Cutout 2 Side View 3.44 (87.4) 2 BREAKER 2 9.25 (235.0) R .25 (6.4) 2 1.91 (48.5) 16.00 (406.4) 2 3.68 1.50 (93.5) (38.1) 2 2 3.19 (81.0) 6.38 (162.1) 8.25 (209.6) 2 5.50 (139.7) 2 Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg) 2 NG-Frame 2 Complete Breaker Breaker Type Three-Pole Four-Pole NGS, NGH, NGC 45 (20.4) 58 (26.3) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-69 2.2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) Contents Description 2 EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) 2 Product Description ● 2 2 2 2 ● Eaton’s RG-Frame circuit breakers are available as frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug and terminals All R-Frame circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed use 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-70 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Page V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-45 V4-T2-61 V4-T2-71 V4-T2-72 V4-T2-77 V4-T2-78 V4-T2-79 V4-T2-80 V4-T2-84 V4-T2-87 V4-T2-91 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-99 V4-T2-106 V4-T2-108 V4-T2-109 V4-T2-110 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 Catalog Number Selection 2 70 kA at 415 Vac and 65 kA at 480 Vac 2 RG Circuit Breaker/Frame 2 RG H 3 250 39 ZG E C 2 Performance at 480 Vac H = 65 kAIC C = 100 kAIC 2 Rating Frame RG Blank = 80% rated C = 100%rated (except 2500A) Amperes 160 = 1600 200 = 2000 250 = 2500 Poles 3 = Three 4 = Four Trip Unit Terminations 310+ Electronic LS 310+ Electronic LSI 310+ Electronic LSG 310+ Electronic LS(A), GFA, no trip 310+ Electronic LSIG 310+ Electronic LSI(A), GFA, no trip 310+ Electronic ALSI w/ Maintenance Mode 39 = 310+ Electronic ALSIG w/ Maintenance Mode 39B22 = 310+ Electronic ALSI(A) w/ Maintenance Mode and GFA, no trip M = Metric tapped line/load conductors E = Imperial tapped line/load conductors 33 32 35 35B22 36 36B22 38 = = = = = = = 2 2 2 2 Feature Blank B20 B21 ZG = = = = 2 No feature High load alarm Ground fault Zone selective interlocking 2 2 RG Circuit Breaker/Frame for OPTIM 610 and 910 2 RGH 3 16 T33 W Type RGH 65K RGC 100K Poles 3 = Three 4 = Four Amperes 16 = 1600 20 = 2000 25 = 2500 Trip Function Digitrip 610 T61 = LI T62 = LSI T63 = LS T64 = LIG T65 = LSG T66 = LSIG Digitrip 910 T91 = LI T92 = LSI T93 = LS T94 = LIG T95 = LSG T96 = LSIG 2 2 Modification Suffix R = Ground fault remote RES trip E = 100% protection (new design 310) RES trip unit P = 100% prot. neut. 4P RES trip unit V3 = Electronic trip without ambient temperature marked on trip unit W = w/o terms K = Molded case switch 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-71 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2 Product Selection 2 70 kA at 415 Vac and 65 kA at 480 Vac 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Type RGH with Digitrip 310+ High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Maximum 690 Vac, 70 kA Icu at 415 Vac Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310 Electronic Trip Unit with Adjustable Rating Plugs—Catalog Number 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 1 Short Time Range Short Time Delay Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay Number of Poles L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Rating Plug) S– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I2t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response) I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat Response) LS 2–8 x In — — — LSI 2–8 x In I–300 ms — — LSG 3 2–8 x In — 200–1200A I–500 ms LSIG 3 2–8 x In I–300 ms 200–1200A I–500 ms 1600 1 3 RGH316033E RGH316032E RGH316035E RGH316036E 2000 3 RGH320033E RGH320032E RGH320035E RGH320036E 2500 3 RGH325033E RGH325032E RGH325035E RGH325036E 2 2 100 kA at Both 415 Vac and 480 Vac 2 Type RGH with Digitrip 310+ High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Maximum 690 Vac, 70 kA Icu at 415 Vac Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310 Electronic Trip Unit with Adjustable Rating Plugs—Catalog Number 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 1 Short Time Range Short Time Delay Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay Number of Poles L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Rating Plug) S– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I2t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response) I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat Response) LS 2–8 x In — — — LSI 2–8 x In I–300 ms — — LSG 3 2–8 x In — 200–1200A I–500 ms LSIG 3 2–8 x In I–300 ms 200–1200A I–500 ms 44 RGH416033E RGH416032E — — 2000 4 4 RGH420033E RGH420032E — — 2500 44 RGH425033E RGH425032E — — 1600 1 Notes 1 For SCR application, use 2000 ampere frame. 2 Order terminals separately. Mounting hardware not included. 3 Ground fault equipped trip units available with remote indicating panel. Add “R” to catalog number, for example, “RGH316035RW.” 4 Unprotected left pole neutral. Add “P” to catalog number for 100% protected left pole neutral, add “E” for 60% protected, for example, “RGH416033PW,” “RGH416033EW.” RG MCCBs have English threading on line and load conductors. Use suffix “M” for metric threading. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-72 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 100 kA at Both 415 Vac and 480 Vac 2 Type RGC with Digitrip 310+ Very High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Maximum 690 Vac, 100 kA Icu at 415 Vac 2 Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310 Electronic Trip Unit with Adjustable Rating Plugs—Catalog Number 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 1 Short Time Range Short Time Delay Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay Number of Poles 2 L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Rating Plug) S– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I2t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response) I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat Response) LS 2–8 x In — — — LSI 2–8 x In I–300 ms — — LSG 3 2–8 x In — 200–1200A I–500 ms 2 2 LSIG 3 2–8 x In I–300 ms 200–1200A I–500 ms 1600 1 3 RGC316033E RGC316032E RGC316035E RGC316036E 2000 3 RGC320033E RGC320032E RGC320035E RGC320036E 2500 3 RGC325033E RGC325032E RGC325035E RGC325036E 2 2 2 2 2 Type RGC with Digitrip 310+ Very High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Maximum 690 Vac, 100 kA Icu at 415 Vac, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310 Electronic Trip Unit with Adjustable Rating Plugs—Catalog Number 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 1 Short Time Range Short Time Delay Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay Number of Poles 2 L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Rating Plug) S– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I2t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response) I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat Response) 2 LS 2–8 x In — — — LSI 2–8 x In I–300 ms — — LSG 3 2–8 x In — 200–1200A I–500 ms LSIG 3 2–8 x In I–300 ms 200–1200A I–500 ms 1600 1 44 RGC416033E RGC416032E — — 2000 44 RGC420033E RGC420032E — — 2500 44 RGC425033E RGC425032E — — 2 2 2 2 2 2 Molded Case Switches 5 Ampere Rating Number of Poles Catalog Number 1600 3 RGK316WK 2000 3 RGK320WK 1600 4 RGK416WK 2000 4 RGK420WK 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 For SCR application, use 2000 ampere frame. 2 Order terminals separately. Mounting hardware not included. 3 Ground fault equipped trip units available with remote indicating panel. Add “R” to catalog number, for example, “RGH316035RW.” 4 Unprotected left pole neutral. Add “P” to catalog number for 100% protected left pole neutral, add “E” for 60% protected, for example, “RGH416033PW,” “RGH416033EW.” 5 Molded case switch will trip above 17,500 amperes. 2 2 RG MCCBs have English threading on line and load conductors. Use suffix “M” for metric threading. 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-73 2.2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Type RG with Digitrip 610 and 910 Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 Electronic Trip Unit with Rating Plugs Order as Individual Component—Catalog Number 1 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Number of Poles Long Delay Pickup Long Delay Time Short Time Range Short Time Delay Instantaneous Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay Digitrip RMS Interchangeable Rating Plug (Order as Individual Component) L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S –Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G –Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG Fixed Rating Plug 0.5–1.0 x In 2–24 Seconds 2–6 x Ir — 2–6 x M1 and M2 — — 0.5–I.0n 2–24 Seconds 2–6 x Ir 100–500 ms — — — 0.5–1.0 x In 2–24 Seconds 2–6 x Ir 100–500 ms 2–6 x M1 and M2 — — 0.5–1.0 x In 2–24 Seconds 2–6 x Ir — 2–6 x M1 and M2 0.25–1.0 x In 2 100–500 ms 0.5–1.0 x In 2–24 Seconds 2–6 x Ir 100–500 ms — 0.25–1.0 x In 2 100–500 ms 0.5–1.0 x In 2–24 Seconds 2–6 x Ir 100–500 ms 2–6 x M1 and M2 0.25–1.0 x In 2 100–500 ms Ampere Rating Catalog Number RGH316T66WP44 800 RP6R16A080 1000 RP6R16A100 1200 RP6R16A120 1250 RP6R16A125 Type RGH with Digitrip 610 High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 70 kA Icu at 415 Vac 1600 3 RGH316T61WP44 RGH316T63WP44 RGH316T62WP44 RGH316T64WP44 RGH316T65WP44 2 2 2 Includes 1600A rating plug 2000 3 RGH320T61WP49 RGH320T63WP49 RGH320T62WP49 RGH320T64WP49 RGH320T65WP49 RGH320T66WP49 2 2 2 2 2 Includes 2000A rating plug 2500 3 RGH325T61WP53 RGH325T63WP53 RGH325T62WP53 RGH325T64WP53 RGH325T65WP53 RGH325T66WP53 1600 3 2 RGC316T61WP44 RGC316T63WP44 RGC316T62WP44 RGC316T64WP44 RGC316T65WP44 RGC316T66WP44 Includes 1600A rating plug 2000 3 RGC320T61WP49 RGC320T63WP49 RGC320T62WP49 RGC320T64WP49 RGC320T65WP49 RGC320T66WP49 2 2 2 2 2 2 RP6R16A160 1000 RP6R20A100 1200 RP6R20A120 1250 RP6R20A125 1600 RP6R20A160 2000 RP6R20A200 1600 RP6R25A160 2000 RP6R25A200 2500 RP6R25A250 800 RP6R16A080 1000 RP6R16A100 1200 RP6R16A120 1250 RP6R16A125 1600 RP6R16A160 1000 RP6R20A100 1200 RP6R20A120 1250 RP6R20A125 1600 RP6R20A160 Type RGC with Digitrip 610 Very High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 100 kA Icu at 415 Vac 2 2 1600 Includes 2000A rating plug 2500 3 RGC325T61WP53 RGC325T63WP53 RGC325T62WP53 RGC325T64WP53 Includes 2500A rating plug Notes 1 Order terminals separately. Mounting hardware not included. 2 Not to exceed 1200 ampere ground fault pickup. RG MCCBs have metric threading on line and load conductors. Use RD MCCBs if imperial threading is required. 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-74 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com RGC325T65WP53 RGC325T66WP53 2000 RP6R20A200 1600 RP6R25A160 2000 RP6R25A200 2500 RP6R25A250 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Type RG with Digitrip 610 and 910, continued 2 Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 Electronic Trip Unit with Rating Plugs Order as Individual Component—Catalog Number 1 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Number of Poles Long Delay Pickup Long Delay Time Short Time Range Short Time Delay Instantaneous Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S –Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G –Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) Digitrip RMS Interchangeable Rating Plug (Order as Individual Component) 2 Fixed Rating Plug 2 LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG 0.5–1.0 x In 2–24 Seconds 2–6 x Ir — 2–6 x M1 and M2 — — 0.5–I.0n 2–24 Seconds 2–6 x Ir 100–500 ms — — — 0.5–1.0 x In 2–24 Seconds 2–6 x Ir 100–500 ms 2–6 x M1 and M2 — — 0.5–1.0 x In 2–24 Seconds 2–6 x Ir — 2–6 x M1 and M2 0.25–1.0 x In 2 100–500 ms 0.5–1.0 x In 2–24 Seconds 2–6 x Ir 100–500 ms — 0.25–1.0 x In 2 100–500 ms 0.5–1.0 x In 2–24 Seconds 2–6 x Ir 100–500 ms 2–6 x M1 and M2 0.25–1.0 x In 2 100–500 ms Ampere Rating Catalog Number RGH316T96WP44 800 RP6R16A080 1000 RP6R16A100 1200 RP6R16A120 1250 RP6R16A125 1600 RP6R16A160 1000 RP6R20A100 1200 RP6R20A120 1250 RP6R20A125 1600 RP6R20A160 2000 RP6R20A200 1600 RP6R25A160 2000 RP6R25A200 2500 RP6R25A250 2 800 RP6R16A080 1000 RP6R16A100 2 1200 RP6R16A120 1250 RP6R16A125 1600 RP6R16A160 1000 RP6R20A100 1200 RP6R20A120 1250 RP6R20A125 1600 RP6R20A160 2000 RP6R20A200 1600 RP6R25A160 2000 RP6R25A200 2500 RP6R25A250 2 Type RGH with Digitrip 910 High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 70 kA Icu at 415 Vac 1600 3 RGH316T91WP44 RGH316T93WP44 RGH316T92WP44 RGH316T94WP44 RGH316T95WP44 Includes 1600A rating plug 2000 3 RGH320T91WP49 RGH320T93WP49 RGH320T92WP49 RGH320T94WP49 RGH320T95WP49 RGH320T96WP49 Includes 2000A rating plug 2500 3 RGH325T91WP53 RGH325T93WP53 RGH325T92WP53 RGH325T94WP53 RGH325T95WP53 RGH325T96WP53 Includes 2500A rating plug Type RGC with Digitrip 910 Very High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 100 kA Icu at 415 Vac 1600 3 RGC316T91WP44 RGC316T93WP44 RGC316T92WP44 RGC316T94WP44 RGC316T95WP44 RGC316T96WP44 Includes 1600A rating plug 2000 3 RGC320T91WP49 RGC320T93WP49 RGC320T92WP49 RGC320T94WP49 RGC320T95WP49 RGC320T96WP49 Includes 2000A rating plug 2500 3 2 LI RGC325T91WP53 RGC325T93WP53 RGC325T92WP53 RGC325T94WP53 Includes 2500 A rating plug RGC325T95WP53 RGC25T96WP53 Notes 1 Order terminals separately. Mounting hardware not included. 2 Not to exceed 1200 ampere ground fault pickup. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 RG MCCBs have metric threading on line and load conductors. Use RD MCCBs if imperial threading is required. 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-75 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2 Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information 2 Line and Load Terminals R-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/Al terminals as standard and copper only terminals as an option. Specify if factory installation is required. 2 2 Line and Load Terminals 2 Maximum Breaker Amperes 2 Wire Terminals 2 2 Terminal Body Material Wire Type 1600 Aluminum 1600 2000 Base Mounting Hardware Supplied by customer. Handle Extension Included with breaker. Additional handle extensions are available. Hardware AWG/kcmil Wire Range/ Number of Conductors Metric Wire Range mm2 Catalog Number Cu/Al Metric 500–1000 (4) 300–500 TA1600RDM 1 Copper Cu Metric 1–600 (4) 50–300 T1600RDM 1 Aluminum Cu/Al Metric 2–600 (6) 35–300 TA2000RDM 2 Rear Connectors 2 2000 Copper — Metric — — B2016RDM 1 2 2000 Copper — Metric — — B2016RDLM 1 2500 Copper — Metric — — B2500RDM 1 2 RG Rear Connector Exploded View 2 Conductor (Viewed from Rear of Circuit Breaker and Cut Away for Clarity) 2 Conductor (Viewed from Front of Circuit Breaker) Securing Hardware 2 Cu Only Terminal Catalog Number T1600RDM 3 (For 1600A Frame Only) 2 OR 2 2 Al/Cu Terminal Catalog Number TA1600RDM 3 (For 1600A Frame Only) 2 2 2 2 Rear Connector (Cu) B2016RDM B2016RDLM (For 100% Application) (For 1600A and 2000A Frames) B2500RDM for 2500A 2 TA2000RD Wire Terminal 2 2 2 Securing Hardware Note: Order one TA2000RDM kit per three poles. Catalog number includes bus connection, terminals and hardware for either line side or load side of three-pole breaker. Breaker Line/Load Conductors 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-76 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Handle Extension Description Single handle extension Catalog Number HEX6 Notes 1 Order one per pole—single terminals individually packed. 2 Order one TA2000RD kit per three poles. Catalog number includes bus connection, terminals and hardware for either line side or load side of three-pole breaker. 3 For use with 2500A Frame. Do not order separately unless for replacement purposes. Included in breaker carton when 2500A frame is ordered. RG MCCBs have metric threading on line and load conductors. Use RD MCCBs if imperial threading is required. 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Accessories 2 Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. 2 2 RG-Frame Accessories Description Reference Page Three-Pole Left 2 Four-Pole Center Right Left Center Right Neutral Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-104 ■ ■ Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-104 ■ ■ Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-104 ■ ■ Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T2-104 ■ ■ Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-104 ● ● Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T2-105 ● ● 2 2 2 2 External Accessories ● ● ● 2 ● 2 Base mounting hardware V4-T2-76 ● ● ● Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-102 ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ Key interlock kit V4-T2-102 ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ Electrical operator V4-T2-102 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Handle mechanisms V4-T2-110 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Handle extension V4-T2-76 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Digitrip 310 test kit V4-T2-102 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-100 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Marine/naval application, UL 489 Supplement SA and SB 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) 2 2 2 Legend ■ Applicable in indicated pole position ❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both ● Accessory available/modification available 2 Note 1 Contact Eaton. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-77 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2 Technical Data and Specifications 2 UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings 2 Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 2 RGH 3, 4 RGC 3, 4 2 2 2 1 Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) 240 277 480 600 125 — 65 50 200 — 100 65 IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1 Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles RGH 3, 4 Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 240 415 690 2 Icu 135 70 25 100 50 13 2 Ics RGC Icu 200 100 35 Ics 100 50 18 2 2 2 2 3, 4 Notes 1 Utilization Category A circuit breakers. See Page V4-T2-70 for trip unit specifications. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-78 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Dimensions and Weights 2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 RG-Frame Number of Poles Width Height Depth 3 15.50 (393.7) 16.00 (406.4) 9.75 (247.7) 4 20.00 (508.0) 16.00 (406.4) 9.75 (247.7) 2 2 Front View 3-Pole Front Cover Cutout 14.50 (368.3) 2 Side View CL Breaker 2 2.25 (57.2) 7.25 (184.2) 0.16 R (4.1) 2 8.25 (209.6) 7.75 (196.9) 5.10 (129.5) CL Handle 9.70 (246.4) 2 .44 R (11.2) 16.00 (406.4) Tee Connectors May Be Rotated 90 15.00 (381.0) 13.00 (330.2) 2 2 2 4 Holes 0.44 Dia. (11.2) 6.57 (166.9) 2 13.13 (333.5) 15.50 (393.7) 9.00 (228.6) 2 6.75 (171.5) Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg) 2 RG-Frame 2 Complete Breaker Breaker Type 2 Number of Poles Three-Pole Four-Pole 2 102 (46.3) 135 (61.2) 2 102 (46.3) 135 (61.2) 2 135 (61.2) 182 (82.6) 1600 Amperes RGH, RGC 2000 Amperes RGH, RGC 2500 Amperes RGH, RGC 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-79 2.2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Motor Circuit 480 Vac, Protectors Description 2 EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Product Selection Guide and Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Contents Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-80 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Page V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-45 V4-T2-61 V4-T2-70 V4-T2-81 V4-T2-84 V4-T2-87 V4-T2-91 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-99 V4-T2-106 V4-T2-108 V4-T2-109 V4-T2-110 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 Product Selection Guide and Ordering Information EG-Frame—480 Vac, 600Y/347 Vac Maximum 2 2 1 Continuous Amperes Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes 2 3 A 0.69 –0.91 9 B 1.1–1.3 15 C 1.6–1.7 21 D 2.0–2.2 27 E 2.3–2.5 30 7 15 30 MCP Trip Setting 3 MCP Catalog Number HMCPE003A0C F 2.6– 2.8 33 A 1.5–2.0 21 B 2.6–3.1 35 C 3.7–3.9 49 D 4.8–5.2 63 E 5.3–5.7 70 F 5.8–6.1 77 A 3.4–4.5 45 B 5.7–6.8 75 C 8.0–9.1 105 D 10.4–11.4 135 E 11.5–12.6 150 F 12.7–13.0 165 A 3.9–9.1 90 B 11.5–13.7 150 C 16.1–18.3 210 D 20.7–22.9 270 E 23.0–25.2 300 F 25.3–26.1 330 2 2 2 2 2 HMCPE007C0C 2 2 2 2 HMCPE015E0C 2 2 2 HMCPE030H1C 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 UL listed for use with Eaton Motor Starters. 2 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. 3 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-81 2.2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G EG-Frame—480 Vac, 600Y/347 Vac Maximum, continued 1 Continuous Amperes Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes 2 50 A 11.5–15.2 150 2 B 19.2–22.9 250 C 26.9–30.6 350 2 D 34.6–38.3 450 E 38.4–42.1 500 F 42.2–43.5 550 A 16.1–30.6 210 B 26.9–32.2 350 2 C 37.6–42.9 490 D 48.4–53.7 630 2 E 53.8–59.1 700 F 59.2–60.9 770 A 23.0–30.6 300 2 B 38.4–46.0 500 C 53.8–61.4 700 2 D 69.2–76.8 900 E 76.9–84.5 1000 F 84.6–87.0 1100 A 38.4–46.0 500 B 57.6–65.2 750 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 70 100 100 2 2 MCP Trip Setting 3 MCP Catalog Number HMCPE050K2C C 76.9–84.5 1000 D 4 1250 E 4 1375 F 4 1500 HMCPE070M2C HMCPE100R3C HMCPE100T3C 2 2 JG-Frame—600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum 1 2 Continuous Amperes 2 250 MCP Trip Range (Amperes) MCP Catalog Number 500–1000 HMCPJ250D5L 625–1250 HMCPJ250F5L 2 750–1500 HMCPJ250G5L 2 875–1750 HMCPJ250J5L 1000–2000 HMCPJ250K5L 1125–2250 HMCPJ250L5L 1250–2500 HMCPJ250W5L 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 UL listed for use with Eaton Motor Starters. 2 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. 3 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. 4 Settings above 10 x I are for special applications. Where the ampere rating of the disconnecting means cannot be n less than 115% of the motor full load ampere rating. 2 2 2 V4-T2-82 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 LG-Frame—600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum 1 Continuous Amperes MCP Trip Range (Amperes) MCP Catalog Number 600 1250–2500 HMCPL600L6G 1500–3000 HMCPL600N6G 1750–3500 HMCPL600R6G 2000–4000 HMCPL600X6G 2250–4500 HMCPL600Y6G 2500–5000 HMCPL600P6G 3000–6000 HMCPL600M6G 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 UL listed for use with Eaton Motor Starters. 2 800 and 1200 ampere, 600 Vac maximum motor circuit protectors are available as Series C HMCP product. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-83 2.2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Series G Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Description 2 Page EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) 2 Product Description 2 Contents ● Eliminates need for separate overload relay Application Description ● 2 2 ● 2 2 2 Can be used with contactor to eliminate need for overload relay and still create manual motor control Meets requirement for motor branch protection, including: ● Disconnecting means ● Branch circuit short circuit protection ● Overload protection Features and Benefits ● ● ● ● ● ● Phase unbalance protection Phase loss protection Hot trip/cold trip High load alarm Pre-detection trip relay option Class 10, 15, 20, 30 protection 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-84 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-45 V4-T2-61 V4-T2-70 V4-T2-80 V4-T2-85 V4-T2-86 V4-T2-87 V4-T2-91 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-99 V4-T2-106 V4-T2-108 V4-T2-109 V4-T2-110 Standards and Certifications ● ● ● ● IEC 60947-2 UL 489 100% rated UL 508 CSA C22.2 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Product Selection 2 JGMP Catalog Numbers 35 kAIC 65 kAIC 2 Continuous Amperes Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 50 JGMPS050G JGMPH050G 100 JGMPS100G JGMPH100G 2 160 JGMPS160G JGMPH160G 250 JGMPS250G JGMPH250G 2 2 2 JGMP FLA le Dial Setting Continuous Amperes A B C D E F G H 50 20 20 25 30 32 40 45 50 100 40 45 50 63 70 80 90 100 160 63 80 90 100 110 125 150 160 250 100 125 150 160 175 200 225 250 2 2 2 2 LGMP Catalog Numbers 2 50 kAIC 65 kAIC Continuous Amperes Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 250 LGMPS250G LGMPH250G 400 LGMPS400G LGMPH400G 2 600 LGMPS600G LGMPH600G 630 1 LGMPS630G LGMPH630G 2 2 2 LGMP FLA le Dial Setting Continuous Amperes A B C D E F G H 250 100 125 150 160 175 200 225 250 400 160 200 225 250 300 315 350 400 250 300 315 350 400 450 500 600 250 300 315 350 400 500 600 630 600 630 1 2 2 2 Notes 1 630 amperes is not a UL listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL or CSA for LG breaker. 2 For pre-trip alarm option, order Style Number 5721B31G02. For additional breaker solutions, see Page V4-T2-274. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-85 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2 Technical Data and Specifications 2 JGMPS and JGMPH Rating and Ampere Range 2 2 Maximum Rated Current—250A Breaker Type Breaker Capacity (kA rms) AC 50–60 Hz IEC 60947-2 220–240 Vac JGMPS JGMPH 100 I cu 85 I cs 85 100 40 70 2 380–415 Vac I cu 2 I cs 40 70 660–690 Vac I cu 12 14 I cs 6 7 2 NEMA UL 489 2 2 2 2 240 Vac 85 100 480 Vac 35 65 600 Vac 25 35 Number of poles 3 3 Ampere range 50–250 50 –250 LGMPS and LGMPH Rating and Ampere Range 2 2 Maximum Rated Current—630A 1 Breaker Type Breaker Capacity (kA rms) AC 50–60 Hz IEC 60947-2 LGMPS 220–240 Vac 2 2 380–415 Vac 2 660–690 Vac 2 I cu 85 100 I cs 85 100 I cu 50 70 I cs 50 53 I cu 20 25 I cs 10 13 240 Vac 85 100 480 Vac 50 65 600 Vac 25 35 Number of poles 3 3 Ampere range 250–630 1 250 –630 1 NEMA UL 489 2 2 LGMPH 2 Notes 1 630 amperes is not a UL listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL or CSA for LG breaker. 2 For pre-trip alarm option, order Style Number 5721B31G02. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-86 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 Contents 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Modules Description Clockwise from Left: JG, LG, EG MCCBs Shown with Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-45 V4-T2-61 V4-T2-70 V4-T2-80 V4-T2-84 V4-T2-88 V4-T2-89 V4-T2-91 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-99 V4-T2-106 V4-T2-108 V4-T2-109 V4-T2-110 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Product Description The module is completely selfcontained because the current sensor, relay and power supply are located inside the product. Current pickup settings are selectable from 0.03–10 amperes for all IEC-rated modules and E and J UL-listed module, and 0.03– 30 amperes for the L ULlisted modules. Time delays are also selectable from Instantaneous–1.0 seconds for 0.10 ampere settings and above. A current pickup setting of 0.03 amperes defaults to an Instantaneous time setting regardless of the time dial’s position. Two alarm contacts come as standard: a 50% pretrip and a 100% after trip, both based only on earth leakage current levels. 2 2 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module Eaton offers a three- and fourpole 30 mA ground fault (earth leakage) protection module for Series G E-, J- and L-Frame breakers. UL-listed modules are available for E, J and L molded case circuit breakers (MCCBs). The modules are bottom mounted for circuits up to 125A (EFrame) 160 and 250 amperes (J-Frame), or 400 and 630 amperes for the L-Frame. 2 2 UL-Rated LG-Frame Earth Leakage Module Faceplate 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 IEC-Rated LG-Frame Earth Leakage Module Faceplate 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-87 2.2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Product Selection EG-Frame 2 2 2 EG-Frame Ground Fault Modules, UL-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 120–480 Vac, 50/60 Hz) 1 LG-Frame Ampere Rating Number of Poles Catalog Number Ampere Rating Number of Poles Catalog Number 125 3 ELEBN3125G 400 3 ELLBN3400W 125 4 ELEBN4125G 400 4 ELLBN4400W 600 3 ELLBN3600W 600 4 ELLBN4600W 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 JG-Frame EG-Frame Earth Leakage Modules, IEC-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 230–415 Vac, 50/60 Hz) LG-Frame Earth Leakage Modules, IEC-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 230–415 Vac, 50/60 Hz) Ampere Rating Number of Poles Catalog Number Ampere Rating Number of Poles Catalog Number 125 3 ELEBE3125G 400 3 ELLBE3400W 125 4 ELEBE4125G 400 4 ELLBE4400W 630 3 ELLBE3630W 630 4 ELLBE4630W JG-Frame Ground Fault Modules, UL-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 120–480 Vac, 50/60 Hz) 2 Ampere Rating Number of Poles Catalog Number 2 150 3 ELJBN3150W 150 4 ELJBN4150W 2 250 3 ELJBN3250W 250 4 ELJBN4250W 2 JG-Frame Earth Leakage Modules, IEC-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 230–415 Vac, 50/60 Hz) 2 2 Ampere Rating 2 2 2 Number of Poles Catalog Number 160 3 ELJBE3160W 160 4 ELJBE4160W 250 3 ELJBE3250W 250 4 ELJBE4250W Note 1 Shunt trip and undervoltage release cannot be used in an EG breaker connected to an earth leakage module. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-88 LG-Frame Ground Fault Modules, UL-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 120–480 Vac, 50/60 Hz) Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 Dimensions 2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 Assembled Breaker and Earth Leakage Module Frame Height Width Depth 2 Three-Pole 2 EG 10.25 (260.3) 3.00 (76.2) 2.98 (75.8) JG 11.25 (285.8) 4.13 (104.9) 3.57 (90.7) LG 15.38 (390.7) 5.48 (139.2) 4.06 (103.1) 2 EG 10.25 (260.3) 4.00 (101.6) 2.98 (75.8) 2 JG 11.25 (285.8) 5.50 (139.7) 3.57 (90.7) LG 15.38 (390.7) 7.23 (183.6) 4.06 (103.1) Four-Pole 2 2 EG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module 10.26 (260.6) 2 4.75 (120.6) 2 0.55 (14.0) 1.49 1.00 (37.8) (25.4) 0.50 (12.7) 8.59 (218.2) 4.78 (121.4) 2 3.98 (101.1) 2 3-Pole 2.98 (75.7) 1.00 (25.4) 1.50 0.50 (38.1) (12.7) 2 2 2.00 (50.8) 2 2 0.70 (17.8) 2 0.90 (22.9) 0.35 (8.9) 0.09 (2.29) 2 2 3.01 (76.5) 2.75 (69.9) 0.78 (19.8) 2 3.17 (80.5) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-89 2.2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G JG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module 4-Pole 5.50 (139.7) 3-Pole 4.13 (104.9) 0.69 2.06 1.38 (17.5) (52.3) (35.1) 2 2 2 5.50 (139.7) 1.25 (31.8) 3.57 (90.7) 2 2 3.92 (99.6) 3.92 (99.6) 5.50 (139.7) 2 0.63 (16.0) 1.88 (47.8) R 0.19 (4.8) 11.25 (285.8) 6.97 (177.0) 4.93 (125.2) 0.28 (7.1) 7.00 (177.8) 2 2.05 (52.1) 11.25 (285.8) 1.06 (26.9) 0.50 (139.7) 2 2 2 3.37 (85.6) 4.25 (108.0) RESET TEST 2 2 3.31 (84.1) 3.69 (93.7) 2 3.81 (96.8) 4.78 (121.4) 2 2 2.05 (52.1) 4.09 (103.9) 3.57 (90.7) LG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module 4.31 (109.5) 5.16 (131.1) 3.44 (87.4) 1.72 (43.7) 2 2 2 2 2 4.06 (103.1) 3.98 (101.1) 0.86 (21.8) 5.58 (141.7) 5.58 (141.7) 4.73 (120.1) 3.44 (87.4) 1.72 (43.7) 4.73 (120.1) 2 2 8.44 (214.4) 8.44 (214.4) 10.13 (257.3) 2 2 2 15.38 (390.7) 13.69 (347.7) 2 2 3-Pole 5.48 (139.2) 2 4-Pole 7.22 (183.4) 2 V4-T2-90 13.68 (347.5) 15.38 (390.7) 4-Pole 2.75 (69.9) 3-Pole 2.74 (69.6) 3.97 (100.8) 4.30 (109.2) 4.55 (115.6) 5.43 (137.9) Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 4-Pole 7.22 (183.4) 3-Pole 5.48 (139.2) 4-Pole 2.75 (69.9) 3-Pole 2.74 (69.6) Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 Contents Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Modules Description Page EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-45 V4-T2-61 V4-T2-70 V4-T2-80 V4-T2-84 V4-T2-87 V4-T2-92 V4-T2-93 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-99 V4-T2-106 V4-T2-108 V4-T2-109 V4-T2-110 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Product Overview Product Description Features and Benefits Standards and Certifications Power demand continues to grow in new and existing facilities. To meet increased demand, larger utility supplies, spot networks and large facility transformers are installed. The increased capacity of the electrical source results in increased fault currents in excess of 100 kA short-circuit protection. Eaton manufactures non-fused current limiting modules with interrupting capacities up to 200 kA at 600 Vac or 70 kA at 690 Vac. Unlike fused current limiters with a one-time use, a current limiter module provides an automatic reset of the module after a shortcircuit event. Resetting the molded-case circuit breaker is the only action required to restore critical power to the system; there is no time wasted with sourcing the correct replacement fuses or module to bring system back online. The current limiting breaker modules use a unique contact design to enhance the system protection similar to that of the circuit breaker. When high short-circuit current is flowing through the contacts of these modules, the design results in very high interrupting capacities and improved current limiting characteristics. Superior system protection: ● ● ● ● Application Description High-performance breakers are most commonly applied when very high fault levels are available and with applications where the current limiting capability is used upstream of the final load to limit current. Typical loads include lighting, power distribution, and motor control applications. ● ● ● Auto reset improves system uptime and eliminates the need for finding replacement parts No fuses to replace, reducing the overall cost of ownership and the waste created by fuses Overloads, by using inverse time current tripping characteristics of the molded-case circuit breaker Low-level short circuits, by using instantaneous and/or short-time delay tripping characteristics of the molded-case circuit breaker High-level short circuits, by using ultra-high-speed, blow-apart contacts of the current limiting module in series with the circuit breaker contacts Let-through currents, by improved opening speed of the contacts, the resultant rapid rise of arc voltage introduces impedance into the system ● ● IEC 60947-2 UL 489 CSA C22.2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-91 2.2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Product Selection 2 Series G High Performance Family Offering 2 Type 2 2 2 2 Amperes 480 Vac (UL) 600 Vac (UL) 415 Vac (IEC) 690 Vac (IEC) Icu Ics Icu Ics — EGC 3P thermal-magnetic Breaker only 15–125 100 35 1 100 100 — With limiter 15–100 150 100 1 150 150 — — JG 3P thermal-magnetic Breaker only 70–250 200 50 200 200 18 14 18 With limiter 70–225 200 200 200 150 70 Breaker only 20–250 200 50 200 200 18 14 With limiter 100–250 200 200 200 150 70 18 LG 3P thermal-magnetic Breaker only 250–600 200 65 200 200 35 18 LG3P electronic 100–600 200 65 200 200 35 18 JG 3P electronic 2 Product Breaker only 2 2 EG-Frame EG IC Rating—150 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 2 UL Listed (NEMA/IEC Rated) Base Molded Case Circuit Breaker Breaker with Line Side Mounted Current Limiter Breaker with Load Side Mounted Current Limiter Line and Load Terminations Included 2 Interphase Barrier Included for Limiter 2 EGC3015FFG EGC3015FFGQ01 EGC3015FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK 2 EGC3016FFG EGC3016FFGQ01 EGC3016FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK EGC3020FFG EGC3020FFGQ01 EGC3020FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK 2 EGC3025FFG EGC3025FFGQ01 EGC3025FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK EGC3030FFG EGC3030FFGQ01 EGC3030FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK 2 EGC3032FFG EGC3032FFGQ01 EGC3032FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK 2 EGC3035FFG EGC3035FFGQ01 EGC3035FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK EGC3040FFG EGC3040FFGQ01 EGC3040FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK 2 EGC3045FFG EGC3045FFGQ01 EGC3045FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK EGC3050FFG EGC3050FFGQ01 EGC3050FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK 2 EGC3060FFG EGC3060FFGQ01 EGC3060FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK 2 EGC3063FFG EGC3063FFGQ01 EGC3063FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK EGC3070FFG EGC3070FFGQ01 EGC3070FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK 2 EGC3080FFG EGC3080FFGQ01 EGC3080FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK EGC3090FFG EGC3090FFGQ01 EGC3090FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK 2 EGC3100FFG EGC3100FFGQ01 EGC3100FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK 2 Notes 1 600Y/347V. 2 Two interphase barriers included on line end mounted limiter; (2) line end of limiter. Four interphase barriers included on load end mounted limiter; (2) line end of breaker (2) load end of limiter. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-92 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 Dimensions and Weights 2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 Assembled Breaker and Current Limiting Module Frame Height Width Depth Weight in lbs (kg) EG 9.66 (245.7) 3.00 (76.2) 2.98 (75.8) 2.91 (1.32) HMCP 9.66 (245.7) 3.00 (76.2) 2.98 (75.8) 4.18 (1.90) 2 2 2 EG-Frame With Current Limiter Module 0.56 (14.2) 1.00 (25.4) 3.00 (76.2) 2 9.66 (245.4) 4.17 (105.9) 2 3.61 (91.7) 2 2 2 0.50 1.00 (12.7) (25.4) 2 1.00 (25.4) 2 2 3.20 (81.3) 2 4.17 (105.9) 2 2 2 2.75 0.09 (69.9) (2.3) 2 0.78 (19.8) 2 2 0.41 (10.4) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-93 2.2 2 JG Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G JG IC Rating—200 kAIC at 600 Vac and 70 kAIC at 690 Vac UL Listed, IEC Rated Breaker With Load Side Mounted Current Limiter 2 IEC Rated Breaker With Line Side Mounted Current Limiter 1 IEC Rated Breaker With Load Side Mounted Current Limiter 2 2 Ampere Rating Magnetic Range UL Listed, IEC Rated Breaker With Line Side Mounted Current Limiter 1 2 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 70 350–700 JGH3070FAGQ01 JGH3070FAGQ02 — 2 90 450–900 JGH3090FAGQ01 JGH3090FAGQ02 — — 2 100 500–1000 JGH3100FAGQ01 JGH3100FAGQ02 JGH3100AAGQ01 JGH3100AAGQ02 125 625–1250 JGH3125FAGQ01 JGH3125FAGQ02 JGH3125AAGQ01 JGH3125AAGQ02 2 150 750–1550 JGH3150FAGQ01 JGH3150FAGQ02 — — 160 800–1600 — — JGH3160AAGQ01 JGH3160AAGQ02 2 175 875–1750 JGH3175FAGQ01 JGH3175FAGQ02 — — 2 200 1000–2000 JGH3200FAGQ01 JGH3200FAGQ02 JGH3200AAGQ01 JGH3200AAGQ02 225 1125–2250 JGH3225FAGQ01 JGH3225FAGQ02 — — 250 — JGH325033GQ02 — — JGH325032GQ02 — — JGH325035GQ02 — — JGH325036GQ02 — — — Electronic Trip LS 2 2 JGH325033GQ01 Electronic Trip LSI 250 2 — JGH325032GQ01 Electronic Trip LSG 250 2 — JGH325035GQ01 Electronic Trip LSIG 2 250 2 Series G HMCP 2 2 2 2 2 — JGH325036GQ01 Ampere Rating Motor Circuit Protector with Line Side Mounted Current Limiter Breaker with Load Side Mounted Current Limiter 250 HMCPJ250D5LQ01 HMCPJ250D5LQ02 250 HMCPJ250F5LQ01 HMCPJ250F5LQ02 250 HMCPJ250G5LQ01 HMCPJ250G5LQ02 250 HMCPJ250J5LQ01 HMCPJ250J5LQ02 250 HMCPJ250K5LQ01 HMCPJ250K5LQ02 250 HMCPJ250L5LQ01 HMCPJ250L5LQ02 Line and Load Terminals 2 Maximum Breaker Amperes 2 Terminal Body Material Wire Type Metric Wire Range mm2 AWG Wire Range/ Number of Conductors Catalog Number Cu/Al 10–185 #8–350 (1) TA250FJ 3 Standard Pressure Type Terminals 250 2 Aluminum Notes 1 Two interphase barriers provided, mounted on line end of limiter, catalog number FJIPBK. 2 Four interphase barriers provided, (2) line end of breaker, (2) load end of limiter. 3 Line and load terminals included with products listed above. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-94 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 Dimensions and Weights 2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 Assembled Breaker and Current Limiting Module Frame Height Width Depth Weight in lbs (kg) JG + limiter 13.06 (331.7) 4.13 (104.9) 3.44 (87.4) 9.87 (4.48) HMCP 13.06 (331.7) 4.13 (104.9) 3.44 (87.4) 9.87 (4.48) 2 2 2 JG-Frame With Current Limiter Module 2 2 4.13 (104.9) 4.12 (104.6) 2 2 2 2 2 13.06 (331.7) 2 2 4.41 (112.0) 2 3.44 (87.4) 3.34 (84.8) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-95 2.2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination Contents Description 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination 2 Product Description Features, Benefits and Functions Eaton’s Electrical Sector introduces new high-magnetic withstand molded case circuit breakers, specifically designed for critical operations and selective coordination requirements. The highmagnetic withstand LHH and NHH frames continue the legacy of circuit breaker innovation for which Eaton is recognized throughout the world. The LHH and NHH breakers are equipped with 125 to 400 ampere trip units with high-magnetic capability. This design enables the breakers to withstand up to 90 times rated current before opening under shortcircuit conditions. Eaton’s new LHH and NHH molded case circuit breakers are furnished with a higher level of magnetic pickup or electronic instantaneous settings as indicated in table on Page V4-T2-98. These higher levels of magnetic pickup and electronic instantaneous values in turn allow the system designer to obtain selective coordination at fault current levels up to these higher ratings. Greater values of selective coordination are available based on manufacturer tested combinations using the LHH and NHH as line-side breakers and standard breakers as load-side devices. Refer to IA01200002E to determine the maximum fault values that selective coordination achieves. When the line-side and load-side molded case circuit breaker trip ratings are chosen to coordinate in the overload range, they also can be selectively coordinated in the fault range up to the values listed in the table on Page V4-T2-98 or IA01200002E. For overcurrents protected by circuit breakers on the load-side of the LHH or NHH, only the effected load-side circuit breaker will open, while the line-side LHH and/ 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Page EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The LHH and NHH circuit breakers incorporate a higher level of instantaneous pickup, thus allowing for higher current levels of selective coordination. Standard molded case circuit breakers typically are furnished with a magnetic pickup or electronic instantaneous adjustment or instantaneous override set at 10 times (10x) the continuous trip rating. 2 2 2 V4-T2-96 or NHH circuit breakers remain closed, thus providing continuity of power to the other critical loads supplied by the LHH or NHH circuit breakers. Benefits of Using the LHH and NHH Molded Case Circuit Breakers Customer expectations and codes are driving product development to protect customers’ critical operations. NEC® 2005 and 2008 requires circuits with elevators, emergency systems, legally required standby systems, health care essential systems and critical operation power systems to be selectively coordinated. Simply stated, only the closest protective device directly protecting the circuit having an overcurrent (overload or fault) condition should open. Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-45 V4-T2-61 V4-T2-70 V4-T2-80 V4-T2-84 V4-T2-87 V4-T2-91 V4-T2-97 V4-T2-98 V4-T2-98 V4-T2-99 V4-T2-106 V4-T2-108 V4-T2-109 V4-T2-110 All other overcurrent protective devices within these systems shall remain closed. Similarly, backup power system designs of a critical nature that are not code mandated may also require overcurrent protective devices to be selectively coordinated as much as practicable to provide a higher level of uptime. Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 Product Selection Proven Technology and Performance The LHH is based on the Series G L-Frame circuit breaker, sharing the same small footprint and field-fit accessories as the L-Frame breaker. The NHH is based on the Series G N-Frame circuit breaker and shares the same footprint and accessories as the N-Frame breaker. NHH accessories must be factory installed. The LHH incorporates a thermal-magnetic trip unit with fixed thermal and fixed magnetic settings. The NHH has an OPTIM™ electronic trip unit with LSI adjustment capabilities. The instantaneous setting is adjustable from 1000–4000A or may be turned off to default to the frame override of 14,000A. A hand-held OPTIMizer must be used with the NHH to adjust short-time delay and instantaneous, however, the long delay pickup is fixed and cannot be adjusted. LHH 2 2 LHH and NHH Catalog Numbers Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit LSI Electronic Trip Unit 2 2 Ampere Rating LHH Frame NHH Frame 125 LHH3125FFG — 150 LHH3150FFG NHH3150T52X15 175 LHH3175FFG NHH3175T52X15 200 LHH3200FFG NHH3200T52X15 225 LHH3225FFG NHH3225T52X15 250 LHH3250FFG NHH3250T52X15 300 LHH3300FFG NHH3300T52X15 350 LHH3350FFG NHH3350T52X15 400 LHH3400FFG — 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 The LHH and NHH breakers are available in Eaton’s panelboards and switchboards. 2 2 Standards and Certifications ● ● 2 UL CSA 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-97 2.2 2 2 2 ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 ● 2 Series G Technical Data and Specifications 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers ● ● ● ● Dimensions Three-pole 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 125–400 ampere LHH 150–350 ampere NHH Trip units: LHH—thermal-magnetic NHH—LSI electronic trip unit No rating plugs required Factory-sealed breakers LHH uses same internal and external accessories as standard Series G L-Frame circuit breaker NHH uses same internal and external accessories as standard Series G N-Frame circuit breaker 2 LHH and NHH Electrical Characteristics 2 Short-Circuit Current Ratings (kA rms) AC 50–60 Hz 2 2 2 LHH NHH Max. rated current (amperes) 400 350 100 2 65 2 600 Vac 35 35 250 Vac 42 — 220 Vac 100 100 415 Vac 70 70 690 Vac 25 25 2 2 LHH 10.13 (257.3) 5.48 (139.2) 4.09 (103.9) 12.36 (5.6) NHH 16.00 (406.4) 8.25 (209.5) 5.50 (139.7) 46.80 (21.2) 2.43 (61.7) CL 2.69 (68.3) 5.58 (141.7) 5.48 (139.2) 5.38 (136.7) Front Cover Cutout 3.44 (87.4) CL R 0.25 Breaker (6.4) 1.91 (48.5) 1.50 (38.1) IEC 60947-2 125/250 Vdc 22 — Number of poles 3 3 Ampere range 125–400A 150–350A 6.38 (162.1) Continuous Current Ratings Continuous Current Multiplier Instantaneous Trip Point Continuous Current Multiplier Short Delay Pickup 125A 2500A 20x — — — 2 150A 2500A 16x 14,000A 93x 225–1200A 175A 4000A 22x 14,000A 80x 260–1400A 2 200A 4000A 20x 14,000A 70x 300–1600A 2 225A 6000A 26x 14,000A 62x 338–1800A 250A 6000A 24x 14,000A 56x 375–2000A 2 300A 6000A 20x 14,000A 47x 450–2400A 350A 6000A 17x 14,000A 40x 525–2800A 400A 6000A 15x — — — 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-98 4.06 (103.1) Breaker 3.16 (80.3) 10.13 (257.3) 1.92 (48.8) Magnetic Trip Point 2 Weight in Lbs (kg) R 0.25 (6.4) Continuous Current Rating (Ir) 2 Depth Four-Pole N-Frame 65 2 Width L-Frame NEMA UL 489 100 2 Height Description Breaker Type Description 480 Vac 2 Dimensions 2.00 (50.8) 240 Vac 2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 3.68 (93.5) 3.19 (81.0) Front View Three-Pole Side View 9.25 (235.0) 16.00 (406.4) 8.25 (209.6) 5.50 (139.7) 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Contents Description Page EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories and Test Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-45 V4-T2-61 V4-T2-70 V4-T2-80 V4-T2-84 V4-T2-87 V4-T2-91 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-101 V4-T2-102 V4-T2-104 V4-T2-106 V4-T2-108 V4-T2-109 V4-T2-110 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Special Features and Accessories Eaton’s molded case circuit breakers are designed to provide circuit protection for low voltage distribution systems. They are described by NEMA as, “... a device for closing and interrupting a circuit between separable contacts under both normal and abnormal conditions,” and furthermore as, “... a breaker assembled as an integral unit in a supporting and enclosing housing of insulating material.” The National Electrical Code (NEC) describes them as, “A device designed to open and close a circuit by nonautomatic means, and to open the circuit automatically on a predetermined overload of current, without injury to itself when properly applied within its rating.” So designed, Eaton circuit breakers protect conductors against overloads and conductors and connected apparatus, such as motors and motor starters, against short circuits. In low voltage distribution systems, there are many varied applications of molded case circuit breakers. Eaton offers the most comprehensive family of molded case circuit breakers in the industry. This section of circuit breakers includes: ● ● ● ● ● ● Thermal-magnetic trip breakers Electronic rms trip breakers Molded case switches Motor circuit protectors Current limiting breakers Special application breakers Modified Breakers Eaton breakers can be ordered with internal accessories installed. These modified breakers will be subject to an addition charge. Special Calibration Special non-UL listed calibrations are available for certain ambient temperatures other than 40°C and for frequencies other than 50/60 Hz or DC. Reduced interrupting ratings will apply for 400 Hz applications. ● Calibrations and Treatment Frame 2 Description EG JG LG NG RG Special calibration ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 2 Moisturefungus treatment ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 2 2 2 Add suffix H01 to breaker catalog number for 400 Hz rating 2 50ºC Calibration 2 Note: Breakers equipped with electronic trip units can operate reliably in ambient temperatures of 50°C. Add suffix “V3” to NG MCCBs to remove standard 40°C labeling. 2 2 2 Add suffix “V” to catalog number for complete thermal magnetic breaker when ordering listed ampere ratings for breakers to be used in 50ºC ambients. 50ºC ambient MCCBs are not UL listed. 2 2 2 Contact Eaton for availability. 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-99 2.2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Series G Standards and Certifications Moisture-Fungus Treatment All Eaton circuit breaker cases are molded from glasspolyester, which does not support the growth of fungus. Any parts that are susceptible to the growth of fungus will require special treatment. Order by description. ● Add suffix J01 to breaker catalog number Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers The circuit breakers may be ordered with freeze testing. This option uses special lubrication and mechanical operation is verified at –40°C. ● 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Add suffix F01 to catalog number –57°F, F02 –30°F Marine Applications E- to R-Framed circuit breakers can be supplied to meet the following marine specifications: ● U.S. Coast Guard CFR 46; ABS—American Bureau of Shipping; IEEE 45; DNV; and Lloyds These specifications generally require molded case circuit breakers to be supplied with 50°C ambient, and plug-in adapter kits. When plug-in adapter kits are used, no terminals need be supplied (switchboard applications). Circuit breakers can also be supplied to meet UL 489 Supplement SA (Marine use) and UL 489 Supplement SB (Naval Use). UL 489 Supplement SA applies to vessels over 65 feet (19.8m) in length. Molded case circuit breakers are designed to conform with the following standards: Requirements include 40°C ambient calibration, special labeling, and no use of aluminum conductors or terminals. (No 50°C.) ● ● Add suffix H08 ● Or you can choose to add 50ºC ambient but then there is no “UL” mark. ● Add suffix VH08 UL 489 Supplement SB requires partial 50°C ambient calibration, vibration testing, special nameplating and no use of aluminum conductors or terminals. Eaton chooses to always fully calibrate to 50°C ambient. (“Naval” labeled per UL but no “UL” mark due to 50°C label.) ● ● ● ● Add suffix VH09 ● Certified Test Reports Eaton breakers can be ordered with certified test reports at the time of order entry. Test report documents the thermal and magnetic or electronic tripping characteristics of the individual breaker. Breaker and test report must be ordered together. Add suffix 12 to breaker catalog number and enter separate line item on order for certified test report. ● ● ● ● 2 2 ● 2 2 2 Underwriters Laboratories Inc., Standard UL 489, molded case circuit breakers and circuit breaker enclosures National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standards Publication No. AB1-1993, molded case circuit breakers Australian Standard AS 2184, molded case circuit breakers British Standards Institution Standard BS 4752: Part 1, switchgear and control gear Part 1: circuit breakers Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Standard C22.2 No. 5, service entrance and branch circuit breakers International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC 60947-2, circuit breakers Japanese T-Mark Standard molded case circuit breakers South African Bureau of Standards, Standard SABS 156, Standard Specification for molded case circuit breakers Swiss Electro-Technical Association Standard SEV 157-1, safety regulations for circuit breakers Union Technique de l’Electricite Standard NF C 63-120, low voltage switchgear and control gear circuit breaker requirements Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker (Association of German Electrical Engineers) Standard VDE 0660, low voltage switchgear and control gear, circuit breakers 2 2 2 V4-T2-100 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Conformance with these standards satisfies most local and international codes, assuming user acceptability and simplified application. Molded case circuit breakers equal or exceed Federal Specification Classification W-C-375b requirements for the particular class associated with the circuit breaker frame being considered. Open breakers do not have service entrance ratings. Service entrance rating is part of the enclosure. Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 Internal Accessories Alarm Lockout The alarm switches operate when the circuit breaker is tripped by a short circuit or overcurrent, but also when it is tripped by a shunt trip or undervoltage release. Auxiliary Switches Auxiliary switches are used for signaling and control purposes. The various functions of the auxiliary switches (changeover) are shown on Page V4-T2-103. 2 Shunt Trips The shunt trip is used for remote tripping. The coil of the shunt trip is rated only for short-time operation. It is not permissible with the circuit breaker open to apply a continuous opening command to the shunt trip in order to prevent the breaker from closing. This means that interlocking circuits with continuous commands may not be set up with shunt trips. Undervoltage Releases The circuit breaker cannot be closed until the undervoltage release is energized. If the release is not energized, the circuit breaker can only perform an idle switching operation. Frequent idle switching actions should be avoided as they shorten the endurance of the circuit breaker. Cause of Trip Display/Remote Mount Cause of Trip Display The Cause of Trip Display can be field-installed on any Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit. The device provides breaker information through an LCD screen, such as cause of trip, phrase current, ground current and low loads. The display is ideal for troubleshooting common trips such as ground fault, long delay, and instantaneous/short delay. The DIGIVIEW version will provide a local display at the breaker without additional wiring by connecting directly onto the trip unit. The DIGIVIEWR06 version has a 6 foot cable that allows users to mount the display on the outside of an enclosure door and connect to the trip unit that is contained inside the enclosure. Cause of Trip LED Module The Cause of Trip LED Module can be field-installed on any Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit. The device provides a cause of trip indication via LED. The Cause of Trip LED Module connects directly onto the trip unit. When the breaker trips, the module indicates the cause of trip (long delay, short delay, instantaneous and ground) via LED indication. The module is reset after the breaker is reset. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Cause of Trip LED Module 2 Catalog Number 2 TRIP-LED 2 2 2 2 Cause of Trip Display/ Remote Mount Cause of Trip Display 2 Catalog Number 2 DIGIVIEW 2 DIGIVIEWR06 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-101 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2 External Accessories and Test Kit 2 External Accessories 2 Description Fit Type EG JG LG NG RG 2 Non-padlockable handle block Field EFHB — — LKD4 — Padlockable handle block Field EFPHB — — — — 2 Padlockable handle block off-only Field EFPHBOFF FJPHBOFF LBHPOFF — — 2 Padlockable handle lock hasp Field EFPLK FJPHL LPHL PLK5 HLK6 Padlockable handle lock hasp off-only Field EFPHLOFF FJPHLOFF LPHLOFF PLK55OFF HLK6OFF Kirk key interlock kit 12 Field — KYKJG KYKLG KYK4 KYK6 2 Castell key interlock kit 23 Field — CTKJG CTKLG CTK4 CTK6 Slide bar interlock 4 Field EFSBI FJSBI LGSBI SBK5 — 2 Walking beam interlock 4 Three-pole EG3WBI JG3WBI LG3WBI WBL5 WBL6 Four-pole EG4WBI JG4WBI LG4WBI WBL5 — 120 Vac MOPEG240C MOPJG120C MOPLG120C EOP5T07 EOP6T08K 2 240 Vac MOPEG240C MOPJG240C MOPLG240C EOP5T11 EOP6T11K 24 Vdc MOPEG48D MOPJG24D MOPLG24D EOP5T21 — 2 48 Vdc MOPEG48D — — EOP5T22 EOP6T21K 125 Vdc MOPEG120C MOPJG120C MOPLG120C EOP5T26 — 220 Vdc — MOPJG240C MOPLG240C — — 2 2 Electrical operator 5 2 2 2 Plug-in adapters Rear connecting studs 6 250 Vdc — MOPJG240C MOPLG240C — — Three-pole PAD3E PAD3J PAD3L PAD53 — Four-pole PAD4E PAD4J PAD4L — — Field EFRCSDL FJRCSDL LRCS3WK (3P) — — EFRCSDS FJRCSDS LRCS4WK (4P) — — 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Frame EFRCSWL FJRCSWL — — — EFRCSWS FJRCSWS — — — Test Kit Frame Description Fit Type EG JG LG NG RG Electronic portable test kit 120V N/A MTST120V MTST120V STK2 STK2 230V N/A MTST230V MTST230V — — Notes 1 Provision only. 2 See Page V4-T2-324 for bolt projection dimensions. 3 Castell bolt mounting hole must be 10 mm. 4 Requires two breakers. 5 Contact Eaton for availability of operators for EG- and NG-Frames before December 2004. 6 D = Imperial threads UL, W = metric threads IEC, L = long studs, S = short studs. 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-102 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 Accessory Configurations for EG–RG Circuit Breakers 2 Internal Accessory Configurations 2 2 2 2 2 ¬ 2 ¬ ¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ 2 2 ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ 2 2 2 2 2 ¨ ≠ 2 ¬ = For N and R-Frame Circuit Breakers Only 2 Contact Making by the Auxiliary and Alarm Switches as a Function of the Switching Position of the Circuit Breaker 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-103 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2 Accessories 2 Field Fit Kit Catalog Numbers Alarm Lockout 2 2 2 Description Pole Location Make/Break 2 Make/2 Break 2 2 Description 2 1A, 1B 2 2A, 2B 2 3A, 3B 2 4A, 4B 2 NG RG 1 Left — A1L5LPK — Right ALM1M1BEPK 2 A1L5RPK A1L6RPK Left — A2L5LPK — Right ALM2M2BEPK 3 A2L5RPK A2L6RPK EG, JG and LG NG RG 1 — Pole Location Frame Left — A1X5PK Right AUX1A1BPK A1X5PK — Left — A2X5PK — Right AUX2A2BPK A2X5PK A2X6RPK Left — A3X5LPK — Right — A3X5RPK — Left — — — Right — — A4X6RPK EG, JG and LG NG RG 1 Auxiliary Switch/Alarm Lockout 2 2 Shunt Trip—Standard 2 ST a Frame Description Pole Location — Left — AA115LPK — Right AUXALRMEPK 4 AA115RPK — NG RG 1 2 2 EG, JG and LG Auxiliary Switch 2 2 Frame Shunt Trip—Standard Frame Description Pole Location 48–60 Vac Left SNT060CPK SNT5LP05K — Right — — SNT6P05K 2 10–240 Vac 2 380–600 Vac 2 EG, JG and LG 5 Left SNT120CPK SNT5LP11K — Right — — SNT6P11K Left SNT480CPK 6 — — Right — — — 220–250 Vdc or 380–440 Vac — SNT5LP14K SNT6P14K 480–600 Vac — SNT5LP18K SNT6P18K 2 12 Vdc Left SNT012CPK — — Right — — — 2 24 Vac/dc Left SNT060CPK SNT5LP03K — 2 Right — — SNT6P03K 48–60 Vdc 2 110–125 Vdc 2 Left SNT060CPK SNT5LP23K — Right — — SNT6P23K Left SNT125DPK SNT5LP26K — Right — — SNT6P26K Notes 1 All accessories mount in the RH cavity which will accept one each of shunt trip, UVR, auxiliary switch and alarm switch. 2 Part number for JG and LG is ALM1M1BJPK. 3 Part number for JG and LG is ALM2M2BJPK. 4 Part number for JG and LG is AUXALRMJPK. 5 LH cavity not available for EG frame with earth leakage module. 6 380–600 Vdc, 50/60 Hz. 2 2 2 V4-T2-104 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 Shunt Trip—Low Energy Description Pole Location — 2 Frame EG, JG and LG NG RG 1 Left — LST5LPK — Right — — LST6RPK 2 2 2 Undervoltage Release Mechanism Description Pole Location 110–127 Vac 2 Frame EG, JG and LG 3 NG RG 1 Left UVR120APK UVH5LP08K — Right — — UVH6RP08K 208–240 Vac Left UVR240APK UVH5LP11K — Right — — UVH6RP11K 24 Vdc Left UVR024DPK UVH5LP21K 2 — Right — — UVH6RP21K 2 24 Vac Left UVR024APK UVH5LP21K 2 — Right — — UVH6RP21K 2 Left UVR048DPK UVH5LP23K — 48–60 Vdc Right — — UVH6RP23K 48–60 Vac Left UVR048APK UVH5LP05K — Right — — UVH6RP05K 120 Vdc Left UVR125DPK UVH5LP26K — Right — — UVH6RP26K Left UVR250DPK UVH5LP28K — Right — — UVH6RP28K 220–250 Vdc 380–500 Vac 525–600 Vac 12 Vdc 12 Vac Left UVR480APK UVH5LP29K — Right — — UVH6RP29K Left UVR600APK — — Right — — — Left — UVH5LP20K — Right — — UVH6RP20K Left — UVH5LP02K — Right — — UVH6RP02K 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 All accessories mount in the RH cavity which will accept one each of shunt trip, UVR, auxiliary switch and alarm switch. 2 24 Vdc only use UVH5LP03K (NG) UVH6RP03K (RG) for 24 Vac. 3 LH cavity not available for EG frame with earth leakage module. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-105 2.2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Contents Series G Motor Operators Description 2 EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Motor Operators 2 Product Description 2 2 2 2 Eaton’s motor operator mechanism enables local and remote ON, OFF and reset switching of a circuit breaker. The motor operator is mounted on the circuit breaker cover within the dimensions of the circuit breaker. The robust motor operators offer various voltages to maximize customer flexibility. Standard load transfer switching can be accomplished through the use of two circuit breakers fitted with motor operators and a mechanical interlock. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-106 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Page V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-45 V4-T2-61 V4-T2-70 V4-T2-80 V4-T2-84 V4-T2-87 V4-T2-91 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-99 V4-T2-107 V4-T2-107 V4-T2-107 V4-T2-108 V4-T2-109 V4-T2-110 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Features, Benefits and Functions The motor operator provides special features for ease of customer use and status indication. ● ● ● The motor operator allows the circuit breaker to be opened, closed or reset remotely The motor operator contains a motor connected to a cam drive mechanism. The cam drives a slide mechanism to operate the circuit breaker handle Internal limit switches and relays are used to control motor operation to prevent overdriving the circuit breaker handle and motor overload conditions 2.2 Product Selection ● ● ● ● A key is provided to manually operate the circuit breaker A special pull-out locking mechanism provides a method for padlocking the circuit breaker handle in the OFF position The locking device will accept three padlock shackles with a maximum diameter of 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) each The cover provides visual status of the circuit breaker: ON, OFF or TRIPPED. A PUSH-TO-TRIP button allows the user to manually trip the breaker Motor Operators Frame Voltage Frequency Inrush Current Catalog Number Series G E-Frame 100–240 Vac 50/60 Hz 1A MOPEG240C 100–220 Vdc DC 1A MOPEG240C 24/48 Vdc DC 3A MOPEG48D Series C F-Frame Series G J-Frame Series G L-Frame Manual Operating Key 2 208–240 Vac 50/60 Hz 1A MOPFD240C 110–127 Vac 50/60 Hz 1A MOPFD120C 220–250 Vdc DC 1A MOPFD240C 110–125 Vdc DC 1A MOPFD120C 24 Vdc DC 3A MOPFD24D 208–240 Vac 50/60 Hz 1A MOPJG240C 110–127 Vac 50/60 Hz 1A MOPJG120C 220–250 Vdc DC 1A MOPJG240C 110–125 Vdc DC 1A MOPJG120C 24 Vdc DC 3A MOPJG24D 208–240 Vac 50/60 Hz 2A MOPLG240C 110–127 Vac 50/60 Hz 2A MOPLG120C 220–250 Vdc DC 2A MOPLG240C 110–125 Vdc DC 2A MOPLG120C 24 Vdc DC 6A MOPLG24D Turn the Key (clockwise only) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Circuit Breaker Status Indication Window 2 2 2 PUSH-TO-TRIP Button 2 2 2 Standards and Certifications 2 The motor operators are UL and CSA listed, and CE marked. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-107 2.2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Contents LG Breaker with Plug-In Block Description 2 EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Plug-In Blocks 2 Product Description 2 2 2 2 2 2 Plug-in adapters simplify installation and front removal of circuit breakers. Plug-ins are available for rear connection applications on three- and four-pole circuit breakers. Trip on drawout interlock kits are included. Stabs for EG, JG and LG plugins rotate 90° for flexible installation. Use terminal shields for IP30 protection. Product Selection Plug-In Blocks Breaker Frame Number of Poles Catalog Number EG-, JG- and LG-Frame Plug-In Blocks EG 3 PAD3E EG 4 PAD4E JG 3 PAD3J JG 4 PAD4J LG 3 PAD3L LG 4 PAD4L Trip-On Drawout Interlock Kit 1 2 2 2 EG 3, 4 PIILEG JG 3, 4 PIILJG LG 3, 4 PIILLG Terminal Shields IP30 2 EG 3 EFTS3K EG 4 EFTS4K 2 JG 3 FJTS3K JG 4 FJTS4K 2 LG 3 LTS3K 2 LG 4 LTS4K Position Switch 2 EG 3, 4 PADILE JG 3, 4 PADILJ 2 LG 3, 4 PADILL Note 1 Included with plug-in block. Trips the breaker when breaker is removed from plug-in block. 2 2 2 V4-T2-108 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Page V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-45 V4-T2-61 V4-T2-70 V4-T2-80 V4-T2-84 V4-T2-87 V4-T2-91 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-99 V4-T2-106 V4-T2-109 V4-T2-110 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 Contents Drawout Cassettes Description Page EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-45 V4-T2-61 V4-T2-70 V4-T2-80 V4-T2-84 V4-T2-87 V4-T2-91 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-99 V4-T2-106 V4-T2-108 V4-T2-110 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Drawout Cassette Product Description Features The drawout cassette is available for use with JG, LG and NG, three- and four-pole breakers. The cassettes consist of two separate components: the movable mechanism, which attaches to the breaker, and the stationary mechanism, which houses in the cassette. For the JG, LG and NG drawout cassettes, all necessary parts for installation are included in the one catalog number. Features of the drawout cassettes for the JG, LG and NG include: ● ● Trip on drawout—breaker will trip if it is in the ON position when withdrawn from the cassette Secondary terminal block— the drawout cassettes include a secondary terminal block for easier access when wiring low voltage accessories, including shunts and undervoltage releases The drawout mechanism has three primary positions: ● ● ● 2 Product Selection Connected—the breaker is fully connected to the primary stabs and secondary contacts Disconnected—both the primary stabs and the secondary contacts are disconnected Withdraw—the breaker can be removed from the cassette JG Drawout Cassette LG Drawout Cassette JG, LG and NG Drawout Cassettes 2 Breaker Frame Number of Poles Catalog Number 2 JG 3 JG3DOM 2 4 JG4DOM 2 3 LG3DOM 2 4 LG4DOM 3 NG3DOM 4 NG4DOM LG NG 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-109 2.2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Contents Handle Mechanisms Description 2 EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . . . Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . . 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Handle Mechanisms 2 Product Overview 2 2 2 2 2 Handle mechanisms are used to operate molded case circuit breakers, molded case switches and motor circuit protectors. They are available in three basic configurations— Flange Mounted, Throughthe-Door and Direct (CloseCoupled)—providing safe, dependable operation and ease of installation. Flange Mounted Flex Shaft™ ● Through-the-Door ● High performance rotary ● Universal rotary Handle mechanisms are used on enclosed circuit breakers, control panels and motor control centers in many different applications. Eaton has a handle mechanism for virtually any need. Direct (Close-Coupled) ● Universal direct 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-110 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Page V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-45 V4-T2-61 V4-T2-70 V4-T2-80 V4-T2-84 V4-T2-87 V4-T2-91 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-99 V4-T2-106 V4-T2-108 V4-T2-109 V4-T2-111 V4-T2-114 V4-T2-118 V4-T2-120 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 Contents Handle Mechanisms Description EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flex Shaft Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . . . . Universal Rotary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . Page V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-45 V4-T2-61 V4-T2-70 V4-T2-80 V4-T2-84 V4-T2-87 V4-T2-91 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-99 V4-T2-106 V4-T2-108 V4-T2-109 V4-T2-110 V4-T2-112 V4-T2-113 V4-T2-113 V4-T2-114 V4-T2-118 V4-T2-120 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Flex Shaft Product Description Flange-Mounted Handle Mechanisms Flange-mounted handle mechanisms mount on the flange of an enclosure door. The Flex Shaft is an extra heavy-duty mechanism that includes a flexible shaft in various lengths, 3 feet (0.9m) through 10 feet (3m) for use with various size enclosures. The Flex Shaft handle will accept up to three padlock shackles, each with a maximum diameter of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). It can be used with Type12 fabricated enclosures. An optional handle is available for Flex Shaft that is suitable for use with Type 4 environments. 2 Standards and Certifications Flex Shaft comes preset from the factory, requiring only minor field adjustments on installation, which takes about 10 minutes—a significant time savings compared to installation of other types of flange handle mechanisms. The Flex Shaft mechanism also takes up less interior enclosure space than competitive designs, and the handle fits standard flange cutouts. Flex Shaft handle can be remotely mounted from breaker, where an operator can use it by “funneling” the cable through conduit. Flex Shaft is UL listed under File E64983 and meets CSA requirements. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-111 2.2 2 2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Product Selection Note: Type 4X handle mechanisms are available. Add Suffix X to the complete Catalog Number. Flex Shaft Note: When selecting the length of shaft, ensure minimum bending radius of 4 inches (101.6 mm) is maintained to operate properly. Note: The standard method of shipment includes the mechanism preset at the factory; however, minor field adjustments may be required. Flex Shaft Flange-Mounted Handle Mechanisms 12 Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m) 2 2 (0.6) 3 (0.9) 4 (1.2) 5 (1.3) 6 (1.8) Breaker Frame Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number EG EHMFS02 EHMFS03 EHMFS04 EHMFS05 EHMFS06 2 JG N/A JHMFS03 JHMFS04 JHMFS05 JHMFS06 2 LG N/A — LHMFS04 — — NG N/A N/A F5S04C F5S05C F5S06C RG N/A N/A F6S04 F6S05 F6S06 2 2 2 Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m) 7 (2.1) 8 (2.4) 9 (2.7) 10 (3.1) 2 Breaker Frame Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 EG EHMFS07 EHMFS08 EHMFS09 EHMFS10 JG JHMFS07 JHMFS08 JHMFS09 JHMFS10 2 LG LHMFS07 — — LHMFS10 2 NG N/A N/A N/A F5S10C RG N/A N/A N/A N/A Notes 1 Three-pole only for EG-; three- and four-pole for JG- and LG-Frame. 2 EG-, JG- and LG-Frame can be left- or right-hand mounted. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-112 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 Accessories 2 Handle Auxiliary Switch—Early Break Design, 1A–1B Contact for Flex Shaft Type 12 Safety Door Hardware for Flex Shaft (E- through R-Frame) 1 2 Breaker Frame Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 2 EG AUX1EBFSEG C361KJ4 JG AUX1EBFSJG C361KJ6 2 LG AUX1EBFSLG C361KR 2 Auxiliary contact changes state prior to parting of breaker contacts to allow for shutdown of equipment. Contacts mounted on breaker mechanism customer supplied wiring. 2 2 UL Type—IP Crossover UL Type IP Type 1 IP20 3R IP55 12 IP54 4/4X IP66 2 2 2 2 Dimensions 2 Type 12 Safety Door Hardware for Flex Shaft (E- through R-Frame) 1 2 Catalog Number 2 Handle Length in Inches (mm) C361KJ4 4.00 (101.6) C361KJ6 6.00 (152.4) C361KR Roller latch 3 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Customer: Consult with box manufacturer for correct door hardware and any adapters required for assembly. 2 The 1/4-inch x 1/2-inch (6.35 x 12.7 mm) standard mill rectangular locking bar is not supplied with these kits. 3 Third roller latch for use with 4.00- or 6.00-inch (101.6 or 152.4 mm) handle when three-point latching is required. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-113 2.2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Description Handle Mechanisms Page EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-45 V4-T2-61 V4-T2-70 V4-T2-80 V4-T2-84 V4-T2-87 V4-T2-91 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-99 V4-T2-106 V4-T2-108 V4-T2-109 V4-T2-110 V4-T2-111 V4-T2-115 V4-T2-118 V4-T2-120 2 2 2 2 High Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms 2 Product Description 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 The high performance rotary handle mechanism uses a simple, yet robust design to make installation and operation easy. The external handle’s key functional components are all metallic, ensuring reliability. The metalon-metal defeater between the handle and shaft prevents contaminant buildup that could impede operation, while UV and chemical agent resistant materials protect the handle from heat and fading in direct sunlight, as well as chemicals that may be introduced in harsh environments. Features In addition to its robust design features, the handle mechanism has stand-off support that allows for easy operation with a gloved hand. With a shallow profile, the handle can easily be used in applications where an internal or double door is required. The high performance external handle can accept padlocks or multi-hasp locks. The door is interlocked when padlocked and cannot be bypassed. ● ● ● ● ● Type 1, 12, 3R, 4 and 4X ratings Black/Blue or Red/Yellow external handle colors Three shaft lengths: 6, 12 and 24 inches Conveniently packaged as kit containing handle, shaft and mechanism Replacement parts are available separately 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-114 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Standards and Certifications The mechanisms for EG, JG and LG breakers have an internal handle that can be operated independent of door position, and locked-out to meet NFPA® 79 and UL 508A disconnect requirements. Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 Product Selection 2 Handle Mechanisms for Series G Frames External Handle in the Vertical Position 2 Complete Kits 2 Rating Type EG-Frame 1 JG-Frame LG-Frame NG-Frame Color UL IP Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 Black/Blue 1/12/3R 20/54/55 EGHMVD06B JGHMVD06B LGHMVD06B NGHMVD08B EGHMVD12B JGHMVD12B LGHMVD12B — 2 EGHMVD24B JGHMVD24B LGHMVD24B — EGHMVD06R JGHMVD06R LGHMVD06R NGHMVD08R EGHMVD12R JGHMVD12R LGHMVD12R — EGHMVD24R JGHMVD24R LGHMVD24R — EGHMVD06BX JGHMVD06BX LGHMVD06BX NGHMVD08BX EGHMVD12BX JGHMVD12BX LGHMVD12BX — EGHMVD24BX JGHMVD24BX LGHMVD24BX — EGHMVD06RX JGHMVD06RX LGHMVD06RX NGHMVD08RX EGHMVD12RX JGHMVD12RX LGHMVD12RX — EGHMVD24RX JGHMVD24RX LGHMVD24RX — Red/Yellow 1/12/3R 20/54/55 External Handle with Padlocks Black/Blue Red/Yellow 4/4X 4/4X 65 65 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Internal Handle Mechanism 2 2 2 2 2 Note 1 Compatible with three-pole and four-pole EG breakers only. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-115 2.2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G EG-Frame Handle Mechanism Components 12 Rating Type Color UL IP Black/Blue 1/12/3R 20/54/55 Red/Yellow Black/Blue 1/12/3R 20/54/55 4/4X 65 2 2 Red/Yellow 4/4X 65 2 2 2 2 2 2 Color UL IP Black/Blue 1/12/3R 20/54/55 Red/Yellow Black/Blue Red/Yellow 2 2 2 Shaft Catalog Number Mechanism Catalog Number 6.00 (152.4) 68C6048G01 66A6010G95 1498D66G17 12.00 (304.8) 68C6048G01 66A6010G96 1498D66G17 24.00 (609.6) 68C6048G01 66A6010G97 3 1498D66G17 6.00 (152.4) 68C6048G02 66A6010G95 1498D66G17 12.00 (304.8) 68C6048G02 66A6010G96 1498D66G17 24.00 (609.6) 68C6048G02 66A6010G97 3 1498D66G17 6.00 (152.4) 68C6048G03 66A6010G95 1498D66G17 12.00 (304.8) 68C6048G03 66A6010G96 1498D66G17 24.00 (609.6) 68C6048G03 66A6010G97 3 1498D66G17 6.00 (152.4) 68C6048G04 66A6010G95 1498D66G17 12.00 (304.8) 68C6048G04 66A6010G96 1498D66G17 24.00 (609.6) 68C6048G04 66A6010G97 3 1498D66G17 Rating Type 1/12/3R 20/54/55 4/4X 65 2 2 External Handle Catalog Number JG-Frame Handle Mechanism Components 2 2 2 Shaft Length Inches (mm) 4/4X 65 Shaft Length Inches (mm) External Handle Catalog Number Shaft Catalog Number Mechanism Catalog Number 6.00 (152.4) 68C6048G01 66A6010G95 69D6020G17 12.00 (304.8) 68C6048G01 66A6010G96 69D6020G17 24.00 (609.6) 68C6048G01 66A6010G98 3 69D6020G17 6.00 (152.4) 68C6048G02 66A6010G95 69D6020G17 12.00 (304.8) 68C6048G02 66A6010G96 69D6020G17 24.00 (609.6) 68C6048G02 66A6010G98 3 69D6020G17 6.00 (152.4) 68C6048G03 66A6010G95 69D6020G17 12.00 (304.8) 68C6048G03 66A6010G96 69D6020G17 24.00 (609.6) 68C6048G03 66A6010G98 3 69D6020G17 6.00 (152.4) 68C6048G04 66A6010G95 69D6020G17 12.00 (304.8) 68C6048G04 66A6010G96 69D6020G17 24.00 (609.6) 68C6048G04 66A6010G98 3 69D6020G17 Notes 1 Compatible with three-pole and four-pole EG breakers only. 2 For replacement purposes. 3 24.00 inches (609.6 mm) includes support bracket. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-116 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 LG-Frame Handle Mechanism Components 1 2 Rating Type Color UL IP Shaft Length Inches (mm) External Handle Catalog Number Shaft Catalog Number Mechanism Catalog Number 2 Black/Blue 1/12/3R 20/54/55 6.00 (152.4) 68C6048G01 66A6010G95 69D6051G30 12.00 (304.8) 68C6048G01 66A6010G96 69D6051G30 2 24.00 (609.6) 68C6048G01 66A6010G99 2 69D6051G30 6.00 (152.4) 68C6048G02 66A6010G95 69D6051G30 Red/Yellow Black/Blue Red/Yellow 1/12/3R 4/4X 4/4X 20/54/55 65 65 12.00 (304.8) 68C6048G02 66A6010G96 69D6051G30 24.00 (609.6) 68C6048G02 66A6010G99 2 69D6051G30 6.00 (152.4) 68C6048G03 66A6010G95 69D6051G30 12.00 (304.8) 68C6048G03 66A6010G96 69D6051G30 24.00 (609.6) 68C6048G03 66A6010G99 2 69D6051G30 6.00 (152.4) 68C6048G04 66A6010G95 69D6051G30 12.00 (304.8) 68C6048G04 66A6010G96 69D6051G30 24.00 (609.6) 68C6048G04 66A6010G99 2 69D6051G30 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 NG-Frame Handle Mechanism Components 1 2 Rating Type Color UL IP Shaft Length Inches (mm) External Handle Catalog Number Shaft Catalog Number Mechanism Catalog Number Black/Blue 1/12/3R 20/54/55 8.00 (203.2) 68C6048G05 66A6013H01 69D9101G30 2 Red/Yellow 1/12/3R 20/54/55 8.00 (203.2) 68C6048G06 66A6013H01 69D9101G30 2 Black/Blue 4/4X 65 8.00 (203.2) 68C6048G07 66A6013H01 69D9101G30 Red/Yellow 4/4X 65 8.00 (203.2) 68C6048G08 66A6013H01 69D9101G30 2 2 Notes 1 For replacement purposes. 2 24.00 inches (609.6 mm) includes support bracket. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-117 2.2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Contents Handle Mechanisms Description 2 EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . . . . Universal Rotary Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Universal Rotary 2 Product Description 2 2 2 2 2 2 Eaton’s Universal Rotary is suitable for use with Type 1 or 12 enclosure types. All rotary handle mechanisms include a handle “lock off” to prevent turning the breaker ON while in the OFF position, and indicate ON/OFF/Tripped/ Reset positions. The Universal Rotary has the added feature of international markings for ON (I) and OFF (O). The Universal Rotary is made of molded material. The Universal Rotary mechanisms for EG-, JG- and LG-Frame MCCBs can be operated by hand with the door open or “locked off” to prevent operation with the door open. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-118 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Page V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-45 V4-T2-61 V4-T2-70 V4-T2-80 V4-T2-84 V4-T2-87 V4-T2-91 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-99 V4-T2-106 V4-T2-108 V4-T2-109 V4-T2-110 V4-T2-111 V4-T2-114 V4-T2-119 V4-T2-120 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 2.2 Product Selection Universal Rotary 2 Universal Rotary Through-the-Door Handle Mechanisms 2 Handle Color UL Rating Shaft Length in Inches (mm) Complete Catalog Number 1 2 1, 12 6.00 (152.4) EHMVD06B 2 12.00 (304.8) EHMVD12B 24.00 (609.6) EHMVD24B EG-Frame Black Red 1, 12 2 2 6.00 (152.4) EHMVD06R 12.00 (304.8) EHMVD12R 24.00 (609.6) EHMVD24R 2 6.00 (152.4) FJHMVD06B 2 12.00 (304.8) FJHMVD12B 24.00 (609.6) FJHMVD24B JG-Frame Black Red 1, 12 1, 12 2 2 6.00 (152.4) FJHMVD06R 12.00 (304.8) FJHMVD12R 24.00 (609.6) FJHMVD24R 6.00 (152.4) KLHMVD06B 12.00 (304.8) KLHMVD12B 24.00 (609.6) KLHMVD24B 6.00 (152.4) KLHMVD06R 12.00 (304.8) KLHMVD12R 24.00 (609.6) KLHMVD24R 6.00 (152.4) HMVD5B 6.00 (152.4) HMVD5BT 2 2 9.00 (228.6) HMVD6B 2 2 2 LG-Frame Black Red 1, 12 1, 12 2 2 2 2 NG-Frame Black 1 RG-Frame Black 1 2 Notes 1 Complete catalog number includes handle, mechanism, shaft and mounting hardware. 2 Same as HMVD5B, except uses T handle. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-119 2.2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Contents Handle Mechanisms Description 2 Page EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . . 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . . . . Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-15 V4-T2-29 V4-T2-45 V4-T2-61 V4-T2-70 V4-T2-80 V4-T2-84 V4-T2-87 V4-T2-91 V4-T2-96 V4-T2-99 V4-T2-106 V4-T2-108 V4-T2-109 V4-T2-110 V4-T2-111 V4-T2-114 V4-T2-118 2 2 2 Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms 2 Product Description 2 2 2 2 Direct (close-coupled) handle mechanisms mount directly to the circuit breaker. They are used in shallow enclosures where the standard variable depth Through-the-door type mechanism is not practical or cannot be used. 2 2 The Universal Direct handle mechanisms are rated Type 1 and Type 12. The Universal Direct handle mechanism is available as standard with a door interlock to prevent opening the enclosure while the circuit breaker is in the ON position. It is also available without a door interlock. Application Description Standards and Certifications Direct (close-coupled) handle mechanisms are typically used for applications where high volume, standardized enclosures are being fabricated. The Universal Direct handle mechanism is UL listed, IEC 60947-1/2 compliant and meets CSA requirements. Product Selection 2 2 Universal Direct (EG – LG) Universal Direct Handle Mechanisms Black Handle Color 2 Red Handle Color With Interlock Without Interlock With Interlock Without Interlock 2 Frame Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number EG EHMCCBI EHMCCB EHMCCRI EHMCCR 2 JG JHMCCBI JHMCCB JHMCCRI JHMCCR LG LHMCCBI LHMCCB LHMCCRI LHMCCR 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-120 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Contents Molded Case Circuit Breaker Product Family Description Page Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Learn Online V4-T2-122 V4-T2-123 V4-T2-126 V4-T2-140 V4-T2-157 V4-T2-165 V4-T2-192 V4-T2-218 V4-T2-229 V4-T2-244 V4-T2-263 V4-T2-274 V4-T2-276 V4-T2-277 V4-T2-281 V4-T2-312 Drawings Online So designed, Eaton circuit breakers protect conductors against overloads and conductors and connected apparatus, such as motors and motor starters, against short circuits. In low voltage distribution systems, there are many varied applications of molded case circuit breakers. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Product Overview Eaton’s molded case circuit breakers are designed to provide circuit protection for low voltage distribution systems. They are described by NEMA as, “... a device for closing and interrupting a circuit between separable contacts under both normal and abnormal conditions,” and furthermore as, “... a breaker assembled as an integral unit in a supporting and enclosing housing of insulating material.” The National Electrical Code (NEC) describes them as, “A device designed to open and close a circuit by nonautomatic means, and to open the circuit automatically on a predetermined overload of current, without injury to itself when properly applied within its rating.” 2 Eaton offers the most comprehensive family of molded case circuit breakers in the industry. This section of circuit breakers includes: ● ● ● ● ● ● Thermal-magnetic trip breakers Electronic rms trip breakers Molded case switches Motor circuit protectors Current limiting breakers Special application breakers Modified Breakers Eaton breakers can be ordered with internal accessories installed. These modified breakers will be subject to an addition charge. Special Calibration Special non-UL-listed calibrations are available for certain ambient temperatures other than 40°C and for frequencies other than 50/60 Hz or DC. Reduced interrupting ratings will apply for 400 Hz applications. 50°C Calibration Add suffix V to catalog Number for complete breaker, listed above, when ordering listed ampere ratings for breakers to be used in 50°C ambients. (No price adder.) (No UL label.) Moisture-Fungus Treatment All circuit breaker cases are molded from glass-polyester which does not support the growth of fungus. Any parts which are susceptible to the growth of fungus will require special treatment. Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers The circuit breakers may be ordered with freeze testing. This option uses special lubrication and mechanical operation is verified at –40°C. Marine Applications E- to R-Framed circuit breakers can be supplied to meet the following marine specifications: ● U.S. Coast Guard CFR 46; ABS—American Bureau of Shipping; IEEE 45; DNV; Lloyds; and ABS/NVR These specifications generally require molded case circuit breakers to be supplied with 50°C ambient, and plug-in adapter kits. When plug-in adapter kits are used, no terminals need be supplied (switchboard applications). Circuit breakers can also be supplied to meet UL 489 Supplement SA (Marine use) and UL 489 Supplement SB (Naval Use). UL 489 Supplement SA applies to vessels over 65 feet (19.8 m) in length. Requirements include 40°C ambient calibration, special labeling, and no use of aluminum conductors or terminals. (No 50°C.) ● Suffix H08 Or you can choose to add 50°C ambient but then there is no “UL” mark. ● Suffix VH08 UL 489 Supplement SB requires partial 50°C ambient calibration, vibration testing, special nameplating and no use of aluminum conductors or terminals. Eaton chooses to always fully calibrate to 50°C ambient. (“Naval” labeled per UL, and UL now allows 50°C label here.) ● 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Suffix VH09 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2 V4-T2-121 2.3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Standards and Certifications Certified Test Reports Eaton breakers can be ordered with certified test reports at the time of order entry. Test report documents the thermal and magnetic or electronic tripping characteristics of the individual breaker. Breaker and test report must be ordered together. Add suffix 12 to breaker catalog number and enter separate line item on order for certified test report. 2 Molded case circuit breakers are designed to conform with the following standards: ● ● ● ● 2 2 ● 2 2 ● 2 2 Underwriters Laboratories Inc., Standard UL 489, molded case circuit breakers and circuit breaker enclosures National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standards Publication No. AB1-1993, molded case circuit breakers Australian Standard AS 2184, molded case circuit breakers British Standards Institution Standard BS 4752: Part 1, switchgear and control gear Part 1: circuit breakers Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Standard C22.2 No. 5, service entrance and branch circuit breakers International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC 60947-2, circuit breakers ● ● ● ● ● Japanese T-Mark Standard molded case circuit breakers South African Bureau of Standards, Standard SABS 156, Standard Specification for molded case circuit breakers Swiss Electro-Technical Association Standard SEV 157-1, safety regulations for circuit breakers Union Technique de l’Electricite Standard NF C 63-120, low voltage switchgear and control gear circuit breaker requirements Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker (Association of German Electrical Engineers) Standard VDE 0660, low voltage switchgear and control gear, circuit breakers 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-122 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Conformance with these standards satisfies most local and international codes, assuming user acceptability and simplified application. Molded case circuit breakers equal or exceed Federal Specification Classification W-C-375b requirements for the particular class associated with the circuit breaker frame being considered. Open breakers do not have service entrance ratings. Service entrance rating is part of the enclosure. 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Quick Reference 2 Industrial Circuit Breakers 2 2 G-Frame Circuit Breaker Type Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C No. of Poles AC GHB 15–100 1 120 GHB 15–100 2, 3 240 125/250 N.I.T.U. 11a10b, 11b — — 65 — — — GHB 15–100 1 277 125 N.I.T.U. 12b, 14b — — — 14 — — GHB 15–100 2, 3 480Y/277 125/250 N.I.T.U. 15b — — — 14 14 — HGHB 15–30 11 277 125 N.I.T.U. 12c, 13a, 13b 65 — — 25 — — GHQ 15–20 1 277 — N.I.T.U. — 65 — — 14 — — — GHBS 15–30 1, 2 480Y/277 — — — 65 65 — 14 — — — — V4-T1-34 GBHS 15–20 1, 2 600Y/347 — N.I.T.U. — — — — — — 10 — — V4-T1-34 GDB 15–50 2 480 125/250 N.I.T.U. — — — — — 14 — — 10 V4-T2-129 GDB 15–100 3 480 250 N.I.T.U. — — — — — 14 — — 10 V4-T2-129 GD 15–50 2 480 125/250 N.I.T.U. 13b — — 65 — 14 — — 10 V4-T2-128 GD 15–100 3 480 250 N.I.T.U. 13b — — 65 — 22 — — 10 V4-T2-128 GHC 15–100 1 120 125 N.I.T.U. 12c, 13a 65 — — — — — 14 — V4-T2-136 GHC 15–100 2, 3 240 125/250 N.I.T.U. 13b — — 65 — — — 1 V4-T2-136 GHC 15–100 277 125 N.I.T.U. 12c, 13a — — — 14 — — 14 — V4-T2-136 UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes) Volts Federal Specification W-C-375b AC (kA) DC Type of Trip 1 120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250 Page Number 125 N.I.T.U. 11a 65 — — — — — 14 — V4-T2-131 — 14 V4-T2-131 14 — V4-T2-131 — 14 V4-T2-131 14 — V4-T2-131 — V4-T2-131 DC (kA) 2 GHC 15–100 2, 3 480Y/277 125/250 N.I.T.U. 13b — — — 14 14 — — 14 V4-T2-136 HGHC 15–30 1 277 125 N.I.T.U. — 65 — — 25 — — 14 — V4-T2-136 Notes 1 N.I.T.U. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T.U. is interchangeable trip unit. 2 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-123 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2 F-Frame 2 Circuit Breaker Type Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C No. of Poles AC 2 EDB 100–225 2, 3 2 EDS 100–225 2, 3 ED 15–225 2 EDH UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes) Volts AC (kA) DC Type of Trip 1 Federal Specification W-C-375b 120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250 Page Number 240 125 N.I.T.U. — — — 22 — — — 10 — V4-T2-140 240 125 N.I.T.U. — — — 42 — — — 10 — V4-T2-140 2, 3 240 125 N.I.T.U. 12b — — 65 — — — 10 — V4-T2-140 100–225 2, 3 240 125 N.I.T.U. 14b — — 100 — — — 10 — V4-T2-140 EDC 100–225 2, 3 240 125 N.I.T.U. 1 — — 200 — — — 10 — V4-T2-140 2 EHD 15–100 1 277 125 N.I.T.U. 13a — — — 14 — — 10 — V4-T2-140 2 EHD 15–100 2, 3 480 250 N.I.T.U. 13b — — 18 — 14 — — 10 V4-T2-140 FDB 15–150 2, 3 600 250 N.I.T.U. 18a — — 18 — 14 14 — 10 V4-T2-140 FDB 15–150 4 600 250 N.I.T.U. 3 — — 18 — 14 14 — 10 V4-T2-140 FD 15–150 1 277 125 N.I.T.U. 13a — — — 35 — — 10 — V4-T2-140 2 FD 15–225 2, 3 600 250 N.I.T. 22a — — 65 — 35 18 — 10 V4-T2-140 FD 15–225 4 600 250 — 3 — — 65 — 35 18 — 10 V4-T2-140 2 FDE 15–225 3 600 — N.I.T. — — — 65 — 35 18 — — V4-T2-140 HFD 15–150 1 277 125 N.I.T.U. 13a — — — 65 — — 10 — V4-T2-140 HFD 15–225 2,3 600 250 — 22a — — 100 — 65 25 — 22 V4-T2-140 V4-T2-140 2 2 DC (kA) 2 2 HFD 15–225 4 600 250 — 3 — — 100 — 65 25 — 22 HFDE 15–225 3 600 — N.I.T. — — — 100 — 65 25 — — V4-T2-140 2 FDC 4 15–225 2, 3 600 250 N.I.T.U. 24a — — 200 — 100 35 — 22 V4-T2-140 FDC 4 15–225 4 600 250 — 3 — — 200 — 100 35 — 22 V4-T2-140 FDCE 45 15–225 3 600 — N.I.T. — — — 200 — 100 25 — — V4-T2-140 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 N.I.T.U. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T.U. is interchangeable trip unit. 2 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc. 3 Not defined in W-C-375b. 4 Current limiting. 5 Check with Eaton for availability. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-124 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C J-Frame Circuit Breaker Type Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C No. of Poles AC 2 UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes) Volts DC Type of Trip 1 Federal Specification W-C-375b AC (kA) 120 120/240 240 277 480 600 DC (kA) 2 125 250 Page Number JDB 70–250 2, 3 600 250 N.I.T.U. 22a — — 65 — 35 18 — 10 V4-T2-160 JD 70–250 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 22a — — 65 — 35 18 — 10 V4-T2-159 70–250 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 22a — — 100 — 65 25 — 22 V4-T2-159 70–250 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 22a — — 200 — 100 35 — 22 V4-T2-159 HJD JDC 3 2 2 2 2 2 K-Frame Circuit Breaker Type Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C No. of Poles AC DK 250–400 2, 3 KDB 100–400 KD 2 UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes) Volts Federal Specification W-C-375b AC (kA) DC Type of Trip 1 120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 240 250 N.I.T.U. 14b — — 65 — — — 2, 3 600 250 N.I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — 35 100–400 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — CKD 100–400 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 65 HKD 100–400 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — CHKD 100–400 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — KDC 3 100–400 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — DC (kA) 2 250 Page Number 2 — 10 V4-T2-173 25 — 10 V4-T2-173 2 35 25 — 10 V4-T2-167, V4-T2-169, V4-T2-176, V4-T2-179 2 — 35 25 — — V4-T2-175, V4-T2-182, V4-T2-184 2 100 — 65 35 — 22 V4-T2-167, V4-T2-169, V4-T2-176, V4-T2-179 2 — 100 — 65 35 — — V4-T2-175, V4-T2-182, V4-T2-184 — 200 — 100 65 — 22 V4-T2-167, V4-T2-169, V4-T2-176, V4-T2-179 2 2 2 L-Frame Circuit Breaker Type Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C No. of Poles AC LDB 300–600 2, 3 LD 300–600 CLD 2 UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes) Volts Federal Specification W-C-375b AC (kA) DC Type of Trip 1 120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250 Page Number 2 600 250 N.I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — 35 25 — 22 V4-T2-198 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — 35 25 — 22 V4-T2-194, V4-T2-195, V4-T2-202 2 300–600 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — 35 25 — — V4-T2-197, V4-T2-208 2 HLD 300–600 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 100 — 65 35 — 25 V4-T2-194, V4-T2-195, V4-T2-202 2 CHLD 300–600 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 100 — 65 35 — — V4-T2-197, V4-T2-208 LDC 3 300–600 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 200 — 100 50 — 30 V4-T2-194, V4-T2-195, V4-T2-204 2 CLDC 3 300–600 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 200 — 100 50 — 30 V4-T2-197, V4-T2-210 DC (kA) 2 2 2 2 M-Frame Circuit Breaker Type Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C No. of Poles AC MDL 300–800 2, 3 CMDL 300–800 2, 3 HMDL 300–800 CHMDL 300–800 UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes) Volts 2 Federal Specification W-C-375b AC (kA) DC Type of Trip 1 120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — 50 25 — 22 V4-T2-220, V4-T2-222 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — 50 25 — — V4-T2-223 2, 3 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 100 — 65 35 — 25 V4-T2-220, V4-T2-222 2, 3 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 100 — 65 35 — — V4-T2-223 DC (kA) 2 Page Number 2 2 Notes 1 N.I.T.U. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T.U. is interchangeable trip unit. 2 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc. 3 Current limiting. Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2 2 2 V4-T2-125 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Molded Case Circuit Breaker Product Family Contents Description 2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) 2 Product Description ● 2 2 2 ● 2 2 2 2 ● ● All two- and three-pole circuit breakers are of the common trip type. On all three-phase delta (240V) Grounded B phase applications, refer to Eaton Single-pole circuit breakers, 15 and 20 amperes. Switching duty rated (SWD) for fluorescent lighting applications All G-Frame circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed use HACR rated 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-126 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Page V4-T2-121 V4-T2-122 V4-T2-123 V4-T2-127 V4-T2-127 V4-T2-140 V4-T2-157 V4-T2-165 V4-T2-192 V4-T2-218 V4-T2-229 V4-T2-244 V4-T2-263 V4-T2-274 V4-T2-276 V4-T2-277 V4-T2-281 V4-T2-312 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Catalog Number Selection 2 This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. 2 2 2 Circuit Breaker/Frame 2 GD 3 100 K Circuit Breaker Type GD HGHB GDB HGHC GHB GHBGFEP GHC GHCGFEP GHQ 2 Suffix Number of Poles 1 = 1 pole 2 = 2 poles 3 = 3 poles Trip Amperes 035 040 045 050 060 015 020 024 030 K D C V 070 080 090 100 = Molded case switch = Ring type terminals = Steel collars = 122°F (50°C) J01= Fungus proofed R01= Shock tested F01= Freeze tester HID= High intensity discharge 1 2 2 2 2 Technical Data and Specifications 2 UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 2 Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 120 240 277 480 480Y/277 125 250 23 GDB 2, 3 — — — 14 — — 10 GD 2 — 65 — 14 — — 10 GD 3 — 65 — 22 — — 10 GHQ — 65 — 14 — — — — GHB 1 65 — 14 — — 14 — GHB 2, 3 — 65 — — 14 14 — HGHB 1 65 — 25 — — 14 — GHC 1 65 — 14 — — 14 — GHC 2, 3 — 65 — — 14 14 — HGHC 1 65 — 25 — — 14 — 2 Volts DC 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Terminal Types For line and load-side. Terminals are UL listed as suitable for wire type and size given below. 2 Terminal Types Terminal Type Material Screw Head Type Wire Type AWG Wire Range Metric Wire Range (mm2) 4 2 15–20 Clamp (plated steel) Slotted Cu/Al 14–10 2.5–4 2 25–100 Pressure (aluminum body) Slotted Cu/Al 10–1/0 4–50 2 Pressure (steel body) Slotted Cu 14–3 — 2 Circuit Breaker Amperes Standard Optional—GD Only 15–100 2 Notes 1 HID suffix only applies to the GHB and GHC single-pole, 15–20A circuit breakers. 2 Time constant is 8 milliseconds minimum. 3 Two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. 4 Not UL listed sizes. 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-127 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Contents Typical G-Frame Circuit Breaker Description 2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Type GD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units (15–100 Amperes) 2 Product Description 2 ● ● 2 2 Standards and Certifications Cable in, cable out Includes mounting hardware and BMHE ● UL/CSA Product Selection 2 2 2 2 Type GD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc 14 kAIC at 480 Vac Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 22 kAIC at 480 Vac Includes Line and Load Terminals Includes Binding Head Screws and Clamps 10–32 x 0.312 Two-Pole Three-Pole Three-Pole Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 15 GD2015 GD3015 GD3015D 20 GD2020 GD3020 GD3020D 25 GD2025 GD3025 GD3025D 2 30 GD2030 GD3030 GD3030D 2 35 GD2035 GD3035 GD3035D 40 GD2040 GD3040 GD3040D 2 45 GD2045 GD3045 GD3045D 50 GD2050 GD3050 GD3050D 2 60 — GD3060 GD3060D 2 70 — GD3070 GD3070D 80 — GD3080 GD3080D 90 — GD3090 GD3090D 100 — GD3100 GD3100D 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-128 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Page V4-T2-121 V4-T2-122 V4-T2-123 V4-T2-126 V4-T2-140 V4-T2-157 V4-T2-165 V4-T2-192 V4-T2-218 V4-T2-229 V4-T2-244 V4-T2-263 V4-T2-274 V4-T2-276 V4-T2-277 V4-T2-281 V4-T2-312 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Type GDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 2 480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc 2 14 kAIC at 480 Vac Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Includes Line and Load Terminals Two-Pole Three-Pole Catalog Number Catalog Number 15 GDB2015 GDB3015 20 GDB2020 GDB3020 25 GDB2025 GDB3025 30 GDB2030 GDB3030 35 GDB2035 GDB3035 40 GDB2040 GDB3040 45 GDB2045 GDB3045 50 GDB2050 GDB3050 60 — GDB3060 70 — GDB3070 80 — GDB3080 90 — GDB3090 100 — GDB3100 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Type GD Molded Case Switches 2 Type GD Molded Case Switches—Three-Pole 480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Catalog Number (Includes Line and Load Terminals) 60 GD3060K 60 GD3060KC 1 100 GD3100K 100 GD3100KD 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Includes line and load steel terminals. 2 Includes binding head screws and clamps 10–32 x 0.312. 2 2 Molded case switches may open above 1300 amperes. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-129 2.3 2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) GD-Frame, Three-Pole Front View Side View 2 2 2 2 2 4.88 (123.8) 2 Off 2 2 2 2 3.00 (76.2) 2.63 (66.7) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-130 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Typical GHB 2.3 Contents Description Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page V4-T2-121 V4-T2-122 V4-T2-123 V4-T2-126 V4-T2-140 V4-T2-157 V4-T2-165 V4-T2-192 V4-T2-218 V4-T2-229 V4-T2-244 V4-T2-263 V4-T2-274 V4-T2-276 V4-T2-277 V4-T2-281 V4-T2-312 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Types GHB and HGHB Bolt-On Panelboard Circuit Breakers (15–100 Amperes) 2 Standards and Certifications 2 These breakers meet the requirements of Federal Specification W-C-375b as follows: ● ● 2 2 Type GHB, 120 and 240V: ● Single-pole: Class 11a ● Two-, three-pole: Classes 10b, 11b, 12b, 14b, 15b ● UL/CSA 2 Type GHB, 277 and 480Y/277V: ● Single-pole: Classes 12c, 13a ● Two-, three-pole: Class 13b ● Type HGHB 277V ● Type GHQ 277V 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-131 2.3 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Product Selection Typical GHB 2 Type GHB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 1 277/480 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc Maximum 2 2 277/480 Vac Maximum, 125/250 Vdc Maximum 277/480 Vac Maximum, 125/250 Vdc Maximum 3 Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 15 GHB1015 45 GHB2015 4 GHB3015 4 20 GHB1020 45 GHB2020 4 GHB3020 4 2 25 GHB1025 GHB2025 GHB3025 30 GHB1030 GHB2030 GHB3030 2 35 GHB1035 GHB2035 GHB3035 2 40 GHB1040 GHB2040 GHB3040 45 GHB1045 GHB2045 GHB3045 2 50 GHB1050 GHB2050 GHB3050 60 GHB1060 GHB2060 GHB3060 2 70 GHB1070 GHB2070 GHB3070 80 GHB1080 GHB2080 GHB3080 90 GHB1090 GHB2090 GHB3090 100 GHB1100 GHB2100 GHB3100 2 2 2 2 Type HGHB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 2 277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc Maximum 2 Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Single-Pole 2 15 HGHB1015 6 2 20 HGHB1020 6 25 HGHB1025 2 30 HGHB1030 2 Catalog Number Type GHQ Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 2 277 Vac Maximum 14 kAIC, No DC Rating (HID and SWD) 2 2 2 2 Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Single-Pole 15 GHQ1015 7 20 GHQ1020 7 Catalog Number Notes 1 480Y/277V, circuit breakers (Type GHB) not suitable for three-phase delta (480V). 2 15 through 70 ampere circuit breakers only. 3 Use two outside poles. 4 Uses 0.190 (4.83) –32 screw type clamp terminals. 5 Add suffix HID for High Intensity Discharge (HID) applications. 15 and 20 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated. 6 15 and 20 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated. 7 Includes 4A33462H01 load clip. 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-132 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Dimensions 2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 GDB-Frame, Three-Pole 2 Front View 2 Side View 2 2 2 2 4.00 (101.6) 2 2 2 3.00 (76.2) Max. 2 2.63 (66.7) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-133 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Contents Single-Phase (requires two poles) Description 2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Type GHBGFEP Bolt-On Panelboard 30 mA Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors (15–100 Amperes) 2 Product Description 2 2 ● ● Standards and Certifications 15–60 amperes, 277V, 50/60 Hz Operational voltage 240V to 305V These circuit breakers meet the requirements of UL 489 and UL 1053. 2 2 2 2 2 2 Product Selection Type GHBGFEP Bolt-On Panelboard 30 mA Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Single-Phase (Requires Two Poles) 277 Vac, 30 mA Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Catalog Number 15 GHBGFEP1015 20 GHBGFEP1020 30 GHBGFEP1030 2 40 GHBGFEP1040 2 50 GHBGFEP1050 60 GHBGFEP1060 2 2 2 2 2 Technical Data and Specifications Interrupting Capacity Ratings Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) GHBGFEP 1 14,000 277 Vac (50/60 Hz) 2 2 2 V4-T2-134 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Page V4-T2-121 V4-T2-122 V4-T2-123 V4-T2-126 V4-T2-140 V4-T2-157 V4-T2-165 V4-T2-192 V4-T2-218 V4-T2-229 V4-T2-244 V4-T2-263 V4-T2-274 V4-T2-276 V4-T2-277 V4-T2-281 V4-T2-312 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Dimensions 2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 GHB-Frame, Three-Pole 2 Front View 2 Side View 2 2 2 2 4.00 (101.6) 2 2 2 3.00 (76.2) 2 2.63 (66.7) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-135 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Contents Typical GHC Description 2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Types GHC and HGHC Circuit Breakers (15–100 Amperes) 2 Product Description 2 ● ● 2 ● 2 ● 2 ● 15–100 amperes 120, 240, 277, 480Y/277V, 50/60 Hz, 125, 125/250 Vdc Single-, two- and three-pole Cable in, cable out Does not include mounting hardware 2 2 Standards and Certifications These breakers meet the requirements of Federal Specification W-C-37b as follows: ● Type GHC, 277 and 480Y/ 277V: ● Single-pole: Classes 12c, 13a ● Two-, three-pole: Class 13b ● UL/CSA 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-136 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Page V4-T2-121 V4-T2-122 V4-T2-123 V4-T2-126 V4-T2-140 V4-T2-157 V4-T2-165 V4-T2-192 V4-T2-218 V4-T2-229 V4-T2-244 V4-T2-263 V4-T2-274 V4-T2-276 V4-T2-277 V4-T2-281 V4-T2-312 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Product Selection 2 2 Type GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc Maximum 1 480Y/277 Vac Maximum, 125/250 Vdc Maximum 480Y/277 Vac Maximum, 125/250 Vdc Maximum 2 Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 15 GHC1015 34 GHC2015 3 GHC3015 3 20 GHC1020 34 GHC2020 3 GHC3020 3 25 GHC1025 GHC2025 GHC3025 30 GHC1030 GHC2030 GHC3030 35 GHC1035 GHC2035 GHC3035 40 GHC1040 GHC2040 GHC3040 45 GHC1045 GHC2045 GHC3045 50 GHC1050 GHC2050 GHC3050 60 GHC1060 GHC2060 GHC3060 70 GHC1070 GHC2070 GHC3070 80 GHC1080 GHC2080 GHC3080 90 GHC1090 GHC2090 GHC3090 100 GHC1100 GHC2100 GHC3100 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Type HGHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 2 277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Single-Pole 15 HGHC1015 5 20 HGHC1020 5 25 HGHC1025 30 HGHC1030 2 Catalog Number 2 2 2 Notes 1 15 through 70 ampere circuit breakers only. 2 Use two outside poles. 3 Uses 0.190–32 screw type clamp terminals. 4 Add suffix HID for High Intensity Discharge (HID) applications. 15 and 20 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated. 5 15 and 20 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-137 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Contents Single-Phase (requires two-pole spaces) Description 2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Type GHCGFEP Cable-In/Cable-Out 30 mA Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors (15–100 Amperes) 2 Product Description 2 2 ● ● Standards and Certifications 15–60 amperes, 277V, 50/60 Hz Operational voltage 240V–305V These circuit breakers meet the requirements of UL 489 and UL 1053. 2 2 Product Selection 2 Type GHCGFEP 30 mA Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 2 2 Single-Phase (Requires Two Poles) 277V, 30 mA Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Catalog Number 2 15 GHCGFEP1015 20 GHCGFEP1020 2 30 GHCGFEP1030 40 GHCGFEP1040 50 GHCGFEP1050 60 GHCGFEP1060 2 2 2 Technical Data and Specifications 2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 2 Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles 2 GHCGFEP 1 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) 277 Vac (50/60 Hz) 14,000 2 2 2 V4-T2-138 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Page V4-T2-121 V4-T2-122 V4-T2-123 V4-T2-126 V4-T2-140 V4-T2-157 V4-T2-165 V4-T2-192 V4-T2-218 V4-T2-229 V4-T2-244 V4-T2-263 V4-T2-274 V4-T2-276 V4-T2-277 V4-T2-281 V4-T2-312 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Contents Special Purpose Circuit Breakers Description Page Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4). . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module. . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-121 V4-T2-122 V4-T2-123 V4-T2-126 V4-T2-140 V4-T2-157 V4-T2-165 V4-T2-192 V4-T2-218 V4-T2-229 V4-T2-244 V4-T2-263 V4-T2-274 V4-T2-276 V4-T2-277 V4-T2-281 V4-T2-312 P Eaton’s Type GHC circuit breakers have binding head screw-type terminals on line and load side. These circuit breakers with screw-type terminals (0.190–32) will be marked “Special purpose breaker not for general use.” To order this special breaker, use the catalog number from the tables on this page. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Special Purpose GHC Circuit Breakers (15–100 Amperes) roduct Description 2 Product Selection 2 Type GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 2 277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc Maximum 480Y/277 Vac Maximum, 125/250 Vdc Maximum 480Y/277 Vac Maximum, 125/250 Vdc Maximum 1 2 2 Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 25 GHC1025D GHC2025D GHC3025D 30 GHC1030D GHC2030D GHC3030D 35 GHC1035D GHC2035D GHC3035D 40 GHC1040D GHC2040D GHC3040D 45 GHC1045D GHC2045D GHC3045D 50 GHC1050D GHC2050D GHC3050D 60 GHC1060D GHC2060D GHC3060D 70 GHC1070D GHC2070D GHC3070D 80 GHC1080D GHC2080D GHC3080D 90 GHC1090D GHC2090D GHC3090D 100 GHC1100D GHC2100D GHC3100D 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Type GHB and GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units for HID Lighting Applications 2 277 Vac Maximum Single-Pole Type Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Cable-in 15 GHC1015HID 20 GHC1020HID 15 GHB1015HID 20 GHB1020HID Bolt-on 2 Catalog Number 2 2 2 2 Note 1 Use two outside poles. 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-139 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Typical F-Frame Breaker F-Frame Breaker with Electronic Trip Unit 2 Contents Description Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) 2 Product Description 2 ● ● 2 2 2 ● All Eaton’s F-Frame circuit breakers are HACR rated All circuit breakers 10 through 30 amperes are suitable for HID (high intensity discharge) use All F-Frame circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed use 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-140 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Page V4-T2-121 V4-T2-122 V4-T2-123 V4-T2-126 V4-T2-141 V4-T2-142 V4-T2-153 V4-T2-154 V4-T2-156 V4-T2-157 V4-T2-165 V4-T2-192 V4-T2-218 V4-T2-229 V4-T2-244 V4-T2-263 V4-T2-274 V4-T2-276 V4-T2-277 V4-T2-281 V4-T2-312 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Catalog Number Selection 2 This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. 2 2 2 2 FDC 3 100 L Circuit Breaker Type EHD FDB FD HFD FDC Number of Poles 1 = 1 pole 2 = 2 poles 3 = 3 poles 4 = 4 poles 2 2 Suffix E = 100% protected (four-pole only) neutral pole EH = 50% protected (four-pole only) K = High magnetic molded case switch L = Line and load terminals S = Stainless steel terminals V = 50°C calibration W = Without terminals Y = Line terminals only Z = Aluminum terminals (≤100 amperes) Trip Amperes 010 015 020 025 030 035 040 045 050 060 070 080 090 100 110 125 150 175 (FD, HFD, FDC, two-, three-, four-pole only) 200 (FD, HFD, FDC, two-, three-, four-pole only) 225 (FD, HFD, FDC, two-, three-, four-pole only) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 EDC 3 200 L Circuit Breaker Type EDB EDS ED EDH EDC Number of Poles 2 = 2 poles 3 = 3 poles Trip Amperes 100 125 150 175 200 225 FDE 3 225 32 Circuit Breaker Type FDE HFDE FDCE Number of Poles 3 = 3 poles Trip Amperes 80 160 225 Trip Unit 33 = LS 32 = LSI 35 = LSG 36 = LSIG 2 Suffix L = Line and load terminals W = Without terminals Y = Line terminals only Z = Aluminum terminals (100 amperes) 2 2 2 2 2 W Suffix ZG = Zone selective interlocking 2 Suffix W = Without terminals L = Line and load terminals — = Load side terminals only 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-141 2.3 2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Product Selection Type ED Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed 240 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 2 65 kAIC at 240 Vac Two-Pole Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number 15 ED2015 ED3015 2 20 ED2020 ED3020 25 ED2025 ED3025 2 30 ED2030 ED3030 35 ED2035 ED3035 2 40 ED2040 ED3040 2 50 ED2050 ED3050 60 ED2060 ED3060 2 100 ED2100 ED3100 125 ED2125 ED3125 2 150 ED2150 ED3150 175 ED2175 ED3175 2 200 ED2200 ED3200 225 ED2225 ED3225 2 2 2 2 2 Type EDH Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed 240 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 2 100 kAIC at 240 Vac Two-Pole Three-Pole 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 15 — — 2 20 — — 25 — — 2 30 — — 35 — — 2 40 — — 50 — — 2 60 — — 2 100 EDH2100 EDH3100 125 EDH2125 EDH3125 2 150 EDH2150 EDH3150 175 EDH2175 EDH3175 2 2 200 EDH2200 EDH3200 225 EDH2225 EDH3225 2 2 2 V4-T2-142 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Type EDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed 2 240 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 2 200 kAIC at 240 Vac Two-Pole Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number 15 — — 20 — — 25 — — 30 — — 35 — — 40 — — 50 — — 60 — — 100 EDC2100 EDC3100 125 EDC2125 EDC3125 150 EDC2150 EDC3150 175 EDC2175 EDC3175 200 EDC2200 EDC3200 225 EDC2225 EDC3225 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Type EDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed 2 240 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 2 22 kAIC at 240 Vac Two-Pole Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number 100 EDB2100 EDB3100 110 EDB2110 EDB3110 125 EDB2125 EDB3125 150 EDB2150 EDB3150 175 EDB2175 EDB3175 200 EDB2200 EDB3200 225 EDB2225 EDB3225 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-143 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Type EDS Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed 2 240 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 2 42 kAIC at 240 Vac Two-Pole Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number 100 EDS2100 EDS3100 110 EDS2110 EDS3110 2 125 EDS2125 EDS3125 150 EDS2150 EDS3150 2 175 EDS2175 EDS3175 2 200 EDS2200 EDS3200 225 EDS2225 EDS3225 2 2 2 2 Type EHD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc 2 480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc 14 kAIC at 277 Vac 14 kAIC at 480 Vac Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 10 1 EHD1010 EHD2010 EHD3010 2 15 EHD1015 2 EHD2015 EHD3015 20 EHD1020 2 EHD2020 EHD3020 2 25 EHD1025 EHD2025 EHD3025 30 EHD1030 EHD2030 EHD3030 2 35 EHD1035 EHD2035 EHD3035 2 40 EHD1040 EHD2040 EHD3040 45 EHD1045 EHD2045 EHD3045 2 50 EHD1050 EHD2050 EHD3050 60 EHD1060 EHD2060 EHD3060 2 70 EHD1070 EHD2070 EHD3070 80 EHD1080 EHD2080 EHD3080 90 EHD1090 EHD2090 EHD3090 100 EHD1100 EHD2100 EHD3100 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Not UL listed. 5 kAIC interrupting rating. 2 UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 240.83(d). 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-144 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Type FDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 2 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc 2 14 kAIC at 600 Vac Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 10 1 FDB2010 FDB3010 FDB4010 15 FDB2015 FDB3015 FDB4015 20 FDB2020 FDB3020 FDB4020 25 FDB2025 FDB3025 FDB4025 30 FDB2030 FDB3030 FDB4030 35 FDB2035 FDB3035 FDB4035 40 FDB2040 FDB3040 FDB4040 45 FDB2045 FDB3045 FDB4045 50 FDB2050 FDB3050 FDB4050 60 FDB2060 FDB3060 FDB4060 70 FDB2070 FDB3070 FDB4070 80 FDB2080 FDB3080 FDB4080 90 FDB2090 FDB3090 FDB4090 100 FDB2100 FDB3100 FDB4100 110 FDB2110 FDB3110 FDB4110 125 FDB2125 FDB3125 FDB4125 150 FDB2150 FDB3150 FDB4150 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Not UL listed. 5 kAIC interrupting rating. 2 UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 240.83(d). 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-145 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Type FD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 2 277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc 35 kAIC at 277 Vac 35 kAIC at 480 Vac Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 10 1 FD1010 — — — 15 FD1015 2 FD2015 FD3015 FD4015 20 FD1020 2 FD2020 FD3020 FD4020 2 25 FD1025 FD2025 FD3025 FD4025 2 30 FD1030 FD2030 FD3030 FD4030 35 FD1035 FD2035 FD3035 FD4035 2 40 FD1040 FD2040 FD3040 FD4040 45 FD1045 FD2045 FD3045 FD4045 2 50 FD1050 FD2050 FD3050 FD4050 60 FD1060 FD2060 FD3060 FD4060 2 70 FD1070 FD2070 FD3070 FD4070 2 80 FD1080 FD2080 FD3080 FD4080 90 FD1090 FD2090 FD3090 FD4090 2 100 FD1100 FD2100 FD3100 FD4100 110 FD1110 FD2110 FD3110 FD4110 2 125 FD1125 FD2125 FD3125 FD4125 2 150 FD1150 FD2150 FD3150 FD4150 175 — FD2175 FD3175 FD4175 2 200 — FD2200 FD3200 FD4200 225 — FD2225 FD3225 FD4225 2 Notes 1 Not UL listed. 5 kAIC interrupting rating. 2 UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 240.83(d). 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-146 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Type HFD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc 2 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc 2 65 kAIC at 277 Vac 65 kAIC at 480 Vac Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 15 HFD1015 1 HFD2015 HFD3015 HFD4015 20 HFD1020 1 HFD2020 HFD3020 HFD4020 25 HFD1025 HFD2025 HFD3025 HFD4025 30 HFD1030 HFD2030 HFD3030 HFD4030 35 HFD1035 HFD2035 HFD3035 HFD4035 40 HFD1040 HFD2040 HFD3040 HFD4040 45 HFD1045 HFD2045 HFD3045 HFD4045 50 HFD1050 HFD2050 HFD3050 HFD4050 60 HFD1060 HFD2060 HFD3060 HFD4060 70 HFD1070 HFD2070 HFD3070 HFD4070 80 HFD1080 HFD2080 HFD3080 HFD4080 90 HFD1090 HFD2090 HFD3090 HFD4090 100 HFD1100 HFD2100 HFD3100 HFD4100 110 HFD1110 HFD2110 HFD3110 HFD4110 125 HFD1125 HFD2125 HFD3125 HFD4125 150 HFD1150 HFD2150 HFD3150 HFD4150 175 — HFD2175 HFD3175 HFD4175 200 — HFD2200 HFD3200 HFD4200 225 — HFD2225 HFD3225 HFD4225 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Note 1 UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 240.83(d). 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-147 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Type FDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 2 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc 100 kAIC at 480 Vac Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 15 FDC2015 FDC3015 FDC4015 20 FDC2020 FDC3020 FDC4020 25 FDC2025 FDC3025 FDC4025 2 30 FDC2030 FDC3030 FDC4030 2 35 FDC2035 FDC3035 FDC4035 40 FDC2040 FDC3040 FDC4040 2 45 FDC2045 FDC3045 FDC4045 50 FDC2050 FDC3050 FDC4050 2 60 FDC2060 FDC3060 FDC4060 70 FDC2070 FDC3070 FDC4070 2 80 FDC2080 FDC3080 FDC4080 2 90 FDC2090 FDC3090 FDC4090 100 FDC2100 FDC3100 FDC4100 2 110 FDC2110 FDC3110 FDC4110 125 FDC2125 FDC3125 FDC4125 2 150 FDC215 FDC3150 FDC4150 2 175 FDC2175 FDC3175 FDC4175 200 FDC2200 FDC3200 FDC4200 225 FDC2225 FDC3225 FDC4225 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-148 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Types FDE, HFDE and FDCE Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Ampere Rating Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG LS LSI LSG LSIG 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 2 IC Rating 35 kAIC at 480 Vac 80 CTF080 FDE308033 FDE308032 FDE308035 FDE308036 160 CTF160 FDE316033 FDE316032 FDE316035 FDE316036 225 CTF225 FDE322533 FDE322532 FDE322535 FDE322536 2 2 IC Rating 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 80 CTF080 HFDE308033 HFDE308032 HFDE308035 HFDE308036 160 CTF160 HFDE316033 HFDE316032 HFDE316035 HFDE316036 225 CTF225 HFDE322533 HFDE322532 HFDE322535 HFDE322536 2 2 IC Rating 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 1 80 CTF080 FDCE308033 FDCE308032 FDCE308035 FDCE308036 160 CTF160 FDCE316033 FDCE316032 FDCE316035 FDCE316036 225 CTF225 FDCE322533 FDCE322532 FDCE322535 FDCE322536 2 2 2 FDE Electronic Breaker with Zone Selective Interlocking Ampere Rating LSI w/ZSI LSIG w/ZSI Catalog Number Catalog Number 35 kAIC at 480 Vac 80 FDE308032ZG FDE308036ZG 160 FDE316032ZG FDE316036ZG 225 FDE322532ZG FDE322536ZG Digitrip Electronic Trip Units Circuit Breaker Type Frame Ratings FDE, HFDE, FDCE 225 100, 110, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 225 FDE, HFDE, FDCE 160 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125, 150, 160 FDE, HFDE, FDCE 80 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80 2 2 2 2 Note 1 Check with Eaton for availability. 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 80 HFDE308032ZG HFDE308036ZG 160 HFDE316032ZG HFDE316036ZG 225 HFDE322532ZG HFDE322536ZG 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-149 2.3 2 2 2 2 2 2 Series C Molded Case Switches Eaton’s molded case switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489. Molded Case Switches 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Complete Circuit Breaker with Load Side Terminals Only Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Two-Pole 2 100 EHD2100K FD2100K HFD2100K 2 150 — FD2150K HFD2150K 225 — FD2225K HFD2225K 2 Three-Pole 100 EHD3100K FD3100K HFD3100K 2 150 — FD3150K HFD3150K 225 — FD3225K HFD3225K 2 Four-Pole 2 100 — FD4100K HFD4100K 150 — FD4150K HFD4150K 225 — FD4225K HFD4225K 2 2 Note Molded case switches will open above 1800 amperes. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-150 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information 2 Breaker Mount Ammeter 2 1 Description Catalog Number Breaker mount ammeter DIGIVIEW Line and Load Terminals Line and load terminals provide wire connecting capabilities for specific ranges of continuous current ratings and wire types. Except as noted, terminals comply with Underwriters Laboratories Standards UL 486A and UL 486B. Unless otherwise specified, F-Frame circuit breakers are factory equipped with load terminals only. 2 2 Ordering Information F-Frame circuit breakers and molded case switches have load terminals only as standard equipment. When standard line-end terminals (same as standard load-end terminals) are required, add Suffix L to the circuit breaker catalog number. When nonstandard or optional line and/ or load terminals are required, order by style number. Specify if factory installation is required. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Package of Three Terminals Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG Wire Range Metric Wire Range mm2 Catalog Number 2 2 Standard Pressure Type Terminals 20 (EHD) Steel Cu/AI 14–10 2.5–4 3T20FB 2 100 Steel Cu/AI 14–1/0 2.5–50 3T100FB 225 Aluminum Cu/AI 4–4/0 25–95 3TA225FD 2 2 Optional Pressure Terminals 50 Aluminum Cu/AI 14–4 2.5–25 3TA50FB 2 100 Aluminum Cu/AI 14–1/0 2.5–50 3TA100FD 200 Stainless steel Cu 4–4/0 25–95 3T150FB 225 Copper Cu 4–4/0 25–95 3T225FD 225 Aluminum Cu/AI 6–300 kcmil 16–150 3TA225FDK 3 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Use on FDE, HFDE and FDCE electronic trip only. 2 Not for use with ED, EDH, EDC breakers. 3 Includes terminal shield kit. Adds approximately 3 inches (76.2) to breaker height. Available for use on three-pole breaker only. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-151 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Line and Load Terminals 2 Collar 2 Collar Nut Screw 2 2 2 2 Clip Conductor Washer Conductor Conductor Screw Wire Clamp Extrusion 3T20FB 3T100FB, 3T150FB 3TA225FD Assemble wire clamp to bottom of conductor as shown. Insert collar enclosing conductor as shown. Locate nut on top of conductor and tighten securely with screw and washer. Caution: Collar must surround conductor. Insert collar enclosing conductor and center on extrusion on collar. Install clip with legs on top of conductor and snap end around bottom of collar. 2 2 2 Collar 2 Conductor Collar 2 2 2 2 Washer Conductor Screw Washer Screw 3TA50FB 3TA100FD 3TA225FDK (Up to 150 mm2) Assemble collar on top of conductor as shown. Tighten securely with screw and washer. Collar slides onto conductor and is held in position by a screw and lockwasher. Assemble collar on top of conductor as shown. Tighten securely with screw and washer. Terminal shield must be used with this collar. Note: For 185 mm2, use 3TA225FDK1. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-152 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Accessories 2 Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. 2 Allowable Accessory Combinations 2 FD Frame Accessories Description Reference Page Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Center Left Left Right 1 Center Four-Pole Right Left Center Right Neutral 2 Internal Accessories (Only one internal accessory per pole) ■ Alarm lockout switch (make only) V4-T2-283 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-283 ■ ❏ ❏ ■ Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break) V4-T2-283 ■ ❏ ❏ ■ Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-285 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-285 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T2-287 ■ ❏ ❏ ■ Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-289 ■ ■ ■ ■ Shunt trip—low energy V4-T2-293 ■ ■ ■ ■ Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T2-295 ■ ■ ■ ■ ● ● ● ● 2 ■ ● V4-T2-316 ● ● ● ● Keeper nut V4-T2-316 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Control wire terminal kit V4-T2-317 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Multiwire connectors V4-T2-318 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Base mounting hardware V4-T2-318 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Terminal shields V4-T2-320 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Terminal end covers V4-T2-321 ● ● ● Interphase barriers V4-T2-321 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Non-padlockable handle block V4-T2-322 ■ ■ ■ ■ Snap-on padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-322 ■ ■ ■ ■ Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-323 Cylinder lock V4-T2-323 Key interlock kit V4-T2-324 Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-325 ● ● ● Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-325 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Electrical (solenoid and motor) operators V4-T2-326 Plug-in adapters V4-T2-327 Rear connecting studs V4-T2-329 ■ ❏ ❏ 2 2 2 2 2 2 ❏ ❏ ❏ 2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Panelboard connecting straps V4-T2-330 Handle mechanisms V4-T2-332 LFD current limiter V4-T2-337 IQ Energy Sentinel V4-T2-337 Cause of trip display V4-T2-338 ● ● Remote mount cause of trip display V4-T2-338 ● ● Cause of trip LED V4-T2-338 ● ● 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Special calibration — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-121 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Marine/naval application — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Legend ■ Applicable in indicated pole position ❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both ● Accessory available/modification available 2 ❏ ● ● 2 ❏ ● ● 2 ❏ ■ ■ 2 2 External Accessories End cap kit 2 Note Internal accessories are listed with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) for factory installation. They are not listed with UL for field installation. 1 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-153 2 2 2 2 2 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2 Technical Data and Specifications 2 UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 2 Circuit Breaker Type 2 2 2 Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) Volts DC 1 Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Number of Poles 240 277 480 600 125 250 23 EDB 2, 3 22 — — — 10 — EDS 2, 3 42 — — — 10 — ED 2, 3 65 — — — 10 — EDH 2, 3 100 — — — 10 — EDC 2, 3 200 — — — 10 — 2 EHD 2 1 — 4 — — 10 — 2, 3 18 — 14 — — 10 FDB 2, 3, 4 18 — 14 14 — 10 2 FD 1 — 35 — — 10 — 2, 3, 4 65 — 35 18 — 10 2 FDE 4 2, 3, 4 65 — 35 18 — — HFD 1 — 65 — — 10 — 2 2, 3, 4 100 — 65 25 — 22 HFDE 4 2, 3, 4 100 — 65 25 — — FDC 5 2, 3, 4 200 — 100 35 — 22 2 FDCE 456 3 200 — 100 25 — — 2 IEC 157-1 (P1) Interrupting Capacity Ratings (P1) 2 Circuit Breaker Type 2 2 Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) Volts DC 1 Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Number of Poles 220, 240 380, 415 440 500 125 250 23 EDB 2, 3 22 — — — 10 — EDS 2, 3 42 — — — 10 — ED 2, 3 65 — — — 10 — EDH 2, 3 100 — — — 10 — EDC 2, 3 200 — — — 10 — 2 EHD 1 — 14 — — 10 — 2 2, 3 18 — 14 — — 10 FDB 2, 3, 4 18 14 14 14 — 10 2 FD 1 35 — — — 10 — 2, 3, 4 65 35 35 18 — 10 2 HFD 1 65 — — — 10 — 2, 3, 4 100 65 65 25 — 22 FDC 2, 3, 4 200 100 100 35 — 22 2 2 2 2 Digitrip Electronic Trip Units 2 Circuit Breaker Type Frame Ratings 2 FDE, HFDE, FDCE 225 100, 110, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 225 FDE, HFDE, FDCE 160 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125, 150, 160 FDE, HFDE, FDCE 80 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. 2 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. 3 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA. 4 Electronics available on three-pole only, no DC rating for FDE, HFDE, FDCE. 5 Current limiting. 6 Check with Eaton for availability. V4-T2-154 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 F-Frame Digitrip Specifications 2 Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+ rms sensing Yes 2 Frame FDE Ampere range 15–225A 2 Interrupting rating at 480V 35, 65, 100 (kA) Breaker Type 2 Protection Ordering options LS LSI LSG LSIG 2 2 Fixed rated plug (In) No Overtemperature trip Yes 2 Adjustable rating plug (In) No Long delay pickup 40–100% frame 2 Long delay time I2t 2–24 seconds Long delay time I4t No Long Delay Protection (L) Long delay thermal memory Yes High load alarm Yes 2 2 2 Short Delay Protection (S) Short delay pickup 200–1000% x (Ir) Short delay time I2t Yes No Short delay time Flat No Inst–300 ms Short delay time Z.S.I. Yes 1 2 2 Instantaneous Protection (I) 2 Instantaneous pickup No Discriminator No Instantaneous override Yes 2 No 2 Ground Fault Protection (G) Ground fault alarm 2 Ground fault pickup 20–100% frame Ground fault delay I2t No Ground fault delay flat Inst–300 ms Ground fault Z.S.I. Yes 1 Ground fault thermal memory Yes 2 Cause of trip LEDs No 2 Magnitude of trip information No Remote signal contacts No 2 Digital display No 2 Current No Voltage No 2 System Diagnostics System Monitoring 2 2 Power and energy No Power quality harmonics No Power factor No 2 No 2 Test kit 2 Communications PowerNet Testing Testing method Legend In = Rating Plug Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting x In 2 2 Note 1 ZSI (zone selective interlocking) is optional. Must order with ZSI. Standard 310+ does not come with ZSI. Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2 V4-T2-155 2.3 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) FD Frame 2 Number of Poles Width Height Depth 2 1 1.38 (35.1) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0) 2 2.75 (70.0) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0) 3 4.13 (105.0) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0) 4 5.50 (139.7) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0) 2 2 2 FD Frame, Three-Pole Side View Front View 2 2 2 On Off 2 2 6.00 (152.4) 2 2 2 2 3.38 (85.7) 4.13 (104.9) 2 2 Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg) 2 FD Frame 2 Breaker Type 1 2 3 4 2 ED, EDB, EDS, EDH, EDC — 3 (1.4) 4.5 (2.0) — 2 EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC 2 (0.9) 3 (1.4) 4.5 (2.0) 6 (2.7) FDE, HFDE, FDCE — — 4.5 (2.0) — Number of Poles 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-156 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Typical J-Frame Breaker 2.3 Contents Description Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module. . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page V4-T2-121 V4-T2-122 V4-T2-123 V4-T2-126 V4-T2-140 V4-T2-158 V4-T2-159 V4-T2-162 V4-T2-163 V4-T2-164 V4-T2-165 V4-T2-192 V4-T2-218 V4-T2-229 V4-T2-244 V4-T2-263 V4-T2-274 V4-T2-276 V4-T2-277 V4-T2-281 V4-T2-312 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) 2 Product Description 2 ● ● ● All Eaton’s J-Frame circuit breakers are HACR rated J-Frame circuit breakers are available as individual components (frame, trip unit, terminals), or factory assembled complete breakers J-Frame circuit breakers with non-interchangeable trip units are suitable for reverse feed use 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-157 2.3 2 2 2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Catalog Number Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. Circuit Breaker/Frame JD 3 250 F 2 2 Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type JDB JD HJD JDC 2 2 Number of Poles 2 = 2 poles 3 = 3 poles 4 = 4 poles 2 2 2 2 Circuit Breaker/Frame Ampere Rating 070 090 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 Suffix C = Non-aluminum terminals F = Frame only K = High magnetic molded case switch V = 50°C calibration W = Without terminals X = Load side terminals only Y = Line side terminals only Trip Unit JT 3 250 T 2 Trip Unit Type JT = Thermal-magnetic 2 2 2 2 2 Number of Poles 2 = 2 poles 3 = 3 poles 4 = 4 poles Trip Unit Rating/ Plug Ampere Rating 070 090 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-158 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Suffix T = Trip unit thermal-magnetic fixed thermal adj. magnetic V = 50°C calibration (thermal-magnetic trip units only) Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Product Selection 2 2 Types JD, HJD and JDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 1 Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 1 Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 1 For Use with Standard or High or Ultra High Interrupting Frames See Page V4-T2-161 for Optional Terminals Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 70 JD2070 HJD2070 JDC2070 JT2070T TA250KB 2 90 JD2090 HJD2090 JDC2090 JT2090T 100 JD2100 HJD2100 JDC2100 JT2100T 125 JD2125 HJD2125 JDC2125 JT2125T 150 JD2150 HJD2150 JDC2150 JT2150T 175 JD2175 HJD2175 JDC2175 JT2175T 200 JD2200 HJD2200 JDC2200 JT2200T 225 JD2225 HJD2225 JDC2225 JT2225T 250 JD2250 HJD2250 JDC2250 JT2250T Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Only 1 Standard Terminals Only JD3070 HJD3070 JDC3070 JT3070T JD3090 HJD3090 JDC3090 JT3090T 100 JD3100 HJD3100 JDC3100 JT3100T 125 JD3125 HJD3125 JDC3125 JT3125T 150 JD3150 HJD3150 JDC3150 JT3150T 175 JD3175 HJD3175 JDC3175 JT3175T 200 JD3200 HJD3200 JDC3200 JT3200T 225 JD3225 HJD3225 JDC3225 JT3225T 250 JD3250 HJD3250 JDC3250 JT3250T 125 JD4125 HJD4125 JDC4125 JT3125T 150 JD4150 HJD4150 JDC4150 JT3150T 175 JD4175 HJD4175 JDC4175 JT3175T 200 JD4200 HJD4200 JDC4200 JT3200T 225 JD4225 HJD4225 JDC4225 JT3225T 250 JD4250 HJD4250 JDC4250 JT3250T 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Three-Pole 90 2 2 Two-Pole 70 2 TA250KB 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Four-Pole 34 TA250KB 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Magnetic trip adjustable 5–10 times continuous ampere rating. 2 Individually packed. 3 Fully rated neutral pole with no protection. 4 Neutral is in right pole. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-159 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2 Types JD, HJD and JDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers— Frame Only 2 Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number HJD2250F JDC2250F 2 2 JD2250F 2 JD3250F Molded Case Switches Three-Pole HJD3250F 2 2 2 Four-Pole JD4250F HJD4250F JDC4250F Type JDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with NonInterchangeable Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed Application Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Complete Circuit Breaker Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Without Line and Load Terminals With Standard Line and Load Terminals Only Catalog Number Catalog Number Two-Pole 2 70 JDB2070W JDB2070 90 JDB2090W JDB2090 250 100 JDB2100W JDB2100 125 JDB2125W JDB2125 2 150 JDB2150W JDB2150 2 175 JDB2175W JDB2175 200 JDB2200W JDB2200 2 225 JDB2225W JDB2225 250 JDB2250W JDB2250 2 Three-Pole 70 JDB3070W JDB3070 2 90 JDB3090W JDB3090 2 100 JDB3100W JDB3100 125 JDB3125W JDB3125 2 150 JDB3150W JDB3150 175 JDB3175W JDB3175 2 200 JDB3200W JDB3200 225 JDB3225W JDB3225 250 JDB3250W JDB3250 250 Suitable for Reverse Feed Use See PageV4-T2-161 for Optional Terminals Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number JD2250KW JDB2250KW TA250KB 1 HJD2250KW HJDB2250KW — JD3250KW JDB3250KW TA250KB 1 HJD3250KW HJDB3250KW — JD4250KW JDB4250KW TA250KB 1 HJD4250KW HJDB4250KW — Four-Pole Notes 1 Individually packed. Molded case switches may open above 2500 amperes. 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-160 Standard Terminals Only Three-Pole 250 2 Complete Circuit Breaker Only Without Line and Load Terminals Two-Pole 600 Vac Rated, 250 Vdc 2 2 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc JDC3250F 2 2 components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489. Two-Pole 2 2 Molded Case Switches Eaton’s molded case switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information Line and Load Terminals Eaton’s line and load terminals provide wire connecting capabilities for specific ranges of continuous current ratings and wire types. All terminals comply with Underwriters Laboratories Standards UL 486A and UL 486B and CSA Standard C22.2 No. 65, or Electrical Bulletin 1165. Unless otherwise specified, JFrame circuit breaker line and load terminals are shipped separately for field installation. The bottom of the standard TA250KB terminal contains a recess that is positioned over the J-Frame circuit breaker terminal conductor. 2 Ordering Information J-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper-only terminals are required, order by catalog number. Specify if factory installation is required. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Collar 2 Collar 2 Nut Slotted Screw T250KB Terminal 2 Slotted Screw 2 TA250KB Terminal (Standard) 2 Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material 2 Wire Type AWG Wire Range/ No. Conductors Metric Wire Range mm2 Catalog Number Cu/AI 4–350 kcmil 25–185 TA250KB 2 Cu 4–350 kcmil 25–185 T250KB 2 2 Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals 250 Aluminum Optional Cu Pressure Terminals 250 Stainless Steel 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-161 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2 Accessories 2 Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. 2 2 JD Frame Accessories 2 Description Reference Page Two-, Three-Pole Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-283 2 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-285 2 Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) Left ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ■ ■ ■ ■ V4-T2-285 ■ ■ ■ ■ Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T2-287 ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-290 ■ ■ ■ ■ Shunt trip—low energy V4-T2-293 ■ ■ ■ ■ 2 Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T2-297 ■ ■ ■ ■ 2 End cap kit V4-T2-316 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Plug nut V4-T2-317 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Control wire terminal kit V4-T2-317 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Multiwire connectors V4-T2-318 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Base mounting hardware V4-T2-319 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Terminal shields V4-T2-320 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Interphase barriers V4-T2-321 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Non-padlockable handle block V4-T2-322 ■ ■ 2 Padlockable handle block V4-T2-322 ■ ■ 2 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-323 ❏ ❏ Cylinder lock V4-T2-323 ❏ ❏ Key interlock kit V4-T2-324 ❏ Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-325 ● ● ● 2 Electrical (solenoid) operator V4-T2-327 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Plug-in adapters V4-T2-327 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Rear connecting studs V4-T2-329 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Panelboard connecting straps V4-T2-330 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Handle mechanisms V4-T2-332 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Handle extension V4-T2-336 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 IQ Energy Sentinel V4-T2-337 ● ● ● 2 Special calibration — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-121 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Marine/naval application — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Center Four-Pole Right 2 Left Center Right Neutral Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) External Accessories ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Legend ■ Applicable in indicated pole position ❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both ● Accessory available/modification available 2 2 V4-T2-162 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Technical Data and Specifications 2 UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 2 Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 240 480 600 125 250 12 JDB 2, 3 65 35 18 — 10 JD 2, 3, 4 65 35 18 — 10 HJD 2, 3, 4 100 65 25 — 22 JDC 3 2, 3, 4 200 100 35 — 22 2 Volts DC 2 2 2 2 IEC 157-1 (P1) Interrupting Capacity Ratings 2 Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 240 380 415 600 125 250 12 JD 2, 3, 4 65 35 35 — — 10 Volts DC HJD 2, 3, 4 100 65 65 — — 22 JDC 2, 3, 4 200 100 100 — — 22 2 2 2 Notes 1 Two-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of three-pole circuit breaker. 2 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA. 3 Current limiting. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-163 2.3 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) JD Frame Number of Poles Width Height Depth 2, 3 4.13 (105.0) 10.00 (254.0) 4.06 (104.1) 2 4 5.50 (139.7) 10.00 (254.0) 4.06 (104.1) 2 JD-Frame, Three-Pole 2 2 Front View Front View Cutout 2 1.56 (39.7) 0.34 R (8.7 R) 2 2 3.94 (100.0) 2 2 0.72 (18.2) 0.50 (12.7) Diameter 3 Megger Holes if Required 0.19 R (4.8) R Side View 4.13 (104.8) 0.78 (19.8) 2.92 (74.2) CL Breaker 2 2 CL Handle 2 0.88 (22.2) 3.33 (84.5) ON 10.00 (254.0) OFF 2.75 (69.9) 1.38 (34.9) 3.50 (88.9) 1.75 (44.5) 2 4.06 (103.2) 2 2 Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg) 2 JD Frame 2 Breaker Type Complete Breaker Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 2 JDB 11.25 (5.1) 12.50 (5.7) — — — — — — — JD 11.25 (5.1) 12.50 (5.7) 13.25 (6.0) 9.00 (4.1) 10.00 (4.5) 10.50 (4.8) 2.00 (0.9) 2.00 (0.9) 2.25 (1.0) 2 HJD 11.25 (5.1) 12.50 (5.7) 13.25 (6.0) 9.00 (4.1) 10.00 (4.5) 10.50 (4.8) 2.00 (0.9) 2.00 (0.9) 2.25 (1.0) JDC 12.25 (5.6) 13.50 (6.1) 14.25 (6.5) 10.00 (4.5) 11.00 (5.0) 11.50 (5.2) 2.00 (0.9) 2.00 (0.9) 2.25 (1.0) Frame Only Trip Unit 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-164 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Typical K-Frame Circuit Breaker 2.3 Contents Description Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module. . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page V4-T2-121 V4-T2-122 V4-T2-123 V4-T2-126 V4-T2-140 V4-T2-157 V4-T2-166 V4-T2-167 V4-T2-187 V4-T2-188 V4-T2-191 V4-T2-192 V4-T2-218 V4-T2-229 V4-T2-244 V4-T2-263 V4-T2-274 V4-T2-276 V4-T2-277 V4-T2-281 V4-T2-312 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) 2 Product Description 2 ● ● ● All Eaton K-Frame Circuit Breakers are HACR rated K-Frame circuit breakers are available as individual components (frame, trip unit, terminals), or factory assembled complete breakers K-Frame circuit breakers with non-interchangeable trip units are suitable for reverse feed use 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-165 2.3 2 2 2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Catalog Number Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. Circuit Breaker/Frame KD 3 400 F 2 2 Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type DK KD KDB HKD HKDB KDC CKD CHKD 2 2 2 Number of Poles 2 = 2 poles 3 = 3 poles 4 = 4 poles 2 Circuit Breaker/Frame Ampere Rating 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 300 350 400 Suffix C = Copper terminals E = 50% protected neutral pole (four-pole electronic trip circuit breaker only) F = Frame only K = High magnetic molded case switch V = 50°C calibration (thermal-magnetic trip units only) W = Without terminals X = Load side terminals only Y = Line side terminals only No suffix number indicates standard load and line side terminals 2 2 Trip Unit 2 KT 3 400 T 2 Trip Unit Type KT = Thermal-magnetic KES = Electronic 2 Suffix Number of Poles 2 = 2 poles 3 = 3 poles 4 = 4 poles 2 2 2 2 2 2 OPTIM Circuit Breaker/Frame 2 KD 3 125 T5 7 W 2 Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type KD HKD KDC CKD CHKD 2 2 2 2 2 Trip Unit Rating/ Plug Ampere Rating 070 1 090 1 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 300 350 400 = Electronic trip unit adjustable short time delay with I2t short delay ramp LSI = Electronic trip unit independently adjustable short time pickup and delay LSG = Electronic trip unit adjustable short time pickup with I2t short delay and ground fault protection LSIG = Electronic trip unit independently adjustable short time pickup and delay and ground fault protection V = 50°C calibration (thermal-magnetic trip units only) E = 50% protected neutral pole (four-pole electronic trip unit only) terminals only T = Trip unit only LS Number of Poles 3 = 3 poles Circuit Breaker/Frame Ampere Rating 125 250 400 Trip Model T5 = Model 550 T10 = Model 1050 Note 1 Ampere rating available with electronic trip unit only. 2 V4-T2-166 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Trip Type 2 = LSI 6 = LSIG 7 = LSIA Suffix W = Without terminals 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Product Selection 2 2 Types KD, HKD and KDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units 2 Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 1 Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 1 Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 1 For Use with Standard or High or Ultra High Interrupting Frames See Page V4-T2-186 for Optional Terminals Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 100 KD2100 HKD2100 KDC2100 KT2100T TA300K 2 125 KD2125 HKD2125 KDC2125 KT2125T TA300K 2 150 KD2150 HKD2150 KDC2150 KT2150T TA300K 2 175 KD2175 HKD2175 KDC2175 KT2175T TA300K 2 200 KD2200 HKD2200 KDC2200 KT2200T TA300K 2 225 KD2225 HKD2225 KDC2225 KT2225T TA300K 2 250 KD2250 HKD2250 KDC2250 KT2250T TA350K 2 300 KD2300 HKD2300 KDC2300 KT2300T TA350K 2 350 KD2350 HKD2350 KDC2350 KT2350T TA350K 2 400 KD2400 HKD2400 KDC2400 KT2400T 2TA400K 3 100 KD3100 HKD3100 KDC3100 KT3100T TA300K 2 125 KD3125 HKD3125 KDC3125 KT3125T TA300K 2 150 KD3150 HKD3150 KDC3150 KT3150T TA300K 2 175 KD3175 HKD3175 KDC3175 KT3175T TA300K 2 200 KD3200 HKD3200 KDC3200 KT3200T TA300K 2 225 KD3225 HKD3225 KDC3225 KT3225T TA300K 2 250 KD3250 HKD3250 KDC3250 KT3250T TA350K 2 300 KD3300 HKD3300 KDC3300 KT3300T TA350K 2 350 KD3350 HKD3350 KDC3350 KT3350T TA350K 2 400 KD3400 HKD3400 KDC3400 KT3400T 3TA400K 3 2 KD4100 HKD4100 KDC4100 KT3100T TA300K 2 2 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Only 1 2 Standard Terminals Only 2 2 2 Two-Pole 2 2 2 2 2 2 Three-Pole 2 2 2 2 2 Four-Pole 100 125 KD4125 HKD4125 KDC4125 KT3125T TA300K 175 KD4175 HKD4175 KDC4175 KT3175T TA300K 2 200 KD4200 HKD4200 KDC4200 KT3200T TA300K 2 225 KD4225 HKD4225 KDC4225 KT3225T TA300K 2 250 KD4250 HKD4250 KDC4250 KT3250T TA350K 2 2 300 KD4300 HKD4300 KDC4300 KT3300T TA350K 350 KD4350 HKD4350 KDC4350 KT3350T TA350K 2 400 KD4400 HKD4400 KDC4400 KT3400T 4TA400K 3 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Magnetic trip adjustable 5–10 times continuous ampere rating. 2 Individually packed. 3 2TA400K, 3TA400K and 4TA400K terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-167 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2 Types KD, HKD and KDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers—Frame Only 2 Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 Two-Pole 2 HKD2400F KDC2400F Three-Pole HKD3400F KDC3400F HKD4400F KDC4400F KD2400F 2 KD3400F 2 KD4400F Four-Pole 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-168 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Types KD, HKD and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit, rating plug, terminals. 2 2 Types KD, HKD and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units—Three-Pole 1 Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Only 3 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac Max. Cont. Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 Catalog Number 125 250 400 KD3400F KD3400F KD3400F HKD3400F HKD3400F HKD3400F Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac KDC3400F KDC3400F KDC3400F Adjustable Rating Plug Standard Options Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I2t Short Delay Ramp Adjustable Short Time Independently Pickup with Adjustable I2t Short Delay and Short Time Ground Fault Pickup and Protection Delay KES3125LS KES3250LS KES3400LS KES3125LSI KES3250LSI KES3400LSI KES3125LSG KES3250LSG KES3400LSG 2 Digitrip 310 Rating Plug Only Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection KES3125LSIG KES3250LSIG KES3400LSIG Ampere Rating Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating Standard Terminals Only See Page V4-T2-186 for Optional Terminals Catalog Number 1KES070T 90 1KES090T 100 1KES100T TA300K 4 110 1KES110T TA300K 4 125 1KES125T 70 2KES070T 100 2KES100T 125 2KES125T TA300K 4 150 2KES150T TA300K 4 160 2KES160T TA300K 4 175 2KES175T TA300K 4 200 2KES200T TA300K 4 225 2KES225T TA300K 4 250 2KES250T 200 4KES200T 225 4KES225T 250 4KES250T 300 4KES300T 350 4KES350T 400 4KES400T 70/90/100/125 A1KES125T1 TA300K 4 70 TA300K 4 TA300K 4 125/150/200/250 A2KES250T1 — — TA350K 4 200/250/300/400 A4KES400T1 TA300K 4 200/240/260/280 A4KES200T5 4 320/340/360/380 A4KES300T5 TA300K 4 TA300K TA300K 4 TA350K 4 3TA400K 5 Notes 1 Three-pole KES Trip Units are for use in three-pole frames only. 2 Ampere rating is established by rating plug. 3 For AC use only. 4 Individually packed. 5 3TA400K and 4TA400K terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-169 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Types KD, HKD and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units—Four Pole 12 2 Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac 2 2 2 2 Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Only 4 Circuit Breaker Frame Only High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac Max. Cont. Ampere Rating at 40°C 3 Catalog Number 2 110 1KES110T TA300K 5 125 1KES125T 70 2KES070T 100 2KES100T 125 2KES125T TA300K 5 2 150 2KES150T TA300K 5 160 2KES160T TA300K 5 2 175 2KES175T TA300K 5 200 2KES200T TA300K 5 225 2KES225T TA300K 5 250 2KES250T 200 4KES200T 2 225 4KES225T 250 4KES250T 2 300 4KES300T 350 4KES350T 400 4KES400T — 2 2 2 400 KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F KES4400LS KES4400LSI — — 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Trip unit includes protected neutral pole. Use corresponding three-pole trip unit if protected neutral pole is not required. 2 Fully rated neutral pole protection is standard. For 50% rated protection on neutral pole, add Suffix E to four-pole trip unit catalog number. 3 Ampere rating is established by rating plug. 4 For AC use only. 5 Individually packed. 6 3TA400K and 4TA400K terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-170 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 70/90/100/125 A1KES125T1 TA300K 5 TA300K 5 — — Catalog Number 1KES100T KES4250LSI — Ampere Rating See Page V4-T2-186 for Optional Terminals 100 KES4250LS KES4125LSI Ampere Rating Fixed Rating Plug Standard Terminals Only 2 KDC4400F KES4125LS Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection 1KES090T HKD4400F KDC4400F Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I2t Short Delay Ramp Adjustable Short Time Independently Pickup with Adjustable I2t Short Short Time Delay and Pickup and Ground Fault Delay Protection 90 KD4400F HKD4400F Options 1KES070T 250 KD4400F Adjustable Rating Plug Standard 70 2 125 Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac Digitrip 310 Rating Plug Only TA300K 5 TA300K 5 125/150/200/250 A2KES250T1 TA300K 5 TA300K 5 TA350K 5 200/250/300/400 A4KES400T1 TA300K 5 200/240/260/280 A4KES200T5 TA350K 5 320/340/360/380 A4KES300T5 TA350K 5 TA300K 5 TA350K 5 4TA400K 6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Types KDB and HKDB with Digitrip 310 Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit Suitable for Reverse Feed Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310 Electronic Tip Unit Less Terminals and Rating Plug—Catalog Number Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40ºC Short Time Range Short Time Delay Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay Number of Poles Digitrip RMS 310 Rating Plug (Order as Separate Items) L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Rating Plug) S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I2t Response) or Adjustable Short Time (Flat Response) I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Time Delay Time to Instantaneous G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat Response) 3 LS 2–8 x In — — — LSI 2–8 x In I–300 ms — — LSG 2–8 x In — Varies by frame 0–500 ms LSIG 2–8 x In 0–300 ms Varies by frame 0–500 ms Fixed KDB3125FT33W KDB3125FT32W KDB3125FT35W KDB3125FT36W 1KES070T Adjustable 2 70/90/100/125 A1KES125T1 1KES125T KDB3250FT33W KDB3250FT32W KDB3250FT35W KDB3250FT36W 2KES070T 2KES090T 125/150/200/250 A2KES250T1 2 2KES125T 2KES150T 2 2KES160T 2KES175T 2 2KES200T 2KES225T 2 2KES250T 3 KDB3400FT33W KDB3400FT32W KDB3400FT35W KDB3400FT36W 4KES200T 4KES225T 4KES250T 4KES300T 4KES350T 4KES400T 2 2 2KES100T 400 2 2 1KES100T 3 2 2 Catalog Number 1KES090T 250 2 2 Type KDB 125 2 200/250/300/400 A4KES400T1 2 200/240/260/280 A4KES200T5 2 320/340/360/380 A4KES300T5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-171 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Types KDB and HKDB with Digitrip 310 Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit Suitable for Reverse Feed, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310 Electronic Tip Unit Less Terminals and Rating Plug—Catalog Number 2 2 2 2 2 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40ºC Short Time Range Short Time Delay Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay Number of Poles Digitrip RMS 310 Rating Plug (Order as Separate Items) L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Rating Plug) S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I2t Response) or Adjustable Short Time (Flat Response) I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Time Delay Time to Instantaneous G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat Response) LS 2–8 x In — — — LSI 2–8 x In I–300 ms — — LSG 2–8 x In — Varies by frame 0–500 ms LSIG 2–8 x In 0–300 ms Varies by frame 0–500 ms Fixed HKDB3125FT33W HKDB3125FT32W HKDB3125FT35W HKDB3125FT36W 1KES070T Catalog Number Type HKDB 125 3 1KES090T 2 2 70/90/100/125 A1KES125T1 1KES100T 1KES125T 250 3 HKDB3250FT33W HKDB3250FT32W HKDB3250FT35W HKDB3250FT36W 2KES070T 2 2KES090T 2 2KES125T 125/150/200/250 A2KES250T1 2KES100T 2KES150T 2 2KES160T 2 2KES200T 2KES175T 2KES225T 2 2 Adjustable 2KES250T 400 3 HKDB3400FT33W HKDB3400FT32W HKDB3400FT35W HKDB3400FT36W 4KES200T 4KES225T 2 4KES250T 2 4KES350T 4KES300T 4KES400T 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-172 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 125/150/200/250 A4KES250T1 200/240/260/280 A4KES200T5 320/340/360/380 A4KES300T5 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Types DK and KDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Suitable for reverse feed application. 2 2 Types DK and KDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 240 Vac Rated, 250 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 600 Vac Rated, 250 Vdc Complete Circuit Breaker Complete Circuit Breaker 2 Without Line and Load Terminals With Line Terminals Only With Standard Line and Load Terminals Only Without Line and Load Terminals With Standard Line and Load Terminals Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 100 — — — KDB2100W KDB2100 125 — — — KDB2125W KDB2125 150 — — — KDB2150W KDB2150 175 — — — KDB2175W KDB2175 200 — — — KDB2200W KDB2200 225 — — — KDB2225W KDB2225 250 DK2250W DK2250Y DK2250 KDB2250W KDB2250 300 DK2300W DK2300Y DK2300 KDB2300W KDB2300 350 DK2350W DK2350Y DK2350 KDB2350W KDB2350 400 DK2400W DK2400Y DK2400 KDB2400W KDB2400 2 100 — — — KDB3100W KDB3100 2 125 — — — KDB3125W KDB3125 150 — — — KDB3150W KDB3150 175 — — — KDB3175W KDB3175 200 — — — KDB3200W KDB3200 225 — — — KDB3225W KDB3225 250 DK3250W DK3250Y DK3250 KDB3250W KDB3250 300 DK3300W DK3300Y DK3300 KDB3300W KDB3300 350 DK3350W DK3350Y DK3350 KDB3350W KDB3350 400 DK3400W DK3400Y DK3400 KDB3400W KDB3400 2 2 Two-Pole 2 2 2 2 2 Three-Pole 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-173 2.3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Three-Pole 2 240 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Complete Circuit Breaker with Standard Line and Load Terminals Complete Circuit Breaker with Standard Line and Load Terminals Complete Circuit Breaker with Standard Line and Load Terminals. Suitable for Reverse Feed Use Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number DK2400K KD2400K KDB2400K — HKD2400K HKDB2400K DK3400K KD3400K KDB3400K — HKD3400K HKDB3400K — KD4400K KDB4400K — HKD4400K HKDB4400K Two-Pole 2 2 components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489. Molded Case Switches 400 2 Series C Molded Case Switches Eaton’s molded case switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers 400 Four-Pole 400 Note Molded case switches may open above 4000 amperes. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-174 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 100% Rated Types CKD and CHKD Electronic Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90°C wire is applied at the 75°C ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. 2 100% Rated Types CKD and CHKD Electronic Circuit Breakers—Three Pole 2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Only Standard Standard Interrupting Capacity High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 480 Vac 65 kAIC at 480 Vac Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Catalog Number 125 CKD3400F 250 400 CKD3400F CKD3400F CHKD3400F CHKD3400F CHKD3400F Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I2t Short Delay Ramp KES3125LS KES3250LS KES3400LS Digitrip 310 Rating Plug Only Adjustable Rating Plug Options Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay KES3125LSI KES3250LSI KES3400LSI 2 Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I2t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection KES3125LSG KES3250LSG KES3400LSG Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection KES3125LSIG KES3250LSIG KES3400LSIG Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating Standard Terminals Only See Page V4-T2-186 for Optional Terminals Ampere Rating Catalog Number 70 1KES070T 90 1KES090T 100 1KES100T TA300K 1 110 1KES110T TA300K 1 125 1KES125T TA300K 1 125 1KES125T 1 70 2KES070T 100 2KES100T 125 2KES125T TA300K 1 150 2KES150T TA300K 1 160 2KES160T TA300K 1 175 2KES175T TA300K 1 200 2KES200T TA300K 1 225 2KES225T TA300K 1 250 2KES250T TA350K 1 200 4KES200T 225 4KES225T 250 4KES250T 300 4KES300T 350 4KES350T 400 4KES400T 70/90/100/125 A1KES125T1 TA300K 1 TA300K 1 TA300K 125/150/200/225 A2KES250T1 TA300K 1 200/250/300/400 A4KES400T1 TA300K 1 220/240/260/280 A4KES200T5 TA350K 1 320/340/360/380 A4KES300T5 TA350K 1 TA300K 1 TA350K 1 3TA400K 2 Notes 1 Individually packed. 2 3TA400K terminal kit contains one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-175 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals. 2 2 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Circuit Breaker Frame Only 2 2 2 Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) ➀ S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C OPTIM 550 2 LSI LSIG LSIA Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Ampere Rating Catalog Number KD3125T57W 70 ORPK125A70 2 90 ORPK125A90 2 100 ORPK125A100 110 ORPK125A110 125 ORPK125A125 125 ORPK025A125 150 ORPK025A150 175 ORPK025A175 2 200 ORPK025A200 2 225 ORPK025A225 250 ORPK025A250 200 ORPK40A200 225 ORPK40A225 250 ORPK40A250 300 ORPK40A300 350 ORPK40A350 400 ORPK40A400 2 2 2 Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac 125 250 KD3125T52W KD3250T52W KD3125T56W KD3250T56W KD3250T57W 2 2 400 KD3400T52W KD3400T56W KD3400T57W 2 2 2 2 Fixed Rating Plug Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-176 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only 2 Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only 2 – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) L S I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 2 OPTIM 550 2 LSI LSIG LSIA Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Ampere Rating Catalog Number HKD3125T57W 70 ORPK125A70 90 ORPK125A90 100 ORPK125A100 110 ORPK125A110 125 ORPK125A125 125 ORPK025A125 150 ORPK025A150 175 ORPK025A175 200 ORPK025A200 225 ORPK025A225 250 ORPK025A250 200 ORPK40A200 225 ORPK40A225 250 ORPK40A250 300 ORPK40A300 350 ORPK40A350 400 ORPK40A400 Fixed Rating Plug 2 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 125 250 400 HKD3125T52W HKD3250T52W HKD3400T52W HKD3125T56W HKD3250T56W HKD3400T56W HKD3250T57W HKD3400T57W 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-177 2.3 2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2 2 Series C Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C OPTIM 550 2 LSI LSIG LSIA Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating Catalog Number 70 ORPK125A70 2 90 ORPK125A90 2 100 ORPK125A100 110 ORPK125A110 125 ORPK125A125 125 ORPK025A125 150 ORPK025A150 175 ORPK025A175 200 ORPK025A200 225 ORPK025A225 250 ORPK025A250 200 ORPK40A200 225 ORPK40A225 2 250 ORPK40A250 300 ORPK40A300 2 350 ORPK40A350 400 ORPK40A400 2 2 Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 125 250 KDC3125T52W KDC3250T52W KDC3125T56W KDC3250T56W KDC3125T57W KDC3250T57W 2 2 2 2 2 2 400 KDC3400T52W KDC3400T56W KDC3400T57W Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-178 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals. 2 2 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Circuit Breaker Frame Only 2 Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2 L S I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 2 OPTIM 1050 2 LSIG LSIA Catalog Number Catalog Number Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating Catalog Number 70 ORPK125A70 90 ORPK125A90 100 ORPK125A100 110 ORPK125A110 125 ORPK125A125 125 ORPK025A125 150 ORPK025A150 175 ORPK025A175 200 ORPK025A200 225 ORPK025A225 250 ORPK025A250 200 ORPK40A200 225 ORPK40A22 250 ORPK40A250 300 ORPK40A300 350 ORPK40A350 400 ORPK40A400 2 Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac 125 250 400 KD3125T106W KD3250T106W KD3400T106W KD3125T107W KD3250T107W KD3400T107W 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Factory sealed. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-179 2.3 2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only L S I G A 2 2 Series C Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) OPTIM 1050 2 LSIG LSIA Catalog Number Catalog Number Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating Catalog Number 70 ORPK125A70 2 90 ORPK125A90 2 100 ORPK125A100 110 ORPK125A110 125 ORPK125A125 125 ORPK025A125 150 ORPK025A150 175 ORPK025A175 200 ORPK025A200 225 ORPK025A225 250 ORPK025A250 200 ORPK40A200 225 ORPK40A225 2 250 ORPK40A250 300 ORPK40A300 2 350 ORPK40A350 400 ORPK40A400 2 2 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 125 250 HKD3125T106W HKD3250T106W HKD3125T107W HKD3250T107W 2 2 2 2 2 2 400 HKD3400T106W HKD3400T107W Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Factory sealed. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-180 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only L S I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 OPTIM 1050 2 LSIG LSIA Catalog Number Catalog Number Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating Catalog Number 250 400 KDC3125T106W KDC3250T106W KDC3400T106W KDC3125T107W 70 ORPK125A70 90 ORPK125A90 100 ORPK125A100 110 ORPK125A110 125 ORPK125A125 KDC3250T107W 125 ORPK025A125 150 ORPK025A150 175 ORPK025A175 200 ORPK025A200 225 ORPK025A225 250 ORPK025A250 KDC3400T107W 200 ORPK40A200 225 ORPK40A225 250 ORPK40A250 300 ORPK40A300 350 ORPK40A350 400 ORPK40A400 2 2 Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 125 2 2 – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Factory sealed. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-181 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals. 2 2 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Circuit Breaker Frame Only 2 L S I G A 2 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) OPTIM 550 2 LSI LSIG LSIA Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Ampere Rating Catalog Number CKD3125T57W 70 ORPK125A70 2 90 ORPK125A90 2 100 ORPK125A100 110 ORPK125A110 2 2 Fixed Rating Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac 125 CKD3125T52W CKD3125T56W 125 ORPK125A125 125 ORPK025A125 150 ORPK025A150 175 ORPK025A175 2 200 ORPK025A200 2 225 ORPK025A225 250 ORPK025A250 200 ORPK40A200 225 ORPK40A225 250 ORPK40A250 300 ORPK40A300 350 ORPK40A350 400 ORPK40A400 2 250 CKD3250T52W CKD3250T56W CKD3250T57W 2 2 400 CKD3400T52W CKD3400T56W CKD3400T57W 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number (refer to Page V4-T2-301). 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-182 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only L S I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 OPTIM 550 2 LSI LSIG LSIA Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Ampere Rating Catalog Number CHKD3125T57W 70 ORPK125A70 90 ORPK125A90 100 ORPK125A100 110 ORPK125A110 125 ORPK125A125 125 ORPK025A125 150 ORPK025A150 175 ORPK025A175 200 ORPK025A200 225 ORPK025A225 250 ORPK025A250 200 ORPK40A200 225 ORPK40A225 250 ORPK40A250 300 ORPK40A300 350 ORPK40A350 400 ORPK40A400 Fixed Rating Plug 250 400 CHKD3125T52W CHKD3250T52W CHKD3400T52W CHKD3125T56W CHKD3250T56W CHKD3400T56W CHKD3250T57W CHKD3400T57W 2 2 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 125 2 2 – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-183 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals. 2 2 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Circuit Breaker Frame Only 2 L S I G A 2 2 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) OPTIM 1050 2 LSIG LSIA Catalog Number Catalog Number Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating Catalog Number 70 ORPK125A70 2 90 ORPK125A90 2 100 ORPK125A100 110 ORPK125A110 125 ORPK125A125 125 ORPK025A125 150 ORPK025A150 175 ORPK025A175 2 200 ORPK025A200 2 225 ORPK025A225 250 ORPK025A250 200 ORPK40A200 225 ORPK40A225 250 ORPK40A250 300 ORPK40A300 350 ORPK40A350 400 ORPK40A400 2 2 Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac 125 250 CKD3125T106W CKD3250T106W CKD3125T107W CKD3250T107W 2 2 400 CKD3400T106W CKD3400T107W 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Factory sealed. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-184 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only L S I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 OPTIM 1050 2 LSIG LSIA Catalog Number Catalog Number Fixed Rating Plug 250 400 CHKD3125T106W CHKD3250T106W CHKD3400T106W CHKD3125T107W CHKD3250T107W CHKD3400T107W 2 2 Ampere Rating Catalog Number 70 ORPK125A70 90 ORPK125A90 100 ORPK125A100 110 ORPK125A110 125 ORPK125A125 125 ORPK025A125 150 ORPK025A150 175 ORPK025A175 200 ORPK025A200 225 ORPK025A225 250 ORPK025A250 200 ORPK40A200 225 ORPK40A225 250 ORPK40A250 300 ORPK40A300 350 ORPK40A350 400 ORPK40A400 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 125 2 2 – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Factory sealed. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-185 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2 Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Guide 2 Line and Load Terminals Eaton’s line and load terminals provide wire connecting capabilities for specific ranges of continuous current ratings and wire types. All terminals comply with Underwriters Laboratories Standards 2 2 2 UL 486A and UL 486B and CSA Standard C22.2 No. 65, or Electrical Bulletin 1165. Unless otherwise specified, K-Frame circuit breaker line and load terminals are shipped separately for field installation. Ordering Information K-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper or Cu/ AI terminals are required, order by catalog number. Specify if factory installation is required. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Tab is 1/4 x.032 TA401K TA400K, T400K TA350K, T350K TA300K, T300K T400KCW, TA400KCW, TA401KCW TA402K, T402K Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG Wire Range/No. Conductors Terminal Terminals with Control Wire Termination Metric Wire Range mm2 Catalog Number Catalog Number Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals 225 Aluminum Cu/AI 3–350/(1) 35–185 TA300K 1 — 2 400 Aluminum Cu/AI 250–500/(1) 120–240 TA350K 1 — 400 Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0–250/(2) 95–120 2TA400K 23 2TA400KCW 23 2 400 Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0–250/(2) 95–120 3TA400K 24 3TA400KCW 24 2 400 Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0–250/(2) 95–120 4TA400K 56 4TA400KCW 56 Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals 2 2 2 2 2 225 Copper Cu 3–350/(1) 35–185 T300K1 — 400 Copper Cu 250–500/(1) 120–240 T350K 1 — 400 Copper Cu 3/0–250/(2) 95–120 2T400K 3 2T400KCW 23 3T400K 4 3T400KCW 24 4T400K 5 4T400KCW 56 70–120 2TA401K 23 2TA401KCW 23 70–240 3TA401K 24 3TA401KCW 24 70–240 4TA401K 56 4TA401KCW 56 2TA402K 23 — 3TA402K 24 — 4TA402K 56 — 2T402K 23 — 3T402K 24 — 4T402K 56 — 400 400 Aluminum Aluminum Cu/AI Cu/AI 2/0–250/(2) or 2/0–500/(1) 500–750/(1) 300–400 2 2 400 Copper Cu 500–750/(1) — 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Individually packed. 2 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. 3 Two-pole kit. 4 Three-pole kit. 5 Four-pole kit. 6 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and three interphase barriers. 2 V4-T2-186 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Accessories 2 Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. 2 2 KD Frame Accessories Reference Page Description Two-Pole 1 Three-Pole Left Right Left ■ Center 2 Four-Pole Right Left ❏ ❏ ■ ❏ ❏ ■ Center Right Neutral Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) 2 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-284 Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break) V4-T2-284 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-286 ■ ■ ■ ■ Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-286 ■ ■ ■ ■ Auxiliary switch (3A, 3B) V4-T2-286 ■ ■ ■ ■ Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T2-287 ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ Shunt trip—standard 2 V4-T2-290 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Shunt trip—low energy 2 Undervoltage release mechanism ■ ■ V4-T2-293 2 PowerNet or zone interlock kit (OPTIM 550) ■ V4-T2-298 2 2 2 2 2 ■ V4-T2-301 External Accessories End cap kit V4-T2-316 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Keeper nut V4-T2-316 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Control wire terminal kit V4-T2-317 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Terminal adapter V4-T2-317 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Multiwire connectors V4-T2-318 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Base mounting hardware V4-T2-319 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Terminal shields V4-T2-321 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Interphase barriers V4-T2-321 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Non-padlockable handle block V4-T2-322 ■ Padlockable handle block V4-T2-322 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-323 Cylinder lock V4-T2-323 Key Interlock kit V4-T2-324 Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-325 ● ● ● Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-325 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Electrical (solenoid) operator V4-T2-326 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Plug-in adapters V4-T2-327 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Rear connecting studs V4-T2-329 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Panelboard connecting straps V4-T2-330 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Handle mechanisms V4-T2-332 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Handle extension V4-T2-336 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● IQ Energy Sentinel V4-T2-337 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit V4-T2-337 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ■ ■ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ■ ❏ ❏ ❏ ● ● ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ■ ■ 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Legend ■ Applicable in indicated pole position ❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both ● Accessory available/modification available 2 Notes 1 Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 2 Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on KES or OPTIM trip units. Standard internal accessories cannot be mounted in right pole on any K-Frame OPTIM trip unites. Special OPTIM ground fault and zone interlock accessories are available for field installation in the right pole of K-Frame 550 OPTIM trip units. Factory installed 2a/2b and bell/aux are available for factory installation. K-Frame breakers equipped with OPTIM 1050 trip units include aux-bell alarm in the right pole. 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-187 2 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C KD Frame Accessories, continued Reference Page Two-Pole 1 Three-Pole Left Right Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral Four-Pole 2 Description 2 OPTIM System Components Three Poles Breaker interface module (BIM) V4-T2-338 2 Digitrip OPTIMizer V4-T2-338 Auxiliary power module V4-T2-338 2 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) 2 Special calibration — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-121 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Marine/naval application — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Legend ■ Applicable in indicated pole position ❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both ● Accessory available/modification available Technical Data and Specifications NEMA/UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 240 277 480 600 250 23 DK 2, 3 65 — — — 10 2 KDB 2, 3, 4 65 — 35 25 10 2 KD 2, 3, 4 65 — 35 25 10 HKD, HKDB 2, 3, 4 100 — 65 35 22 KDC 4 2, 3, 4 200 — 100 65 22 2 2 2 2 2 Volts DC CKD 3 65 — 35 25 — CHKD 3 100 — 65 35 — IEC 157-1 (P1) Interrupting Capacity Ratings Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles 2 DK 2, 3 65 — — — — — 10 KDB 2, 3, 4 65 40 40 — — — 10 2 KD 2, 3, 4 65 40 40 — — — 10 HKD, HKDB 2, 3, 4 100 65 65 — — — 22 2 KDC 2, 3, 4 200 100 100 — — — 22 2 Notes 1 Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 2 Two-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of three-pole circuit breaker. 3 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA. 4 Current limiting. 2 2 Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 240 380 Volts DC 415 440 500 600 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-188 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 250 23 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Specifications Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310 rms sensing Yes Frame Ampere range Interrupting rating at 480 volts 2 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Yes Yes Yes 2 K K K K 2 125–400A 125–400A 125–400A 125–400A 35, 65, 100 (kA) 35, 65, 100 (kA) 35, 65, 100 (kA) 35, 65, 100 (kA) 2 Ordering options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG LSI, LSI(A), LSIG LSI(A), LSIG 2 Fixed rated plug (In) Yes Yes Yes Yes Overtemperature trip Yes Yes Yes Yes Adjustable rating plug (In) Yes Yes No No Long delay pickup 0.5–1.0 (In) 1 0.5–1.0 (In) 1 0.4–1.0 x (In) 0.4–1.0 x (In) Long delay time I2t 12 seconds 12 seconds 2–24 seconds 2–24 seconds Long delay time I4t No No 1–5 seconds 1–5 seconds Breaker Type Protection 2 2 Long Delay Protection (L) 2 2 2 Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes Yes Yes High load alarm No No 0.5–1.0 x Ir 0.5–1.0 x Ir 2 2 Short Delay Protection (S) Short delay pickup 200–800% x (In) 200–800% x (In) 150–800% x (Ir) 150–800% x (Ir) Short delay time I2t 100 ms No 100–500 ms 100–500 ms Short delay time flat No Inst–300 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms Short delay time zone selective interlocking No No Yes 2 Yes Instantaneous pickup No 200–800% x (In) 200–800% x (In) 200–800% x (In) Discriminator No No Yes Yes Instantaneous override Yes Yes Yes Yes Ground fault alarm No No 20–100% x (Is) 20–100% x (Is) Ground fault pickup Varies by frame 6 Varies by frame 6 20–100% x (Is) 20–100% x (Is) Ground fault delay I2t No No 100–500 ms 100–500 ms Ground fault delay flat Inst–500 ms Inst–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms Ground fault zone selective interlocking No No Yes 2 Yes Ground fault thermal memory Yes Yes Yes Yes 2 2 2 2 Instantaneous Protection (I) 2 2 Ground Fault Protection (G) 2 2 2 System Diagnostics Status LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes Cause of trip LEDs No No Yes Yes Magnitude of trip information No No Yes Yes Remote signal contact—ground alarm Yes 3 Yes 3 Yes 2 Yes Local auxiliary and bell alarm contact Optional Optional Optional Included 2 2 2 Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm Is = Sensor Rating In = Rating Plug Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting 2 2 Notes 1 Adjust by rating plug. 2 Zone interlock kit. 3 With separate ground fault alarm unit (GFAU). 4 By OPTIMizer/BIM. 5 Eaton’s PowerNet kit. 6 400 ampere frame 1–5 x I (80A). g 250 ampere frame 1–5 x Ig (50A). 125 ampere frame 1–5 x Ig (25A). 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-189 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Specifications, continued Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Yes 1 Yes 1 2 System Monitoring 2 Current No No Yes Yes Power and energy No No No Yes Power quality—harmonics No No No Yes Power factor No No No Yes No No Yes 2 Yes Test set Test set OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet 2 2 2 Digital display No Communications PowerNet 2 Testing 2 Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm Is = Sensor Rating In = Rating Plug Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting 2 2 2 No Testing method Notes By OPTIMizer/BIM. 2 Eaton’s PowerNet kit. 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-190 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Dimensions and Weights 2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 KD Frame Number of Poles Width Height Depth 2, 3 5.50 (149.7) 10.13 (257.3) 4.10 (104.1) 4 7.22 (183.4) 10.13 (257.3) 4.10 (104.1) 2 2 2 KD-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole 2 4.31 (109.6) 5.49 (139.4) Front Cover Cutout 2 Side View Front View 2 0.34 R (8.7 R) 2 3.75 (95.3) 2 CL Handle 0.83 (21.0) 0.19 R (4.8 R) 2 1.64 (41.7) ON 1.25 (31.8) 2 10.13 (257.2) 1.31 (33.3) OFF 2 2.63 (66.7) 2.39 (60.7) 4.78 (121.5) 2 2 2 2 Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs (kg) 2 KD Frame Complete Breaker Breaker Type Two-Pole Trip Unit 1 Frame Only Three-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Two-Pole 2 Three-Pole DK 10.0 (4.5) 11.5 (5.2) — — — — KDB 10.0 (4.5) 11.5 (5.2) — — — — KD 10.0 (4.5) 11.5 (5.2) 7.5 (3.4) 8.5 (3.9) 1.5 (0.7) 1.5 (0.7) HKD, HKDB 10.0 (4.5) 11.5 (5.2) 7.5 (3.4) 8.5 (3.9) 1.5 (0.7) 1.5 (0.7) KDC 10.0 (4.5) 11.5 (5.2) 7.5 (3.4) 8.5 (3.9) 1.5 (0.7) 1.5 (0.7) 2 2 2 2 Note 1 Weights shown are for thermal-magnetic trip units. Three-pole electronic trip units weigh 2.5 lbs (1.1 kg). 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-191 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Contents Typical L-Frame Circuit Breaker Description 2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) 2 Product Description 2 ● ● 2 2 2 2 ● All Eaton L-Frame circuit breakers are HACR rated L-Frame circuit breakers are available as individual components (frame, trip unit, terminals), or factory assembled complete breakers L-Frame circuit breakers with non-interchangeable trip units are suitable for reverse feed use Standards and Certifications ● CE marked 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-192 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Page V4-T2-121 V4-T2-122 V4-T2-123 V4-T2-126 V4-T2-140 V4-T2-157 V4-T2-165 V4-T2-193 V4-T2-194 V4-T2-212 V4-T2-214 V4-T2-217 V4-T2-218 V4-T2-229 V4-T2-244 V4-T2-263 V4-T2-274 V4-T2-276 V4-T2-277 V4-T2-281 V4-T2-312 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Catalog Number Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. 2 2 Circuit Breaker/Frame LD 3 600 F Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type LDB LD HLD LDC CLD CHLD CLDC Number of Poles 2 = 2 poles 3 = 3 poles 4 = 4 poles Circuit Breaker/ Frame Ampere Rating 300 350 400 450 500 600 2 2 Suffix C = Copper terminals F = Frame only K = High magnetic molded case switch V = 50°C (thermal-magnetic trip units only) W = Without terminals X = Load side terminals only Y = Line side terminals only 2 2 2 2 2 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 2 LT 3 400 T Trip Unit Type LT = Thermal Magnetic Number of Poles 2 = 2 poles 3 = 3 poles 4 = 4 poles Trip Unit Rating/Plug Ampere Rating 300 350 400 450 500 600 2 Suffix T = Trip unit thermal-magnetic fixed thermal adjustable magnetic V = 50°C calibration (thermal-magnetic trip units only) 2 2 2 2 OPTIM Circuit Breaker/Frame 2 LD 3 125 T5 7 W Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type LD HLD LDC CLD CHLD CLDC 2 Number of Poles 3 = 3 poles 2 Trip Type 2 = LSI (550 only) 6 = LSIG 7 = LSIA Circuit Breaker/ Frame Ampere Rating 125 (Available on Model 1050 only) 250 (Available on Model 1050 only) 400 600 2 Suffix W = Without terminals 2 2 Trip Model T5 = Model 550 T10 = Model 1050 2 2 Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit 2 LES 3 600 LS P Trip Unit Type LES = Electronic Suffix Number of Poles 3 = 3 poles 4 = 4 poles Trip Unit Ampere Rating 600 LS LSI LSG LSIG 2 Suffix P = 100% protected neutral on four-pole trip unit 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-193 2.3 2 2 Types LD, HLD and LDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units 2 2 2 Series C Product Selection 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 1 Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Factory Assembled Factory Assembled Circuit Circuit Consisting of Frame, Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Trip Unit and Terminals For Use with Standard or High or Ultra High Interrupting Frames See Page V4-T2-211 for Optional Terminals Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Only Standard Terminals Only Catalog Number Two-Pole 300 LD2300 HLD2300 LDC2300 LT2300T TA602LD 2 350 LD2350 HLD2350 LDC2350 LT2350T TA602LD 2 400 LD2400 HLD2400 LDC2400 LT2400T TA602LD 2 450 LD2450 HLD2450 LDC2450 LT2450T TA602LD 2 2 500 LD2500 HLD2500 LDC2500 LT2500T TA602LD 2 2 600 LD2600 HLD2600 LDC2600 LT2600T 2TA603LDK 3 Three-Pole 2 2 2 300 LD3300 HLD3300 LDC3300 LT3300T TA602LD 2 350 LD3350 HLD3350 LDC3350 LT3350T TA602LD 2 2 400 LD3400 HLD3400 LDC3400 LT3400T TA602LD 2 450 LD3450 HLD3450 LDC3450 LT3450T TA602LD 2 500 LD3500 HLD3500 LDC3500 LT3500T TA602LD 2 LD3600 HLD3600 LDC3600 LT3600T 3TA603LDK 3 2 2 600 Four-Pole 4 2 300 LD4300 HLD4300 LDC4300 LT4300T TA602LD 2 350 LD4350 HLD4350 LDC4350 LT4350T TA602LD 2 2 400 LD4400 HLD4400 LDC4400 LT4400T TA602LD 2 450 LD4450 HLD4450 LDC4450 LT4450T TA602LD 2 2 500 LD4500 HLD4500 LDC4500 LT4500T TA602LD 2 600 LD4600 HLD4600 LDC4600 LT4600T 4TA603LDK 3 2 2 2 2 2 Types LD, HLD and LDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers—Frame Only Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number HLD2600F LDC2600F HLD3600F LDC3600F HLD4600F LDC4600F Two-Pole 2 LD2600F 2 LD3600F Three-Pole 2 Four-Pole 2 Notes 1 Magnetic trip range 5–10 times continuous ampere rating. 2 Individually packed. 3 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. 4 Neutral is in right pole. 2 2 LD4600F 2 V4-T2-194 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Types LD, HLD and LDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit, rating plug, terminals. 2 2 Types LD, HLD and LDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Only 2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Standard High Interrupting Interrupting Capacity Capacity 600 Vac Maximum 600 Vac Rated Continuous Rated 35 kAIC at 65 kAIC at Ampere 480 Vac 480 Vac Rating at 40°C 1 Catalog Number Three-Pole 3 600 LD3600F HLD3600F Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac LDC3600F Adjustable Rating Plug L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Rating Plug) S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I2t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response) I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat Response) Ampere Fixed Rating Plug Catalog Number Rating Catalog Number 300 6LES300T 350 6LES350T 400 6LES400T 450 6LES450T 500 6LES500T 600 6LES600T 300 6LES300T 350 6LES350T 400 6LES400T 450 6LES450T 500 6LES500T 600 6LES600T LES3600LS LES3600LSI LES3600LSG 2 Digitrip RMS 310 Rating Plug Only LES3600LSIG Ampere Rating 300/400/ 500/600 A6LES600T1 420/440/ 460/480 A6LES400T5 Standard Terminals Only See Page V4-T2-211 for Optional Terminals LD4600F HLD4600F LDC4600F LES4600LS LES4600LSI — — TA602LD 1 TA602LD 1 TA602LD 1 TA602LD 1 520/540/ 560/580 A6LES500T5 3TA603LDK 4 300/400/ 500/600 A6LES600T1 TA602LD 2 420/440/ 460/480 A6LES400T5 520/540/ 560/580 A6LES500T5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Four-Pole 3 600 2 TA602LD 2 TA602LD 2 TA602LD 2 4TA603LDK 4 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Individually packed. 2 For AC use only. 3 Neutral is in right pole. 4 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-195 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Types LDB, HLDB and LDCB Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed 2 Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310 Electronic Tip Unit Less Terminals and Rating Plug—Catalog Number 2 L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Rating Plug) S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I2t Response) or Adjustable Short Time (Flat Response) I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Time Delay Time to Instantaneous G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat Response) 2 2 2 2 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40ºC Short Time Range Short Time Delay Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay Number of Poles Digitrip RMS 310 Rating Plug (Order as Separate Items) LS LSI LSG LSIG Fixed 2–8 x In — — — 2–8 x In I–300 ms — — 2–8 x In — Varies by frame 0–500 ms 2–8 x In 0–300 ms Varies by frame 0–500 ms Catalog Number LDB3600FT35W 6LES300T Type LDB, HLDB and LDCB with Digitrip 310 Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit 600 3 LDB3600FT33W LDB3600FT32W LDB3600FT35W 6LES350T 2 6LES400T 2 6LES500T 2 Adjustable 6LES450T 6LES600T 600 3 HLDB3600FT33W HLDB3600FT32W HLDB3600FT35W HLDB3600FT36W 6LES300T 6LES350T 2 6LES400T 2 6LES450T 2 6LES600T 6LES500T 600 3 LDCB3600FT33W LDCB3600FT32W LDCB3600FT35W LDCB3600FT36W 6LES300T 2 6LES350T 2 6LES450T 6LES400T 6LES500T 2 6LES600T 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-196 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 300/400/500/600 A6LES600T1 420/440/460/480 A6LES400T5 520/540/560/580 A6LES500T5 300/400/500/600 A6LES600T1 420/440/460/480 A6LES400T5 520/540/560/580 A6LES500T5 300/400/500/600 A6LES600T1 420/440/460/480 A6LES400T5 520/540/560/580 A6LES500T5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 100% Rated Types CLD, CHLD and CLDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90°C wire is applied at the 75°C ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit, rating plug and terminals. Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 1 Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Only Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac Standard Options Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I2t Short Delay Ramp Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Ground Fault Protection 2 Digitrip RMS 310 Rating Plug Only Adjustable Rating Plug Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I2t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Catalog Number Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection Ampere Rating Catalog Number LES3600LSIG 300 6LES300T 350 6LES350T 400 6LES400T 450 6LES450T 500 6LES500T 600 6LES600T Standard Terminals Only Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating See Page V4-T2-211 for Optional Terminals CLD3600F CHLD3600F CLDC3600F LES3600LS LES3600LSI LES3600LSG 300/400/500/600 A6LES600T1 420/440/460/480 A6LES400T5 520/540/560/580 A6LES500T5 2 2 2 2 2 Three-Pole 600 2 2 100% Rated Types CLD, CHLD and CLDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Circuit Breaker Frame Only 2 TA602LD 2 TA602LD 2 TA602LD 2 TA602LD 2 3TA603LDK 3 3TA603LDK 3 Notes 1 Ampere rating is established by rating plug. 2 Individually packed. 3 3TA603LDK terminal kit contains one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-197 2.3 2 2 2 2 Series C Type LDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with NonInterchangeable Trip Units 1 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers 600 Vac Rated, 250 Vdc Complete Circuit Breaker Without Line and Load Terminals With Standard Line and Load Terminals Only Catalog Number Catalog Number 300 LDB2300W LDB2300 350 LDB2350W LDB2350 400 LDB2400W LDB2400 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating Molded Case Switches Eaton’s molded case switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489. Two-Pole 2 450 LDB2450W LDB2450 2 500 LDB2500W LDB2500 600 LDB2600W LDB2600 2 Three-Pole 300 LDB3300W LDB3300 2 350 LDB3350W LDB3350 400 LDB3400W LDB3400 2 450 LDB3450W LDB3450 2 500 LDB3500W LDB3500 600 LDB3600W LDB3600 Molded Case Switches Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Standard Terminals Only Circuit Breaker Only without Line and Load Terminals See Page V4-T2-211 for Optional Terminals Catalog Number Catalog Number Two-Pole 600 LD2600WK 2TA603LDK 600 LDB2600WK 1 2TA603LDK 600 HLD2600WK 2TA603LDK Three-Pole 600 LD3600WK 3TA603LDK 600 LDB3600WK 1 3TA603LDK 2 600 HLD3600WK 3TA603LDK 2 600 LD4600WK 4TA603LDK 2 600 LDB4600WK 1 4TA603LDK 600 HLD4600WK 4TA603LDK 2 Notes 1 Factory sealed—suitable for reverse feed application. 2 Molded case switch will trip above 6000 amperes. Four-Pole 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-198 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals. 2 2 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug Circuit Breaker Frame Only 2 Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2 I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 2 OPTIM 550 2 LSI LSIG LSIA Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Ampere Rating Catalog Number LD3125T57W — ORPL125A070 — ORPL125A090 — ORPL125A100 — ORPL125A110 — ORPL125A125 — ORPL025A125 — ORPL025A150 — ORPL025A175 — ORPL025A200 — ORPL025A225 — ORPL025A250 200 ORPL40A200 225 ORPL40A225 250 ORPL40A250 300 ORPL40A300 350 ORPL40A350 400 ORPL40A400 300 ORPL60A300 350 ORPL60A350 400 ORPL60A400 500 ORPL60A500 600 ORPL60A600 Fixed Rating Plug 2 Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac 125 250 400 600 LD3125T52W LD3250T52W LD3400T52W LD3600T52W LD3125T56W LD3250T56W LD3400T56W LD3600T56W LD3250T57W LD3400T57W LD3600T57W 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-199 2.3 2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only 2 Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2 2 Series C Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C OPTIM 550 2 LSI LSIG LSIA Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating Catalog Number Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 70 ORPL125A070 2 90 ORPL125A090 2 100 ORPL125A100 110 ORPL125A110 2 125 250 HLD3125T52W HLD3250T52W HLD3125T56W HLD3250T56W HLD3125T57W HLD3250T57W 2 2 2 125 ORPL125A125 125 ORPL025A125 150 ORPL025A150 175 ORPL025A175 200 ORPL025A200 225 ORPL025A225 250 ORPL025A250 200 ORPL40A200 225 ORPL40A225 2 250 ORPL40A250 300 ORPL40A300 2 350 ORPL40A350 2 2 400 600 HLD3400T52W HLD3600T52W HLD3400T56W HLD3600T56W HLD3400T57W HLD3600T57W 2 2 2 2 400 ORPL40A400 300 ORPL60A300 350 ORPL60A350 400 ORPL60A400 500 ORPL60A500 600 ORPL60A600 Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-200 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only 2 Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only 2 – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) L S I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 2 OPTIM 550 2 LSI LSIG LSIA Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating Catalog Number — ORPL125A070 — ORPL125A090 — ORPL125A100 — ORPL125A110 — ORPL125A125 — ORPL025A125 — ORPL025A150 — ORPL025A175 — ORPL025A200 — ORPL025A225 — ORPL025A250 200 ORPL40A200 225 ORPL40A225 250 ORPL40A250 300 ORPL40A300 350 ORPL40A350 400 ORPL40A400 300 ORPL60A300 350 ORPL60A350 400 ORPL60A400 500 ORPL60A500 600 ORPL60A600 2 Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 125 250 400 600 LDC3125T52W LDC3250T52W LDC3400T52W LDC3600T52W LDC3125T56W LDC3250T56W LDC3400T56W LDC3600T56W LDC3125T57W LDC3250T57W LDC3400T57W LDC3600T57W 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-201 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals. 2 2 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug Circuit Breaker Frame Only 2 L S I G A 2 2 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) OPTIM 1050 23 LSIG LSIA Catalog Number Catalog Number Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating Catalog Number 70 ORPL125A070 2 90 ORPL125A090 2 100 ORPL125A100 110 ORPL125A110 125 ORPL125A125 125 ORPL025A125 150 ORPL025A150 175 ORPL025A175 2 200 ORPL025A200 2 225 ORPL025A225 250 ORPL025A250 200 ORPL40A200 225 ORPL40A225 250 ORPL40A250 300 ORPL40A300 350 ORPL40A350 400 ORPL40A400 300 ORPL60A300 2 350 ORPL60A350 400 ORPL60A400 2 500 ORPL60A500 600 ORPL60A600 2 2 Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac 125 250 LD3125T106W LD3250T106W LD3125T107W LD3250T107W 2 2 400 LD3400T106W LD3400T107W 2 2 2 2 2 2 600 LD3600T106W LD3600T107W Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-202 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only 2 Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only 2 – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) L S I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 2 OPTIM 1050 23 LSIG LSIA Catalog Number Catalog Number Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating Catalog Number 70 ORPL125A070 90 ORPL125A090 100 ORPL125A100 110 ORPL125A110 125 ORPL125A125 125 ORPL025A125 150 ORPL025A150 175 ORPL025A175 200 ORPL025A200 225 ORPL025A225 250 ORPL025A250 200 ORPL40A200 225 ORPL40A225 250 ORPL40A250 300 ORPL40A300 350 ORPL40A350 400 ORPL40A400 300 ORPL60A300 350 ORPL60A350 400 ORPL60A400 500 ORPL60A500 600 ORPL60A600 2 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 125 250 400 600 HLD3125T106W HLD3250T106W HLD3400T106W HLD3600T106W HLD3125T107W HLD3250T107W HLD3400T107W HLD3600T107W 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-203 2.3 2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only L S I G A 2 2 Series C Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) OPTIM 1050 23 LSIG LSIA Catalog Number Catalog Number Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating Catalog Number 70 ORPL125A070 2 90 ORPL125A090 2 100 ORPL125A100 110 ORPL125A110 125 ORPL125A125 125 ORPL025A125 150 ORPL025A150 175 ORPL025A175 200 ORPL025A200 225 ORPL025A225 250 ORPL025A250 200 ORPL40A200 225 ORPL40A225 2 250 ORPL40A250 300 ORPL40A300 2 350 ORPL40A350 400 ORPL40A400 300 ORPL60A300 350 ORPL60A350 400 ORPL60A400 500 ORPL60A500 600 ORPL60A600 2 2 Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 125 250 LDC3125T106W LDC3250T106W LDC3125T107W LDC3250T107W 2 2 2 2 2 400 600 LDC3400T106W LDC3600T106W LDC3400T107W LDC3600T107W 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-204 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals. 2 2 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Circuit Breaker Frame Only 2 Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2 L S I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 2 OPTIM 550 2 LSI LSIG LSIA Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Ampere Rating Catalog Number CLD3125T57W 70 ORPL125A070 90 ORPL125A090 100 ORPL125A100 110 ORPL125A110 125 ORPL125A125 125 ORPL025A125 150 ORPL025A150 175 ORPL025A175 200 ORPL025A200 225 ORPL025A225 250 ORPL025A250 200 ORPL40A200 225 ORPL40A225 250 ORPL40A250 300 ORPL40A300 350 ORPL40A350 400 ORPL40A400 300 ORPL60A300 350 ORPL60A350 400 ORPL60A400 500 ORPL60A500 600 ORPL60A600 Fixed Rating Plug 2 Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac 125 250 400 600 CLD3125T52W CLD3250T52W CLD3400T52W CLD3600T52W CLD3125T56W CLD3250T56W CLD3400T56W CLD3600T56W CLD3125T57W CLD3400T57W CLD3600T57W 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-205 2.3 2 Series C 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only 2 L S I G A 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) OPTIM 550 2 LSI LSIG LSIA Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Ampere Rating Catalog Number CHLD3125T57W 70 ORPL125A070 2 90 ORPL125A090 2 100 ORPL125A100 110 ORPL125A125 125 ORPL125A125 125 ORPL025A125 150 ORPL025A150 175 ORPL025A175 200 ORPL025A200 225 ORPL025A225 250 ORPL025A250 200 ORPL40A200 225 ORPL40A225 2 250 ORPL40A250 350 ORPL40A350 2 400 ORPL40A400 300 ORPL60A300 350 ORPL60A350 400 ORPL60A400 500 ORPL60A500 600 ORPL60A600 2 2 2 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 125 250 CHLD3125T52W CHLD3250T52W CHLD3125T56W CHLD3250T56W CHLD3125T57W 2 2 2 2 2 400 600 CHLD3400T52W CHLD3600T52W CHLD3400T56W CHLD3600T56W CHLD3400T57W CHLD3600T57W 2 2 2 2 Fixed Rating Plug Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-206 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only 2 Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only 2 – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) L S I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 OPTIM 550 2 LSI LSIG LSIA Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating Catalog Number 70 ORPL125A070 90 ORPL125A090 100 ORPL125A100 110 ORPL125A110 125 ORPL125A125 125 ORPL025A125 150 ORPL025A150 175 ORPL025A175 200 ORPL025A200 225 ORPL025A225 250 ORPL025A250 200 ORPL40A200 225 ORPL40A225 250 ORPL40A250 300 ORPL40A300 350 ORPL40A350 400 ORPL40A400 300 ORPL60A300 350 ORPL60A350 400 ORPL60A400 500 ORPL60A500 600 ORPL60A600 2 Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 125 250 400 600 CLDC3125T52W CLDC3250T52W CLDC3400T52W CLDC3600T52W CLDC3125T56W CLDC3250T56W CLDC3400T56W CLDC3600T56W CLDC3125T57W CLDC3125T57W CLDC3400T57W CLDC3600T57W 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-207 2.3 2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only L S I G A 2 2 Series C 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) OPTIM 1050 23 LSIG LSIA Catalog Number Catalog Number Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating Catalog Number 70 ORPL125A070 2 90 ORPL125A090 2 100 ORPL125A100 110 ORPL125A110 125 ORPL125A125 125 ORPL025A125 150 ORPL025A150 175 ORPL025A175 200 ORPL025A200 225 ORPL025A225 250 ORPL025A250 200 ORPL40A200 225 ORPL40A225 2 250 ORPL40A250 300 ORPL40A300 2 350 ORPL40A350 400 ORPL40A400 300 ORPL60A300 350 ORPL60A350 400 ORPL60A400 500 ORPL60A500 600 ORPL60A600 2 2 Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac 125 250 CLD3125T106W CLD3250T106W CLD3125T107W CLD3250T107W 2 2 2 2 2 400 600 CLD3400T106W CLD3600T106W CLD3400T107W CLD3600T107W 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-208 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only L S I G A Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only 2 – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2 2 OPTIM 1050 23 LSIG LSIA Catalog Number Catalog Number Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating Catalog Number 70 ORPL125A070 90 ORPL125A090 100 ORPL125A100 110 ORPL125A110 125 ORPL125A125 125 ORPL025A125 150 ORPL025A150 175 ORPL025A175 200 ORPL025A200 225 ORPL025A225 250 ORPL025A250 200 ORPL40A200 225 ORPL40A225 250 ORPL40A250 300 ORPL40A300 350 ORPL40A350 400 ORPL40A400 300 ORPL60A300 350 ORPL60A350 400 ORPL60A400 500 ORPL60A500 600 ORPL60A600 2 2 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 125 250 400 600 CHLD3125T106W CHLD3250T106W CHLD3400T106W CHLD3600T106W CHLD3125T107W CHLD3250T107W CHLD3400T107W CHLD3600T107W 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-209 2.3 2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only L S I G A 2 2 Series C 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) OPTIM 1050 23 LSIG LSIA Catalog Number Catalog Number Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating Catalog Number 70 ORPL125A070 2 90 ORPL125A090 2 100 ORPL125A100 110 ORPL125A110 2 2 Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 125 250 CLDC3125T106W CLDC3250T106W CLDC3125T107W CLDC3250T107W 2 2 2 125 ORPL125A125 125 ORPL025A125 150 ORPL025A150 175 ORPL025A175 200 ORPL025A200 225 ORPL025A225 250 ORPL025A250 200 ORPL40A200 225 ORPL40A225 2 250 ORPL40A250 300 ORPL40A300 2 350 ORPL40A350 2 2 400 600 CLDC3400T106W CLDC3600T106W CLDC3400T107W CLDC3600T107W 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-210 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 400 ORPL40A400 300 ORPL60A300 350 ORPL60A350 400 ORPL60A400 500 ORPL60A500 600 ORPL60A600 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information Line and Load Terminals Eaton’s line and load terminals provide wire connecting capabilities for specific ranges of continuous current ratings and wire types. All terminals comply with Underwriters Laboratories Standards UL 486A and UL 486B and CSA Standard C22.2 No. 65M. Unless otherwise specified, 2 L-Frame circuit breaker line and load terminals are shipped separately for field installation. The wire connecting terminal is secured with two panhead, slotted screws and lockwashers that can be checked for the correct torque loading or retightened from the front of the circuit breaker before installation of the conductors. (Applies to all styles.) The circuit breaker line/load terminal conductors are positioned in the conducting holes in the wire connecting terminal and are secured with recessed socket screws that are tightened to the correct torque loading from the front of the circuit breaker. Ordering Information L-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper terminals are required, order by catalog Number. Specify if factory installation is required. 2 2 2 2 2 2 Terminals 2 TA401LD or TA603LD Terminal (Step-Type Terminal Requires Terminal Cover and Warning Label. See Inset.) Pan-Head Screws and Lockwashers TA450LD or TA602LD or T602LD Terminal 2 Pan-Head Screws and Lockwashers (Installed before Cable Clamping Screws) 2 2 Terminal Cover 2 2 2 2 Warning Label 2 Retainer 2 Screws Circuit Breaker Line Terminal Cover 2 2 Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Wire Type Terminals with Control Wire Termination Terminal AWG Wire Range/Number of Conductors Metric Wire Range mm2 Poles Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 2 2 Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals 2 400 Aluminum Cu/AI 4/0–600 (1) 120–300 Two-pole kit 1 2TA401LDK — 400 Aluminum Cu/AI 4/0–600 (1) 120–300 Three-pole kit 1 3TA401LDK — 400 Aluminum Cu/AI 4/0–600 (1) 120–300 Four-pole kit 1 4TA401LDK — 450 Aluminum Cu/AI 4–4/0 (2) 25–95 2 TA450LD — 500 Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0–350 (2) 95–150 2 TA602LD TA602LDCW 600 Aluminum Cu/AI 400–500 (2) 185–240 Two-pole kit 1 2TA603LDK 2TA603LDKCW 600 Aluminum Cu/AI 400–500 (2) 185–240 Three-pole kit 1 3TA603LDK 3TA603LDKCW 600 Aluminum Cu/AI 400–500 (2) 185–240 Four-pole kit 1 4TA603LDK 4TA603LDKCW 2 120–250 2 T602LD T602LDCW 2 2 2 2 Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals 600 Copper Cu 250–350 (2) 2 Notes 1 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. 2 Individually packed. 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-211 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2 Accessories 2 Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. 2 2 LD Frame Accessories 2 Description 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Reference Page Two-Pole 1, Three-Pole Four-Pole Left Right Left Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-284 ■ ■ ■ ■ Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break) V4-T2-284 ■ ■ ■ ■ Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-286 ■ ■ ■ ■ Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-286 ■ ■ ■ ■ Auxiliary switch (3A, 3B) V4-T2-286 ■ ■ ■ ■ Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) and alarm switch combination V4-T2-288 ■ ■ ■ ■ Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) and alarm switch combination V4-T2-288 ■ ■ ■ ■ Shunt trip—standard 4 V4-T2-290 ■ ■ ■ ■ V4-T2-293 ■ ■ ■ ■ Undervoltage release mechanism 4 V4-T2-299 ■ ■ ■ ■ Eaton PowerNet communications kit (OPTIM 550) V4-T2-301 Center Center Right Neutral 2 Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) 3 Shunt trip—low energy 4 ■ External Accessories End cap kit V4-T2-316 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Control wire terminal kit V4-T2-317 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Base mounting hardware V4-T2-319 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Terminal shields V4-T2-321 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Interphase barriers V4-T2-321 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Non-padlockable handle block V4-T2-322 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-323 ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ 2 Key interlock kit V4-T2-324 ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-325 ● ● ● Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-325 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Electrical (motor) operator V4-T2-326 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Plug-in adapters V4-T2-328 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Rear connecting studs V4-T2-329 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Panelboard connecting straps V4-T2-330 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Handle mechanisms V4-T2-332 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Handle extension V4-T2-336 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit V4-T2-337 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 2 Legend ■ Applicable in indicated pole position ❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both ● Accessory available/modification available 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ■ ■ Notes Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 2 Refer to Eaton for appropriate neutral pole accessory combinations. 3 OPTIM model 1050 is factory sealed and does not have the right pole space available for accessories. 4 Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on LES or OPTIM trip units. Standard non-tripping internal accessories can be mounted in the left or right poles of LES and 550 OPTIM trip units. 2 2 V4-T2-212 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C LD Frame Accessories, continued Description Reference Page Two-Pole 1, Three-Pole Left Center Right 2 Four-Pole Left Center Right Neutral 2 OPTIM System Components Three Poles Ground fault alarm unit V4-T2-337 Potential transformer module V4-T2-337 Breaker interface module (BIM) V4-T2-338 Digitrip OPTIMizer V4-T2-338 Auxiliary power module V4-T2-338 2 2 2 2 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Special calibration — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-121 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Marine/naval application — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 2 2 2 Legend ■ Applicable in indicated pole position ❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both ● Accessory available/modification available 2 2 Notes Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 2 Refer to Eaton for appropriate neutral pole accessory combinations. 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-213 2.3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Technical Data and Specifications UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1 Interrupting Capacity (kA rms Symmetrical Amperes) Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 240 277 480 600 125 250 23 LDB 2, 3 65 — 35 25 — 22 LD 2, 3, 4 65 — 35 25 — 22 CLD 4 2, 3, 4 65 — 35 25 — — HLD, HLDB 2, 3, 4 100 — 65 35 — 25 4 2, 3, 4 100 — 65 35 — — LDC, LDCB 5 2, 3, 4 200 — 100 50 — 30 CLDC 45 2, 3, 4 200 — 100 50 — — CHLD IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 2 2 2 Volts DC 1 Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles 240 Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics LDB 2, 3 85 85 45 45 20 10 20 10 10 20 10 415 250 23 690 2 LD 2, 3, 4 85 85 45 45 20 4 2, 3, 4 85 85 45 45 20 10 — — 2 HLD, HLDB 2, 3, 4 100 100 70 70 25 13 20 10 CHLD 4 2, 3, 4 100 100 70 70 25 13 — — LDC, LDCB 2, 3, 4 200 100 100 75 35 18 20 10 CLDC 4 2, 3, 4 200 100 100 75 35 18 — — 2 2 2 2 CLD Notes 1 Utilization Category A circuit breakers. 2 L/R = 8 milliseconds minimum. 3 Two-pole circuit breaker or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. Incorporating thermal-magnetic trip unit only. 4 100% rated breakers. 5 Current limiting. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-214 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Specifications Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310 rms sensing Yes Frame Ampere range Interrupting rating at 480 volts 2 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Yes Yes Yes 2 L L L L 2 300–600A 300–600A 200–600A 200–600A 35, 65, 100 (kA) 35, 65, 100 (kA) 35, 65, 100 (kA) 35, 65, 100 (kA) 2 Ordering options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG LSI, LSI(A), LSIG LSI(A), LSIG 2 Fixed rated plug (In) Yes Yes Yes Yes Overtemperature trip Yes Yes Yes Yes Adjustable rating plug (In) Yes Yes No No Long delay pickup 0.5–1.0 (In) 1 0.5–1.0 (In) 1 0.4–1.0 x (In) 0.4–1.0 x (In) Long delay time I2t 12 seconds 12 seconds 2–24 seconds 2–24 seconds Long delay time I4t No No 1–5 seconds 1–5 seconds Breaker Type Protection 2 2 Long Delay Protection (L) 2 2 2 Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes Yes Yes High load alarm No No 0.5–1.0 x Ir 0.5–1.0 x Ir 2 2 Short Delay Protection (S) Short delay pickup 200–800% x (In) 200–800% x (In) 150–800% x (Ir) 150–800% x (Ir) Short delay time I2t 100 ms No 100–500 ms 100–500 ms Short delay time flat No Inst–300 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms Short delay time zone selective interlocking No No Yes 4 Yes Instantaneous pickup No 200–800% x (In) 200–800% x (In) 200–800% x (In) Discriminator No No Yes Yes Instantaneous override Yes Yes Yes Yes Ground fault alarm No No 20–100% x (Is) 20–100% x (Is) Ground fault pickup 1–5 x Ig (120A) 1–5 x Ig (120A) 20–100% x (Is) 20–100% x (Is) Ground fault delay I2t No No 100–500 ms 100–500 ms Ground fault delay flat Inst–500 ms Inst–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms Ground fault zone selective interlocking No No Yes 4 Yes Ground fault thermal memory Yes Yes Yes Yes 2 2 2 2 Instantaneous Protection (I) 2 2 Ground Fault Protection (G) 2 2 2 System Diagnostics Status LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes Cause of trip LEDs No No Yes Yes Magnitude of trip information No No Yes Yes Remote signal contact—ground alarm Yes 5 Yes 5 Yes 4 Yes Local auxiliary and bell alarm contact Optional Optional Optional Included 2 2 2 Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm Is = Sensor Rating In = Rating Plug Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting 2 2 Notes 1 Adjust by rating plug. 2 By OPTIMizer/BIM. 3 Eaton’s PowerNet kit. 4 Zone interlock kit. 5 With separate ground fault alarm unit (GFAU). 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-215 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Specifications, continued Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Yes 1 Yes 1 2 System Monitoring 2 Current No No Yes Yes Power and energy No No No Yes Power quality—harmonics No No No Yes Power factor No No No Yes No No Yes 2 Yes Test set Test set OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet 2 2 2 Digital display No Communications PowerNet 2 Testing 2 Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm Is = Sensor Rating In = Rating Plug Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting 2 2 2 No Testing method Notes By OPTIMizer/BIM. 2 Eaton’s PowerNet kit. 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-216 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Dimensions and Weights 2 Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 LD Frame Number of Poles Width Height Depth 2, 3 8.25 (209.6) 10.75 (273.1) 4.06 (103.1) 4 11.00 (279.4) 10.75 (273.1) 4.06 (103.1) 2 2 2 LD-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole Side View 2 3.81 (96.8) 2 Front View Front Cover Cutout 2 CL Handle CL Breaker 3.44 (87.3) 1.72 (43.7) 2 3.28 (83.3) 0.25 (6.4) R 2 1.33 (33.7)2.29 (58.2) 10.75 (273.1) 1.50 (38.1) 3.64 (92.5) 2 8.21 (208.6) 2 2 0.19 R (4.8) R 7.28 (184.9) 2 2 8.25 (209.6) 2 2 Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs (kg) 2 LD Frame Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Breaker Type Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole LD, HLD, LDC 18 (8.2) 20 (9.1) 25 (11.3) 14 (6.4) 15 (6.8) 20 (9.1) 3 (1.4) 4 (1.8) 5 (2.3) LDB 18 (8.2) 20 (9.1) 25 (11.3) — — — — — — 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-217 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Contents Typical M-Frame Circuit Breaker Description 2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) 2 Product Description 2 ● ● 2 2 2 2 2 ● All Eaton M-Frame circuit breakers are HACR rated MDL-Frame circuit breakers are available as individual components (frame, trip unit, terminals), or factory assembled complete breakers MDLB, HMDLB-Frame circuit breakers with noninterchangeable trip units are suitable for reverse feed use Standards and Certifications ● CE marked 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-218 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Page V4-T2-121 V4-T2-122 V4-T2-123 V4-T2-126 V4-T2-140 V4-T2-157 V4-T2-165 V4-T2-192 V4-T2-219 V4-T2-220 V4-T2-225 V4-T2-226 V4-T2-228 V4-T2-263 V4-T2-229 V4-T2-244 V4-T2-274 V4-T2-276 V4-T2-277 V4-T2-281 V4-T2-312 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Catalog Number Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. 2 2 2 Circuit Breaker/Frame MDL 3 800 F Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type MDL, MDLB HMDL, HMDLB Number of Poles 2 = 2 poles 3 = 3 poles Circuit Breaker/ Frame Ampere Rating 300 1 350 1 400 450 500 600 700 800 2 F K V W X Y = = = = = = 2 Suffix Frame only High magnetic molded case switch 50°C (thermal-magnetic trip units only) Without terminals Load side terminals only Line side terminals only 2 2 2 2 2 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 2 MT 3 800 T Trip Unit Type MT MES Number of Poles 2 = 2 poles 3 = 3 poles Trip Unit Rating/ Plug Ampere Rating 300 1 350 1 400 450 500 600 700 800 T V LS LSI LSG LSIG = = = = = = 2 Suffix Thermal-magnetic 50°C (thermal-magnetic trip units only) Digitrip RMS 310 Digitrip RMS 310 Digitrip RMS 310 Digitrip RMS 310 2 2 2 2 2 Note 1 Thermal-magnetic only. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-219 2.3 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Product Selection Types MDL and HMDL Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units—Two-Pole 2 Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 2 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Only For Use with Standard or High or Ultra High Interrupting Frames 2 Standard Terminals Only 1 Frame Only Magnetic Trip Range is 5–10 Up Through 600A; 4–8 on 700 and 800A x Continuous Ampere Rating See Page V4-T2-224 for Optional Terminals Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number HMDL2800F MT2300T TA700MA1 HMDL2350 MT2350T TA700MA1 HMDL2400 MT2400T TA700MA1 MDL2450 HMDL2450 MT2450T TA700MA1 2 500 MDL2500 HMDL2500 MT2500T TA700MA1 600 MDL2600 HMDL2600 MT2600T TA700MA1 2 700 MDL2700 HMDL2700 MT2700T TA700MA1 800 MDL2800 HMDL2800 MT2800T TA800MA2 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Catalog Number 300 MDL2300 2 350 MDL2350 2 400 MDL2400 450 2 2 Frame Only Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Catalog Number Catalog Number MDL2800F HMDL2300 2 2 Types MDL and HMDL Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units—Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac 2 High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Only For Use with Standard or High or Ultra High Interrupting Frames 2 2 Standard Terminals Only 1 Frame Only Magnetic Trip Range is 5–10 Up Through 600A; 4–8 on 700 and 800A x Continuous Ampere Rating See Page V4-T2-224 for Optional Terminals Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Catalog Number 300 MDL3300 MT3300T TA700MA1 2 350 MDL3350 HMDL3350 MT3400T TA700MA1 400 MDL3400 HMDL3400 MT3400T TA700MA1 2 450 MDL3450 HMDL3450 MT3450T TA700MA1 500 MDL3500 HMDL3500 MT3500T TA700MA1 2 600 MDL3600 HMDL3600 MT3600T TA700MA1 2 700 MDL3700 HMDL3700 MT3700T TA700MA1 800 MDL3800 HMDL3800 MT3800T TA800MA2 2 2 2 2 Frame Only Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Catalog Number Catalog Number MDL3800F HMDL3300 HMDL3800F Note 1 Two terminals are required per pole. 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-220 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Types MDLB and HMDLB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units—Two-Pole 1 Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac Standard Terminals Only 2 Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals See Page V4-T2-224 for Optional Terminals Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 300 MDLB2300 HMDLB2300 TA700MA1 350 MDLB2350 HMDLB2350 TA700MA1 400 MDLB2400 HMDLB2400 TA700MA1 450 MDLB2450 HMDLB2450 TA700MA1 500 MDLB2500 HMDLB2500 TA700MA1 600 MDLB2600 HMDLB2600 TA700MA1 700 MDLB2700 HMDLB2700 TA700MA1 800 MDLB2800 HMDLB2800 TA800MA2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Types MDLB and HMDLB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units—Three Pole1 Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac Standard Terminals Only 2 2 Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals See Page V4-T2-224 for Optional Terminals 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 300 MDLB3300 HMDLB3300 TA700MA1 350 MDLB3350 HMDLB3350 TA700MA1 2 400 MDLB3400 HMDLB3400 TA700MA1 450 MDLB3450 HMDLB3450 TA700MA1 500 MDLB3500 HMDLB3500 TA700MA1 600 MDLB3600 HMDLB3600 TA700MA1 700 MDLB3700 HMDLB3700 TA700MA1 800 MDLB3800 HMDLB3800 TA800MA2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Factory sealed for reverse feed application. 2 Two terminals are required per pole. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-221 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Types MDL and HMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Order as Individual Components: breaker frame, trip unit, rating plug, terminals. 2 2 2 2 2 Types MDL and HMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units—Three-Pole Circuit Breaker Frame Only Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Maximum Vac Continuous Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac Ampere Rating Catalog at 40°C 1 Number Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Only 2 Digitrip RMS 310 Rating Plug Only L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (by Adjustable Rating Plug) S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I2t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response) High Interrupting I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous Capacity 600 Vac G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Rated 65 kAIC Delay (Flat Response) at 480 Vac Adjustable Rating Plugs Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating Catalog Number Catalog Number Ampere Rating Catalog Number Catalog Number HMDL3800F MES3800LS 400 8MES400T MES3800LSI 500 8MES500T 400/500/600/800 A8MES800T 2 MES3800LSG 600 8MES600T MES3800LSIG 700 8MES700T 2 — 800 8MES800T 2 2 800 MDL3800F 620/640/660/680 A8MES600T5 720/740/760/780 A8MES700T5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Types MDLB and HMDLB Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 3 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 1 Factory-Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit LS LSI LSG LSIG Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number MDLB3800T35W MDLB3800T36W HMDLB3800T35W HMDLB3800T36W Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac 800 MDLB3800T33W MDLB3800T32W Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 800 HMDLB3800T33W HMDLB3800T32W Notes 1 Ampere rating is established by rating plug. 2 For AC use only. 3 Factory sealed, suitable for reverse feed application. CMDLB and CHMDLB are also available. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-222 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Terminals See Page V4-T2-224 for standard and optional terminals Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 100% Rated Types CMDL and CHMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90°C wire is applied at the 75°C ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit, rating plug and terminals. Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Only 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 1 800 Standard Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity 65 kAIC at 480 Vac Standard Options Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I2t Short Delay Ramp Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Ground Fault Protection Catalog Number CMDL3800F CHMDL3800F MES3800LS Molded Case Switches Eaton’s molded case switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker MES3800LSI 2 Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Only 2 Adjustable Rating Plug Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I2t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection MES3800LSG MES3800LSIG 2 2 100% Rated Types CMDL and CHMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units—Three-Pole Circuit Breaker Frame Only 2 2 Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating Catalog Number 400 8MES400T 500 8MES500T 600 8MES600T 700 8MES700T 800 8MES800T 2 2 Ampere Rating Terminals 400/500/600/800 A8MES800T 620/640/660/680 A8MES600T5 See Page V4-T2-224 for standard and optional terminals 720/740/760/780 A8MES700T5 2 2 2 2 2 components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489. 2 2 2 2 Molded Case Switches 2 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Circuit Breaker Only without Line and Load Terminals 2 Catalog Number 2 Two-Pole 800 2 MDL2800WK MDLB2800WK 3 2 HMDL2800WK 2 Three-Pole 800 MDL3800WK 2 MDLB3800WK 3 HMDL3800WK 2 Notes 1 Ampere rating is established by rating plug. 2 For AC use only. 3 MDLB and HMDLB are suitable for reverse feed applications. 2 2 Molded case switch may trip above 6000 amperes. 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-223 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2 Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information 2 Line and Load Terminals M-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper or Cu/ AI terminals are required, order by catalog number. Specify if factory installation is required. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 TA700MA1 TA800MA2 TA801MA Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG Wire Range/No. Conductors Terminal Terminals with Control Wire Termination Catalog Number Catalog Number TA700MA1CWT 2 Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals 700 Aluminum Cu/AI (2) 1–500 kcmil TA700MA1 2 800 std. Aluminum Cu/AI (3) 3/0–400 kcmil TA800MA2 TA800MA2CWT 800 Aluminum Cu/AI (2) 500–750 kcmil TA801MA TA801MACWT 2 Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals 2 600 Copper Cu (2) 2/0–500 kcmil T600MA1 — 800 Copper Cu (3) 3/0–300 kcmil T800MA1 — 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-224 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Accessories 2 Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. 2 MD Frame Accessories 2 Two-Pole 1 Three-Pole 2 Right 2 ■ ■ 2 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ V4-T2-288 ■ ■ ■ ■ Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) and alarm switch combination V4-T2-288 ■ ■ ■ ■ Shunt trip—standard 2 V4-T2-291 ■ ■ ■ ■ V4-T2-293 ■ ■ ■ ■ V4-T2-299 ■ ■ ■ ■ Reference Page Left Right Left Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-284 ■ ■ Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break) V4-T2-284 ■ Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-286 ■ Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-286 Auxiliary switch (3A, 3B) V4-T2-286 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) and alarm switch combination Description Center Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) Shunt trip—low energy 2 Undervoltage release mechanism 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 External Accessories 2 Base mounting hardware V4-T2-319 ● Terminal shields V4-T2-321 ● Interphase barriers V4-T2-321 ● Non-padlockable handle block V4-T2-322 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-323 ❏ ❏ ❏ Key interlock kit V4-T2-324 ❏ ❏ ❏ Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-325 ● ● ● ● ● Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-325 ● ● ● ● ● Electrical (motor) operator V4-T2-326 ● ● ● ● ● Plug-in adapters V4-T2-328 ● ● ● ● ● Rear connecting studs V4-T2-329 ● ● ● ● ● Panelboard connecting straps V4-T2-330 ● ● ● ● ● Handle mechanisms V4-T2-332 ● ● ● ● ● Handle extension V4-T2-336 ● ● ● ● ● Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit V4-T2-337 ● ● ● ● ● Special calibration — ● ● ● ● ● Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-121 ● ● ● ● ● Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● Marine/naval application — ● ● ● ● ● 2 ■ 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) 2 2 2 Legend ■ Applicable in indicated pole position ❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both 2 ● Accessory available/modification available 2 Notes Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole. 2 Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on MES trip units. 1 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-225 2.3 2 2 2 2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Technical Data and Specifications UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1 Circuit Breaker Type Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) Volts DC 23 Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Number of Poles 240 480 600 250 MDL, MDLB 2, 3 65 50 25 22 CMDL 2, 3 65 50 25 — HMDL, HMDLB 2, 3 100 65 35 25 CHMDL 2, 3 100 65 35 — 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1 Interrupting Capacity rms (kA Symmetrical Amperes) I CU ≠ I CS Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 240 415 690 MDL, MDLB 2, 3 65/65 50/50 20/10 20/10 CMDL 2, 3 65/65 50/50 20/10 — Volts DC 23 250 HMDL, HMDLB 2, 3 100/100 70/50 25/13 20/10 CHMDL 2, 3 100/100 70/50 25/13 — Notes 1 Utilization Category A circuit breakers. 2 Two-pole or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. Thermal-magnetic trip units only, MDL, HMDL breakers with electronic trip unit are not DC rated. 3 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds at 22 kA. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-226 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Specifications 2 MDL-Frame Digitrip Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310 rms sensing Yes 2 Yes 2 2 Breaker Type Frame MDL, MDLB, CMDL, HMDL, HMDLB, CHMDL MDL, MDLB, CMDL, HMDL, HMDLB, CHMDL Ampere range 400–800A 400–800A Interrupting rating at 480 volts 50, 65 (kA) 50, 65 (kA) 2 2 Protection Ordering options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG Fixed rated plug (In) Yes Yes Overtemperature trip Yes Yes 2 Long Delay Protection (L) Adjustable rating plug (In) Yes Yes Long delay pickup 0.5–1.0 (In) 1 0.5–1.0 (In) 1 Long delay time I2t 12 seconds 12 seconds 2 2 2 Long delay time I4t No No Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes High load alarm No No 2 2 Short Delay Protection (S) Short delay pickup 200–800% x (In) 200 –800% x (In) Short delay time I2t 100 ms No Short delay time flat No Inst–300 ms Short delay time zone selective interlocking No No 2 Instantaneous pickup No 200–800% x (In) Discriminator No No 2 Instantaneous override Yes Yes 2 2 2 Instantaneous Protection (I) Ground Fault Protection (G) Ground fault alarm No No Ground fault pickup 1–5 x Ig (160A) 1–5 x Ig (160A) Ground fault delay I2t No No Ground fault delay flat Inst–500 ms Inst–500 ms Ground fault zone selective interlocking No No Ground fault thermal memory Yes Yes 2 2 2 2 System Diagnostics Status LEDs Yes Yes Cause of trip LEDs No No Magnitude of trip information No No Remote signal contacts—ground alarm Yes 2 Yes 2 Digital display No No Current No No Power and energy No No Power quality—harmonics No No Power factor No No No No 2 Test set Test set 2 2 2 System Monitoring 2 2 2 Communications Eaton’s PowerNet Testing Testing method Legend In = Rating Plug Notes 1 Adjust by rating plug. 2 With separate ground fault alarm unit (GFAU). Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2 2 V4-T2-227 2.3 2 2 2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Dimensions and Weights Dimensions in Inches (mm) MD Frame Number of Poles Width Height Depth 2, 3 8.25 (209.6) 16.00 (406.4) 4.06 (103.1) MDL-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole Drilling Plan 2 2 Front View Side View 8.25 (209.6) 4.06 (103.2) 3.44 (87.3) 1.72 (43.7) 2 R 0.25 (6.4) CL Breaker 2 2 2 2 R 0.19 (4.8) CL Handle 1.33 (33.7) 1.50 (38.1) 0.97 (24.6) 2 3.64 (92.5) 2 7.28 (184.9) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 16.00 (406.4) 3.28 (83.3) Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs (kg) MD Frame Trip Unit 1 Complete Breaker Frame Only Breaker Type Two-Pole Three-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Two-Pole MDL, HMDL (T/M T.U.) 26.5 (12.0) 29.0 (13.2) 24.5 (11.1) 26.0 (11.8) 2.5 (1.1) 3.0 (1.4) MDL, HMDL (Elec. T.U.) — 30.0 (13.6) — 26.0 (11.8) — 4.0 (1.8) Note 1 Thermal-magnetic only. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-228 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Three-Pole Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Typical N-Frame Breaker 2.3 Contents Description Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module. . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page V4-T2-121 V4-T2-122 V4-T2-123 V4-T2-126 V4-T2-140 V4-T2-157 V4-T2-165 V4-T2-192 V4-T2-218 V4-T2-230 V4-T2-231 V4-T2-239 V4-T2-240 V4-T2-243 V4-T2-244 V4-T2-263 V4-T2-274 V4-T2-276 V4-T2-277 V4-T2-281 V4-T2-312 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) 2 Product Description 2 ● ● All Eaton N-Frame circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed use All N-Frame circuit breakers are HACR rated 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-229 2.3 2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Catalog Number Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. Circuit Breaker/Frame ND 3 12 T3 2 W 2 2 2 2 2 Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type ND HND NDC NDU CND CHND CNDC Number of Poles 2 = 2 poles 3 = 3 poles 4 = 4 poles Circuit Breaker/Frame Ampere Rating 800 = 800 amperes 12 = 1200 amperes T3 T5 T7 T10 Trip Model = Model 310 = Model 550 = Model 750 = Model 1050 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-230 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Trip Type 2 = LSI 3 = LS 5 = LSG 6 = LSIG 7 = LSIA E EH K W X Y = = = = = = Suffix 100% R.P. protected (four-pole) 50% R.P. protected (four-pole) High magnetic molded case switch Without terminals Load only terminals Line only terminals Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Product Selection 2 Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals. 2 2 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only L S I G A Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) 2 2 OPTIM 550 2 LSI LSIG LSIA Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number ND3800T57W Fixed Rating Plug 2 Ampere Rating Catalog Number 2 400 ORPN80A400 450 ORPN80A450 500 ORPN80A500 550 ORPN80A550 600 ORPN80A600 700 ORPN80A700 800 ORPN80A800 600 ORPN12A600 700 ORPN12A700 800 ORPN12A800 1000 ORPN12A100 1200 ORPN12A120 400 ORPN80A400 450 ORPN80A450 500 ORPN80A500 550 ORPN80A550 600 ORPN80A600 700 ORPN80A700 800 ORPN80A800 600 ORPN12A600 700 ORPN12A700 800 ORPN12A800 1000 ORPN12A100 1200 ORPN12A120 Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac 800 1200 ND3800T52W ND312T52W ND3800T56W ND312T56W ND312T57W Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 800 1200 HND3800T52W HND312T52W HND3800T56W HND312T56W HND3800T57W HND312T57W 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-231 2.3 2 Series C Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only 2 L S I G A 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) OPTIM 550 2 Fixed Rating Plug LSI LSIG LSIA Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Ampere Rating Catalog Number NDC3800T57W 400 ORPN80A400 2 450 ORPN80A450 2 500 ORPN80A500 550 ORPN80A550 2 600 ORPN80A600 700 ORPN80A700 2 800 ORPN80A800 600 ORPN12A600 2 700 ORPN12A700 2 800 ORPN12A800 1000 ORPN12A100 1200 ORPN12A120 2 2 2 2 Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 800 1200 NDC3800T52W NDC312T52W NDC3800T56W NDC312T56W NDC312T57W Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-232 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only I– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) A– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 Fixed Rating Plug 2 Ampere Rating Catalog Number 2 400 ORPN80A400 450 ORPN80A450 500 ORPN80A500 550 ORPN80A550 600 ORPN80A600 700 ORPN80A700 800 ORPN80A800 600 ORPN12A600 700 ORPN12A700 800 ORPN12A800 1000 ORPN12A100 1200 ORPN12A120 2 400 ORPN80A400 450 ORPN80A450 2 500 ORPN80A500 550 ORPN80A550 600 ORPN80A600 700 ORPN80A700 800 ORPN80A800 600 ORPN12A600 700 ORPN12A700 800 ORPN12A800 1000 ORPN12A100 1200 ORPN12A120 2 400 ORPN80A400 2 450 ORPN80A450 500 ORPN80A500 550 ORPN80A550 600 ORPN80A600 700 ORPN80A700 OPTIM 1050 23 LSIG LSIA Catalog Number Catalog Number Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac 800 1200 ND3800T106W ND312T106W ND3800T107W ND312T107W 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 800 1200 HND3800T106W HND312T106W HND3800T107W HND312T107W 2 2 2 2 2 Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 800 1200 NDC3800T106W NDC312T106W NDC3800T107W NDC312T107W 2 2 L– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 S– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) 800 ORPN80A800 600 ORPN12A600 700 ORPN12A700 800 ORPN12A800 1000 ORPN12A100 1200 ORPN12A120 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell (trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed. Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2 2 V4-T2-233 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals. 2 2 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only 2 L S I G A 2 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) OPTIM 550 2 Fixed Rating Plug LSI LSIG LSIA Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Ampere Rating Catalog Number CND3800T57W 400 ORPN80A400 2 450 ORPN80A450 2 500 ORPN80A500 550 ORPN80A550 2 600 ORPN80A600 700 ORPN80A700 2 800 ORPN80A800 600 ORPN12A600 2 700 ORPN12A700 2 800 ORPN12A800 1000 ORPN12A100 1200 ORPN12A120 400 ORPN80A400 450 ORPN80A450 2 500 ORPN80A500 2 550 ORPN80A550 600 ORPN80A600 2 700 ORPN80A700 800 ORPN80A800 600 ORPN12A600 700 ORPN12A700 800 ORPN12A800 1000 ORPN12A100 1200 ORPN12A120 2 2 2 2 2 Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac 800 CND3800T52W 1200 3 CND312T52W CND3800T56W CND312T56W CND312T57W Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 800 1200 CHND3800T52W 3 CHND312T52W CHND3800T56W CHND312T56W CHND3800T57W CHND312T57W 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. 3 Includes conductor extension kit, which increases breaker length 3.75 on each end. Terminal ordered separate. 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-234 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only L S I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 Fixed Rating Plug 2 Ampere Rating Catalog Number 2 400 ORPN80A400 450 ORPN80A450 500 ORPN80A500 550 ORPN80A550 600 ORPN80A600 700 ORPN80A700 OPTIM 550 2 LSI LSIG LSIA Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number CNDC3800T57W Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 800 1200 3 CNDC3800T52W CNDC312T52W CNDC3800T56W CNDC312T56W CNDC312T57W 2 2 – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) 800 ORPN80A800 600 ORPN12A600 700 ORPN12A700 800 ORPN12A800 1000 ORPN12A100 1200 ORPN12A120 Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. 3 Includes conductor extension kit, which increases breaker length 3.75 on each end. Terminal ordered separate. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-235 2.3 2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only L S I G A 2 2 Series C 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) OPTIM 1050 23 LSIG LSIA Catalog Number Catalog Number Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating Catalog Number 400 ORPN80A400 2 450 ORPN80A450 2 500 ORPN80A500 550 ORPN80A550 2 600 ORPN80A600 700 ORPN80A700 2 800 ORPN80A800 600 ORPN12A600 2 700 ORPN12A700 2 800 ORPN12A800 1000 ORPN12A100 1200 ORPN12A120 400 ORPN80A400 450 ORPN80A450 550 ORPN80A550 600 ORPN80A600 700 ORPN80A700 800 ORPN80A800 600 ORPN12A600 2 700 ORPN12A700 2 800 ORPN12A800 1000 ORPN12A100 1200 ORPN12A120 2 2 2 Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac 800 1200 CND3800T106W CND312T106W CND3800T107W CND312T107W Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 800 CHND3800T106W CHND3800T107W 2 2 2 2 2 2 1200 CHND312T106W CHND312T107W Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 One Form C auxiliary switch one Form C bell (trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-236 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only L S I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 Fixed Rating Plug 2 Ampere Rating Catalog Number 2 400 ORPN80A400 450 ORPN80A450 500 ORPN80A500 550 ORPN80A550 600 ORPN80A600 700 ORPN80A700 800 ORPN80A800 600 ORPN12A600 700 ORPN12A700 800 ORPN12A800 1000 ORPN12A100 1200 ORPN12A120 OPTIM 1050 23 LSIG LSIA Catalog Number Catalog Number Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 800 1200 CNDC3800T106W CNDC3800T107W CNDC312T106W 4 CNDC312T107W 2 2 – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) Type ND Molded Case Switches 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Type ND High Instantaneous (K) 2 Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Three-Pole Four-Pole 5 Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 800 ND3800WK ND4800WK 2 1200 HND3800WK HND4800WK ND312WK ND412WK HND312WK HND412WK 2 2 Notes 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2 One Form C auxiliary switch one Form C bell (trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed. 4 Includes conductor extension kit, which increases breaker length 3.75 on each end. Terminal ordered separate. 5 Neutral is in right pole. 2 2 Molded case switch will trip above 14,000 amperes. For UL listed, series tested molded case switch application data, refer to Eaton. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-237 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2 Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information 2 Line and Load Terminals—Ordering Information N-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper or Cu/AI terminals are required, order by catalog number. Specify if factory installation is required. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 TA700NB1 TA1000NB1 TA1200NB1 TA1201NB1 T700NB1 T1000NB1 Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG Wire Range/ No. Conductors Metric Wire Range mm2 Catalog Number Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals 2 700 Aluminum Cu/AI (2) 1–500 kcmil 50–240 TA700NB1 1000 Aluminum Cu/AI (3) 3/0–400 kcmil 95–185 TA1000NB1 1 2 1200 Aluminum Cu/AI (4) 4/0–500 kcmil 120–240 TA1200NB1 1 2 1200 Aluminum Cu/AI (3) 500–750 kcmil 300–400 TA1201NB1 2 Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals 2 2 2 700 Copper Cu (2) 2/0–500 kcmil 70–240 T700NB1 1000 Copper Cu (3) 3/0–500 kcmil 95–240 T1000NB1 1200 Copper Cu (4) 3/0–400 kcmil 95–185 T1200NB3 Notes 1 Terminal rating is AL9CU. 2 Terminal rating is AL7CU. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-238 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Accessories 2 Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. 2 ND Frame Accessories 2 Description Reference Page Three-Pole Left Four-Pole Center Right Left Center Right Neutral Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) 1 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-284 ■ ■ ■ ■ Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break) V4-T2-284 ■ ■ ■ ■ Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-286 ■ ■ ■ ■ Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-286 ■ ■ ■ ■ Auxiliary switch (3A, 3B) V4-T2-286 ■ ■ ■ ■ Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) and alarm switch combination V4-T2-288 ■ ■ ■ ■ Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) and alarm switch combination V4-T2-288 ■ ■ ■ ■ Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-292 ■ ■ Shunt trip—low energy V4-T2-293 ■ ■ Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T2-300 ■ Eaton PowerNet communications kit (OPTIM 550) V4-T2-301 2 2 2 2 2 ■ External Accessories Base mounting hardware V4-T2-319 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Interphase barriers V4-T2-321 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Terminal shield V4-T2-321 ■ ■ ■ Non-padlockable handle block V4-T2-322 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-323 ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ Key interlock kit V4-T2-324 ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-325 ● ● ● Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-325 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Electrical (motor) operator V4-T2-327 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Plug-in adapters V4-T2-328 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Rear connecting studs V4-T2-329 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Panelboard connecting straps V4-T2-330 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Handle mechanisms V4-T2-332 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Handle extension V4-T2-336 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit V4-T2-338 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● V4-T2-337 Potential transformer module V4-T2-337 Breaker interface module (BIM) V4-T2-338 Digitrip OPTIMizer V4-T2-338 Auxiliary power module V4-T2-338 2 2 2 ■ 2 OPTIM System Components Three Poles Ground fault alarm unit 2 2 ■ ■ 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Special calibration — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-121 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Marine/naval application — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Legend ■ Applicable in indicated pole position ❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both ● Accessory available/modification available 2 2 2 2 2 Note 1 OPTIM 550 and 1050 are factory sealed and do not have the right pole available for accessories. Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2 V4-T2-239 2.3 2 2 2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Technical Data and Specifications UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1 Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 240 277 480 ND 2, 3, 4 65 — 50 25 CND 2 2, 3, 4 65 — 50 25 600 2 HND 2, 3, 4 100 — 65 35 CHND 2 2, 3, 4 100 — 65 35 2 NDC 2, 3, 4 200 — 100 65 CNDC 2 2, 3, 4 200 — 100 65 2 NDU 3 3 300 4 — 150 75 5 2 2 2 IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1 Circuit Breaker Type Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) Number of Poles Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 240 415 690 2 ND Icu 2, 3, 4 85 50 20 2 Ics 2, 3, 4 85 50 10 2 Icu 2, 3, 4 85 50 20 2 Ics 2, 3, 4 85 50 10 HND Icu 2, 3, 4 100 70 25 Ics 2, 3, 4 100 50 13 Icu 2, 3, 4 100 70 25 2 Ics 2, 3, 4 100 50 13 2 Icu 2, 3, 4 200 100 35 Ics 2, 3, 4 100 50 18 Icu 2, 3, 4 200 100 35 Ics 2, 3, 4 100 50 18 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 CND 2 CHND 2 NDC CNDC 2 Notes 1 Utilization Category A circuit breakers. 2 100% rated breakers. 3 800 amperes maximum rating. 4 Successfully tested at 300 kAIC, although UL recognizes maximum of 200 kAIC at 240 Vac. 5 Successfully tested at 75 kAIC, although UL recognizes maximum of 65 kAIC at 600 Vac. 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-240 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 N-Frame Digitrip 2 Trip Unit Type Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 rms sensing Yes Yes 2 2 Breaker Type Frame N N Ampere range 400A–1200A 400A–1200A Interrupting rating at 480 volts 50, 65, 100 (kA) 50, 65, 100 (kA) 2 Ordering options LSI, LSIG, LSI(A) LSI(A), LISG 2 Fixed rated plug (In) Yes Yes Overtemperature trip Yes Yes Adjustable rating plug (In) No No Long delay pickup 0.4–1.0 x (In) 0.4–1.0 x (In) Long delay time I2t 2–24 seconds 2–24 seconds Long delay time I4t 1–5 Seconds 1–5 Seconds Protection 2 2 Long Delay Protection (L) 2 2 2 Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes High load alarm No 0.5–1.0 x Ir 2 Short delay pickup 150 –800% x (Ir) 150–800% x (Ir) Short delay time I2t 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 2 Short delay time flat 100–500 ms 100–500 ms Short delay time zone selective interlocking Yes Yes Instantaneous pickup 200 –800% x (In) 200–800% x (In) Discriminator Yes Yes Instantaneous override Yes Yes Ground fault alarm 20–100% x (Is) 20 –100% x (Is) Ground fault pickup 20–100% x (Is) 20 –100% x (Is) Ground fault delay I2t 100–500 ms 100–500 ms Ground fault delay flat 100–500 ms 100–500 ms Ground fault zone selective interlocking Yes 1 Yes Ground fault thermal memory Yes Yes 2 2 Short Delay Protection (S) 2 2 Instantaneous Protection (I) 2 2 Ground Fault Protection (G) 2 2 2 System Diagnostics Status LEDs Yes Yes Cause of trip LEDs Yes Yes Magnitude of trip information Yes Yes Remote signal contact—ground alarm Yes 1 Yes Local auxiliary and bell alarm contact Optional Included 2 2 2 Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm Is = Sensor Rating In = Rating Plug Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting 2 2 Note 1 Zone interlock kit. 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-241 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C N-Frame Digitrip, continued Trip Unit Type Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Yes 1 Yes 1 2 System Monitoring 2 Current Yes Yes 2 Power and energy No Yes Power quality—harmonics No Yes 2 Power factor No Yes No 2 Yes OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Digital display Communications Eaton PowerNet Testing Testing method Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm Is = Sensor Rating In = Rating Plug Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting Notes By OPTIMizer/BIM. 2 Eaton’s PowerNet kit. 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-242 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Dimensions and Weights 2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 ND Frame Number of Poles Width 2, 3 4 2 Height Depth 8.25 (209.6) 16.00 (406.4) 5.50 (139.7) 11.13 (282.6) 16.00 (406.4) 5.50 (139.7) 2 2 ND-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole 2 Front View Side View 2 Front Cover Cutout 2 3.44 (87.3) 1.72 (43.6) CL Handle 1.91 (48.4) 2 0.25 R (6.4 R) 2 CL Handle 16.00 (406.4) 0.19 R (4.8 R) 3.68 (93.2) 2 ON/I 2 OFF/O 2 1.50 (38.1) 3.19 (80.9) 2 6.38 (161.9) 8.25 (209.6) 2 5.50 (139.7) 2 2 Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg) 2 ND Frame 2 Complete Breaker Breaker Type Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole ND, HND, NDC, NDU 37 (16.8) 45 (20.4) 58 (26.3) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-243 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Typical R-Frame Breaker Contents Description 2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) 2 Product Description ● 2 2 2 2 ● Eaton R-Frame circuit breakers are available as frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug and terminals All R-Frame circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed use 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-244 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Page V4-T2-121 V4-T2-122 V4-T2-123 V4-T2-126 V4-T2-140 V4-T2-157 V4-T2-165 V4-T2-192 V4-T2-218 V4-T2-229 V4-T2-245 V4-T2-246 V4-T2-258 V4-T2-259 V4-T2-262 V4-T2-263 V4-T2-274 V4-T2-276 V4-T2-277 V4-T2-281 V4-T2-312 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Catalog Number Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. 2 2 Circuit Breaker/Frame 2 RD 3 16 T53 W Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type RD RDC CRD 2 CRDC 2 2 Number of Poles 3 = 3 poles 4 = 4 poles Circuit Breaker/Frame Ampere Rating 16 = 1600 amperes 20 = 2000 amperes 25 = 2500 amperes T53 T65 T86 T96 T106 T107 Trip Type 1 = Digitrip RMS 510 LS = Digitrip RMS 610 LSG = Digitrip RMS 810 LSIG = Digitrip RMS 910 LSIG = Digitrip OPTIM 1050 LSIG = Digitrip OPTIM 1050 LSIA W P R K = = = = 2 Suffix Without terminals 100% protected neutral pole Ground fault remote (310 only) Molded case switch 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 For complete list of available trip types, refer to Pages V4-T2-246 to V4-T2-255. 2 No four-pole for CRD and CRDC. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-245 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2 Product Selection 2 Digitrip RMS 510 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. 2 2 2 2 Digitrip RMS 510 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C L S I G Digitrip Rating Plug Only – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) Rated Current (In) Fixed Rating Plug 800 RP6R16A080 1000 RP6R16A100 1200 RP6R16A120 1600 RP6R16A160 1000 RP6R20A100 2 1200 RP6R20A120 2 1600 RP6R20A160 2000 RP6R20A200 1600 RP6R25A160 2000 RP6R25A200 2500 RP6R25A250 800 RP6R16A080 1000 RP6R16A100 1200 RP6R16A120 1600 RP6R16A160 1000 RP6R20A100 1200 RP6R20A120 1600 RP6R20A160 2000 RP6R20A200 1600 RP6R25A160 2000 RP6R25A200 2500 RP6R25A250 2 2 LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG Catalog Number 1600 RD316T51W RD316T53W RD316T52W RD316T54W RD316T55W RD316T56W 2 2 2 2 2 2000 2500 RD320T51W RD325T51W RD320T53W RD325T53W RD320T52W RD325T52W RD320T54W RD325T54W RD320T55W RD325T55W RD320T56W RD325T56W Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600 RDC316T51W RDC316T53W RDC316T52W RDC316T54W RDC316T55W RDC316T56W 2 2 2000 RDC320T51W RDC320T53W RDC320T52W RDC320T54W RDC320T55W RDC320T56W 2 2 2 Catalog Number Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 2500 RDC325T51W RDC325T53W RDC325T52W RDC325T54W RDC325T55W 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-246 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com RDC325T56W Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 100% Rated Digitrip RMS 510 Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90°C wire is applied at 75°C ampacity. Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. 2 100% Rated Digitrip RMS 510 Circuit Breakers 2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C L S I G Digitrip Rating Plug Only – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG Catalog Number Rated Current (In) Fixed Rating Plug 800 RP6R16A080 1000 RP6R16A100 1200 RP6R16A120 1600 RP6R16A160 1000 RP6R20A100 1200 RP6R20A120 1600 RP6R20A160 2000 RP6R20A200 800 RP6R16A080 1000 RP6R16A100 1200 RP6R16A120 1600 RP6R16A160 1000 RP6R20A100 1200 RP6R20A120 1600 RP6R20A160 2000 RP6R20A200 Catalog Number Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600 2000 1 CRD316T51W CRD320T51W CRD316T53W CRD320T53W CRD316T52W CRD320T52W CRD316T54W CRD320T54W CRD316T55W CRD320T55W CRD316T56W CRD320T56W Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600 2000 1 — CRDC320T51W CRDC316T53W CRDC320T53W CRDC316T52W CRDC320T52W CRDC316T54W CRDC320T54W CRDC316T55W CRDC320T55W CRDC316T56W CRDC320T56W Note 1 Includes B2016RDL rear connectors. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-247 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Digitrip RMS 610 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. 2 2 2 2 Digitrip RMS 610 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C L S I G Digitrip Rating Plug Only – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) Fixed Rating Plug Rated Current (In) Catalog Number 800 RP6R16A080 2 1000 RP6R16A100 1200 RP6R16A120 2 1600 RP6R16A160 1000 RP6R20A100 2 1200 RP6R20A120 2 1600 RP6R20A160 2000 RP6R20A200 1600 RP6R25A160 2000 RP6R25A200 2500 RP6R25A250 800 RP6R16A080 2 1000 RP6R16A100 1200 RP6R16A120 2 1600 RP6R16A160 1000 RP6R20A100 2 1200 RP6R20A120 2 1600 RP6R20A160 2000 RP6R20A200 1600 RP6R25A160 2000 RP6R25A200 2500 RP6R25A250 2 2 2 2 2 2 LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG Catalog Number Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600 2000 2500 RD316T61W RD320T61W RD325T61W RD316T63W RD320T63W RD325T63W RD316T62W RD320T62W RD325T62W RD316T64W RD320T64W RD325T64W RD316T65W RD320T65W RD325T65W RD316T66W RD320T66W RD325T66W Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600 2000 2500 RDC316T61W RDC320T61W RDC325T61W RDC316T63W RDC320T63W RDC325T63W RDC316T62W RDC320T62W RDC325T62W RDC316T64W RDC320T64W RDC325T64W RDC316T65W RDC320T65W RDC325T65W 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-248 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com RDC316T66W RDC320T66W RDC325T66W Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 100% Rated Digitrip RMS 610 Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90°C wire is applied at 75°C ampacity. Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. 2 100% Rated Digitrip RMS 610 Circuit Breakers 2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C L S I G Digitrip Rating Plug Only – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG Catalog Number Rated Current (In) Fixed Rating Plug 800 RP6R16A080 1000 RP6R16A100 1200 RP6R16A120 1600 RP6R16A160 1000 RP6R20A100 1200 RP6R20A120 1600 RP6R20A160 2000 RP6R20A200 800 RP6R16A080 1000 RP6R16A100 1200 RP6R16A120 1600 RP6R16A160 1000 RP6R20A100 1200 RP6R20A120 1600 RP6R20A160 2000 RP6R20A200 Catalog Number Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600 2000 1 CRD316T61W CRD320T61W CRD316T63W CRD320T63W CRD316T62W CRD320T62W CRD316T64W CRD320T64W CRD316T65W CRD320T65W CRD316T66W CRD320T66W Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600 2000 1 CRDC316T61W CRDC320T61W CRDC316T63W CRDC320T63W CRDC316T62W CRDC320T62W CRDC316T64W CRDC320T64W CRDC316T65W CRDC320T65W CRDC316T66W CRDC320T66W Note 1 Includes B2016RDL rear connectors. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-249 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Digitrip RMS 810 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. 2 2 2 2 Digitrip RMS 810 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C L S I G Digitrip Rating Plug Only – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) Rated Current (In) Fixed Rating Plug 800 RP6R16A080 2 1000 RP6R16A100 1200 RP6R16A120 2 1600 RP6R16A160 1000 RP6R20A100 2 1200 RP6R20A120 2 1600 RP6R20A160 2000 RP6R20A200 1600 RP6R25A160 2000 RP6R25A200 2500 RP6R25A250 800 RP6R16A080 2 1000 RP6R16A100 1200 RP6R16A120 2 1600 RP6R16A160 1000 RP6R20A100 2 1200 RP6R20A120 2 1600 RP6R20A160 2000 RP6R20A200 1600 RP6R25A160 2000 RP6R25A200 2500 RP6R25A250 2 2 2 2 2 2 LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG Catalog Number Catalog Number Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600 2000 2500 RD316T81W RD320T81W RD325T81W RD316T83W RD320T83W RD325T83W RD316T82W RD320T82W RD325T82W RD316T84W RD320T84W RD325T84W RD316T85W RD320T85W RD325T85W RD316T86W RD320T86W RD325T86W Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600 2000 2500 RDC316T81W RDC320T81W RDC325T81W RDC316T83W RDC320T83W RDC325T83W RDC316T82W RDC320T82W RDC325T82W RDC316T84W RDC320T84W RDC325T84W RDC316T85W RDC320T85W RDC325T85W 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-250 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com RDC316T86W RDC320T86W RDC325T86W Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 100% Rated Digitrip RMS 810 Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90°C wire is applied at 75°C ampacity. Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. 2 100% Rated Digitrip RMS 810 Circuit Breakers 2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C L S I G Digitrip Rating Plug Only – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG Catalog Number Rated Current (In) Fixed Rating Plug 800 RP6R16A080 1000 RP6R16A100 1200 RP6R16A120 1600 RP6R16A160 1000 RP6R20A100 1200 RP6R20A120 1600 RP6R20A160 2000 RP6R20A200 800 RP6R16A080 1000 RP6R16A100 1200 RP6R16A120 1600 RP6R16A160 1000 RP6R20A100 1200 RP6R20A120 1600 RP6R20A160 2000 RP6R20A200 Catalog Number Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600 2000 1 CRD316T81W CRD320T81W CRD316T83W CRD320T83W CRD316T82W CRD320T82W CRD316T84W CRD320T84W CRD316T85W CRD320T85W CRD316T86W CRD320T86W Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600 2000 1 CRDC316T81W CRDC320T81W CRDC316T83W CRDC320T83W CRDC316T82W CRDC320T82W CRDC316T84W CRDC320T84W CRDC316T85W CRDC320T85W CRDC316T86W CRDC320T86W Note 1 Includes B2016RDL rear connectors. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-251 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Digitrip RMS 910 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. 2 2 2 2 Digitrip RMS 910 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C L S I G Digitrip Rating Plug Only – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) Rated Current (In) Fixed Rating Plug 800 RP6R16A080 2 1000 RP6R16A100 1200 RP6R16A120 2 1600 RP6R16A160 1000 RP6R20A100 2 1200 RP6R20A120 2 1600 RP6R20A160 2000 RP6R20A200 1600 RP6R25A160 2000 RP6R25A200 2500 RP6R25A250 800 RP6R16A080 2 1000 RP6R16A100 1200 RP6R16A120 2 1600 RP6R16A160 1000 RP6R20A100 2 1200 RP6R20A120 2 1600 RP6R20A160 2000 RP6R20A200 1600 RP6R25A160 2000 RP6R25A200 2500 RP6R25A250 2 2 2 2 2 2 LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG Catalog Number Catalog Number Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600 2000 2500 RD316T91W RD320T91W RD325T91W RD316T93W RD320T93W RD325T93W RD316T92W RD320T92W RD325T92W RD316T94W RD320T94W RD325T94W RD316T95W RD320T95W RD325T95W RD316T96W RD320T96W RD325T96W Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600 2000 2500 RDC316T91W RDC320T91W RDC325T91W RDC316T93W RDC320T93W RDC325T93W RDC316T92W RDC320T92W RDC325T92W RDC316T94W RDC320T94W RDC325T94W RDC316T95W RDC320T95W RDC325T95W 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-252 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com RDC316T96W RDC320T96W RDC325T96W Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 100% Rated Digitrip RMS 910 Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90°C wire is applied at 75°C ampacity. Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. 2 100% Rated Digitrip RMS 910 Circuit Breakers 2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C L S I G Digitrip Rating Plug Only – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG Catalog Number Rated Current (In) Fixed Rating Plug 800 RP6R16A080 1000 RP6R16A100 1200 RP6R16A120 1600 RP6R16A160 1000 RP6R20A100 1200 RP6R20A120 1600 RP6R20A160 2000 RP6R20A200 800 RP6R16A080 1000 RP6R16A100 1000 RP6R16A100 1200 RP6R16A120 1000 RP6R20A100 1200 RP6R20A120 1600 RP6R20A160 2000 RP6R20A200 Catalog Number Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600 2000 1 CRD316T91W CRD320T91W CRD316T93W CRD320T93W CRD316T92W CRD320T92W CRD316T94W CRD320T94W CRD316T95W CRD320T95W CRD316T96W CRD320T96W Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600 2000 1 CRDC316T91W CRDC320T91W CRDC316T93W CRDC320T93W CRDC316T92W CRDC320T92W CRDC316T94W CRDC320T94W CRDC316T95W CRDC320T95W CRDC316T96W CRDC320T96W Note 1 Includes B2016RDL rear connectors. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-253 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. 2 2 Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only 2 2 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C L S I G A Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) LSIA 1050 LSIG 1050 Catalog Number Catalog Number Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating Catalog Number 800 ORPR16A080 1000 ORPR16A100 1200 ORPR16A120 1600 ORPR16A160 1000 ORPR20A100 2 1200 ORPR20A120 1600 ORPR20A160 2 2000 ORPR20A200 1600 ORPR25A160 2000 ORPR25A200 2500 ORPR25A250 800 ORPR16A080 1000 ORPR16A100 1200 ORPR16A120 1600 ORPR16A160 1000 ORPR20A100 2 1200 ORPR20A120 1600 ORPR20A160 2 2000 ORPR20A200 1600 ORPR25A160 2000 ORPR25A200 2500 ORPR25A250 2 2 Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600 RD316T107W RD316T106W 2 2 2 2 2 2000 2500 RD320T107W RD325T107W RD320T106W RD325T106W Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600 RDC316T107W RDC316T106W 2 2 2000 2500 RDC320T107W RDC325T107W RDC320T106W RDC325T106W 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-254 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 100% Rated 600 Volts AC Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. 2 2 100% Rated 600 Volts AC Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C L S I G A Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only 2 – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) LSIA 1050 LSIG 1050 Catalog Number Catalog Number Fixed Rating Plug 2000 1 CRD316T107W CRD316T106W CRD320T107W CRD320T106W 2000 1 CRDC316T107W CRDC316T106W CRDC320T107W CRDC320T106W 2 Catalog Number 800 ORPR16A080 1000 ORPR16A100 1200 ORPR16A120 1600 ORPR16A160 1000 ORPR20A100 1200 ORPR20A120 1600 ORPR20A160 2000 ORPR20A200 2 800 ORPR16A080 2 1000 ORPR16A100 1200 ORPR16A120 1600 ORPR16A160 1000 ORPR20A100 1200 ORPR20A120 1600 ORPR20A160 2000 ORPR20A200 2 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600 2 Ampere Rating Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 1600 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Molded Case Switches Refer to Eaton for UL listed, series tested Molded Case Switch application data. 2 2 Type RD—High Instantaneous (K) Three-Pole Four-Pole 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 1600 RD316WK RD416WK 2000 RD320WK RD420WK 2 Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Complete without Terminals 2 Notes 1 Includes B2016RDL rear connectors. 2 Molded case switch may trip above 17,500 amperes. 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-255 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2 Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information 2 Line and Load Terminals Line and load terminals provide wire connecting capabilities for specific ranges of continuous current ratings and wire types. All terminals comply with Underwriters Laboratories Standards UL 486A and UL 486B and CSA C22.2 No. 65M. Unless otherwise specified, R-Frame circuit breaker line load terminals are shipped separately for field installation. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Ordering Information R-Frame circuit breakers have Cu/AI terminals as standard and Cu only terminals as an option. Specify if factory installation is required. Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Wire Type Hardware AWG/kcmil Wire Range/ No. Conductors Metric Wire Range mm2 Catalog Number Wire Terminals 2 1600 Aluminum Cu/AI English 500–1000 (4) 300–500 TA1600RD 1600 Copper Cu English 1–600 (4) 50–300 T1600RD 2 2000 Aluminum Cu/AI English 2–600 (6) 35–300 TA2000RD 1 2 Rear Connectors 2000 Copper — English — — B2016RD 2 2000 Copper — English — — B2016RDL 2 2500 Copper — English — — B2500RD 3 2 2 2 Notes 1 Catalog Number includes bus connection, terminals and hardware for either line side or load side of three-pole breaker. 2 For use with 100% rated 1600A and 2000A frame. Do not order separately unless for replacement purposes. Included in breaker carton when 100% rated device is ordered. 3 For use with 2500A frame. Do not order separately unless for replacement purposes. Included in breaker carton when 2500A breaker is ordered. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-256 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Mounting Hardware 2 2 Breaker Line/Load Conductors 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 TA2000RD 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-257 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2 Accessories 2 Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. 2 2 RD Frame Accessories 2 Description 2 Reference Page Three-Pole Left Four-Pole Center Right Left Center Right Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-284 ■ ■ 2 Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break) V4-T2-284 ■ ■ 2 Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-284 ■ ■ Auxiliary switch (4A, 4B) V4-T2-284 ■ ■ Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-292 ■ ■ Shunt trip—low energy V4-T2-293 ■ ■ 2 Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T2-300 ■ ■ 2 Accessory terminal block 2 V4-T2-301 ■ External Accessories 2 2 Base mounting hardware V4-T2-319 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-322 2 Key interlock kit V4-T2-324 2 Walking beam interlock V4-T2-325 Electrical (motor) operator Handle mechanisms Handle extension 3 V4-T2-336 2 ■ ● ● ■ ■ ■ ■ V4-T2-327 ■ ■ ■ ■ V4-T2-332 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 2 OPTIM System Components 2 Breaker interface module (BIM) V4-T2-338 ● ● ● Digitrip OPTIMizer V4-T2-338 ● ● ● Auxiliary power module V4-T2-338 ● ● ● 2 Neu. Internal Accessories 1 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) 2 Special calibration — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-121 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Marine/naval application — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 2 2 2 Legend ■ Applicable in indicated pole position ● Accessory available/modification available Notes All accessories mount in the RH cavity which will accept one each shunt trip, UVR, auxiliary switch and alarm switch. 2 Mounts outside breaker. 3 Included with breaker. 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-258 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Technical Data and Specifications 2 UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings 2 1 2 Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 240 277 480 600 RD 3, 4 125 — 65 50 CRD 2 3 125 — 65 50 RDC 3, 4 200 — 100 65 CRDC 2 3 200 — 100 65 2 2 2 2 IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings Circuit Breaker Type 1 2 Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) Number of Poles Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 240 415 690 2 Icu 3, 4 135 70 25 2 Ics 3, 4 100 50 13 2 Icu 3, 4 200 100 35 2 Ics 3, 4 100 50 18 RD RDC 2 Notes 1 Utilization Category A circuit breakers. 2 100% rated breakers. 2 2 See Page V4-T2-260 for Trip Unit Specifications. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-259 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Specifications 2 R-Frame Digitrip 2 Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 510 Digitrip RMS 610 Digitrip RMS 810 Digitrip RMS 910 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 rms sensing Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes R 2 Breaker Type 2 Frame R R R R 2 Ampere range 800–2500A 800–2500A 800–2500A 800–2500A 800–2500A Interrupting rating at 480 volts 65, 100 (kA) 65, 100 (kA) 65, 100 (kA) 65, 100 (kA) 65, 100 (kA) LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG LSI(A), LISG 2 2 Protection Ordering options Fixed rated plug (In) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 2 Overtemperature trip Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 2 Adjustable rating plug (In) No No No No No 2 Long delay pickup 0.5–1.0 x (In) 0.5–1.0 x (In) 0.5–1.0 x (In) 0.5 –1.0 x (In) 0.4–1.0 x (In) Long delay time I2t 2–24 seconds 2–24 seconds 2–24 seconds 2–24 seconds 2–24 seconds Long delay time I4t No No No No 1–5 Seconds Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes High load alarm No 0.85 x Ir 0.85 x Ir 0.85 x Ir 0.5-1.0 x Ir 2 2 Long Delay Protection (L) Short Delay Protection (S) 2 Short delay pickup 200–600% S1 and S2 x (Ir) 200–600% S1 and S2 x (Ir) 200–600% S1 and S2 x (Ir) 200–600% S1 and S2 x (Ir) 150-800% x (Ir) 12 2 Short delay time I2t 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms Short delay time flat 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms Short delay time zone selective interlocking Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 200–600% M1and M2 x (In) 200–600% M1and M2 x (In) 200–600% M1and M2 x (In) 200–600% M1and M2 x (In) 200–800% x (In) 2 2 2 2 Instantaneous Protection (I) Instantaneous pickup Discriminator Yes 3 Yes 3 Yes 3 Yes 3 Yes 2 Instantaneous override Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 2 Ground fault alarm 4 No No No No 25–100% x (In) 2 Ground fault pickup 4 25–100% x (Is) 25-100% x (Is) 25–100% x (Is) 25–100% x (Is) 25–100% x (In) Ground fault delay I2t 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 2 Ground fault delay flat 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100 –500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms Ground fault zone selective interlocking Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 2 Ground fault thermal memory Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 2 2 2 2 2 Ground Fault Protection (G) Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm Is = Sensor Rating In = Rating Plug Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting x In Notes 1 Except 2500 ampere frame is 200–600%. 2 Varies by frame. 3 LS/LSG only. 4 Not to exceed 1200 amperes. 2 2 V4-T2-260 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 R-Frame Digitrip, continued Digitrip RMS 510 Digitrip RMS 610 Digitrip RMS 810 Digitrip RMS 910 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Status LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Cause of trip LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Trip Unit Type 2 2 System Diagnostics 2 2 Magnitude of trip information No Yes Yes Yes Yes Remote signal contacts No Yes Yes Yes Yes 2 Digital display No Yes Yes Yes Yes 1 Current No Yes Yes Yes Yes 2 System Monitoring Voltage No No No Yes No Power and energy No No Yes Yes Yes Power quality—harmonics No No No Yes Yes Power factor No No Yes (over Eaton PowerNet only) Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Integral Integral Integral Integral OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet 2 2 2 Communications Eaton PowerNet 2 2 Testing Testing method 2 Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm Is = Sensor Rating In = Rating Plug Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting x In 2 2 2 Note 1 By OPTIMizer/BIM. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-261 2.3 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Dimensions and Weights Dimensions in Inches (mm) RD Frame 2 Number of Poles Width Height Depth 2 3 15.50 (393.7) 16.00 (406.4) 9.75 (247.7) 4 20.00 (508.0) 16.00 (406.4) 9.75 (247.7) 2 RD-Frame, Three-Pole, 1600 and 2000 Amperes 2 Front View 2 2 7.25 (184.2) 2 2 2 14.50 (368.3) 11.13 (0.4) Dia. (4 Holes) Use 4, 0.38 (Mil) Dia. Bolts for Mounting Breaker 5.09 (129.4) 9.69 (246.1) C L Handle 16.00 (406.4) 15.00 (381.0) Push To Trip 6.65 (166.7) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 9.00 (228.6) 7.75 (196.9) 2 2 Side View C L Breaker 2 2 15.50 (393.7) 12.91 (327.8) 0.16 (4.0) R Typ. Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg) RD Frame Complete Breaker Breaker Type Three-Pole Four-Pole 102 (46.3) 135 (61.2) 1600 Amperes RD, CRD 1, RDC, CRDC 1 2000 Amperes RD, RDC 102 (46.3) 135 (61.2) CRD, CRDC 130 (59.0) 175 (79.4) 135 (61.2) 182 (82.6) 2500 Amperes RD, RDC Note 1 No four-pole for CRD and CRDC. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-262 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Contents Motor Circuit Protectors Description Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module. . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page V4-T2-121 V4-T2-122 V4-T2-123 V4-T2-126 V4-T2-140 V4-T2-157 V4-T2-165 V4-T2-192 V4-T2-218 V4-T2-229 V4-T2-244 V4-T2-264 V4-T2-265 V4-T2-266 V4-T2-274 V4-T2-276 V4-T2-277 V4-T2-281 V4-T2-312 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) 2 Product Description Standards and Certifications Designated as Eaton’s Types GMCP and HMCP, the instantaneous-only motor circuit protector (MCP) is available in ratings from 3A to 1200A for motor starter sizes 0 through 8. The MCP is designed to comply with the applicable requirements of Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489, Canadian Standards Association Standard C22.2 No. 5.1, and International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC 157-1. 2 An innovative design of internal components allows higher MCP-starter combination interrupting ratings. The MCP is marked to permit proper electrical application within the assigned equipment ratings. 2 2 2 2 2 The MCP is a recognized component (UL File E7819) and complies with the applicable requirements of Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489. It is also designed to comply with the applicable requirements of Canadian Standards Association Standard C22.2 No. 5.1, International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC 157-1, and nameplates bear the CE marking. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Note: Interrupting ratings are dependent on starter it is used with. Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2 2 V4-T2-263 2.3 2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Catalog Number Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. Motor Circuit Protector HMCP 003 A0 C 2 2 Motor Circuit Protective Type HMCP = 3 poles HM2P = 2 poles 1 HMCPS = 3 poles 2 2 2 2 Continuous Ampere Rating 003 007 015 025 030 050 A0 = C0 = E0 = D0 = H1 = G2 = K2 = J2 = M2 = L3 = R3 = T4 = U4 = A5 = C5 = D5 = F5 = G5 = J5 = K5 = L5 = W5 = N5 = R5 = X5 = Y5 = L6 = X6 = Y6 = X7 = Y8 = 070 100 2 150 2 250 2 400 2 2 2 2 600 2 800 1200 2 2 Suffix Non-aluminum terminals Without terminals Load terminals only Line terminals only Stainless steel terminals (150A frame only) No Suffix: Standard terminals on line and load C = W= X = Y = S = Motor Circuit Protector GMCP 003 A0 C 2 2 Motor Circuit Protective Device GMCP = 3 poles 2 Continuous Ampere Rating 003 007 015 030 050 060 063 2 2 2 2 Magnetic Trip Range/ NEMA Starter Size 9–30/0 21–70/0 45–150/0 40–60/0 90–300/1 80–120/2 50–500/2 115–170/2 210–700/2 160–240/3 300–1000/3 450–1500/4 750–2500/4 350–700/5 450–900/5 500–1000/5 625–1250/5 750–1500/5 875–1750/5 1000–2000/5 1125–2250/5 1250–2500/5 1500–3000/5 1750–3500/5 2000–4000/5 2250–4500/5 1800–6000/6 (electronic) 500–2500/6 (electronic) 1000–4000/6 (electronic) 1600–6400/7 (electronic) 2400–9600/8 (electronic) Magnetic Trip Range/NEMA Starter Size A0 = 15–30/0 C0 = 35–70/0 E0 = 75–150/0 H1 = 150–300/1 K2 = 250–500/2 J2 = 300–600/2 M2 = 320–630/2 Note 1 On J- and K-Frame HMCPs only. 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-264 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Suffix C = Non-aluminum terminals Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Product Selection 2 G-Frame 2 480 Vac Maximum, 600Y/347 Vac NEMA Starter Size Continuous Amperes Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1 MCP Trip Setting MCP Catalog Number 0 3 A 1.1–1.2 15 GMCP003A0C B 1.3–1.5 18 C 1.6–1.7 21 D 1.8–1.9 24 E 2.0–2.2 27 0 0 1 2 3 3 7 15 30 50 60 63 F 2.3–2.5 30 A 2.6–3.1 35 B 3.2–3.6 42 C 3.7–3.9 49 D 4.3–4.7 56 E 4.8–5.2 63 F 5.3–5.7 70 A 5.7–6.8 75 B 6.9–7.9 90 C 8.0–9.1 105 D 9.2–10.3 120 E 10.4–11.4 135 F 11.5–12.6 150 A 11.5–13.7 150 B 13.8–16.0 180 C 16.1–18.3 210 D 18.4–20.6 240 E 20.7–22.9 270 F 23.0–25.2 300 A 19.3–22.9 250 B 23.0–26.8 300 C 26.9–30.6 350 D 30.7–34.5 400 E 34.6–38.3 450 F 38.4–42.1 500 A 23.1–27.5 300 B 27.7–32.2 360 C 32.3–36.7 420 D 36.9–41.4 480 E 41.5–46.0 540 F 46.2–50.5 600 A 24.2–32.1 320 B 29.1–34.8 380 D 38.8–46.4 500 E 43.6–48.9 570 F 48.5–53.7 630 2 2 2 2 2 GMCP007C0C 2 2 2 2 GMCP015E0C 2 2 2 GMCP030H1C 2 2 2 2 GMCP050K2C 2 2 2 GMCP060J2C 2 2 2 2 GMCP063M2C 2 2 Notes 1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate Cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. All GMCP 3–63A come with line and load steel body terminals for Cu only wire. Refer to Page V4-T2-127 under Optional Terminal Types. UL recognized and CSA approved. Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2 2 2 V4-T2-265 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2 Accessories 2 Modifications for GMCP Internal accessories must be factory installed. 2 Internal Accessories 1 2 Type Accessory Volts Frequency Amperes Contact Arrangement Factory Suffix Style Number Shunt trip 2 120 50/60 Hz 1.1 — S5 1373D62G18 Shunt trip 2 240 50/60 Hz 2.1 — S6 1373D62G19 Auxiliary switch 3 240 50/60 Hz 6.0 1A/1B A3 1288C74G03 2 Auxiliary switch 3 240 50/60 Hz 6.0 2A/2B A6 1288C73G03 Alarm switch 3 240 50/60 Hz 6.0 Make/Break B3 1288C75G03 2 Auxiliary switch/alarm switch combination 3 240 50/60 Hz 6.0 1A/1B Make/Break B13 1288C76G09 2 2 Electrical Ratings 2 External Mounted Accessories 2 Description 2 2 2 2 Number Units in Package Style Number Lock dog (non-padlockable) 1 1294C01H01 Mounting hardware 1 624B375G23 DIN rail adapter 4 10 1225C79G02 Vari-Depth Handle Mechanism 5 Description Catalog Number For Type 1 use HRGMV11L 2 For Type 3R, 4X, 12 use HRGMV14L Close coupled black with gray handle HRGMC10 2 Close coupled red with yellow handle HRGMC30 2 Modifications for HMCP See Internal Accessories starting on Page V4-T2-281. 2 Notes 1 Only one accessory may be installed in GMCP. 2 LH only. 3 RH only. 4 For use with standard 35 mm DIN rail such as, 35 x 7.5 or 15 mm per DIN EN50022. 5 For use with GMCP only. 2 2 2 2 No UVR available on GMCP. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-266 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C F-Frame 2 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1 0 3 A 0.69–0.91 B 0.92–1.0 C 1.1–1.2 D 1.3–1.5 E 1.6–1.7 F G 0 0 1 2 7 15 30 50 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum, continued 2 MCP Catalog Number NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1 9 HMCP003A0C 2 70 A 16.1–21.4 210 12 B 21.5 –26.8 280 15 C 26.9 –32.2 350 18 D 32.3–37.5 420 21 E 37.6–42.9 490 1.8–1.9 24 F 43.0–48.3 560 2.0–2.2 27 G 48.4–53.7 630 H 2.3–2.5 30 H 53.8–59.1 700 MCP Trip Setting HMCP007C0C 3 100 2 MCP Catalog Number HMCP070M2C A 1.5–2.0 21 A 23.0–30.6 300 B 2.1–2.5 28 B 30.7–38.3 400 C 2.6–3.1 35 C 38.4–46.0 500 D 3.2–3.6 42 D 46.1–53.7 600 E 3.7–3.9 49 E 53.8 –61.4 700 F 4.3–4.7 56 F 61.5 –69.1 800 G 4.8–5.2 63 G 69.2–76.8 900 H 76.9–84.5 1000 A 34.6–46.0 450 H 5.3–5.7 70 A 3.4–4.5 45 B 4.6–5.6 60 B 46.1–57.5 600 C 5.7–6.8 75 C 57.6–69.1 750 D 6.9–7.9 90 D 69.2–80.6 900 HMCP015E0C 4 150 E 8.0–9.1 105 D 69.2–80.6 900 F 9.2–10.3 120 E 80.7–92.2 1050 G 10.4–11.4 135 F 92.3–103.7 1200 H 11.5 –12.6 150 G 103.8–115.2 1350 A 6.9–9.1 90 H 115.3–126.7 1500 HMCP030H1C B 9.2–11.4 120 A 57.0 –75.0 750 C 11.5–13.7 150 B 76.0–95.0 1000 D 13.8–16.0 180 C 96.0–114.0 1250 E 16.1–18.3 210 D 115.0–130.7 1500 F 18.4–20.6 240 E 3 1750 G 20.7–22.9 270 F 3 2000 H 23.0–25.2 300 G 3 2250 H 3 2500 A 11.5–15.2 150 B 15.3–19.1 200 C 19.2–22.9 250 D 23.0–26.8 300 E 26.9–30.6 350 F 30.7–4.5 400 G 34.6–38.3 450 H 38.4–42.1 500 4 HMCP050K2C 150 2 MCP Trip Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 HMCP100R3C 2 2 2 2 2 HMCP150T4C 2 2 2 2 2 HMCP150U4C 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate Cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. 2 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. 3 Settings above 130 amperes are for special applications. NEC Article 430.110(a) requires the ampere rating of the disconnecting means to be not less than 115% of the motor full load ampere rating. 2 HMCP 3–100A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB. HMCP 150A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T150FB. 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-267 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2 Special Low Magnetic Protection Application MCP 2 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum 2 Cont. Amps 2 25 2 2 2 Cam Setting MCP Trip Setting 1 MCP Catalog Number HMCP025D0C A 40 B 43 D 49 E 52 F 55 G 58 H 60 A 80 B 87 2 C 93 D 98 2 E 103 F 109 G 115 2 50 2 2 H 120 A 115 2 B 122 2 C 130 D 139 2 E 145 F 153 2 G 160 70 H 170 A 160 B 174 C 185 2 D 196 E 207 2 F 218 G 229 H 240 2 100 2 2 HMCP050G2C HMCP070J2C HMCP100L3C 2 Notes 1 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. 2 HMCP 25–100A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-268 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C MCPs for Application with Motor Starters Equipped with Electronic Overload Relays 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps 0 3 0 0 1 2 7 15 30 50 2 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum, continued Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1 MCP Trip Setting A B 15 C 38.4–46.0 500 18 D 46.1–53.7 600 1.6–1.7 21 E 53.8–61.4 700 F 1.8–1.9 24 F 61.5–69.1 800 G 2.0–2.2 27 G 69.2–76.8 900 H 2.3–2.5 30 A 1.5–2.0 21 B 2.1–2.5 C D Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1 MCP Trip Setting A B 2 MCP Catalog Number NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting 0.69–0.91 9 HMCPS003A0C 3 100 0.92–1.0 12 C 1.1–1.2 D 1.3–1.5 E 2 2 23.0–30.6 300 HMCPS100R3C 30.7–38.3 400 2 H 76.9–84.5 1000 A 34.6–46.0 450 28 B 46.1–57.5 600 2.6–3.1 35 C 57.6–69.1 750 3.2–3.6 42 D 69.2–80.6 900 E 3.7–3.9 49 E 80.7–92.2 1050 F 4.3–4.7 56 F 92.3–103.7 1200 G 4.8–5.2 63 G 103.8–115.2 1350 H 5.3–5.7 70 H 115.3–126.7 1500 A 3.4–4.5 45 A 57.0–75.0 750 B 4.6–5.6 60 B 76.0–95.0 1000 C 5.7–6.8 75 C 96.0–114.0 1250 D 6.9–7.9 90 D 115.0–130.7 1500 E 8.0–9.1 105 E 3 1750 F 9.2–10.3 120 F 3 2000 G 10.4–11.4 135 G 3 2250 H 11.5–12.6 150 H 3 2500 A 6.9–9.1 90 B 9.2–11.4 120 C 11.5–13.7 150 D 13.8–16.0 180 E 16.1–18.3 210 F 18.4–20.6 240 G 20.7–22.9 270 H 23.0–25.2 300 A 11.5–15.2 150 B 15.3–19.1 200 C 19.2–22.9 250 D 23.0–26.8 300 E 26.9–30.6 350 F 30.7–34.5 400 G 34.6–38.3 450 H 38.4–42.1 500 HMCPS007C0C HMCPS015E0C HMCPS030H1C 4 4 150 150 2 MCP Catalog Number 2 2 2 2 HMCPS150T4C 2 2 2 2 HMCPS150U4C 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. 2 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. 3 Settings above 130A are for special applications. NEC Article 430.110(a) requires the ampere rating of the disconnecting means to be not less than 115% of the motor full load ampere rating. HMCP 25–100A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB. HMCPS 3–100A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB. HMCPS 150A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T150FB. HMCPS050K2C 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-269 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2 J-Frame 2 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum 2 2 2 MCP Catalog Number 3 NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting 27.0–30.7 350 HMCP250A5C 5 250 A 30.8–33.8 400 B NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting 4 250 A B 2 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum, continued Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1 Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1 MCP Trip Setting MCP Trip Setting 2 MCP Catalog Number 3 67.4–75.3 875 HMCP250J5C 75.4–83.8 980 1090 C 33.9–36.9 440 C 83.9–92.3 D 37.0–40.3 480 D 92.4–100.7 1200 2 E 40.4–43.8 525 E 100.8–109.2 1310 F 43.9–46.9 570 F 109.3–117.6 1420 2 G 47.0–50.7 610 G 117.7–126.1 1530 H 47.0–50.7 660 H 126.2–134.6 1640 2 I 47.0–50.7 700 I 134.7–142.8 1750 A 34.7–38.8 450 A 77.0–86.6 1000 B 38.9–43.4 505 B 86.6–96.1 1125 C 43.5–47.6 565 C 96.2–105.7 1250 D 47.7–52.2 620 D 105.8–115.3 1375 2 E 52.3–56.5 680 E 115.4–124.9 1500 2 F 56.6–60.7 735 F 125.0–134.6 1625 G 60.8–64.9 790 G 134.7–144.2 1750 H 65.0–69.2 845 H 144.3–153.8 1875 I 69.3–73.5 900 I 153.9–163.3 2000 A 38.5–43.4 500 A 86.6–97.3 1125 B 43.5–48.0 565 B 97.4–108.4 1265 2 C 48.1–53.0 625 C 108.5–118.8 1410 2 D 53.1–57.6 690 D 118.9–129.9 1545 E 57.7–62.3 750 E 130.0–140.7 1690 2 F 62.4–67.3 810 F 140.8–151.5 1830 G 67.4–71.9 875 G 151.6–162.3 1970 2 H 72.0–76.9 935 H 162.4–173.0 2110 I 77.0–81.6 1000 I 173.1–183.6 2250 A 48.1–53.8 625 A 96.2–108.0 1250 2 B 53.9–59.9 700 B 108.1–119.9 1405 C 60.0–66.1 780 C 120.0–132.3 1560 2 D 66.2–72.3 860 D 132.4–144.2 1720 E 72.4–78.4 940 E 144.3–156.1 1875 2 F 78.5–83.8 1020 F 156.2–168.0 2030 2 G 83.9–89.9 1090 G 168.1–179.9 2185 H 90.0–96.1 1170 H 180.0–192.3 2340 I 96.2–102.0 1250 I 192.4–204.0 2500 A 57.7–64.6 750 B 64.7–71.9 840 C 72.0–79.2 935 2 D 79.3–86.5 1030 2 E 86.6–93.8 1125 F 93.9–101.1 1220 2 G 101.2–108.4 1315 H 108.5–115.3 1410 2 I 115.4–122.4 1500 2 2 5 5 250 250 2 2 2 2 2 5 5 5 2 V4-T2-270 250 250 250 HMCP250C5C HMCP250D5C HMCP250F5C HMCP250G5C 5 5 5 250 250 250 HMCP250K5C HMCP250L5C HMCP250W5C Notes 1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. 2 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. 3 Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin with HM2P in place of HMCP. All HMCP and HM2P 250A come with line and load steel body terminals, T250KB. (With suffix “C,” without “C” comes with TA250KB.) Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C K-Frame 2 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum 2 MCP Catalog Number 3 NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1 27.0–30.7 350 HMCP400A5C 5 400 A 77.0–86.5 B 30.8–33.8 400 B 86.6–96.1 1125 C 33.9–36.9 440 C 96.2–105.7 1250 D 37.0–40.3 480 D 105.8–115.3 1375 E 40.4–43.8 525 E 115.4–124.9 1500 F 43.9–46.9 570 F 125.0–134.6 1625 G 47.0–50.7 610 G 134.7–144.2 1750 H 50.8–53.8 660 H 144.3–153.8 1875 I 153.9–163.3 2000 A 86.6–97.3 1125 NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1 4 400 A 5 5 5 5 5 400 400 400 400 400 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum, continued MCP Trip Setting HMCP400A5C 2 MCP Catalog Number 3 1000 HMCP400K5C I 53.9–57.2 700 A 38.5–43.4 500 B 43.5–48.0 565 B 97.4–108.4 1265 C 48.1–53.0 626 C 108.5–118.8 1410 D 53.1–57.6 690 D 118.9–129.9 1545 HMCP400D5C 5 400 E 57.7–62.3 750 E 130.0–140.7 1690 F 62.4–67.3 810 F 140.8–151.5 1830 G 67.4–71.9 875 G 151.6–162.3 1970 H 72.0–76.9 935 H 162.4–173.0 2110 I 77.0–81.6 1000 I 173.1–183.6 2250 A 48.1–53.8 625 A 96.2–108.0 1250 B 53.9–59.9 700 B 108.1–119.9 1405 C 60.0–66.1 780 C 120.0–132.3 1560 D 66.2–72.3 860 D 132.4–144.2 1720 E 72.4–78.4 940 E 144.3–156.1 1875 F 78.5–83.8 1020 F 156.2–168.0 2030 G 83.9–89.9 1090 G 168.1–179.9 2185 HMCP400F5C 5 400 H 90.0–96.1 1170 H 180.0–192.3 2340 I 96.2–102.0 1250 I 192.4–204.0 2500 A 57.7–64.6 750 A 115.4–129.9 1500 B 64.7–71.9 840 B 130.0–144.2 1690 C 72.0–79.2 935 C 144.3–158.4 1875 D 79.3–86.5 1030 D 158.5–173.0 2060 E 86.6–93.8 1125 E 173.1–187.6 2250 F 93.9–101.1 1220 F 187.7–201.9 2440 G 101.2–108.4 1315 G 202.0–216.1 2625 HMCP400G5C 5 400 H 108.5–115.3 1410 H 216.2–230.7 2810 I 115.4–122.4 1500 I 230.8–244.9 3000 A 67.4–75.3 875 B 75.4–83.8 980 C 83.9–92.3 1090 D 92.4–100.7 1200 E 100.8–109.2 1310 F 109.3–117.6 1420 G 117.7–126.1 1530 H 126.2–134.6 1640 I 134.7–142.8 1750 HMCP400J5C 2 MCP Trip Setting 2 2 2 2 2 2 HMCP400L5C 2 2 2 2 2 2 HMCP400W5C 2 2 2 2 2 HMCP400N5C 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. 2 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. 3 Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin with HM2P in place of HMCP. All HMCP and HM2P 400A come with aluminum body terminals, 3TA400K. Catalog numbers with suffix “C” as shown above come with copper body terminals 3T400K. 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-271 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C L-Frame 2 2 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum, continued NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1 5 400 A 2 B 2 600 Vac Maximum 4 2 MCP Catalog Number 3 NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1 134.7–151.5 1750 HMCP400R5C 6 600 A 138.5–184.5 1800 151.6–168.4 1970 B 184.6–230.7 2400 C 168.5–185.3 2190 C 230.8–276.8 3000 D 185.4–201.9 2410 D 276.9–323.0 3600 2 E 202.0–218.8 2625 E 323.1–369.1 4200 F 218.9–235.7 2845 F 369.2–415.3 4800 2 G 235.8–252.6 3065 G 415.4–461.4 5400 H 252.7–269.2 3285 H 461.5–507.7 6000 2 I 269.3–285.7 3500 A 38.5–46.1 500 A 153.9–173.0 2000 B 46.2–61.4 600 B 173.1–192.3 2250 C 61.5–76.8 800 C 192.4–211.5 2500 D 76.9–96.1 1000 D 211.6–230.7 2750 E 96.2–115.3 1250 2 E 230.8–249.9 3000 F 115.4–153.7 1500 2 F 250.0–269.2 3250 G 153.8–192.2 2000 G 269.3–288.4 3500 H 192.3–230.7 2500 H 288.5–307.6 3750 A 76.9–96.1 1000 I 307.7–326.9 4000 B 96.2–115.3 1250 A 173.1–194.5 2250 C 115.4–153.7 1500 B 194.6–216.1 2530 D 153.8–192.2 2000 2 C 216.2–237.6 2810 E 192.3–230.7 2500 2 D 237.7–259.5 3090 F 230.8–269.1 3000 E 259.6–281.1 3375 G 269.2–307.6 3500 2 F 281.2–302.6 3655 H 307.7–346.1 4000 G 302.7–324.1 3935 2 H 324.2–346.1 4215 I 346.2–368.1 4500 2 2 2 5 400 2 2 2 5 400 2 2 2 MCP Trip Setting 6 600 HMCP400X5C 6 600 HMCP400Y5C MCP Trip Setting MCP Catalog Number HMCP600L6W HMCP600X6W HMCP600Y6W Notes 1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. 2 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. 3 Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin with HM2P in place of HMCP. 4 Equipped with electronic trip device. All HMCP and HM2P 400A come with aluminum body terminals, 3TA400K. Catalog numbers with suffix “C” as shown above come with copper body terminals 3T400K. All HMCP 600A come without terminals. For terminals, see Page V4-T2-224. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-272 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 N-Frame 2 600 Vac Maximum 1 NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 2 MCP Trip Setting MCP Catalog Number 7 800 A 123.1–184.5 1600 HMCP800X7W B 184.6–246.1 2400 C 246.2–307.6 3200 D 307.7–369.1 4000 E 369.2–430.7 4800 F 430.8–492.2 5600 G 492.3–553.7 6400 A 184.6–276.8 2400 B 276.9–369.1 3600 C 369.2–461.4 4800 D 461.5–553.7 6000 E 553.8–646.1 7200 F 646.2–738.4 8400 G 738.5–830.7 9600 8 1200 2 2 2 2 2 2 HMCP12Y8W 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Equipped with electronic trip device. 2 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13X the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13X setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-273 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Contents Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Description 2 Page Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-121 V4-T2-122 V4-T2-123 V4-T2-126 V4-T2-140 V4-T2-157 V4-T2-165 V4-T2-192 V4-T2-218 V4-T2-229 V4-T2-244 V4-T2-263 V4-T2-275 V4-T2-275 V4-T2-276 V4-T2-277 V4-T2-281 V4-T2-312 2 2 2 2 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) 2 Product Description 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Motor protection circuit breakers (MPCBs) provide UL 489 branch circuit protection, UL 508 and CSA C22.2 No. 14 motor protection, and meet IEC 60947-2 and 50947-4 requirements. Typical branch motor loads are protected by three-component starters, consisting of breaker, contactor and overload relay, or fuse, contactor and overload relay. The MPCB application-specific protection eliminates the need for motor overload relay found in the traditional three-component starter assembly. The branch motor load protection is simplified to an MPCB and contactor, reducing both space requirements and heat generation in customer panels. Protection is provided by application-specific electronic trip units. The electronic trip unit provides typical motor overload relay functionality and short-circuit protection against potential phase-tophase or phase-to-ground faults. ● ● ● ● Disconnecting means Branch circuit short-circuit protection Overload protection ● Class 5, 10, 15 and 20 Phase unbalance protection ● FDMP breaker trips when there is a 40% difference between any phase compared to the calculated three-phase average ● ● Phase loss protection ● Active when the maximum phase current is greater than 50% of FLA setting ● Breaker will trip when minimum phase current is 25% or less than the maximum phase current ● Time delay of 1 or 2 seconds before breaker trips Thermal memory to prevent immediate restart after overload trip to allow motor to cool down 2 2 2 V4-T2-274 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com The MPCB is based on the Series C F-Frame. Accessories for standard Series C breakers apply to the MPCB. Unlike Motor Circuit Protectors (MCPs), MPCBs are UL 489 listed with 35 kA and 65 kA interruption ratings. 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Product Selection 2 FDMP and HFDMP Continuous Amperes 35 kA Without Phase Unbalance, Class 10 Motor Protection Only 35 kA With Phase Unbalance and Adjustable Motor Class Protection 65 kA Without Phase Unbalance, Class 10 Motor Protection Only 65 kA With Phase Unbalance and Adjustable Motor Class Protection 80 FDMP3080L FDMP3080JL HFDMP3080L HFDMP3080JL 100 FDMP3100L FDMP3100JL HFDMP3100L HFDMP3100JL 160 FDMP3160L FDMP3160JL HFDMP3160L HFDMP3160JL 205 FDMP3205L FDMP3205JL HFDMP3205L HFDMP3205JL 2 2 2 2 2 FLA le Dial Setting Continuous Amperes A B C D E F G H 80 40 50 60 70 80 — — — 100 80 — 90 — 100 — — — 160 100 115 130 145 160 — — — 205 160 170 180 195 205 — — — 2 2 2 2 2 Technical Data and Specifications 2 Specifications Feature FDMP HFDMP Interruption rating at 240V 65 kA 100 kA Interruption rating at 480V 35 kA 65 kA Interruption rating at 600V 18 kA 25 kA Icu/Ics at 240V 65 kA/33 kA 1 Icu/Ics at 415V 35 kA/18 kA 1 100% rated No No FLA range (A) 40–205 40–205 Motor class protection 5, 10, 15, 20 5, 10, 15, 20 Phase unbalance protection (current)—active for phase current >0.5 FLA setting t40% delta (single-phase): (three-phase avg.) for 5 seconds t40% delta (single-phase): (three-phase avg.) for 5 seconds 2 Phase loss protection (current)—active for phase current >0.5 FLA setting Min. phase d0.25 max. phase for 1 second Min. phase d0.25 max. phase for 1 second 2 Thermal memory protection Yes Yes High load indicator — — 2 Pre-detection relays — — Internal accessories Factory installed Factory installed Aux. alarm, shunt trip, UVR Aux. alarm, shunt trip, UVR 2 2 2 100 kA/50 kA 1 65 kA/33 kA 1 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 IEC ratings available only on FWMP and HFWMP. 2 For additional breaker solutions, see Page V4-T2-84. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-275 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Contents Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment Description 2 Page V4-T2-121 V4-T2-122 V4-T2-123 V4-T2-126 V4-T2-140 V4-T2-157 V4-T2-165 V4-T2-192 V4-T2-218 V4-T2-229 V4-T2-244 V4-T2-263 V4-T2-274 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-277 V4-T2-281 V4-T2-312 2 2 Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) 2 Product Description 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Eaton’s Type ELC current limiter attachment for the MCP is designed to provide increased interrupting capacity. The combination may be used for the application up to 200,000A symmetrical at 600 Vac, making the MCP suitable for use in network distribution systems or other applications where unusually high fault currents are available. The current limiter connects to the load end of the MCP and is provided with terminals suitable for copper or aluminum conductors. (See table at right.) Product Selection Limiters are coordinated with the MCP so that normal fault currents are interrupted automatically by the MCP without any damage to the limiter. Only the rare very high fault is opened by the limiter. Faults that are interrupted by the limiter also magnetically trip the MCP, opening all three poles, preventing singlephase operation. Each of the three poles of the Type ELC limiter is equipped with an indicator that extends when a fault is interrupted by the limiter. Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment ELC Current Limiter Attachment MCP Rating (Amperes) Catalog Number 3 ELC3003R 7 ELC3007R 15 ELC3015R 30 ELC3030R 50 ELC3050R 100 ELC3100R 150 ELC3150R Technical Data and Specifications Type ELC Current Limiter Terminal Wire Sizes Type ELC Current Limiter Maximum Amperes 1 Wire Range AWG Metric (mm2) Standard Aluminum Terminals 2 50 14–2 2.5–35 100 1–4/0 50–95 2 150 1–4/0 50–95 Non-Standard Terminals (Steel) 2 2 50 14–2 2 2.5–35 100 — — 150 — — Notes 1 Terminal wire connectors are UL listed for standard stranded wire sizes as defined in UL 486A or UL 486B. 2 Optional on special order for copper cable only. 2 2 All HMCP 800A and 1200A come without terminals. For terminals, see Page V4-T2-224. 2 2 2 V4-T2-276 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Contents Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Description Page Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-121 V4-T2-122 V4-T2-123 V4-T2-126 V4-T2-140 V4-T2-157 V4-T2-165 V4-T2-192 V4-T2-218 V4-T2-229 V4-T2-244 V4-T2-263 V4-T2-274 V4-T2-276 V4-T2-278 V4-T2-280 V4-T2-281 V4-T2-312 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Product Overview Product Description Features and Benefits Standards and Certifications Power demand continues to grow in new and existing facilities. To meet increased demand, larger utility supplies, spot networks and large facility transformers are installed. The increased capacity of the electrical source results in increased fault currents in excess of 100 kA short-circuit protection. Eaton manufactures non-fused current limiting modules with interrupting capacities up to 200 kA at 600 Vac. Unlike fused current limiters with a one-time use, a current limiter module provides an automatic reset of the module after a short-circuit event. Resetting the moldedcase circuit breaker is the only action required to restore critical power to the system; there is no time wasted with sourcing the correct replacement fuses or module to bring the system back online. The current limiting breaker modules use a unique contact design to enhance the system protection similar to that of the circuit breaker. When high short-circuit current is flowing through the contacts of these modules, the design results in very high interrupting capacities and improved current limiting characteristics. Superior system protection: ● ● ● ● Application Description High-performance breakers are most commonly applied when very high fault levels are available and with applications where the current limiting capability is used upstream of the final load to limit current. Typical loads include lighting, power distribution, and motor control applications. ● ● ● Auto reset improves system uptime and eliminates the need for finding replacement parts No fuses to replace, reducing the overall cost of ownership and the waste created by fuses Overloads, by using inverse time current tripping characteristics of the molded-case circuit breaker Low-level short circuits, by using instantaneous and/or short-time delay tripping characteristics of the molded-case circuit breaker High-level short circuits, by using ultra-high-speed, blow-apart contacts of the current limiting module in series with the circuit breaker contacts Let-through currents, by improved opening speed of the contacts, the resultant rapid rise of arc voltage introduces impedance into the system ● UL 489 CSA C22.2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-277 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Product Selection 2 Series C High Performance Ratings 2 2 Type Product Amperes 480 Vac (UL) 600 Vac (UL) FDC 3P thermal-magnetic Breaker only 15–225 100 35 With limiter 40–200 200 200 2 2 FD Frame FD IC Rating—200 kAIC at 600 Vac 1 Ampere Rating 2 Breaker with Line Side Mounted Current Limiter 2 Breaker with Load Side Mounted Current Limiter 3 Thermal-Magnetic 2 40 FDC3040Q01 FDC3040Q02 45 FDC3045Q01 FDC3045Q02 50 FDC3050Q01 FDC3050Q02 2 60 FDC3060Q01 FDC3060Q02 70 FDC3070Q01 FDC3070Q02 2 80 FDC3080Q01 FDC3080Q02 90 FDC3090Q01 FDC3090Q02 2 100 FDC3100Q01 FDC3100Q02 2 110 FDC3110Q01 FDC3110Q02 125 FDC3125Q01 FDC3125Q02 2 150 FDC3150Q01 FDC3150Q02 175 FDC3175Q01 FDC3175Q02 2 200 FDC3200Q01 FDC3200Q02 2 Notes 1 Line and load terminal included. 2 Two interphase barriers provided, mounted on line end of limiter, catalog number FJ1PBK. 3 Four interphase barriers provided, (2) line end of breaker, (2) load end of limiter. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-278 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Limiter Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Wire Type Metric Wire Range mm2 AWG Wire Range/ Number of Conductors 2 Catalog Number 2 Standard Pressure Type Terminals 250 Aluminum Cu/Al 10–185 #8–350 (1) TA250FJ 2 1 2 Breaker Load Terminals (For Line Mounted Limiters Only) Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material AWG Wire Range Metric Wire Range mm2 Package of Three Terminals Wire Type Catalog Number 2 Standard Pressure Type Terminals 100 Steel Cu/AI 14–1/0 2.5–50 3T100FB 225 Aluminum Cu/AI 4–4/0 25–95 3TA225FD 2 2 2 Note 1 Load side breaker terminations included for units configured with line mounted limiters. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-279 2.3 2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Assembled Breaker and Current Limiting Module Frame Height Width Depth Weight in lbs (kg) FD + limiter 12.06 (306.3) 4.13 (104.9) 3.39 (86.1) 8.50 (3.86) 2 2 FD-Frame With Current Limiter Module 2 2 4.13 (104.9) 4.12 (104.6) 2 2 2 2 12.06 (306.3) 2 2 2 3.34 (84.8) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-280 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 3.96 (100.5) 3.39 (86.1) Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Contents Series C Internal Accessories Description Page Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module. . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-121 V4-T2-122 V4-T2-123 V4-T2-126 V4-T2-140 V4-T2-157 V4-T2-165 V4-T2-192 V4-T2-218 V4-T2-229 V4-T2-244 V4-T2-263 V4-T2-274 V4-T2-276 V4-T2-277 V4-T2-283 V4-T2-302 V4-T2-312 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Internal Accessories 2 Product Overview Alarm Switch For remote indication of automatic trip operation. Does not function with manual switching; however, it will operate when either a shunt trip or undervoltage release is operated. A “make” contact closes and a “break” contact opens when the alarm/lockout switch operates. The switch automatically resets when the circuit breaker is reset. Auxiliary Switch The auxiliary switch provides circuit breaker contact status information by monitoring the position of the molded cross bar that contains the moving contact arms. The auxiliary switch is used for remote indication and interlock system verification, and consists of one or two SPDT switches housed in a plug-in module. Each SPDT switch has one “a” and one “b” contact. When the circuit breaker contacts are open, the “a” contact is open and the “b” contact is closed. Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Each catalog number listed in tables on Pages V4-T2-286 and V4-T2-287 includes one auxiliary switch and one alarm switch. In an auxiliary switch ASL switch combination, the auxiliary switch is always mounted on the side of the plug-in module next to the center pole of the circuit breaker. Shunt Trip The shunt trip provides remote controlled tripping of the circuit breaker. The shunt trip consists of an intermittent rated solenoid with a tripping plunger and a cutoff switch assembled to a plug-in module. When required for ground fault protection applications, certain AC rated shunt trips, as noted in the electrical rating table, are suitable for operation at 55 percent of rated voltage. Select shunt trip catalog number for the voltage within the indicated voltage range. Shunt trip coils are designed to be applied at specific AC or DC voltages within the voltage range shown. Electrical ratings are also shown on applicable circuit breaker accessory nameplates. Low Energy Shunt Trip Low energy shunt trip devices are designed to operate from low energy output signals from dedicated current sensors typically applied in ground fault protection schemes. However, with a proper control voltage source, they may be applied in place of conventional trip devices for special applications. Flux paths surrounding permanent magnets used in the shunt trip assembly hold a charged spring poised in readiness to operate the circuit breaker trip mechanism. When a 100 microfarad capacitor charged to 28 Vdc is discharged through the shunt trip coil, the resultant flux opposes the permanent magnet flux field, which releases the stored energy in the spring to trip the circuit breaker. As the circuit breaker resets, the shunt trip reset arm is actuated by the circuit breaker handle, resetting the shunt trip. The plug-in module is mounted in retaining slots in the top of the trip unit. Coil is intermittent-rated only. Cutoff provisions required in control circuit. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-281 2.3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Undervoltage Release Mechanism The undervoltage release mechanism monitors a voltage (typically a line voltage) and trips the circuit breaker when the voltage falls to between 70 and 35 percent of the solenoid coil rating. The undervoltage release mechanism consists of a continuous rated solenoid with a plunger and tripping lever mounted in a plug-in module. The tab on the tripping lever resets the undervoltage release mechanism when normal voltage has been restored and the circuit breaker handle is moved to the reset (or OFF) position. With less than pickup voltage applied to the undervoltage release mechanism, the circuit breaker contacts will not touch when a closing operation is attempted. Accessory Terminal Block (R-Frame) (For fixed-mounted configuration.) Internal accessory wiring leads are normally supplied with pigtail leads (18 AWG) that exit from the right side of the circuit breaker. Where specified, fixed-mounted accessory terminal blocks are available. A maximum of one 24-point terminal block can be installed on the right side of the circuit breaker for the internal accessories. PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kits (OPTIM 550 only) K-, L- and N-Frames Eaton’s PowerNet Communications Kit can be ordered to add PowerNet communications to an existing OPTIM 550 breaker in the field. An 18-inch (457.2 mm) wiring pigtail is routed to the rear of the breaker: two wires for PowerNet and two wires for 24 Vdc (45 mA load). It is recommended that the power supply be an “isolated high quality” unit. For convenience in determining the appropriate number of terminal block points required, refer to Page V4-T2-282. Note: Undervoltage release mechanism accessories are not designed for, and should not be used as, circuit interlocks. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-282 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Product Selection 2 Alarm Switch Alarm Switch Electrical Ratings Make 2 G-Frame Alarm Switch (RH Only) 1 Volts Frequency 2 Amperes Contact Arrangement Factory Suffix Catalog Number 234 6 1 Make/1 Break B3 1288C75G03 2 B13 1288C76G09 2 2 Alarm Switch Break 240 50/60 Hz Alarm Switch Auxiliary Switches Combination 240 50/60 Hz 6 1 Make/1 Break and 1A/1B 2 F-Frame Alarm Switch 1 Factory Installation Kit 5 Factory Mounted 2 Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block 2 Number of Contacts (Make and Break) Mounting Location (Pole) Same Side Rear 6 Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 1 Left 7 B01 B02 B03 B04 A1L1LPK A1L1LTK Right B05 B06 B07 B08 A1L1RPK A1L1RTK 2 2 1 (Make only) 7 B09 B10 — B11 A2L1LPK A2L1LTK Right B12 B13 — B14 A2L1RPK A2L1RTK Single-pole B15 8 — — — — — Left 2 2 2 F-Frame HMCP Alarm Switch 1 Factory Installation Kit 5 Factory Mounted 2 Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block 2 Number of Contacts (Make and Break) Mounting Location (Pole) Same Side Rear 6 Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 1 Left 7 B01 B02 B03 B04 MA1L1LPK MA1L1LTK Right B05 B06 B07 B08 MA1L1RPK MA1L1RTK 2 B09 B10 — B11 MA2L1LPK MA2L1LTK B12 B13 — B14 MA2L1RPK MA2L1RTK 2 Left 7 Right 2 J-Frame and HMCP (J) Alarm Switch Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 9 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Number of Contacts (Make and Break) Mounting Location (Pole) 1 2 Terminal Block Pigtail Leads 2 Terminal Block Same Side Rear 7 Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Left j B01 B02 B03 B04 A1L2LPK A1L2LTK Right B05 B06 B07 B08 A1L2RPK A1L2RTK 6 Notes 1 F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected. 2 Includes 24-inch (609.6 mm) external pigtail leads,18 AWG (16–0.010). 3 A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a three-pole circuit breaker. 4 Suitable for mounting in right pole only of two- or three-pole breaker. 5 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation. 6 Standard pigtail lead exit location. 7 Standard mounting location. 8 Factory installation only. Leads exit load end of circuit breaker. 9 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation on interchangeable trip unit breakers under E64983. j Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker. Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-283 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2.3 2 2 2 2 2 Series C K-Frame and HMCP (K) Alarm Switch Catalog Number Catalog Number B03 B04 A1L3LPK A1L3LTK B07 B08 A1L3RPK A1L3RTK B10 — B11 A2L3LPK A2L3LTK B13 — B14 A2L3RPK A2L3RTK Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number 1 Left 3 B01 B02 Right 4 B05 B06 Left 3 B09 Right 4 B12 2 L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Alarm Switch Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads 2 Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Suffix Number Catalog Number Catalog Number B03 B04 A1L4LPK A1L4LTK B07 B08 A1L4RPK A1L4RTK B10 — B11 A2L4LPK A2L4LTK B13 — B14 A2L4RPK A2L4RTK Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number Left 3 B01 B02 Right B05 B06 Left 3 B09 Right B12 N-Frame and HMCP (N) Alarm Switch 2 Number of Sets of Contacts (1M and 1B) 2 1 2 2 2 Suffix Number Same Side 2 2 Terminal Block Opposite Side 1 2 Pigtail Leads Rear 2 2 2 Terminal Block Same Side Mounting Location (Pole) 2 Field Installation Kits 1 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Number of Sets of Contacts (1M and 1B) 2 Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Mounting Location (Pole) 2 2 Factory Mounted Number of Sets of Contacts (1M and 1B) 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 5 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Mounting Location (Pole) Terminal Block Catalog Number Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number Left B01 B02 B03 B04 A1L5LPK A1L5LTK B05 B06 B07 B08 A1L5RPK A1L5RTK Left B09 B10 — B11 A2L5LPK A2L5LTK B12 B13 — B14 A2L5RPK A2L5RTK 3 R-Frame Alarm Switch (RH Only) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 5 2 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads Catalog Number 6 2 1 B05 A1L6RPK 2 B12 A2L6RPK 2 Catalog Number Same Side Suffix Number 6 2 Suffix Number Opposite Side Number of Contacts (Make and Break) 2 Terminal Block Rear 2 Right 3 Right 2 2 Pigtail Leads Same Side Notes 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation on interchangeable trip unit breakers under E64983. 2 Standard mounting location. 3 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker. 4 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole. 5 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983. 6 A maximum of three ASL plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker. 2 2 2 V4-T2-284 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Auxiliary Switch Auxiliary Switch 2 a b 2 G-Frame Auxiliary Switch (RH Only) Electrical Ratings Volts Frequency Amperes Contact Arrangement Factory Suffix Catalog Number 12 240 50/60 Hz 6 1a/1b A3 1288C74G03 240 50/60 Hz 6 2a/2b A6 1288C73G03 2 2 2 F-Frame and HMCP (F) Auxiliary Switch Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit 4 2 Connection Type and Location Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Number of Contacts A and B Mounting Location (Pole) Same Side Suffix Number Rear 3 Suffix Number Opposite Side Suffix Number Same Side Suffix Number 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 1 Left 5 A01 A02 A03 A04 A1X1PK A1X1LTK Left 5 A15 7 A16 7 A17 7 — E1X1PK — 2 A05 A06 A07 A08 A1X1PK A1X1RTK 8 — — — 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Right or Neutral 6 Right or Neutral 2 6 A18 7 A19 7 A20 7 Left 5 A09 A10 — A11 A2X1LPK A2X1LTK Left 5 A21 7 A22 7 — — E2X1LPK — Right or Neutral 6 A12 A13 — A14 A2X1RPK A2X1RTK 8 Right or Neutral 6 A23 7 A24 7 — — E2X1RPK — F-Frame with Electronic Trip Unit Auxiliary Switch 2 2 2 Factory Installation Kit 4 2 Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block 2 9 Factory Mounted Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads 2 Number of Contacts A and B Mounting Location (Pole) Same Side Suffix Number Rear Suffix Number Opposite Side Suffix Number Same Side Suffix Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 1 Right A30 A31 A32 — A1X1RPKFDE — 2 2 2 J-Frame and HMCP (J) Auxiliary Switch Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Factory Installation Kit j 2 Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Number of Contacts A and B Mounting Location (Pole) Same Side Suffix Number Rear 3 Suffix Number Opposite Side Suffix Number Same Side Suffix Number 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 1 Left A01 A02 A03 A04 A1X2PK A1X2LTK Right k A05 A06 A07 A08 A1X2PK A1X2RTK 4 2 Left A09 A10 — A11 A2X2PK A2X2LTK Right k A12 A13 — A14 A2X2PK A2X2RTK 4 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads 2 Notes 1 Includes 24-inch external pigtail leads, 18 AWG (16–0.010). 2 A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a three-pole circuit breaker. Suitable for mounting in right pole only of two- or three-pole breaker. 3 Standard pigtail lead exit location. 4 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation. 5 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). 6 Not for use on F-Frame with electronic trip unit. 7 125 volts (max.), 50/60 Hz switch for use in electronic circuit of 100 micro amperes and 15 Vdc minimum. 8 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers. 9 Only for use on three-pole F-Frame breakers with electronic trip unit. j Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation or interchangeable trip unit breakers under E64983. k Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-285 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C K-Frame and HMCP (K) Auxiliary Switch 2 2 2 2 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Same Side Suffix Number 1 Left A01 Right 23 A05 Left A09 Right 23 A12 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Terminal Block Catalog Number Catalog Number A02 A03 A04 A1X3PK A1X3LTK A06 A07 A08 A1X3PK A1X3RTK 4 A10 — A11 A2X3PK A2X3LTK A13 — A14 A2X3PK A2X3RTK 4 Right A21 A22 — — 1482D28G10 67 — A18 — — A15 A3X3LPK A3X3LTK Right 3 A17 — — A16 A3X3RPK A3X3RTK 4 Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Factory Installation Kit 1 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Number of Contacts A and B 1 2 3 Mounting Location (Pole) Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Suffix Number Rear 2 Suffix Number Opposite Side Suffix Number Same Side Suffix Number Catalog Number Catalog Number A1X4LTK Left A01 A02 A03 A04 A1X4PK Right 2 A05 A06 A07 A08 A1X4PK A1X4RTK 4 Left A09 A10 — A11 A2X4PK A2X4LTK Right 2 A12 A13 — A14 A2X4PK A2X4RTK 4 Left A18 — — A15 A3X4PK A3X4LTK Right 2 A17 — — A16 A3X4PK A3X4RTK 4 N-Frame and HMCP (N) Auxiliary Switch 2 2 Pigtail Leads Same Side Suffix Number L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Auxiliary Switch 2 2 Terminal Block Opposite Side Suffix Number Rear 2 Suffix Number Left 2 2 Factory Installation Kit 1 Mounting Location (Pole) 2 2 Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Number of Contacts A and B 2 2 Factory Mounted Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Factory Installation Kit 1 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Number of Contacts A and B 1 2 3 Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Mounting Location (Pole) Same Side Suffix Number Rear 2 Suffix Number Opposite Side Suffix Number Same Side Suffix Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Left A01 A02 A03 A04 A1X5PK A1X5LTK Right 2 A05 A06 A07 A08 A1X5PK A1X5RTK 4 Left A09 A10 — A11 A2X5PK A2X5LTK Right 2 A12 A13 — A14 A2X5PK A2X5RTK 4 Left A18 — — A15 A3X5LPK A3X5LTK Right 2 A17 — — A16 A3X5RPK A3X5RTK 4 R-Frame Auxiliary Switch (RH Only) 2 Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 2 Number of Contacts A and B 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads Suffix Number 5 Catalog Number 5 2 A12 A2X6RPK 4 A19 A4X6RPK 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983. 2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker. 3 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole. 4 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers. 5 A maximum of two auxiliary switches (any combination of 2a/2b or 4a/4b plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker. 6 This option is not field installable. 7 Available on the OPTIM 550 only. Communications are not available with this option. V4-T2-286 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination a b 2 F-Frame Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit 1 2 Pigtail Leads Terminal Block 2 Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Mounting Location (Pole) Same Side Rear 2 Same Side Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Left 2 C01 C02 C03 AAL1LPK AAL1LTK Right C04 C05 C06 AAL1RPK AAL1RTK 3 2 2 2 Factory Installation Kit 1 2 Pigtail Leads Terminal Block 2 F-Frame HMCP Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Factory Mounted Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block 2 2 Same Side Mounting Location (Pole) Same Side Rear Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Left 3 C01 C02 C03 MAAL1LPK MAAL1LTK Right C04 C05 C06 MAAL1RPK MAAL1RPK 2 2 2 J-Frame and HMCP (J) Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Factory Mounted Field Mounted Field Installation Kits 4 Connection Type and Location Number of Sets of Contacts (1A and 1B) (1M–1B) Mounting Location (Pole) Same Side Rear 5 Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 1 Left C01 C02 — C03 AAL2LPK AAL2LTK Right 3 C04 C05 — C06 AAL2RPK AAL2RTK 3 18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Field Mounted Mounting Location (Pole) Same Side Rear 5 Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number 1 Left C01 C02 — Right 56 C04 C05 — 18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Right C07 C08 Terminal Block Pigtail Leads — 2 2 2 Field Installation Kits 4 Connection Type and Location Number of Sets of Contacts (1A and 1B) (1M–1B) 2 2 K-Frame and HMCP (K) Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Factory Mounted 2 Terminal Block 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 C03 AAL3LPK AAL3LTK C06 AAL3RPK 7 2 — 1482D28G09 AAL3RTK 89 2 — Notes 1 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation. 2 Standard mounting location. 3 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers 4 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation of interchangeable trip unit breakers under E64983. 5 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker. 6 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole. 7 Will not install on OPTIM Trip (RH). 8 Available on the OPTIM 550 only. Communications are not available with this option. 9 This option is not field installable. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-287 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number C01 C02 — C03 AA114LPK AA114LTK Right 2 C04 C05 — C06 AA114RPK AA114RTK 3 2A, 2B and 1 Make/1 Break Left C07 C08 — C12 AA214LPK AA214LTK C10 C11 — C13 AA214RPK AA214RTK 3 3A, 3B and 1 Make/1 Break Left C14 — — — AA314LPK — Right 2 C15 — — — AA314RPK — Right 2 N-Frame and HMCP (N) Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Suffix Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number 2 1A, 1B and 1 Make/1 Break Left 2 2A, 2B and 1 Make/1 Break 2 Catalog Number Left Same Side 2 Catalog Number 1A, 1B and 1 Make/1 Break Mounting Location (Pole) 2 Terminal Block Mounting Location (Pole) Number of Sets of Contacts 2 Pigtail Leads Number of Sets of Contacts 2 2 Factory Mounted C01 C02 — C03 AA115LPK AA115LTK 2 C04 C05 — C06 AA115RPK AA115RTK 3 Left C07 C08 — C12 AA215LPK AA215LTK Right 2 C10 C11 — C13 AA215RPK AA215RTK 3 Right Notes 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983. 2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker. 3 Not for use on four-pole circuit breaker. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-288 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Shunt Trip Shunt Trip 2 2 G-Frame Shunt Trip (LH Three-Pole Only) Electrical Ratings ST a Catalog Number 2 2 Volts Frequency Amperes Suffix Number 120 50/60 Hz 1.1 S1 1373D62G01 240 50/60 Hz 2.1 S2 1373D62G02 12 DC 2.8 S3 1373D62G15 24 DC 5.7 S4 1373D62G16 24 60 Hz — S7 1373D62G20 2 2 2 F-Frame and HMCP (F) Shunt Trip 2 Factory Installation Kit 1 Factory Mounted Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads 2 Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear 3 Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 12–24 Vac or Vdc S01 S02 S03 S04 SNT1LP03K SNT1LT03K 48–127 Vac or 48–60 Vdc 4 S05 S06 S07 S08 SNT1LP08K SNT1LT08K 208–380 Vac or 110–127 Vdc S09 S10 S11 S12 SNT1LP12K SNT1LT12K 415–600 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S13 S14 S15 S16 SNT1LP18K SNT1LT18K S18 S19 S20 SNT1RP03K SNT1RT03K 6 Voltage Rating (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) 2 2 Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 5 12–24 Vac or Vdc S17 2 48–127 Vac or 48–60 Vdc 4 S21 S22 S23 S24 SNT1RP08K SNT1RT08K 6 208–380 Vac or 110–127 Vdc S25 S26 S27 S28 SNT1RP12K SNT1RT12K 6 415–600 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S29 S30 S31 S32 SNT1RP18K SNT1RT18K 6 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation. 2 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). 3 Standard pigtail lead exit location. 4 120 Vac marked suitable for ground fault protection devices. 5 Standard mounting location. 6 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers. 2 2 2 G-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-289 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C J-Frame and HMCP (J) Shunt Trip Factory Mounted Field Mounted 2 Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 2 Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number 2 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Voltage Rating (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Suffix Number Catalog Number Catalog Number SNT2T04K Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 2 2 12–24 Vac or Vdc S41 S42 S43 S44 SNT2P04K 2 48–60 Vac or Vdc S49 S50 S51 S52 SNT2P06K SNT2T06K 110–240 Vac or 110–125 Vdc 3 S09 S10 S11 S12 SNT2P11K SNT2T11K 2 380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S13 S14 S15 S16 SNT2P14K SNT2T14K 480–600 Vac S17 S18 S19 S20 SNT2P18K SNT2T18K 2 Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 12–24 Vac or Vdc S45 S46 S47 S48 SNT2P04K SNT2T04K 4 2 48–60 Vac or Vdc S53 S54 S55 S56 SNT2P06K SNT2T06K 4 2 S29 S30 S31 S32 SNT2P11K SNT2T11K 4 380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S33 S34 S35 S36 SNT2P14K SNT2T14K 4 480–600 Vac S37 S38 S39 S40 SNT2P18K SNT2T18K 4 2 2 110–240 Vac or 110–125 Vdc 3 K-Frame and HMCP (K) Shunt Trip 2 Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 2 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Suffix Number Catalog Number Catalog Number S43 S44 SNT3P04K SNT3T04K S51 S52 SNT3P06K SNT3T06K S10 S11 S12 SNT3P11K SNT3T11K S13 S14 S15 S16 SNT3P14K SNT3T14K S17 S18 S19 S20 SNT3P18K SNT3T18K S45 S46 S47 S48 SNT3P04K SNT3T04K 4 48–60 Vac or Vdc S53 S54 S55 S56 SNT3P06K SNT3T06K 4 2 110–240 Vac or 110–125 Vdc 3 S29 S30 S31 S32 SNT3P11K SNT3T11K 4 2 380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S33 S34 S35 S36 SNT3P14K SNT3T14K 4 480–600 Vac S37 S38 S39 S40 SNT3P18K SNT3T18K 4 Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number 12–24 Vac or Vdc S41 S42 2 48–60 Vac or Vdc S49 S50 2 110–240 Vac or 110–125 Vdc 3 S09 380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc 2 480–600 Vac 2 12–24 Vac or Vdc 2 2 2 2 2 Voltage Rating (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 2 Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 56 Notes 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983. 2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker. 3 Suitable for use with Class 1 ground fault sensing element. 4 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers. 5 For use with KT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only. 6 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole. 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-290 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Shunt Trip Factory Mounted 2 Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads 2 1 Terminal Block Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 12–24 Vac or Vdc S01 S02 S03 S04 SNT4LP03K SNT4LT03K 48–60 Vac S05 S06 S07 S08 SNT4LP05K SNT4LT05K 48–60 Vdc S85 S86 S87 — SNT4LP23K SNT4LT23K 110–240 Vac S09 S10 S11 S12 SNT4LP11K SNT4LT11K 110–125 Vdc S41 S42 S43 S44 SNT4LP26K SNT4LT26K 380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S13 S14 S15 S16 SNT4LP14K SNT4LT14K 480–600 Vac S17 S18 S19 S20 SNT4LP18K SNT4LT18K S21 S22 S23 S24 SNT4RP03K SNT4RT03K Voltage Rating (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) 2 Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 2 Right-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 3 12–24 Vac or Vdc 2 48–60 Vac S25 S26 S27 S28 SNT4RP05K SNT4RT05K 48–60 Vdc S88 S89 S90 — SNT4RP23K SNT4RT23K 110–240 Vac S29 S30 S31 S32 SNT4RP11K SNT4RT11K 110–125 Vdc S45 S46 S47 S48 SNT4RP26K SNT4RT26K 380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S33 S34 S35 S36 SNT4RP14K SNT4RT14K 480–600 Vac S37 S38 S39 S40 SNT4RP18K SNT4RT18K Notes 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation under E64983. 2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker. 3 For use with LT (thermal-magnetic) three-pole trip units only. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-291 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C N-Frame and HMCP (N) Shunt Trip Factory Mounted Field Mounted 2 Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 2 Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 9–24 Vac or Vdc S01 S02 S03 S04 SNT5LP03K SNT5LT03K 48–60 Vac S05 S06 S07 S08 SNT5LP05K SNT5LT05K 2 2 2 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Voltage Rating (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) Terminal Block Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 2 3 S09 S10 S11 S12 SNT5LP11K SNT5LT11K 2 110–125 Vdc S41 S42 S43 S44 SNT5LP26K SNT5LT26K 380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S13 S14 S15 S16 SNT5LP14K SNT5LT14K 2 480–600 Vac S17 S18 S19 S20 SNT5LP18K SNT5LT18K 48–60 Vdc S21 S22 S23 S24 SNT5LP23K SNT5LT23K 110–240 Vac 2 2 R-Frame Shunt Trip (RH Only) 2 Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads 2 Voltage Rating (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) Suffix Number 4 Catalog Number 4 2 24 Vac or Vdc S21 SNT6P03K 48–60 Vac S25 SNT6P05K 2 110–240 Vac S29 SNT6P11K 2 380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S33 SNT6P14K 480–600 Vac S37 SNT6P18K 2 48–60 Vdc S88 SNT6P23K 110–125 Vdc S45 SNT6P26K 2 2 2 Notes 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983. 2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker. 3 Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with accessory kits. 4 A maximum of two shunt trip plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-292 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Low Energy Shunt Trip Ordering Information 2 Select shunt trip catalog number for the voltage within the indicated voltage range. Shunt trip coils are designed to be applied at specific AC or DC voltages within the voltage range shown. Electrical ratings are also shown on applicable circuit breaker accessory nameplates. 2 Low Energy Shunt Trip 2 2 2 2 2 F-, J-, K-, L-, M-, N- and R-Frames and HMCPs Low Energy Shunt Trip 1 Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 2 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads UV Mounting Positions (Pole) Same Side Rear Suffix Number 3 Suffix Number 2 2 Terminal Block Opposite Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Suffix Number Suffix Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 2 F-Frame 4 LST1LTK 2 4 Left NO1 NO2 NO3 NO4 LST1LPK Right 3 NO5 NO6 NO7 NO8 LST1RPK 4 LST1RTK 4 Left NO1 NO2 NO3 — LST2LPK — Right 3 NO5 NO6 NO7 — LST2RPK — 2 NO1 NO2 NO3 — LST3LPK — 2 NO5 NO6 NO7 — LST3RPK — 2 2 2 J-Frame K-Frame Left 3 Right 56 L- and M-Frames Left NO1 NO2 NO3 — LST4LPK — Right NO5 NO6 NO7 — LST4RPK — 2 NO1 NO2 NO3 — LST5LPK — 2 NO1 — — — LST6RPK — N-Frame Left 3 R-Frame Right 2 Notes 1 Cutoff provisions required in control circuit. 2 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983. 3 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker. 4 For F-Frame HMCP, add an “M” to beginning of catalog number. Field Installation Kit referenced for factory use only, not UL listed for field installation. 5 For use with thermal-magnetic trip units only. 6 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-293 2.3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Undervoltage Release Mechanism Ordering Information Select handle reset undervoltage release mechanism catalog number for the voltage within the indicated voltage range. Undervoltage release mechanism coils are designed to be applied at specific AC or DC voltages within the voltage range shown on applicable circuit breaker accessory nameplates. Undervoltage Release Mechanism UV 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 G-Frame Undervoltage Release Mechanism (LH Three-Pole Only) Electrical Ratings Volts (AC Only) Frequency Amperes Style Numbers 123 Factory Suffix 120 50/60 Hz 0.05 1373D62G03 T1 24 50/60 Hz 0.22 1373D62G04 T2 48 50/60 Hz 0.11 1373D62G05 T3 60 50/60 Hz 0.10 1373D62G06 T4 110 50 Hz 0.049 1373D62G07 T5 208 60 Hz 0.026 1373D62G08 T6 220 50 Hz 0.025 1373D62G09 T7 240 50/60 Hz 0.024 1373D62G10 T8 380 50 Hz 0.015 1373D62G11 T9 415 50 Hz 0.013 1373D62G12 T10 440 50 Hz 0.012 1373D62G13 T11 480 60 Hz 0.01 1373D62G14 T12 Notes 1 Includes 24-inch (609.6 mm) external pigtail leads, 18 AWG (16–0.010). 2 A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a three-pole circuit breaker. 3 Suitable for mounting in left pole only of three-pole breaker. 2 2 G-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-294 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 F-Frame Factory Mounted (For F-Frame Breaker and F-Frame HMCP) Undervoltage Release Mechanism 2 Connection Type and Location 18-Inch Pigtail Leads Rear 1 Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number 12 Vac U01 U02 U03 U04 24 Vac U05 U06 U07 U08 48 Vac U37 U38 U39 U40 60 Vac U97 U98 U99 U100 110–127 Vac U13 U14 U15 U16 208–240 Vac U17 U18 U19 U20 380–480 Vac U21 U22 U23 U24 525–600 Vac U25 U26 U27 U28 Voltage Rating (AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz) 2 Terminal Block Same Side 2 2 Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 2 2 2 2 2 Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 23 12 Vac U49 U50 U51 U52 24 Vac U53 U54 U55 U56 48 Vac U85 U86 U87 U88 60 Vac U101 U102 U103 U104 110–127 Vac U61 U62 U63 U64 208–240 Vac U65 U66 U67 U68 380–480 Vac U69 U70 U71 U72 525–600 Vac U73 U74 U75 U76 12 Vdc U29 U30 U31 U32 24 Vdc U33 U34 U35 U36 48 Vdc U37 U38 U39 U40 60 Vdc U97 U98 U99 U100 110–127 Vdc U41 U42 U43 U44 220–250 Vdc U45 U46 U47 U48 2 2 2 2 2 Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 2 2 2 2 Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 23 12 Vdc U77 U78 U79 U80 24 Vdc U81 U82 U83 U84 48 Vdc U85 U86 U87 U88 60 Vdc U101 U102 U103 U104 110–127 Vdc U89 U90 U91 U92 220–250 Vdc U93 U94 U95 U96 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Standard pigtail lead exit location. 2 Standard mounting location. 3 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breaker. 2 F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-295 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C F-Frame Field Mounted Undervoltage Release Mechanism F-Frame Breaker 2 2 Voltage Rating (AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz) 2 Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 2 2 2 2 2 F-Frame Breaker HMCP Factory Installation Kits 1 Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number MUVH1LT02K 12 Vac UVH1LP02K UVH1LT02K MUVH1LP02K 24 Vac UVH1LP03K UVH1LT03K MUVH1LP03K MUVH1LT03K 48 Vac UVH1LP22K UVH1LT22K MUVH1LP22K MUVH1LT22K MUVH1LT24K 60 Vac UVH1LP24K UVH1LT24K MUVH1LP24K 110–127 Vac UVH1LP08K UVH1LT08K MUVH1LP08K MUVH1LT08K 208–240 Vac UVH1LP11K UVH1LT11K MUVH1LP11K MUVH1LT11K 380–480 Vac UVH1LP15K UVH1LT15K MUVH1LP15K MUVH1LT15K 525–600 Vac UVH1LP18K UVH1LT18K MUVH1LP18K MUVH1LT18K Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 23 12 Vac UVH1RP02K UVH1RT02K MUVH1RP02K MUVH1RT02K 24 Vac UVH1RP03K UVH1RT03K MUVH1RP03K MUVH1RT03K 2 48 Vac UVH1RP22K UVH1RT22K MUVH1RP22K MUVH1RT22K 60 Vac UVH1RP24K UVH1RT24K MUVH1RP24K MUVH1RT24K 2 110–127 Vac UVH1RP08K UVH1RT08K MUVH1RP08K MUVH1RT08K 2 208–240 Vac UVH1RP11K UVH1RT11K MUVH1RP11K MUVH1RT11K 380–480 Vac UVH1RP15K UVH1RT15K MUVH1RP15K MUVH1RT15K 525–600 Vac UVH1RP18K UVH1RT18K MUVH1RP18K MUVH1RT18K 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 12 Vdc UVH1LP20K UVH1LT20K MUVH1LP20K MUVH1LT20K 24 Vdc UVH1LP21K UVH1LT21K MUVH1LP21K MUVH1LT21K 48 Vdc UVH1LP22K UVH1LT22K MUVH1LP22K MUVH1LT22K 60 Vdc UVH1LP24K UVH1LT24K MUVH1LP24K MUVH1LT24K 110–127 Vdc UVH1LP26K UVH1LT26K MUVH1LP26K MUVH1LT26K 220–250 Vdc UVH1LP28K UVH1LT28K MUVH1LP28K MUVH1LT28K Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 23 12 Vdc UVH1RP20K UVH1RT20K MUVH1RP20K MUVH1RT20K 24 Vdc UVH1RP21K UVH1RT21K MUVH1RP21K MUVH1RT21K 2 48 Vdc UVH1RP22K UVH1RT22K MUVH1RP22K MUVH1RT22K 2 60 Vdc UVH1RP22K UVH1RT22K MUVH1RP22K MUVH1RT22K 110–127 Vdc UVH1RP26K UVH1RT26K MUVH1RP26K MUVH1RT26K 220–250 Vdc UVH1RP28K UVH1RT28K MUVH1RP28K MUVH1RT28K 2 2 2 Notes 1 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation. 2 Standard mounting location. 3 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breaker. 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-296 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 J-Frame and HMCP (J) Undervoltage Release Mechanism Factory Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 2 2 Terminal Block 1 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Voltage Rating (AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz) 2 Field Mounted Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block 3 Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Suffix Number 2 2 Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 4 12 Vac U05 U06 U07 U08 UVH2LP02K UVH2LT02K 24 Vac U09 U10 U11 U12 UVH2LP03K UVH2LT03K 48–60 Vac U13 U14 U15 U16 UVH2LP05K UVH2LT05K 110–127 Vac U17 U18 U19 U20 UVH2LP08K UVH2LT08K 208–240 Vac U21 U22 U23 U24 UVH2LP11K UVH2LT11K 380–480 Vac U25 U26 U27 U28 UVH2LP15K UVH2LT15K 2 2 2 2 Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 3 2 12 Vac U37 U38 U39 U40 UVH2RP02K UVH2RT02K 24 Vac U41 U42 U43 U44 UVH2RP03K UVH2RT03K 48–60 Vac U45 U46 U47 U48 UVH2RP05K UVH2RT05K 110–127 Vac U49 U50 U51 U52 UVH2RP08K UVH2RT08K 208–240 Vac U53 U54 U55 U56 UVH2RP11K UVH2RT11K 380–480 Vac U57 U58 U59 U60 UVH2RP15K UVH2RT15K 2 2 2 2 Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 4 12 Vdc T01 T02 T03 T04 UVH2LP20K UVH2LT20K 24 Vdc T05 T06 T07 T08 UVH2LP21K UVH2LT21K 48–60 Vdc T09 T10 T11 T12 UVH2LP23K UVH2LT23K 110–127 Vdc T13 T14 T15 T16 UVH2LP26K UVH2LT26K 220–250 Vdc T17 T18 T19 T20 UVH2LP28K UVH2LT28K 2 2 2 2 Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 3 12 Vdc T21 T22 T23 T24 UVH2RP20K UVH2RT20K 24 Vdc T25 T26 T27 T28 UVH2RP21K UVH2RT21K 48–60 Vdc T29 T30 T31 T32 UVH2RP23K UVH2RT23K 110–127 Vdc T33 T34 T35 T36 UVH2RP26K UVH2RT26K 220–250 Vdc T37 T38 T39 T40 UVH2RP28K UVH2RT28K 2 2 2 Notes 1 For electrical rating data for manual, automatic and electrical reset undervoltage release mechanisms, refer to Eaton. 2 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983. 3 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breakers. 4 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-297 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C K-Frame and HMCP (K) Undervoltage Release Mechanism Factory Mounted Field Mounted 2 Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 2 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 Voltage Rating (AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz) 2 Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 2 12 Vac U05 U06 U07 U08 UVH3LP02K UVH3LT02K 2 24 Vac U09 U10 U11 U12 UVH3LP03K UVH3LT03K 48–60 Vac U13 U14 U15 U16 UVH3LP05K UVH3LT05K 2 110–127 Vac U17 U18 U19 U20 UVH3LP08K UVH3LT08K 2 208–240 Vac U21 U22 U23 U24 UVH3LP11K UVH3LT11K 380–480 Vac U25 U26 U27 U28 UVH3LP15K UVH3LT15K Suffix Number 2 Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 345 12 Vac U37 U38 U39 U40 UVH3RP02K UVH3RT02K 2 24 Vac U41 U42 U43 U44 UVH3RP03K UVH3RT03K 48–60 Vac U45 U46 U47 U48 UVH3RP05K UVH3RT05K 110–127 Vac U49 U50 U51 U52 UVH3RP08K UVH3RT08K 2 208–240 Vac U53 U54 U55 U56 UVH3RP11K UVH3RT11K 380–480 Vac U57 U58 U59 U60 UVH3RP15K UVH3RT15K 2 Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 2 12 Vdc T01 T02 T03 T04 UVH3LP20K UVH3LT20K 2 24 Vdc T05 T06 T07 T08 UVH3LP21K UVH3LT21K 2 48–60 Vdc T09 T10 T11 T12 UVH3LP23K UVH3LT23K 110–127 Vdc T13 T14 T15 T16 UVH3LP26K UVH3LT26K 2 220–250 Vdc T17 T18 T19 T20 UVH3LP28K UVH3LT28K 2 12 Vdc T21 T22 T23 T24 UVH3RP20K UVH3RT20K 24 Vdc T25 T26 T27 T28 UVH3RP21K UVH3RT21K 2 48–60 Vdc T29 T30 T31 T32 UVH3RP23K UVH3RT23K 2 110–127 Vdc T33 T34 T35 T36 UVH3RP26K UVH3RT26K 220–250 Vdc T37 T38 T39 T40 UVH3RP28K UVH3RT28K 2 2 2 2 Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 345 Notes 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation under E64983. 2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker. 3 For use with KT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only. 4 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breaker. 5 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-298 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 L-, HMCP (L) and (M)-Frames and Undervoltage Release Mechanism Factory Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Voltage Rating (AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz) 2 Field Mounted 2 1 Terminal Block Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 2 Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 2 12 Vac U05 U06 U07 U08 UVH4LP02K UVH4LT02K 24 Vac U09 U10 U11 U12 UVH4LP03K UVH4LT03K 48–60 Vac U13 U14 U15 U16 UVH4LP05K UVH4LT05K 110–127 Vac U17 U18 U19 U20 UVH4LP08K UVH4LT08K 208–240 Vac U21 U22 U23 U24 UVH4LP11K UVH4LT11K 380–480 Vac U25 U26 U27 U28 UVH4LP15K UVH4LT15K 2 2 2 2 Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 34 2 12 Vac U37 U38 U39 U40 UVH4RP02K UVH4RT02K 24 Vac U41 U42 U43 U44 UVH4RP03K UVH4RT03K 48–60 Vac U45 U46 U47 U48 UVH4RP05K UVH4RT05K 110–127 Vac U49 U50 U51 U52 UVH4RP08K UVH4RT08K 208–240 Vac U53 U54 U55 U56 UVH4RP11K UVH4RT11K 380–480 Vac U57 U58 U59 U60 UVH4RP15K UVH4RT15K 2 2 2 2 Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 2 12 Vdc T01 T02 T03 T04 UVH4LP20K UVH4LT20K 24 Vdc T05 T06 T07 T08 UVH4LP21K UVH4LT21K 48–60 Vdc T09 T10 T11 T12 UVH4LP23K UVH4LT23K 110–127 Vdc T13 T14 T15 T16 UVH4LP26K UVH4LT26K 220–250 Vdc T17 T18 T19 T20 UVH4LP28K UVH4LT28K 2 2 2 2 Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 34 12 Vdc T21 T22 T23 T24 UVH4RP20K UVH4RT20K 24 Vdc T25 T26 T27 T28 UVH4RP21K UVH4RT21K 48–60 Vdc T29 T30 T31 T32 UVH4RP23K UVH4RT23K 110–127 Vdc T33 T34 T35 T36 UVH4RP26K UVH4RT26K 220–250 Vdc T37 T38 T39 T40 UVH4RP28K UVH4RT28K 2 2 2 Notes 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983. 2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker. 3 For use with LT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only. 4 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breaker. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-299 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C N-Frame and HMCP (N) Undervoltage Release Mechanism 2 2 2 2 Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Voltage Rating (AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz) Terminal Block Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number Suffix Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 2 12 Vac U05 U06 U07 U08 UVH5LP02K UVH5LT02K 24 Vac U09 U10 U11 U12 UVH5LP03K UVH5LT03K 2 48–60 Vac U13 U14 U15 U16 UVH5LP05K UVH5LT05K 2 110–127 Vac U17 U18 U19 U20 UVH5LP08K UVH5LT08K 208–240 Vac U21 U22 U23 U24 UVH5LP11K UVH5LT11K 2 380–480 Vac U25 U26 U27 U28 UVH5LP29K UVH5LT29K 2 12 Vdc T01 T02 T03 T04 UVH5LP20K UVH5LT20K 24 Vdc T05 T06 T07 T08 UVH5LP21K UVH5LT21K 2 48–60 Vdc T09 T10 T11 T12 UVH5LP23K UVH5LT23K 2 110–127 Vdc T13 T14 T15 T16 UVH5LP26K UVH5LT26K 220–250 Vdc T17 T18 T19 T20 UVH5LP28K UVH5LT28K 2 2 Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 2 R-Frame Undervoltage Release Mechanism (RH only) Factory Mounted 2 Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 3 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads 2 Voltage Rating (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) Suffix Number 4 Catalog Number 4 2 12 Vac U37 UVH6RP02K 24 Vac U41 UVH6RP03K 2 48–60 Vac U45 UVH6RP05K 110–127 Vac U49 UVH6RP08K 2 208–240 Vac U53 UVH6RP11K 2 380–500 Vac U57 UVH6RP29K 12 Vdc T21 UVH6RP20K 2 24 Vdc T25 UVH6RP21K 48–60 Vdc T29 UVH6RP23K 2 110–125 Vdc T33 UVH6RP26K 220–250 Vdc T37 UVH6RP28K 2 2 2 Notes 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983. 2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker. 3 Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus 2500 mechanical operations. 4 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). Leads are orange and brown. 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-300 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Accessory Terminal Block (R-Frame) Accessory Terminal Block (R-Frame) 2 R-Frame Accessory Terminal Block 1 Factory Installed Field Mounted 2 Suffix Number Catalog Number 2 Q01 TBRDK 2 2 2 Number of Control Wires for Each Internally Mounted Accessory Number of Contacts per Single Accessory Required Number of Wires 2 Auxiliary switch 2a/2b 4a/4b 6 12 2 Alarm (Signal)/ Lockout switch 1m/1b 2m/2b 6 12 Shunt trip N/A 2 2 Low energy shunt N/A 2 Undervoltage release mechanism N/A 2 Type of Accessory 2 2 2 PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kits (OPTIM 550 Only) K-, L- and N-Frames PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kits 2 PowerNet Interlock Kit 2 Circuit Breaker Factory Install Suffix Catalog Number 2 K-Frame PN ICK550K L-Frame PN ICK550L 2 N-Frame PN ICK550N 2 2 2 Zone Interlock/Ground Kit 23 Circuit Breaker Factory Install Suffix Catalog Number 2 K-Frame ZG ZGK550K L-Frame ZG ZGK550L 2 N-Frame ZG ZGK550N 2 2 PowerNet and Zone Interlock/Ground Kit 23 Circuit Breaker Factory Install Suffix Catalog Number K-Frame ZGP ZGPK550K L-Frame ZGP ZGPK550L N-Frame ZGP ZGPK550N 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 One 24-point accessory terminal block provided with circuit breaker when ordered factory installed or shipped from warehouse as separate item when ordered for field installation. See Digitrip RMS master connection diagram (IL 29C714). 2 Installation of these kits restrict any other attachments from being installed in the RH pole. 3 Includes a ground fault alarm signal that can drive the ground fault alarm unit (catalog number GFAU). 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-301 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2 Technical Data and Specifications 2 Alarm Switch 2 2 F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 12 Maximum Voltage Frequency L- and M-Frames Electrical Rating Data 67 Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage 600 50/60 Hz 6 2500 600 50/60 Hz 6 2500 125 DC 0.50 3 2500 125 DC 0.50 3 2500 250 DC 0.25 3 2500 2 250 DC 0.25 3 2500 2 125/250 50/60 Hz 63 2000 28 DC 33 2000 28 DC 54 2000 2 2 N-Frame Electrical Rating Data Single-Pole Circuit Breakers 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 J-Frame Electrical Rating Data Maximum Voltage Frequency 600 125 250 Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage 600 50/60 Hz 6 2500 125 DC 0.50 3 2500 250 DC 0.25 3 2500 56 Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage R-Frame Electrical Rating Data 9j 50/60 Hz 6 2500 Maximum Voltage DC 0.50 3 2500 DC 0.25 3 2500 K-Frame Electrical Rating Data Maximum Voltage Frequency 600 67 Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage 50/60 Hz 6 2500 125 DC 0.50 3 2500 250 DC 0.25 3 2500 2 Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage 600 50/60 Hz 6 2500 125 DC 0.50 3 2500 250 DC 0.25 3 2500 Notes 1 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations. 2 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations. 3 Non-inductive load. 4 Inductive (L/R = 0.026). 5 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations. 6 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). 7 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. 8 Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. i Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus 2500 mechanical operations. j Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). Leads are red, black and blue. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-302 8 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Auxiliary Switch 2 L- and M-Frames Electrical Rating Data 2 F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 12 Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage 125 3 50/60 Hz 1 2500 600 50/60 Hz 6 2500 4 2500 2500 600 50/60 Hz 6 2500 125 DC 0.50 125 DC 0.50 4 2500 250 DC 0.25 4 250 DC 0.25 4 2500 2 N-Frame Electrical Rating Data 26 Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage 600 50/60 Hz 6 Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage 600 50/60 Hz 6 2500 2500 125 DC 0.50 4 2500 4 2500 250 DC 0.25 4 2500 2500 DC 0.50 250 DC 0.25 4 K-Frame Electrical Rating Data 25 Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage 600 50/60 Hz 6 2500 2 2 Frequency 2 600 50/60 Hz 6 125 DC 0.50 4 2 DC 0.25 4 250 Notes 1 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations. 2 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). 3 For use in electronic circuit of 100 micro amperes and 15 Vdc minimum. 4 Non-inductive load. 5 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. 6 Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. 7 Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus 2500 mechanical operations. 8 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). Leads are red, black and blue. 0.25 4 2 Maximum Current Amperes 2500 0.50 DC 2 Maximum Voltage 2500 DC 250 2 R-Frame Electrical Rating Data 78 4 125 2 2 J-Frame Electrical Rating Data 12 125 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-303 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2 Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination 2 F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 12 2 2 Maximum Voltage L- and M-Frames Electrical Rating Data 52 Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage Maximum Voltage 600 50/60 Hz 6 2500 125 DC 0.50 3 2200 250 DC 0.25 3 2200 Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage 600 50/60 Hz 6 2500 125 DC 0.50 3 2500 250 DC 0.25 3 2500 2 2 2 2 2 J-Frame Electrical Rating Data 24 Maximum Voltage Maximum Current Amperes Frequency 600 50/60 Hz 125 DC 250 DC 0.25 3 N-Frame Electrical Rating Data 62 Dielectric Withstand Voltage Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage 6 2500 600 50/60 Hz 6 2500 0.50 3 2500 125 DC 0.50 3 2500 2500 250 DC 0.25 3 2500 2 K-Frame Electrical Rating Data 25 2 Maximum Voltage Frequency 2 600 50/60 Hz 6 2500 125 DC 0.50 3 2500 250 DC 0.25 3 2500 2 Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage Notes 1 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations. 2 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). 3 Non-inductive load. 4 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations. 5 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. 6 Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-304 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Shunt Trip 2 K-Frame Electrical Rating Data 678 F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 123 50/60 Hz DC Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage 12 6.75 24 50/60 Hz VA Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage 75 12 9 6.75 300 24 9 48 36 92 48 36 100 60 36 140 60 36 160 110 156 480 110 77 55 120 156 570 120 77 127 156 640 125 208 156 180 220 156 240 2 DC VA Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage 100 12 9 VA 45 12 8.4 35 400 24 9 200 24 8.4 170 48 — 830 48 — 710 60 — 1280 60 — 1105 110 5 60 100 110 77 110 66 120 5 60 120 120 77 130 77 71 127 5 60 140 125 77 140 — — — 208 5 60 420 — — — 200 — — — 220 5 60 470 — — — 156 240 — — — 240 5 60 550 — — — 380 300 610 127 — 72 380 285 95 220 154 41 415 300 130 220 — 110 400 285 108 250 154 54 440 300 330 250 — 140 415 285 120 — 154 — 480 300 380 — — — 440 285 136 — 154 — 525 300 450 — — — 480 360 40 — — — 550 300 530 — — — 525 360 50 — — — 600 300 590 — — — J-Frame Electrical Rating Data 124 50/60 Hz DC Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA 12 9 31 12 8.4 50 24 9 173 24 8.4 247 48 36 686 48 33.6 1094 60 36 1014 60 33.6 1698 5 60.5 66 110 77 112 120 5 60.5 84 120 77 138 127 5 60.5 102 125 77 150 208 5 60.5 354 — 77 — 220 5 60.5 396 — — — 110 5 60.5 432 — — — 380 285 180 110 154 40 400 285 200 120 154 58 415 285 240 125 154 — 440 285 610 127 154 — 480 360 34 — — — 525 360 42 — — — 550 360 50 — — — 600 360 60 — — — 240 550 360 50 — — — 600 360 70 — — — Notes 1 Average unlatching time: 6 milliseconds. 2 Average circuit breaker contact total opening time: 18 milliseconds. 3 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations. 4 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations. 5 Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with accessory kits. 6 Approximate unlatching time: 6 milliseconds. 7 Approximate total circuit breaker contact opening time: 8 milliseconds. 8 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-305 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2 L- and M-Frame Electrical Rating Data 123 N-Frame Electrical Rating Data 125 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 2 Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage 2 12 24 DC VA Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage 9 45 12 9 200 24 DC VA Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA 9 35 24 16.8 200 24 16.8 170 9 170 48 33.6 830 48 33.6 710 2 48 34 830 48 34 710 60 33.6 1280 60 33.6 1150 2 60 34 1280 60 34 1105 110 4 60 100 110 77 110 110 4 60 100 110 77 110 120 4 60 120 120 77 130 4 60 120 120 77 130 127 4 60 140 125 77 140 2 120 127 4 60 140 125 77 140 208 4 60 420 — — — 2 208 4 60 420 — 77 — 220 4 60 470 — — — 220 4 60 470 — — — 240 4 60 550 — — — 240 4 60 550 — — — 380 266 95 220 154 41 2 380 266 95 220 154 41 400 266 108 250 — 54 400 266 108 250 — 54 415 266 120 — — — 2 415 266 120 — — — 440 266 136 — — — 440 266 136 — — — 480 336 40 — — — 2 480 336 40 — — — 525 336 50 — — — 2 525 336 50 — — — 550 336 50 — — — 550 336 50 — — — 600 336 70 — — — 600 336 70 — — — Notes 1 Approximate unlatching time: 6 milliseconds. 2 Approximate total circuit breaker contact opening time: 18 milliseconds. 3 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. 4 Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with accessory kits. 5 Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-306 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C R-Frame Electrical Rating Data 123456 Application Ratings 2 Electrical Operating Ratings Suffix Number Voltage (V) Frequency (Hz) Supply Voltage (V) Minimum Operating Voltage (V) Ip (A) Irms at 0.250s (A) Irms at 0.033s (A) VA One Minute Dielectric Withstand Voltage (V) 2 03/03K 24 50/60 24 16.8 36.1 — 25.5 612 1050 24 DC 24 16.8 36.1 16.5 — 396 1050 2 48–60 50/60 48 34.0 13.1 — 9.2 450 1120 48–60 50/60 60 34.0 17.2 — 12.2 740 1120 05/05K 11/11K 3 14/14K 18/18K 23/23K 26/26K 110–240 50/60 110 60.5 4.2 — 3.0 330 1480 110–240 50/60 120 60.5 4.5 — 3.2 390 1480 110–240 50/60 127 60.5 4.6 — 3.3 430 1480 110–240 50/60 208 60.5 7.9 — 5.6 1170 1480 110–240 50/60 220 60.5 8.5 — 6.0 1370 1480 110–240 50/60 240 60.5 8.7 — 6.1 1470 1480 380–440 50/60 380 266.0 4.5 — 3.2 1220 1880 380–440 50/60 415 266.0 5.0 — 3.6 1500 1880 380–440 50/60 440 266.0 5.3 — 3.7 1640 1880 220–250 DC 220 154.0 — 2.4 — 530 1500 220–250 DC 250 154.0 — 2.7 — 680 1500 480–600 50/60 480 336.0 0.6 — 0.4 200 2200 480–600 50/60 525 336.0 0.7 — 0.5 270 2200 480–600 50/60 550 336.0 0.7 — 0.5 280 2200 480–600 50/60 600 336.0 0.8 — 0.6 360 2200 48–60 DC 48 34.0 — 9.8 — 470 1120 48–60 DC 60 34.0 — 11.6 — 700 1120 110–125 DC 110 77.0 — 3.3 — 370 1250 110–125 DC 120 77.0 — 3.6 — 440 1250 110–125 DC 125 77.0 — 3.8 — 480 1250 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Approximate unlatching time of 6 milliseconds. 2 Average circuit breaker contact total opening time approximately 62 milliseconds, at rated voltage. 3 Endurance: 500 electrical operations and 2500 mechanical operations. 4 Shunt trip can be operated up to a maximum of six times per minute. 5 Maximum operating voltage—110% of maximum voltage range rating. 6 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). Leads are yellow and white. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-307 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2 Undervoltage Release Mechanism 2 F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 1 2 50/60 Hz DC Supply Voltage Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA Supply Voltage Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA 12 4.2 6.3 7.6 1.3 2 12 4.2 6.3 7.6 2.5 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 2.8 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 2.8 1.4 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 1.6 2 48 21.0 33.6 60 21.0 33.6 40.8 1.2 48 21.0 33.6 40.8 1.3 40.8 1.9 60 21.0 33.6 40.8 2 110 44.5 2.0 77.0 93.5 1.3 110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.5 2 120 127 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.5 120 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.7 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.7 125 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.9 2 208 84.0 145.6 176.8 2.2 220 87.5 154.0 187.0 2.6 220 84.0 145.6 176.8 2.4 250 87.5 154.0 187.0 3.4 2 240 84.0 145.6 176.8 2.9 — — — — — 380 168.0 266.0 323.0 2.9 — — — — — 2 415 168.0 266.0 323.0 3.5 — — — — — 2 440 168.0 266.0 323.0 3.9 — — — — — 480 168.0 266.0 323.0 4.6 — — — — — 2 525 210.0 367.0 446.0 4.3 — — — — — 550 210.0 367.0 446.0 4.8 — — — — — 2 600 210.0 367.0 446.0 5.8 — — — — — 2 2 J-Frame Electrical Rating Data 23 2 50/60 Hz DC Pickup Voltage 2 Supply Voltage Dropout Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA 2 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.9 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.9 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.6 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 2 48 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.5 3.1 48 21.0 33.6 40.8 60 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.0 3.8 60 21.0 33.6 40.8 2 110 44.5 77.0 3.1 93.5 1.8 110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.6 2 120 44.5 127 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.1 120 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.9 77.0 93.5 2.4 125 44.5 77.0 93.5 2 208 2.2 84.0 145.6 176.8 2.7 220 87.5 154.0 187.0 3.1 220 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.1 250 87.5 154.0 187.0 4.0 2 240 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.8 — — — — — 2 380 168.0 266.0 323.0 3.4 — — — — — 415 168.0 266.0 323.0 4.0 — — — — — 440 168.0 266.0 323.0 4.6 — — — — — 480 168.0 266.0 323.0 5.4 — — — — — 2 2 2 VA Supply Voltage Notes 1 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations. 2 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations. 3 For electrical rating data for manual, automatic and electrical reset undervoltage release mechanisms, refer to Eaton. 2 2 2 V4-T2-308 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 K-Frame Electrical Rating Data 1 50/60 Hz 2 DC Supply Voltage Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.9 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.9 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.6 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.1 48 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.5 48 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.0 60 21.0 33.6 40.8 3.8 110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.8 60 21.0 33.6 40.8 3.1 110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.6 120 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.1 127 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.4 120 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.9 125 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.2 208 84.0 145.6 176.8 2.7 220 87.5 154.0 187.0 3.1 220 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.1 250 87.5 154.0 187.0 4.0 240 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.8 — — — — — 380 415 168.0 266.0 323.0 3.4 — — — — — 168.0 266.0 323.0 4.0 — — — — — 440 168.0 266.0 323.0 4.6 — — — — — 480 168.0 266.0 323.0 5.4 — — — — — VA Supply Voltage 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 L- and M-Frames Electrical Rating Data 1 50/60 Hz DC Supply Voltage Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA Supply Voltage 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.9 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 48 21.0 33.6 40.8 2 Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.6 3.9 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.1 2.5 48 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.0 60 21.0 33.6 40.8 3.8 60 21.0 33.6 40.8 3.1 110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.8 110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.6 120 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.1 120 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.9 127 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.4 125 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.2 208 84.0 145.6 176.8 2.7 220 87.5 154.0 187.0 3.1 220 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.1 250 87.5 154.0 187.0 4.0 240 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.8 — — — — — 380 168.0 266.0 323.0 3.4 — — — — — 415 168.0 266.0 323.0 4.0 — — — — — 440 168.0 266.0 323.0 4.6 — — — — — 480 168.0 266.0 323.0 5.4 — — — — — 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Note 1 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-309 2.3 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C N-Frame Electrical Rating Data 1 50/60 Hz DC Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA Supply Voltage Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.9 2 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.9 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.6 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.1 48 21.0 33.6 40.8 2 60 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.5 48 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.0 3.8 60 21.0 33.6 40.8 110 44.5 77.0 3.1 93.5 1.8 110 44.5 77.0 93.5 2 120 44.5 1.6 77.0 93.5 2.1 120 44.5 77.0 93.5 2 127 1.9 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.4 125 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.2 208 84.0 145.6 176.8 2.7 220 87.5 154.0 187.0 3.1 2 220 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.1 220 87.5 154.0 187.0 — 240 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.8 250 — — — 4.0 2 380 175.0 266.0 323.0 3.4 — — — — — 415 175.0 266.0 323.0 4.0 — — — — — 2 480 175.0 266.0 323.0 4.6 — — — — — 500 175.0 266.0 323.0 5.4 — — — — — 2 2 2 Supply Voltage Note 1 Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-310 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com VA Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 R-Frame AC Undervoltage Release Mechanism (Handle Reset) Ratings 12 Application Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings Catalog Suffix Voltage (V) Supply Voltage (V) Minimum 02/02K 12 12 4.2 03/03K 24 24 05/05K 48–60 48 08/08K 11/11K 29/29K 110–127 208–240 380–500 Dropout Voltage (V) 2 Approximate Operating Time (ms) Maximum Pickup Voltage (V) Max. VA Minimum UVR Response 3 Initiation Circuit Breaker Contact Separation 4 Maximum Circuit Breaker Contact Opening Dielectric Withstand Voltage (V) 5 8.4 10.2 2.3 5 46 77 1024 8.4 16.8 21.0 33.5 20.4 3.1 5 46 77 1048 40.8 3.4 5 46 77 1120 60 21.0 33.5 40.8 6.0 5 46 77 1120 110 120 44.5 77.0 93.5 3.3 5 46 77 1254 44.5 77.0 93.5 3.6 5 46 77 1254 127 44.5 77.0 93.5 3.8 5 46 77 1254 208 84.0 145.6 176.8 4.2 5 46 77 1480 220 84.0 145.6 176.8 6.6 5 46 77 1480 240 84.0 145.6 176.8 7.2 5 46 77 1480 380 168.0 266.0 323.0 3.8 5 46 77 2000 415 168.0 266.0 323.0 8.3 5 46 77 2000 440 168.0 266.0 323.0 8.8 5 46 77 2000 480 168.0 266.0 323.0 9.6 5 46 77 2000 500 168.0 266.0 323.0 10.0 5 46 77 2000 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Application Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings Catalog Suffix Voltage (V) Supply Voltage (V) 20/20K 12 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 3.4 5 46 77 1024 21/21K 24 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 4.3 5 46 77 1048 23/23K 48–60 48 21.0 33.5 40.8 4.8 5 46 77 1120 60 21.0 33.5 40.8 7.2 5 46 77 1120 110 43.8 77.0 93.5 3.3 5 46 77 1250 120 43.8 77.0 93.5 3.6 5 46 77 1250 125 43.8 77.0 93.5 3.8 5 46 77 1250 220 87.5 154.0 187.0 6.6 5 46 77 1500 250 87.5 154.0 187.0 7.5 5 46 77 1500 26/26K 28/28K 110–127 220–250 Minimum Maximum Approximate Operating Time (ms) Pickup Voltage (V) Max. VA Minimum UVR Response 3 2 2 R-Frame DC Undervoltage Release Mechanism (Handle Reset) Ratings 12 Dropout Voltage (V) 2 Initiation Circuit Breaker Contact Separation 4 Maximum Circuit Breaker Contact Opening Dielectric Withstand Voltage (V) 5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus 2500 mechanical operations. 2 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). Leads are orange and brown. 3 UVR will override a momentary voltage dip up to the response time shown. 4 Unlatching occurs 1 millisecond before circuit breaker contacts begin to separate. 5 For 1 minute. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-311 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Contents Series C External Accessories Description 2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-Frame (70–250 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Accessories Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 External Accessories 2 Product Overview 2 End Cap Kit The end cap kit slides onto the line or load conductor of the circuit breaker and acts as a threaded adapter for the conductor to accept a ring terminal or other bolt-on connector. The end cap kit is available with English and metric thread sizes. (Field installation only.) Listed per UL File E7819. J-Frame Plug Nut The plug nut is used in applications where screwconnected ring-type terminals are preferred to connect cables to circuit breaker conductors. The plug nut is press-fit into the opening in the circuit breaker terminal conductor. Screws and washers are supplied by customer. Keeper Nut The keeper nut slides onto the line or load conductor of the circuit breaker and acts as a threaded adapter for the conductor to accept a ring terminal or other bolt-on connector. The keeper nut is available with English and metric thread sizes. Screws and washers are supplied by customer. (Field installation only.) Listed per UL File E7819. Terminal Adapter 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 L-, M-, N-Frames 2 Not required. Terminals are threaded. Control Wire Terminal Kit The control wire terminal kit provides a means to tap off control power from a main disconnect, using the provided male end of a quick disconnect. For use with steel or stainless steel terminals only. Note: Terminal Kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. Multiwire Connectors Eaton’s field-installed multiwire connectors for the load side (OFF) end terminals, are used to distribute the load from the circuit breaker to multiple devices without the use of separate distribution terminal blocks. Multiwire lug kits include mounting hardware, insulators and tin-plated aluminum connectors to replace three mechanical load lugs. UL listed as used on the load side (OFF) end. Terminal Shields Terminal shields provide protection against accidental contact with live line side terminations. Terminal shields are fabricated from high dielectric insulating material and fasten over the front terminal access openings. Small openings in the shields provide limited access to the terminals for tightening connectors. (Field installation only.) 2 V4-T2-312 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Page V4-T2-121 V4-T2-122 V4-T2-123 V4-T2-126 V4-T2-140 V4-T2-157 V4-T2-165 V4-T2-192 V4-T2-218 V4-T2-229 V4-T2-244 V4-T2-263 V4-T2-274 V4-T2-276 V4-T2-277 V4-T2-281 V4-T2-316 V4-T2-339 V4-T2-340 V4-T2-341 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Terminal End Covers The terminal end covers are designed for use in motor control center applications where, because of confined spaces, line side conductors are normally custom fitted. The molded end covers are made of high dielectric glasspolyester and slide over the line ends of the circuit breaker. Close fitting conductor openings are molded into the end covers. The end cover and circuit breaker case fit together to form terminal compartments that isolate discharged ionizing gases during circuit breaker tripping. Terminal end covers are available with two conductor opening diameters, 0.25-inch (6.4 mm) and 0.41inch (10.4 mm), and are listed per UL File E7819. (Field installation only.) Interphase Barriers The interphase barriers provide additional electrical clearance between circuit breaker poles for special termination applications. The barriers are high dielectric insulating plates that are installed in the molded slots between the terminals. (Field installation only.) Two per package. Base Mounting Plate Suitable for mounting six single-pole circuit breakers. DIN Rail Adapter For use with standard 35 mm DIN rail such as, 35 x 7.5 or 35 x 15 mm per DIN EN50022. Adapter mounting screws included are for use with twoand three-pole circuit breakers. Adapters for singlepole circuit breakers clip into the base molding. Key Operated Attachment Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable) Non-Padlockable Handle Block The non-padlockable handle block secures the circuit breaker handle in either the ON or OFF position. (Trip-free operation allows the circuit breaker to trip when the handle block holds the circuit breaker handle in the ON position.) The device is positioned over the circuit breaker handle and secured by a setscrew to deter accidental operation of the circuit breaker handle. Listed per UL File E7819. (Field installation only.) Padlockable Handle Padlockable Handle Lock The device is positioned in the cover opening to prevent handle movement. Will accommodate one 5/16-inch (8 mm) padlock. Snap-on Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp The snap-on padlockable handle lock allows the handle to be locked in the OFF or ON position. (Trip-free operation allows the circuit breaker to trip when the handle lock holds the circuit breaker handle in the ON position.) This device was designed for use on the single-pole circuit breaker, but may be used on one-, two-, threeand four-pole styles. The handle lock snaps onto the escutcheon area of the handle with an optional retaining screw for added secureness. The handle lock will accommodate one padlock with a 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) shackle. Listed per UL File E7819. (Field installation only.) Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp The padlockable handle lock hasp allows the handle to be locked in the ON or OFF position. (Trip-free operation allows the circuit breaker to trip when the handle lock holds the circuit breaker handle in the ON position.) The hasp mounts on the circuit breaker cover within the trimline. The cover is predrilled on both sides of the operating handle so that the hasp can be mounted on either side of the handle. The hasp will accommodate up to three padlocks with 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) shackles, one per circuit breaker. Listed per UL File E7819. (Field installation only.) Cylinder Lock The cylinder lock internally blocks the trip bar in the tripped position to prevent the circuit breaker from being switched to ON. The cylinder lock is factory installed in the left pole only of the circuit breaker cover. Other internally mounted accessories cannot be installed in the same pole as the cylinder lock. (Factory installation only.) Key Interlock Kit (Lock Not Included) The key interlock is used to externally lock the circuit breaker handle in the OFF position. When the key interlock is locked, an extended deadbolt blocks movement of the circuit breaker handle. Uniquely coded keys are removable only with the deadbolt extended. Each coded key controls a group of circuit breakers for a given specific customer installation. The key interlock assembly is Underwriters Laboratories listed for field installation under UL File E7819 and consists of a mounting kit and a purchaser supplied deadbolt lock. The mounting kit comprises a mounting plate, which is secured to the circuit breaker cover in either the left- or right-pole position, key interlock mounting screws, and a wire seal. Specific mounting kits are required for individual key interlock types. Sliding Bar Interlock The sliding bar interlock provides mechanical interlocking between two adjacent three-pole circuit breakers. It is installed on the enclosure cover between the circuit breakers. When the sliding bar interlock handle is moved from one side to the other, a bar extends to alternately block movement of the circuit breaker handles and prevents both circuit breakers from being switched to ON at the same time. Sliding bar interlocks are not UL listed. (Field installation only.) 2.3 Walking Beam Interlock The walking beam Interlock provides mechanical interlocking between two adjacent circuit breakers of the same pole configuration. The walking beam interlock mounts on a bracket behind and between the circuit breakers. A plunger on each end of the beam is inserted through an access hole in the back plate and base of each circuit breaker. The walking beam interlock prevents both circuit breakers from being switched ON at the same time. If a walking beam interlock is installed, the wiring troughs in the back of the circuit breaker case are blocked by the plungers and cannot be used for cross wiring. Factory modified circuit breakers are required for this application. UL File E38116. Electrical Operator The electrical (solenoid) operator is a single solenoid mechanism that enables local and remote circuit breaker ON, OFF, and reset switching. The electrical operator is mounted on the circuit breaker cover within the trimline of the circuit breaker. The electrical operator uses a unique bi-stable latch that allows the device to operate using one solenoid. The accessory provides high-speed switching with a maximum operating time of 5 cycles (80 mS), making it suitable for generator synchronizing applications. Means are provided for remote electrical operation and for local manual operation. A special slide includes provisions for padlocking the circuit breaker handle in the OFF position. The slide will accept three padlock shackles with a maximum diameter of 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) each. An interlock electrically disconnects the solenoid when the electrical operator cover is removed. The rating data tables provide electrical rating data for the electrical (solenoid) operator. Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-313 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2.3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C The electrical (motor) operator allows the circuit’s breaker to be opened, closed or reset remotely. It also has a lock-off capability and provisions for manual operation. The electrical (motor) operator contains a reversible motor connected to a ball screw. The ball screw drives the circuit breaker handle. Limit switches and relays are used to control the motor. Plug-In Adapters Plug-in adapters simplify installation and front removal of circuit breakers. Individual line and load plug-in adapters are available for rear connection applications on two-, three-, and four-pole circuit breakers. Common mounting plates for lineand load-end adapters are available. One plug-in adapter kit is required for line-end and one for load-end. Plug-in adapters are UL approved unless otherwise noted. Rear Connecting Studs Rear connecting studs are available in several sizes to accommodate specific fixedmounted circuit breaker applications. Each rear connecting stud assembly consists of one stud and one tube. To maintain proper clearances between poles, select alternate long and short stud assemblies for circuit breakers with more than one pole. One assembly is required for line-end and one for load-end of each pole. Tubes must be ordered separately. Connecting studs are available only with English thread sizes. Note: Not UL listed. Panelboard Connecting Straps Panelboard connecting straps are used to connect the circuit breaker terminals to the panelboard bus. The panelboard connecting straps are available with various ratings for outside and center poles. (Field installation only.) V4-T2-314 Panelboard connecting straps are available to meet the needs of most standard panelboard applications. Style numbers for mounting brackets for CDP panelboard installations are also included. Note: Not UL listed. Refer to panelboard manufacturer for compatibility. Handle Mechanisms Handle mechanisms are used to operate molded case circuit breakers, molded case switches and motor circuit protectors. They are available in three basic configurations— flange mounted, through-thedoor and direct (closecoupled)—providing safe, dependable operation and ease of installation. ● Flange mounted: ● Flex Shaft™ ● C371 ● Through-the-door: ● Series C Rotary ● Universal Rotary ● Direct (close-coupled): ● Universal Direct ● Euro IEC ● G Direct Handle mechanisms are typically used on enclosed circuit breakers, control panels and motor control centers in many different applications. Eaton has a handle mechanism for virtually any need. Flange Mounted Handle Mechanisms Flange mounted handle mechanisms mount on the flange of an enclosure door. The Flex Shaft is an extra heavy-duty mechanism that includes a flexible shaft in various lengths, 3 feet (0.9m) through 10 feet (3m) for use with various size enclosures. The Flex Shaft handle will accept up to three padlock shackles, each with a maximum diameter of 3/8-inch (9.5 mm). Can be used with NEMA 1, 3R and 12 fabricated enclosures. An optional handle is available for Flex Shaft that is suitable for use with NEMA 4 and 4X environments. Flex Shaft comes preset from the factory, requiring only minor field adjustments on installation, which takes about 10 minutes—a significant time savings compared to installation of other types of flange handle mechanisms. The Flex Shaft mechanism also takes up less interior enclosure space than competitive designs and the handle fits standard flange cutouts. Flex Shaft handle can be remotely mounted from breaker, where an operator can use it by “funneling” the cable through conduit. Series C Rotary and Universal Rotary, are UL listed and meet CSA requirements. Universal Rotary also meets IEC947-1/2 for international compliance. Rotary UL File Number is E64983. The Type C371 circuit breaker operating mechanisms are designed for installation in control enclosures where main or branch circuit protective devices are required. All circuit breaker mechanisms are suitable for right-hand mounting. Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms Direct (close-coupled) handle mechanisms mount directly to the circuit breaker. They are used in shallow enclosures where the standard variable depth Through-the-door type mechanism is not practical or cannot be used. They are typically for applications where high volume, standardized enclosures are being fabricated. Auxiliary contacts are not available for mounting on operating mechanisms. Where required, have them installed in circuit breaker. Type C371 is UL listed under File E62635. Flex Shaft is UL listed under File E64983 and meets CSA requirements. Through-the-Door Handle Mechanisms Eaton’s through-the-door handle mechanisms mount on the front of an enclosure or cabinet door and externally operate the circuit breaker via a variable depth shaft or a linear operator (Type MC). Each rotary type handle mechanism includes a handle, base operating mechanism and shaft that can be cut to various lengths. Series C Rotary and Universal Rotary handle mechanisms are for use with molded case circuit breakers (G, F, J, K, L, MDL), molded case switches and motor circuit protectors. Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Type 4/4X handles are similar to standard handles except they include an internal neoprene gasket. Type 4/4X handle style number is 6648C22G03. Due to gasketing effect between the handle and the housing, the handle may not indicate a tripped position. Universal Rotary F-Frame The Euro IEC Direct handle mechanism can be used on F- through R-Frames. The G Direct is available with a black or the yellow handle, and with or without a shroud. It is suitable for use with NEMA 1 enclosures. It is for use only with the G-Frame (GD, GC, GHC, GMCP). An escutcheon ring and interlock clip are provided as standard. The standard design includes a lock-off feature. The Universal Direct handle mechanism is UL 489 listed, IEC947-1/2 and meets CSA requirements. The Euro IEC Direct handle mechanism is IEC-240-1. G Direct is UL listed and meets CSA requirements. Handle Extension Handle extension is not included with J, K, L, M and N-Frame breakers. It must be purchased separately. Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Type LFD Current Limiter The LFD current limiter is an accessory that bolts to the load end of a standard FDB or FD thermal-magnetic circuit breaker, providing 200,000A interrupting capacity at up to 600 Vac. LFD current limiters for thermal-magnetic and electronic circuit breakers are listed with Underwriters Laboratories under File E47239. Ground Fault Alarm Unit The ground fault alarm unit is a remotely mounted device with a combination indicating light/test button that will light when the breaker trips or alarms on ground fault. The ground fault alarm unit requires a separate 120 Vac power source to power the light and the internal relay, which has 1NO and 1NC contacts for remote indication. The ground fault alarm unit can be panel mounted for ordering with an optional face mounting bracket. For use on Digitrip 310 only, K- through NFrame. IQ Energy Sentinel The IQ Energy Sentinel is a highly accurate, microprocessor-based, breaker-mounted device designed to monitor power and energy readings. It represents an alternative to watt meters, watt-hour meters, and watt demand meters. Key advantages include savings in space, lower installation costs, and remote monitoring capability. The IQ Energy Sentinel mounts on the load side of a Series C F-Frame (150 ampere) circuit breaker. It can be applied on threephase, four-wire systems, or single-phase, three-wire systems with voltage connected through Phases A and C. For more information, see Descriptive Bulletin 8178. Potential Transformer Module The potential transformer module is required for the Digitrip OPTIM 1050 to provide a voltage input to allow the trip unit to monitor power and energy as well as power factor. The potential transformer module is a 6 VA transformer with a primary voltage input of up to 600 volt line to line. Three 0.1 ampere fuses are provided on the primary of the transformer and can be used for isolation purposes during dielectric testing. The device is normally panel mounted and can feed up to 16 OPTIM trip units. Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit The solid-state (electronic) portable test kit provides verification of performance of all ratings of Digitrip 310 electronic trip units installed in circuit breakers while in service under varying load and/or phase imbalance. The test kit operates on 120-volt, 50/60 Hz power; it includes complete instructions and test times for testing long time, short time/instantaneous operation and optional ground fault operation of the circuit breaker. Breaker Interface Module (BIM) The Breaker Interface Module (BIM) is a panel mounted user interface device that is mounted on the front of an electrical assembly or at a remote location. The BIM is used to access, configure, test and display information for OPTIM trip units and other devices. The BIM consists of four display windows, eight function buttons, 18 LEDs, and a graphical time/current curve to provide breaker status, operational information, protection status and energy monitoring. A 24 Vdc power supply is required to provide power to the BIM. This is supplied by the switchboard builder to Eaton’s specifications. The BIM is a member of Eaton’s PowerNet family of communicating devices that connects OPTIM trip units, Digitrip RMS 810/910 trip units and energy sentinels as a subnetwork system. The BIM can also be connected to a main network via a PONI module to PowerNet software. Digitrip OPTIMizer The Digitrip OPTIMizer is a hand-held programmer that is used to access, configure, test and display information from OPTIM trip units. The OPTIMizer plugs into the front of an OPTIM trip unit via an eight-pin telephone jack and is powered by a nine-volt battery or the auxiliary power module. One highlighted feature is the “Copy” and “Download” commands. Setting up multiple OPTIM trips can be finished in minutes and with no errors. An Auxiliary Power Module connection provides a trip test when control power is not present at the breaker. The OPTIMizer is supplied as a standard package to include the programmer, the eightpin connection cord, battery and carrying case. The auxiliary power module is optional. Auxiliary Power Module The auxiliary power module is a power supply requiring 120 Vac input at 50 or 60 Hz that provides a 32 Vdc output. The auxiliary power module provides control power for testing an OPTIM trip unit when other means of control power is not available or for continuous OPTIMizer operation versus temporary with a battery. The auxiliary power module connects into the top of the Digitrip OPTIMizer via a keyed receptacle. The main application for the auxiliary power module would be for the testing of a standalone non-communicating OPTIM breaker that ordinarily would not have control power. 2.3 Cause of Trip Display/Remote Mount Cause of Trip Display The Cause of Trip Display can be field-installed on any Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit. The device provides breaker information through an LCD screen, such as cause of trip, phrase current, ground current and low loads. The display is ideal for troubleshooting common trips such as ground fault, long delay, and instantaneous/short delay. The DIGIVIEW version will provide a local display at the breaker without additional wiring by connecting directly onto the trip unit. The DIGIVIEWR06 version has a 6 foot cable that allows users to mount the display on the outside of an enclosure door and connect to the trip unit that is contained inside the enclosure. 2 Cause of Trip LED Module The Cause of Trip LED Module can be field-installed on any Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit. The device provides a cause of trip indication via LED. The Cause of Trip LED Module connects directly onto the trip unit. When the breaker trips, the module indicates the cause of trip (long delay, short delay, instantaneous and ground) via LED indication. The module is reset after the breaker is reset. 2 Note: The OPTIMizer can work off of 32 Vdc control power, although 24 Vdc is the standard on OPTIM breakers. Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-315 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2 Product Selection 2 Termination Hardware—End Cap Kit 2 End Cap Kit End Cap Kit Thread Type 2 Thread Size Catalog Number Two-Pole F-Frame (225A) 2 Imperial 10–32 KPEK12 Metric M–5 KPEKM12 2 Three-Pole F-Frame (225A) Imperial 10–32 KPEK1 2 Metric M–5 KPEKM1 2 Imperial 10–32 KPEK14 2 Metric M–5 KPEKM14 2 Imperial 0.312–18 KPEK2 Metric M–8 KPEKM2 2 Four-Pole J-Frame Imperial 0.312–18 KPEK24 2 Metric M–8 KPEKM24 2 Imperial 0.312–18 KPEK3 2 Metric M–8 KPEKM3 2 Imperial 0.312–18 KPEK34 Metric M–8 KPEKM34 Four-Pole F-Frame (225A) Three-Pole J-Frame Three-Pole K-Frame Four-Pole K-Frame 2 Three-Pole L-Frame Imperial 0.312-18 2 KPEK4 Metric M-8 KPEKM4 2 Four-Pole L-Frame Imperial 0.312–18 KPEK44 2 Metric M–8 KPEKM44 2 Termination Hardware—Keeper Nut 2 F-Frame Keeper Nut F-Frame Keeper Nut 2 Thread Type Thread Size Catalog Number Package of 12 (Priced Individually) 2 Imperial 10–32 KPR1A Metric M–5 KPR1AM 2 Thread Type Thread Size Line/Load End Catalog Number Package of 3 2 Imperial 0.375–16 Line KPR3A Load KPR3B 2 Metric Line KPR3AM Load KPR3BM 2 2 K-Frame Keeper Nut 2 K-Frame Keeper Nut M–8 Note L-, M-, N-Frames not required. Terminals are threaded. 2 V4-T2-316 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Termination Hardware J-Frame Plug Nut Thread Type K-Frame Terminal Adapter 2 J-Frame Plug Nut Thread Size Catalog Number Package of 6 Imperial 0.250–20 PLN2 Metric M–6 PLN2M 2 2 2 2 K-Frame Terminal Adapter 1 Line/Load End Catalog Number 2 Line and load TAD3 2 2 2 F-Frame Ordering Information Terminals must be ordered separately. Priced individually. F-Frame Kit 2 F-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit 2 Description Package of 12 control wire terminal tangs. Maximum Amperes Catalog Number 150 FCWTK 225 FCWTK225 2 2 2 2 2 J- and K-Frame Ordering Information Terminals must be ordered separately. Priced individually. J- and K-Frame Kit 2 J- and K-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit Description Catalog Number Package of 12 control wire terminal tangs. KCWTK 2 2 2 2 L-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit 2 AWG Wire Range/Number Conductors Metric Wire Range mm2 Catalog Number Al/Cu (2) 3/0–350 kcmil 95–150 TA602LDCW 3 2 Cu (2) 250–350 kcmil 120–250 T602LDCW 3 2 Al/Cu (2) 400–500 kcmil 185–240 2TA603LDKCW 45 2 Al/Cu (2) 400–500 kcmil 185–240 3TA603LDKCW 46 2 Al/Cu (2) 400–500 kcmil 185–240 4TA603LDKCW 47 2 2 Notes 1 K-Frame terminal adapter for use in replacing LB/DA breakers. 2 Not for use with T250KB terminals. 3 Individually packed. 4 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. 5 Two-pole kit. 6 Three-pole kit. 7 Four-pole kit. Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2 2 2 V4-T2-317 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Termination Hardware 2 G-Frame Control Wire Terminal 2 Description Catalog Number Catalog Number Control wire terminal (kit of 12) 5652B38G01 GCWTK 2 2 Multiwire Connectors Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information (Package of 3) Maximum Amperes 2 100 2 F-Frame 2 225 2 J-Frame 250 2 400 2 2 Kit Catalog Number 3 14–2 3TA100G3K 6 14–6 3TA100G6K 3 14–2 3TA150F3K 6 14–6 3TA150F6K 3 14–2 3TA250J3K 6 14–6 3TA250J6K 3 14–2/0 3TA400K3K 6 14–3 3TA400K6K K-Frame 2 2 Wire Size Range AWG Cu G-Frame 1 2 2 Wires per Terminal Base Mounting Hardware Ordering Information Hardware for surface mounting of circuit breakers is supplied only on request. Hardware consists of mounting screws and lockwashers. Order hardware for circuit breaker pole configurations as required. Mounting Hardware 2 Screw Length in Inches (mm) 2 Catalog Number G-Frame 2 0.138–32 x 2.63 (3.5 x 66.7 mm) Std. 624B375G23 0.138–32 x 3.00 (3.5 x 76.2 mm) 8703C80G05 2 Note 1 GD breakers require special tapping for multiwire lugs, as described in the IL or use with standard aluminum collars. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-318 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Imperial Thread Mounting Hardware Number of Poles Description Type of Mounting Catalog Number 0.164-32 x 3.188-inch pan-head steel screws, lockwashers and clamps Individual 624B375G01 Group 1 624B375G02 F-Frame 1 2 2 2 2 2 0.164-32 x 1.5-inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual 4218B80G01 3, 4 0.164-32 x 1.5-inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH1 2 0.250-20 x 2.75 inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH2 2 0.250-20 x 1.5 inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH3 2 0.250-20 x 1.5 inch filister-head steel screws and lockwashers and flat washers Individual BMH4 2 0.3125-18 x 1.25 inch filister-head steel screws and lockwashers and flat washers Individual BMH5 2 0.3125-18 x 1.25 inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH5 2 J-Frame 2, 3, 4 K-Frame 2, 3, 4 L-Frame 2, 3, 4 M-Frame 2, 3 N-Frame 2, 3, 4 2 R-Frame Supplied by customer 2 2 Metric Thread Mounting Hardware Number of Poles Description Type of Mounting Catalog Number M4–0.7 x 80 mm pan-head steel screws, lockwashers, and clamps Individual 4218B80G09 Group 1 4218B80G10 F-Frame 1 2 2 2 2 M4–0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual 4218B80G11 3, 4 M4–0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH1M 2 M6–0.7 x 70 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH2M 2 M6–0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH3M 2 — Individual BMH4M 2 — Individual BMH5M 2 — Individual BMH5M 2 J-Frame 2, 3, 4 K-Frame 2, 3, 4 L-Frame 2, 3 2 M-Frame 2, 3 N-Frame 2, 3 R-Frame Supplied by customer 2 Note 1 One set of hardware for two circuit breakers. 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-319 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Terminal Shields 2 G-Frame Terminal Shield 2 Number Units in Package Catalog Number 10 GTSK3 2 2 F-Frame 2 2 2 2 2 2 J-Frame 2 2 2 F-Frame Terminal Shield Standard (Package of 10) (Priced Individually) Special—For Use When Electrical Operator is Mounted on Circuit Breaker Number of Poles Location Catalog Number Catalog Number 1 Line 625B229G06 — 2 Line 625B229G07 — 3 Line 625B229G08 4210B95G01 4 Line 625B229G09 4210B95G02 J-Frame Terminal Shield Number of Poles Location Catalog Number (Package of 10) 2, 3 Line End 1266C07G01 4 Line End 6631C01G01 2, 3 Load End 6641C16G01 4 Load End 6641C16G02 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-320 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C K-Frame K-Frame Terminal Shield Number of Poles Location Catalog Number (Package of 10) 2, 3 Line TS33LN 4 Line TS34LN 3 Load TS33LD Interphase Barriers Ordering Information Two per package. Interphase Barrier L-Frame Terminal Shield 2 2 Interphase Barriers Frame Catalog Number F IPB1 J, K IPB3 L IPB4 M IPB4 N IPB5 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number (Package of 1) 2 314C420G05 2 2 Base Mounting Plate Base Mounting Plate M-Frame Terminal Shield Base Mounting Plate G-Frame GD/GHC 2 Number of Units in Package Catalog Number 2 1 207B513G01 Catalog Number (Package of 1) 2 208B966G01 2 DIN Rail Adapter DIN Rail Adapter DIN Rail Adapter G-Frame GD/GHC Number of Poles Number of Units in Package Catalog Number 1, 2 10 1225C79G01 3 10 1225C79G02 1 N-Frame Terminal Shield Catalog Number (Package of 1) Key Operated Attachment NTS3K Key Operated Attachment Terminal End Covers Ordering Information The terminal end cover is available for three-pole circuit breakers only. Two conductor opening sizes are available. Specify quantity (one per circuit breaker) when ordering. F-Frame 2 2 2 2 2 Key Operated Attachment G-Frame GD/GHC Number of Units in Package Catalog Number 10 GKOA 2 2 2 Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable) Lock Dog (NonPadlockable) 2 2 Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable) G-Frame GD/GHC/GHB/GMCP 2 F-Frame Terminal End Covers Number of Units in Package Catalog Number Conductor Opening Diameter in Inches (mm) Catalog Number 1 1294C01H01 0.25 (6.35 mm) TEC1 0.41 (10.41 mm) TEC2 2 2 2 Note 1 For use on three-pole breakers only. 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-321 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2 Non-Padlockable Handle Block 2 Non-Padlockable Handle Block Non-Padlockable Handle Block 2 Frame Catalog Number F LKD1 2 J, K LKD3 L, M, N LKD4 2 2 2 2 Padlockable Handle Padlockable Handle 2 2 Padlockable G-Frame GD/GHC/GHB Number of Units in Package Catalog Number 1 10 1223C77G03 10 1223C77G05 2 10 1223C77G06 2 2 2 2 2 Padlockable Handle Lock Padlockable Handle Lock 2 Padlockable Handle Lock Frame Catalog Number G GPHBOFF J, K PHB3 2 2 2 2 Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp 2 Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Frame Catalog Number F PHL1 2 2 2 Notes 1 Accepts 0.285 Lock Shank. 2 Padlockable in the OFF position only. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-322 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp 2 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp 2 Catalog Number Description 2 F-Frame Single-pole breakers PHL1 Two-, three- and four-pole breakers PLK1 For left side mounting PLK1LOFF For right side mounting PLK1ROFF 2 2 2 J, K-Frames Two-, three- and four-pole breakers PLK3 For left side mounting PLK3LOFF 1 For right side mounting PLK3ROFF 2 2 1 L-Frame (Side Mounted) 2 Side Mounted Lock ON or OFF HLK4 Lock OFF only (left-hand mount) HLK4LOFF 1 2 Lock ON or OFF HLK4S 2 Lock OFF only HLK4SOFF 1 2 Lock ON or OFF HLK4 2 Lock OFF only (left-hand mount) HLK4LOFF 1 2 Lock ON/OFF HLK4S Lock OFF only HLK4SOFF 2 L-Frame (Top Mounted) M-Frame M-Frame (Vertical Mounting) 2 N-Frame Side mounted PLK5 Top mounted (ON/OFF) PLK5S Top mounted (OFF only) PLK5SOFF 1 2 2 R-Frame Lock ON/OFF HLK6 Lock OFF only HLK6OFF 1 2 2 Cylinder Lock Cylinder Lock 2 Cylinder Lock Frame Catalog Number F, J, K Order by description 2 2 2 2 Note 1 For padlockable handle lock hasp to padlock handle in OFF position only, order either catalog number. 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-323 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2 Key Interlock Kit Ordering Information Key interlock mounting kits are for field installation only. Select mounting kit catalog numbers to match type of lock used. Key interlocks are supplied by customer. 2 Key Interlock Kit 2 2 photo 2 2 Key Interlock Kit Lock Manufacturer Lock Type Bolt Projection in Withdrawn Position in Inches (mm) Kit Catalog Number KYK1 F-Frame position 2 Superior B-4003-1 0.38 (9.5) Kirk® F 0.38 (9.5) KYK1 Square D® SF None KYK1 Castell 1 K or QK 0.38 (9.5) CTK1 B-4003-1 0.38 (9.5) KYK3 KYK3 2 J, K-Frames 2 Kirk F 0.38 (9.5) 2 Square D SF None KYK3 Castell 1 K or QK 0.38 (9.5) CTK3 2 L-, M-, N-Frames 2 Superior B-4003-1 0.38 (9.5) KYK4 Kirk F 0.38 (9.5) KYK4 2 Square D SF None KYK4 Castell 1 K or QK 0.38 (9.5) CTK4 2 R-Frame Superior B-4003-1 1.0 (25.4) KYK6 2 Kirk F 1.0 (25.4) KYK6 2 Square D SF 1.0 (25.4) KYK6 Castell 1 K or QK 1.0 (25.4) CTK6 Superior 2 JG-Frame Superior B-4003-1 0.38 (9.5) KYKJG 2 Kirk F 0.38 (9.5) KYKJG Square D SF None KYKJG Castell 1 K or QK 0.38 (9.5) CTKJG Superior B-4003-1 0.38 (9.5) KYKLG 2 Kirk F 0.38 (9.5) KYKLG Square D SF None KYKLG 2 Castell 1 K or QK 0.38 (9.5) CTKLG 2 Note 1 When ordering Castell Interlock, it is necessary for customer to specify that the mounting bolt holes must be 10 mm in diameter 2 LG-Frame 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-324 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Sliding Bar Interlock Ordering Information The sliding bar interlock is available for mounting between two adjacent threepole circuit breakers with circuit breakers centerline Sliding Bar Interlock 2 spacing as indicated in table and enclosure front panel thickness of 1/8 or 3/16 inch (3.2 or 4.8 mm). (For field installation only.) 2 2 2 Sliding Bar Interlock Frame Centerline Spacing in Inches (mm) Catalog Number F 4.19 (106.4) SBK1 J 4.38 (111.3) SBK2 K 5.75 (146.0) SBK3 L, M 8.50 (215.9) SBK4 N 8.50 (215.9) SBK5 Walking Beam Interlock Ordering Information The walking beam interlock is available for mounting between two adjacent circuit breakers spaced 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) apart and having the same pole configuration. The two circuit breakers must be factory modified to accept the walking beam interlock assembly (suitable for use with either two-, three- or four-pole circuit breakers). Walking Beam Interlock 2.3 2 2 2 2 2 2 With properly modified circuit breakers, the walking beam interlock is suitable for field installation. Order circuit breakers specifying modification for walking beam (20% price adder) and select walking beam interlock from table below. Circuit breakers and walking beam interlock are boxed and shipped separately. 2 2 2 2 2 2 Walking Beam Interlock Frame Catalog Number 2 F WBL1 K WBL3 2 L, M WBL4A N WBL5 R1 WBL6 2 2 2 Note 1 Three-pole only. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-325 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2 Electrical Operator 2 F-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator 2 2 Terminal Block 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Lead Catalog Number Voltage Frequency Catalog Number 120 AC EOP1T07 EOP1P07 240 AC EOP1T11 EOP1P11 2 2 F-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator 1 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Lead Voltage Frequency Catalog Number 2 120 50/60 Hz AC MOPFD120C 24 DC MOPFD24D 2 125 DC MOPFD120C 2 208–240 50/60 Hz MOPFD240C 220–250 DC MOPFD240C 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 J-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Terminal Block Operating Voltage Frequency Catalog Number 120 50/60 Hz AC EOP2T07 240 50/60 Hz AC EOP2T11 K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Terminal Block Operating Voltage Frequency Catalog Number 120 50/60 Hz AC EOP3MT07 240 50/60 Hz AC EOP3MT11 K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Base Mounting Kit Frame Catalog Number K BBMK3 2 2 2 L- and M-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator (310 and OPTIM) Terminal Block 2 Operating Voltage Frequency Catalog Number 2 120 50/60 Hz EOP4MT07 208 50/60 Hz EOP4MT11 2 240 50/60 Hz EOP4MT11A 480 50/60 Hz EOP4MT15 125 DC EOP4MT26 24 DC EOP4MT21 2 2 2 Note 1 Motor operators MOP1P07, MOP1P03DC, MOP1P05DC and MOP1P07DC are replaced by MOPFD motor operators listed in table. V4-T2-326 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 N-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Pigtail Leads 2 Operating Voltage Frequency Catalog Number 2 120 50/60 Hz EOP5T07 208 50/60 Hz EOP5T09 2 240 50/60 Hz EOP5T11 480 50/60 Hz EOP5T15 24 DC EOP5T21 48 DC EOP5T22 125 DC EOP5T26 2 2 2 2 R-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Factory-Installed Terminal Block 2 Operating Voltage Frequency Catalog Number 2 120 50/60 Hz EOP6T08K 240 50/60 Hz EOP6T11K 2 48 DC EOP6T21K 2 2 Plug-In Adapters 2 F-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type) Continuous Current Rating (Amperes) Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 100–225 1480D13G01 1480D13G02 1480D13G07 1 Mounting plate 176C511H01 507C047H01 — 2 2 2 2 J-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type) Continuous Current Rating (Amperes) Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Terminal End Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 250 Line 1260C86G05 1260C86G06 1231C67G01 Load 1260C86G07 1260C86G08 1231C67G02 One line and one load 506C144G27 506C144G28 — — 2 PMP23 — Mounting plate 2 2 2 2 2 K-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type)—600 Vac Maximum 2 Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Continuous Current Rating (Amperes) Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 400 PAD32 PAD33 — Mounting plate 2 PMP33 — 2 2 Notes 1 100 ampere maximum. 2 Use three-pole mounting plate for two-pole circuit breaker. 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-327 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2 L-Frame (Threaded Stud Type) 2 Continuous Current Rating (Amperes) 2 Mounting plate 2 2 2 2 2 Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 600 (threaded stud type) 506C059G03 506C059G04 PAD44 600 (flat bar type) 1288C19G01 1288C19G02 6636C55H01 504C824H01 504C824H01 — M-Frame (Flat Bar Type)—600 Vac Maximum Two-Pole Three-Pole Continuous Current Rating (Amperes) Catalog Number Catalog Number 800 2614D53G05 2614D53G06 Mounting plate 1290C73H01 1290C73H01 2 2 2 2 2 N-Frame (Flat Bar Type) Two-Pole Three-Pole Continuous Current Rating (Amperes) Catalog Number Catalog Number 1200 2614D53G03 2614D53G04 Mounting plate 1290C73H01 1290C73H01 Number of Poles Standard Certification 2 Plug-In Adapters 2 Frame 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number FD 3 IEC PAD3F FD 4 IEC PAD4F JD 3 IEC PAD3JD KD 3 IEC PAD3K LD 3 IEC PAD3LD LD 4 IEC PAD4LD 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-328 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Rear Connecting Studs 2 L-Frame Ordering Information F-Frame 1 Stud Ampere Rating Stud Catalog Number 2 Stud Catalog Number Tube Catalog Number 2 314C960G07 For 15 to 100 Ampere Circuit Breakers 2 314C960G08 100A short 451D874G01 32B9446H20 100A short 451D874G01 32B9446H21 100A short 451D874G01 32B9446H22 100A short 451D874G01 32B9446H23 M-Frame Ordering Information 1 100A long 451D874G02 32B9446H24 100A long 451D874G02 32B9446H25 Stud Ampere Rating Stud Catalog Number 100A long 451D874G02 32B9446H26 225 314C960G01 100A long 451D874G02 32B9446H27 400 314C960G04 400 314C960G05 400 314C960G06 600 314C960G07 600 314C960G08 600 314C960G09 800 314C960G10 800 314C960G11 800 314C960G12 314C960G09 2 For 110 to 225 Ampere Circuit Breakers 225A short 374D883G01 374D883H06 225A short 374D883G01 374D883H07 225A short 374D883G01 374D883H08 225A short 374D883G01 374D883H09 225A long 374D883G02 374D883H10 225A long 374D883G02 374D883H11 225A long 374D883G02 374D883H12 225A long 374D883G02 374D883H13 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 N-Frame Ordering Information 1 J-Frame 1 Stud Ampere Rating Stud Catalog Number Tube Catalog Number 250A short 5010D23G01 456D983H05 250A short 5010D23G01 456D983H06 250A short 5010D23G01 456D983H07 250A long 5010D23G02 5010D23H05 250A long 5010D23G02 5010D23H06 250A long 5010D23G02 Stud Ampere Rating Stud Catalog Number 800 623B222G01 800 623B222G02 800 623B222G03 1200 373B375G04 1200 373B375G03 2 2 2 2 2 Note 1 Not UL listed. 5010D23H07 2 2 K-Frame 1 Stud Ampere Rating Stud Catalog Number Standard Tube Catalog Number 400A short 6642C14G02 313C909H17 400A short 6642C14G04 313C909H18 400A short 6642C14G06 313C909H19 400A long 6642C14G03 313C909H20 400A long 6642C14G05 313C909H21 400A long 6642C14G07 313C909H22 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-329 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2 Panelboard Connecting Straps 2 F-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps 2 Bus Spacing in Inches (mm) Continuous Current Rating (Amperes) 2.75 (69.9) 2.75 (69.9) Pole Connector Type Center Outside Catalog Number Catalog Number 50 673B142G02 673B142G09 100 673B142G02 673B142G10 2.75 (69.9) 150 673B142G04 673B142G03 2 3.50 (88.9) 50 1253C72G01 1253C72G03 2 3.50 (88.9) 100 1253C73G03 1253C73G06 3.50 (88.9) 150 1253C73G01 1253C73G05 2 2 2 2 F-Frame Mounting Bracket 2 Number of Poles Catalog Number 2 624B600H02 2 3 624B600H01 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 J-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps Pole Connector Type Bus Spacing in Inches (mm) Continuous Current Rating (Amperes) Center Outside Catalog Number Catalog Number 3.50 (88.9) 250 2600D26G01 2600D26G02 K-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps Pole Connector Type Bus Spacing in Inches (mm) Continuous Current Rating (Amperes) Center Outside Catalog Number Catalog Number 3.50 (88.9) 400 4212B78G02 4212B77G01 2 K-Frame Mounting Bracket 2 Number of Poles Catalog Number 2, 3 208B264H01 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-330 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 L-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps Continuous Current Rating (Amperes) 600 2 Pole Connector Type Center Outside Catalog Number Catalog Number 624B609G01 506C052G01 2 2 2 L-Frame Mounting Bracket Number of Poles Catalog Number 2, 3 208B297H01 2 2 2 2 M-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps Bus Spacing in Inches (mm) Continuous Current Rating (Amperes) 3.50 (88.9) 800 Pole Connector Type Connector Type Catalog Number Short 314C996G01 Medium 314C996G02 Long 314C996G03 2 2 2 2 2 M-Frame Mounting Bracket Catalog Number 2 315C270H01 2 2 N-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps Bus Spacing in Inches (mm) Continuous Current Rating (Amperes) Connector Type Catalog Number 3.50 (88.9) 1200 Short 505C606G04 Medium 505C606G05 Long 505C606G06 Pole Connector Type 2 2 2 2 2 N-Frame Mounting Bracket (Four Required) Catalog Number 2 315C270H01 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-331 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2 Handle Mechanisms 2 Flex Shaft 2 2 Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m) 3 (0.9) 4 (1.2) 5 (1.5) 6 (1.8) 7 (2.1) 8 (2.4) 9 (2.7) 10 (3.0) Breaker Frame Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number — G1 F0S03C F0S04C F0S05C F0S06C — — — F F1S03C F1S04C F1S05C F1S06C F1S07C F1S08C F1S09C F1S10C F (dual) F1S03CD F1S04CD F1S05CD F1S06CD F1S07CD F1S08CD F1S09CD F1S10CD 2 J F2S03C F2S04C F2S05C F2S06C F2S07C F2S08C F2S09C F2S10C 2 K F3S03C F3S04C F3S05C F3S06C F3S07C F3S08C F3S09C F3S10C L and MDL — F4S04C F4S05C F4S06C — — — F4S10C 2 N — F5S04C F5S05C F5S06C — — — F5S10C R — F6S04 F6S05 F6S06 — — — — 2 MD, MDS (old) — F7S04 F7S05 F7S06 — — — F7S10C 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Suitable for GC/GD MCCB; not suitable for GMCP. Type 4/4X handle mechanisms are available. Add Suffix X to complete catalog number. Add Suffix I to complete catalog number for IEC handle. Original narrow handle design (No C Suffix) is available. Remove C from catalog number. When selecting the length of shaft, ensure minimum bending radius of 4 inches (101.6 mm) (5 inches, 12.7 mm for L-, N- and R-Frames) is maintained to operate properly. The standard method of shipment includes the mechanism preset at the factory; however, minor field adjustments may be required. Dual breakers operator available on F-Frame only. Only the F, J and K can mount LH and RH all other RH only. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-332 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Type C371 Operating Mechanism Only 3 Operating Mechanism w/ 4-Inch Handle Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number For NEMA 1–12 EnclosureFor NEMA 4/4X Enclosure 2 2 Circuit Breaker or Motor Circuit Protector Frame Size Variable Depth Mounting Range Min/Max 12 HMCP and Series C EHD, FDB, FD, FDC, HFD, ED 150 6.50–16 (165.1–406.4) C371E C371E1 C371E2 2 HMCP and Series C HJD, JD, JDB, JDC 250 6.50–16.63 (165.1–422.4) C371F C371F5 C371F6 2 HMCP and Series C DK, HKD, KD, KDB 400 6.50–16.63 (165.1–422.4) C371F C371F5 C371F6 2 Series C HLD, LD, LDC 600 8.50–22 (215.9–558.8) C371G C371G5 C371G6 2 Series C MD, MDS (No MDL) 800 8.75–22 (222.3–558.8) C371K C371K5 C371K6 2 Series C HND, ND, NDC 1200 9.75–22 (247.7–558.8) C371K C371K5 C371K6 2 2 2 Handle Only Circuit Breaker Frame Size (Amperes) NEMA Enclosure Type Operating Handle Length Catalog Number 2 150 1-3R-3-12 4.00 (101.6) C371H1 4/4X 4.00 (101.6) C371H2 2 1-3R-3-12 6.00 (152.4) C371H3 4/4X 6.00 (152.4) C371H4 1-3R-3-12 4.00 (101.6) C371H5 4/4X 4.00 (101.6) C371H6 1-3R-3-12 6.00 (152.4) C371H7 4/4X 6.00 (152.4) C371H8 250–1200 2 2 2 2 2 Channel Support Kit (Rod Not Supplied) For use to prevent bending of the operating handle mounting surface. This is especially useful when the operating handle is mounted on a channel in a multi-door enclosure. Amperes Catalog Number 600–1200 C371CS6 2 2 2 2 Connecting Rods 4 Application Catalog Number Disconnect switches (30, 60, 100, 200A sizes) C371CS1 Circuit breakers (150, 250, 400A sizes) C371CS1 Circuit breakers (600, 800, 1200A sizes) C371CS2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 For increased maximum allowable depth, see connecting rods left. 2 Dimensions shown are from panel flange surface. 3 Does not include handle. 4 Increase maximum allowable depth by 5 inches (127 mm). 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-333 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2 Through-the-Door Handle Mechanisms 2 Series C Rotary Series C Rotary Ordering Information Complete Catalog Number 1 Separate Catalog Number Standard Handle 2 Breaker Mechanism 3 Shaft 4 IEC IP65 56 IEC IP66 56 6.00 (152.4) HM1R06 6648C22G25 6648C23G11 4217B37G08 WHM1R06 WHM1R06X 2 12.00 (304.8) HM1R12 6648C22G25 6648C23G11 4217B37G05 WHM1R12 WHM1R12X 2 16.00 (406.4) HM1R16 6648C22G25 6648C23G11 4217B37G06 WHM1R16 WHM1R16X 24.00 (609.6) HM1R24 6648C22G25 6648C23G11 4217B37G07 WHM1R24 WHM1R24X Shaft Length Inches (mm) 2 2 Catalog Number F-Frame 2 J-Frame 6.00 (152.4) HM2R06 6648C22G01 6648C23G21 4217B37G08 WHM2R06 WHM2R06X 2 12.00 (304.8) HM2R12 6648C22G01 6648C23G21 4217B37G05 WHM2R12 WHM2R12X 16.00 (406.4) HM2R16 6648C22G01 6648C23G21 4217B37G06 WHM2R16 WHM2R16X 2 24.00 (609.6) HM2R24 6648C22G01 6648C23G21 4217B37G07 WHM2R24 WHM2R24X 2 6.00 (152.4) HM3R06 6648C22G01 6648C23G25 4217B37G08 WHM3R06 WHM3R06X 2 12.00 (304.8) HM3R12 6648C22G01 6648C23G25 4217B37G05 WHM3R12 WHM3R12X 16.00 (406.4) HM3R16 6648C22G01 6648C23G25 4217B37G06 WHM3R16 WHM3R16X 2 24.00 (609.6) HM3R24 6648C22G01 6648C23G25 4217B37G07 WHM3R24 WHM3R24X 2 6.00 (152.4) HM4R06 6648C22G11 6648C23G19 4217B37G08 WHM4R06 WHM4R06X 2 12.00 (304.8) HM4R12 6648C22G11 6648C23G19 4217B37G05 WHM4R12 WHM4R12X 16.00 (406.4) HM4R16 6648C22G11 6648C23G19 4217B37G06 WHM4R16 WHM4R16X 2 24.00 (609.6) HM4R24 6648C22G11 6648C23G19 4217B37G07 WHM4R24 WHM4R24X K-Frame L- and MDL-Frame MD/MDS 2 6.00 (152.4) HM7R06 6648C22G21 6648C23G17 4217B37G08 — — 2 12.00 (304.8) HM7R12 6648C22G21 6648C23G17 4217B37G05 — — 16.00 (406.4) HM7R16 6648C22G21 6648C23G17 4217B37G06 — — 2 24.00 (609.6) HM7R24 6648C22G21 6648C23G17 4217B37G07 — — 2 6.00 (152.4) HM5R06 6648C22G21 6648C23G08 4217B37G08 WHM5R06 WHM5R06X 12.00 (304.8) HM5R12 6648C22G21 6648C23G08 4217B37G05 WHM5R12 WHM5R12X 16.00 (406.4) HM5R16 6648C22G21 6648C23G08 4217B37G06 WHM5R16 WHM5R16X 24.00 (609.6) HM5R24 6648C22G21 6648C23G08 4217B37G07 WHM5R24 WHM5R24X N-Frame 2 2 Notes 1 Complete catalog number includes the standard handle, mechanism, shaft and support brace/bracket. 2 Handle is designed suitable for NEMA Types 1, 3R and 12 enclosures. Use style number 6648C22G03 for Type 4/4X handle or add X Suffix to complete catalog number. Handle is cast aluminum. 3 Breaker mechanism includes a shaft support bracket and its parts. Shaft is.50-inch (12.7 mm). 4 Longer shafts,16-inch (406.4 mm) and 24-inch (609.6 mm), include an adjustable support extension. 5 IEC handle mechanism supplied with metric thread mounting hardware. 6 Complete catalog number includes a handle, mechanism and shaft. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-334 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Universal Rotary F-Frame 2 Features Comparison of Series C Rotary and Universal Rotary Handle Mechanism Rotary NEMA Enclosure Type Number Handle of Poles 1 3R 12 4/4X 1 Lock-Off 2 International Handle Indication: Markings ON/OFF TRIPPED/RESET ON (I) OFF (O) Handle Material Available Handle Colors Handle Rotation Shaft Lengths (Inches) Series C rotary — X X X X X X X Metal Black 45 deg. 6, 12, 16, 24 Universal rotary — X — X — X X X Molded plastic Yellow/Red/Black 90 deg. 6, 12, 24 Universal Rotary F-Frame 2 2 2 Series C Universal Rotary 3 Shaft Length in Inches (mm) 2 Handle Color Complete Catalog Number 6.00 (152.4) Black GHMVD06B 12.00 (304.8) Black GHMVD12B 6.00 (152.4) Red GHMVD06R 12.00 (304.8) Red GHMVD12R 6.00 (152.4) Black FHMVD06B 2 2 G-Frame 2 2 2 F-Frame 2 12.00 (304.8) Black FHMVD12B 6.00 (152.4) Red FHMVD06R 12.00 (304.8) Red FHMVD12R 2 6.00 (152.4) Black JHMVD06B 2 J-Frame 12.00 (304.8) Black JHMVD12B 6.00 (152.4) Red JHMVD06R 12.00 (304.8) Red JHMVD12R 6.00 (152.4) Black KHMVD06B 2 2 K-Frame 2 2 12.00 (304.8) Black KHMVD12B 6.00 (152.4) Red KHMVD06R 12.00 (304.8) Red KHMVD12R 2 2 L-Frame 6.00 (152.4) Black LHMVD06B 12.00 (304.8) Black LHMVD12B 6.00 (152.4) Red LHMVD06R 12.00 (304.8) Red LHMVD12R 2 2 2 Series C G-Frame Vari-Depth Handle Mechanism (Not Shown) For Use With Handle Color Enclosure Breaker Black Complete Catalog Number NEMA 1 GC/GHC/GD Black HRGCV11L NEMA 1 GC/GHC/GD Yellow HRGCV31L NEMA 3R/12/4X GC/GHC/GD Black HRGCV14L NEMA 3R/12/4X GC/GHC/GD Yellow HRGCV34L NEMA 1 GMCP Black HRGMV11L NEMA 1 GMCP Yellow HRGMV31L NEMA 3R/12/4X GMCP Black HRGMV14L NEMA 3R/12/4X GMCP Yellow HRGMV34L 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Type 4/4X application requires special handle. See “Ordering Information.” 2 All rotary handle mechanisms include a handle “Lock Off” to prevent turning the breaker ON while in the OFF position. 3 Only available as complete handle mechanism. Parts not sold separately. Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2 V4-T2-335 2.3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms 2 Euro IEC Direct 2 Black Handle Red Handle 2 Frame Catalog Number Catalog Number F HMCC1B HMCC1R 2 J HMCC2B HMCC2R K HMCC3B HMCC3R 2 L and M HMCC4B HMCC4R 2 N HMVD5B — R HMVD6B — 2 G Direct 1 2 Black Handle 2 2 2 2 Handle Extension 2 Handle Extension Without Shroud With Shroud Without Shroud Frame Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number GD/GHC HRGCC1S HRGCC10 HRGCC3S HRGCC30 GMCP HRGMC1S HRGMC10 HRGMC3S HRGMC30 Handle Extension 23 Frame Style Number 2 J, K HEX3 L, M HEX4 2 N HEX5 R HEX6 2 2 Yellow Handle With Shroud Notes 1 Suitable for use on two- or three-pole G-Frame. 2 Handle extension is not included with J, K, L, M and N-Frame breakers. It must be purchased separately. 3 Handle extension is included with breaker with R-Frame breakers. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-336 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Type LFD Current Limiter The LFD current limiter is an accessory that bolts to the load end of a standard FDB or FD thermal-magnetic and electronic circuit breaker, providing 200,000A Type LFD Current Limiter Type LFD Current Limiter Circuit Breaker Rating Amperes Catalog Number 15–70 LFD3070R 80–160 LFD3150R Ground Fault Alarm Unit The ground fault alarm unit is a remotely mounted device with a combination indicating light/test button that will light when the breaker trips or alarms on ground fault. The ground fault alarm unit requires a separate 120 Vac power source to power the Ground Fault Alarm Unit interrupting capacity at up to 600 Vac. LFD current limiters for thermal-magnetic circuit breakers are listed with Underwriters Laboratories under File E47239. light and the internal relay, which has 1NO and 1NC contacts for remote indication. The ground fault alarm unit can be panel mounted for ordering with an optional face mounting bracket. For use on Digitrip 310 only, K- through N-Frame. GF Alarm Unit Description Catalog Number Ground fault alarm unit GFAU Face mounting bracket 1264C67G01 Potential Transformer Module The potential transformer module is required for the Digitrip OPTIM 1050 to provide a voltage input to allow the trip unit to monitor power and energy as well as power factor. The potential transformer module is a 6 VA transformer with a primary voltage input of up to 600 volt Potential Transformer Module line to line. Three 0.1 ampere fuses are provided on the primary of the transformer and can be used for isolation purposes during dielectric testing. The device is normally panel mounted and can feed up to 16 OPTIM trip units. 2 2 2 2 2 Potential Transformer Module Description Catalog Number 2 Potential transformer module DOPTMLN 2 2 Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit The solid-state (electronic) 50/60 Hz power; it includes portable test kit provides complete instructions and verification of performance of test times for testing long all ratings of Digitrip 310 time, short time/ electronic trip units installed instantaneous operation in circuit breakers while in and optional ground fault service under varying load operation of the circuit and/or phase imbalance. The breaker. test kit operates on 120-volt, Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit 2 2 2 2 2 2 Portable Test Kit Description IQ Energy Sentinel The IQ Energy Sentinel is a highly accurate, microprocessor-based, breaker-mounted device designed to monitor power and energy readings. It represents an alternative to watt meters, watt-hour meters, and watt demand meters. Key advantages include savings in space, lower installation costs, and remote monitoring capability. 2 Catalog Number 2 STK2 2 The IQ Energy Sentinel mounts on the load side of a Series C F-Frame (150 ampere) circuit breaker. It can be applied on three-phase, four-wire systems, or singlephase, three-wire systems with voltage connected through Phases A and C. 2 2 2 2 2 For more information, see Descriptive Bulletin 8178. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-337 2.3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Breaker Interface Module (BIM) The Breaker Interface Module (BIM) is a panel mounted user interface device that is mounted on the front of an electrical assembly or at a remote location. The BIM is used to access, configure, test and display information for OPTIM trip units and other devices. The BIM consists of four display windows, eight function buttons, 18 LEDs, and a graphical time/current curve to provide breaker status, operational information, protection status and energy monitoring. A 24 Vdc power supply is required to provide power to the BIM. This is supplied by the switchboard builder to Eaton’s specifications. The BIM is a member of Eaton’s PowerNet family of communicating devices that connects OPTIM trip units, Digitrip RMS 810/910 trip units and energy sentinels as a subnetwork system. The BIM can also be connected to a main network via a PONI module to PowerNet software. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Auxiliary Power Module Catalog Number Breaker Interface Module (BIM) Breaker Interface Module (BIM) Catalog Number BIMII 2 2 Auxiliary Power Module power module connects into the top of the Digitrip OPTIMizer via a keyed receptacle. The main application for the auxiliary power module would be for the testing of a standalone non-communicating OPTIM breaker that ordinarily would not have control power. PRTBAPMDV 2 2 Auxiliary Power Module The auxiliary power module is a power supply requiring 120 Vac input at 50 or 60 Hz that provides a 32 Vdc output. The auxiliary power module provides control power for testing an OPTIM trip unit when other means of control power is not available or for continuous OPTIMizer operation versus temporary with a battery. The auxiliary Digitrip OPTIMizer The Digitrip OPTIMizer is a hand-held programmer that is used to access, configure, test and display information from OPTIM trip units. The OPTIMizer plugs into the front of an OPTIM trip unit via an eight-pin telephone jack and is powered by a nine-volt battery or the auxiliary power module. One highlighted feature is the “Copy” and “Download” commands. Setting up multiple OPTIM trips can be finished in minutes and with no errors. An Auxiliary Power Module connection provides a trip test when control power is not present at the breaker. The OPTIMizer is supplied as a standard package to include Digitrip OPTIMizer 2 the programmer, the eightpin connection cord, battery and carrying case. The auxiliary power module is optional. Note: 24 Vdc Power Supply A 24 Vdc power supply is required for all Digitrip OPTIM trip units that are required to communicate either on the main Eaton PowerNet network or as a subnetwork to a BIM. The breaker’s load is 45 mA of current. Typically one power supply is required per switchboard and can provide control power to a BIM and the OPTIM trip units. The 24 Vdc power supply should be an “isolated high quality” power supply with a “CE” label, and is normally provided by the switchboard manufacturer to Eaton’s recommendations. Digitrip OPTIMizer Cause of Trip Display/Remote Mount Cause of Trip Display The Cause of Trip Display can The DIGIVIEW version will be field-installed on any provide a local display at the Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit. breaker without additional The device provides breaker wiring by connecting directly information through an LCD onto the trip unit. The screen, such as cause of trip, DIGIVIEWR06 version has a phrase current, ground 6 foot cable that allows users current and low loads. The to mount the display on the display is ideal for outside of an enclosure door troubleshooting common and connect to the trip unit trips such as ground fault, that is contained inside the long delay, and enclosure. instantaneous/short delay. Cause of Trip Display/Remote Mount Cause of Trip Display Catalog Number DIGIVIEW DIGIVIEWR06 Cause of Trip LED Module The Cause of Trip LED Module can be field-installed on any Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit. The device provides a cause of trip indication via LED. The Cause of Trip LED Module connects directly onto the trip unit. When the Catalog Number Cause of Trip LED Module OPTIMizer—standard package Catalog Number 2 TRIP-LED 2 2 2 V4-T2-338 breaker trips, the module indicates the cause of trip (long delay, short delay, instantaneous and ground) via LED indication. The module is reset after the breaker is reset. Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2.3 Accessories 2 Flex Shaft Accessories (F- through R-Frame) 2 NEMA 12 Safety Door Hardware for Flex Shaft and C371 1 Handle Length in Inches (mm) Catalog Number 2 4 (101.6) C361KJ4 6 (152.4) C361KJ6 Roller Latch 3 C361KR Series C Rotary Accessories As an option, an auxiliary switch is offered so that the control panel builder may electrically indicate the status of the breaker. 2 2 2 2 This accessory would be mounted on the mechanism and comes with 24-inch (609.6 mm) pigtail leads. 2 2 2 2 Series C Auxiliary Switch Catalog Number 2 5108A61G01 2 Notes 1 Customer: Consult with box manufacturer for correct door hardware and any adapters required for assembly. 2 The 1/4-inch x 1/2-inch (6.35 x 12.7 mm) standard mill rectangular locking bar is not supplied with these kits. 3 Third roller latch for use with 4- or 6-inch (101.6 or 152.4 mm) handle when 3 point latching is required. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-339 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2 Technical Data and Specifications 2 Electrical Operator 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 F-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Rating Data 12 Voltage 3 Frequency Inrush Current Amperes Maximum Operating Time Fuse Amperes 4 120 50/60 Hz AC 10 5 cycles (80 ms) 240 50/60 Hz AC 5 5 cycles (80 ms) 2 2 168j Operating Voltage 3 Inrush Current Amperes 3 120 AC 31 2 208 AC 13 240 AC 12 125 DC 21 24 DC 50 F-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data 2567 Voltage 3 Frequency Inrush Current Amperes 120 AC 2 24 DC 5 48 DC 3 Operating Voltage 3 Frequency Inrush Current Amperes Fuse Amperes 125 DC 2 120 50/60 Hz 31 6 208 50/60 Hz 21 — 240 50/60 Hz 19 4 480 50/60 Hz — — N-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data 16kl J-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Rating Data 1689 Voltage 3 Inrush Current Amperes Fuse Amperes 24 DC 50 — 120 30 6 48 DC 80 — 240 16 4 125 DC 21 — 2 2 L- and M-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Rating Data 1689 R-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data mnop Operating Voltage 3 Inrush Current Amperes Fuse Amperes Operating Voltage q Frequency Motor Inrush Current Amperes 120 30 6 120 50/60 Hz 40 240 16 4 240 50/60 Hz 27 48 DC 53 24 DC 58 2 Notes 1 UL listed under UL File E64983. 2 The electrical operator design is endurance tested for 8000 electrical operations. 3 Tolerance: +10%, –15% of nominal voltage. 4 Use current-limiting type fuse where required. 5 UL listed under UL File E64124. 6 Frequency: 50/60 Hz. 7 Maximum operating time: 3 seconds max. Operator is an intermittent duty device. The safe duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should not exceed one per minute. 8 The electrical operator design has been endurance tested for 6000 electrical operations. 9 Maximum operating time: 5 cycles (80 mS). j Maximum operating time: 12 cycles. k The electrical operator design has been endurance tested for 2,500 electrical operations. l Maximum operating time: 12 cycles max. Operator is an intermittent duty device. The safe duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should not exceed one per minute. m Operator is an intermittent duty service. The safe duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should not exceed one per minute. n Electric Operating time at rated voltage; (a) To turn breaker ON–1/2 second max. (b) To turn breaker OFF–1/2 second max. o Motor operating temperature; Class “A” temperature limits apply. p A minimum 1 kVA power source is recommended for motor operation. q Applied voltage should be no less than 85% or no more than 110% of rated voltage. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 For OPTIM trip, OPEOPCK kit required. 2 2 V4-T2-340 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 Rear Connecting Studs 2 2 F-Frame 1 Stud Ampere Rating Stud Catalog Number Panel Thickness Tube Length A B Dimensions C Tube Catalog Number D E F 2 2 For 15 to 100 Ampere Circuit Breakers 100A short 451D874G01 1.00 (25.4) 1.06 (26.9) — 32B9446H20 — 3.63 (92.1) 0.31 (7.9)–18 100A short 451D874G01 0.69 –0.94 (17.5 to 23.8) 1.38 (34.9) — 32B9446H21 — 3.63 (92.1) 0.31 (7.9)–18 100A short 451D874G01 0.38 –0.63 (9.5 to 15.9) 1.69 (42.9) — 32B9446H22 — 3.63 (92.1) 0.31 (7.9)–18 100A short 451D874G01 0.25 –0.31 (6.4 to 7.9) 2.00 (50.8) — 32B9446H23 — 3.63 (92.1) 0.31 (7.9)–18 100A long 451D874G02 1.00 (25.4) — 3.44 (87.3) 32B9446H24 6.13 (155.6) — 0.31 (7.9)–18 100A long 451D874G02 0.69 –0.94 (17.5 to 23.8) — 3.75 (95.2) 32B9446H25 6.13 (155.6) — 0.31 (7.9)–18 2 2 2 2 100A long 451D874G02 0.38 –0.63 (9.5 to 15.9) — 4.06 (103.1) 32B9446H26 6.13 (155.6) — 0.31 (7.9)–18 100A long 451D874G02 0.25 –0.31 (6.4 to 7.9) — 4.38 (111.3) 32B9446H27 6.13 (155.6) — 0.31 (7.9)–18 2 2 For 110 to 225 Ampere Circuit Breakers 225A short 374D883G01 1.00 (25.4) 1.06 (26.9) — 374D883H06 — 4.25 (108.0) 0.44 (11.1)–14 225A short 374D883G01 0.69 –0.94 (17.5 to 23.8) 1.38 (34.9) — 374D883H07 — 4.25 (108.0) 0.44 (11.1)–14 225A short 374D883G01 0.38 –0.63 (9.5 to 15.9) 1.69 (42.9) — 374D883H08 — 4.25 (108.0) 0.44 (11.1)–14 225A short 374D883G01 0.25 –0.31 (6.4 to 7.9) 2.00 (50.8) — 374D883H09 — 4.25 (108.0) 0.44 (11.1)–14 225A long 374D883G02 1.00 (25.4) — 3.44 (87.3) 374D883H10 7.50 (190.5) — 0.44 (11.1)–14 225A long 374D883G02 0.69 –0.94 (17.5 to 23.8) — 3.75 (95.2) 374D883H11 7.50 (190.5) — 0.44 (11.1)–14 225A long 374D883G02 0.38 –0.63 (9.5 to 15.9) — 4.06 (103.1) 374D883H12 7.50 (190.5) — 0.44 (11.1)–14 225A long 374D883G02 0.25 –0.31 (6.4 to 7.9) — 4.38 (111.3) 374D883H13 7.50 (190.5) — 0.44 (11.1)–14 2 2 2 2 2 F-Frame 2 E B 2 Mounting Panel .75 (19.1) 2 “F” Thread Breaker Mounting Surface 2 .06 (1.5) A 2 C 2 D 2 Note 1 Not UL listed. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-341 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 J-Frame Stud Ampere Rating Stud Catalog Number Panel Thickness Tube Length A B C Tube Catalog Number 2 250A short 5010D23G01 0.75–1.00 (19.1–25.4) 0.84 (21.4) — 456D983H05 250A short 5010D23G01 0.50 –0.75 (12.7–19.1) 1.09 (27.7) — 456D983H06 2 250A short 5010D23G01 0.25 –0.50 (6.4–12.7) 1.03 (26.2) — 456D983H07 250A long 5010D23G02 0.75–1.00 (19.1–25.4) — 3.88 (98.6) 5010D23H05 250A long 5010D23G02 0.50 –0.75 (12.7–19.1) — 4.13 (104.9) 5010D23H06 250A long 5010D23G02 0.25 –0.50 (6.4–12.7) — 4.38 (111.3) 5010D23H07 2 2 2 2 1.59 (40.4) 0.59 (15.0) 0.06 (1.5) 2 2 2 2 2 6.66 (169.2) C A 0.03 (0.7) 0.31 (7.9) – 18 Thread Do Not Use More Than 10 Ft Lbs Torque to Tighten Nuts 0.50 (12.7) – 13 Thread Breaker 2 B Mounting Panel 3.63 (92.2) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 K-Frame 1 Stud Ampere Rating Stud Catalog Number Panel Thickness Tube Length A B C E F 0.75–16 (19.1–406.4) 6642C14G02 0.75–1 (19.1–25.4) 0.84 (21.3) — 313C909H17 — 3.66 (93.0) 6642C14G04 0.50 –0.75 (12.7–18.4) 1.09 (27.69) — 313C909H18 — — — 400A short 6642C14G06 0.25 –0.5 (6.35–12.7) 1.03 (26.16) — 313C909H19 — — — — 400A long 6642C14G03 0.75–1 (19.1–25.4) — 3.78 (96.0) 313C909H20 — — 400A long 6642C14G05 0.50 –0.75 (12.7–18.4) — 4.03 (102.4) 313C909H21 6.58 (167.1) — — 400A long 6642C14G07 0.25 –0.5 (6.35–12.7) — 4.28 (108.7) 313C909H22 — — — E B Mounting Panel “F” Thread Breaker Mounting Surface 2 0.06 (1.5) 2 1.67 (42.4) 2 2 D 400A short 2 2 Dimensions 400A short 2 2 Standard Tube Catalog Number A C D Note 1 Not UL listed. V4-T2-342 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 Flange Mounted Handle Mechanisms 2 Type C371 Operating Mechanism Only 2 Operating Mechanism w/ 4-inch Handle For NEMA 1–12 Enclosure For NEMA 4/4X Enclosure 2 Circuit Breaker or Motor Circuit Protector Frame Size Variable Depth Mounting Range Min/Max 12 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number HMCP and Series C EHD, FDB, FD, FDC, HFD, ED 150 6.5–16 (165.1–406.4) C371E C371E1 C371E2 2 HMCP and Series C HJD, JD, JDB, JDC 250 6.5–16.63 (165.1–422.4) C371F C371F5 C371F6 2 HMCP and Series C DK, HKD, KD, KDB 400 6.5–16.63 (165.1–422.4) C371F C371F5 C371F6 2 Series C HLD, LD, LDC 600 8.5–22 (215.9–558.8) C371G C371G5 C371G6 2 Series C MD, MDS (No MDL) 800 8.75–22 (222.3–558.8) C371K C371K5 C371K6 2 Series C HND, ND, NDC 1200 9.75–22 (247.7–558.8) C371K C371K5 C371K6 2 2 2 Handle Only Circuit Breaker Frame Size (Amperes) NEMA Enclosure Type Operating Handle Length Catalog Number 2 150 1-3R-3-12 4.00 (101.6) C371H1 4/4X 4.00 (101.6) C371H2 2 1-3R-3-12 6.00 (152.4) C371H3 4/4X 6.00 (152.4) C371H4 1-3R-3-12 4.00 (101.6) C371H5 4/4X 4.00 (101.6) C371H6 1-3R-3-12 6.00 (152.4) C371H7 4/4X 6.00 (152.4) C371H8 250–1200 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-343 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 L-Frame 2 Stud Length (A) Stud Catalog Number 5.47 (138.9) 314C960G07 2 7.97 (202.4) 314C960G08 10.47 (265.9) 314C960G09 2 2 .44 (11.2) A 2 Insulators Washer 2 Nut 2 2 Circuit Breaker 2 Insulating Panel Rear Connecting Stud 2 2 M-Frame Stud Ampere Rating Diameter and Thread Extension Back of Breaker Stud Catalog Number 2 225 0.50 (12.7)–13 3.66 (93.0) 314C960G01 400 0.75 (19.1)–16 5.91 (150.1) 314C960G04 2 400 0.75 (19.1)–16 8.41 (213.6) 314C960G05 400 0.75 (19.1)–16 10.91 (277.0) 314C960G06 2 600 1.00 (25.4)–12 5.91 (150.1) 314C960G07 2 600 1.00 (25.4)–12 8.41 (213.6) 314C960G08 600 1.00 (25.4)–12 10.91 (277.0) 314C960G09 2 800 1.13 (28.7)–12 5.91 (150.1) 314C960G10 800 1.13 (28.7)–12 8.41 (213.6) 314C960G11 2 800 1.13 (28.7)–12 10.91 (277.0) 314C960G12 Stud Ampere Rating Diameter and Thread Extension Back of Breaker Stud Catalog Number 800 1.13 (28.7)–12 5.5 (139.7) 623B222G01 2 800 1.13 (28.7)–12 8.0 (203.2) 623B222G02 2 800 1.13 (28.7)–12 10.5 (266.7) 623B222G03 1200 1.25 (31.8)–12 5.5 (139.7) 373B375G04 1200 1.25 (31.8)–12 10.5 (266.7) 373B375G03 2 2 2 2 2 N-Frame 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-344 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Definite Purpose 2.4 Contents GP, FP, KP, LP and MP Frames Description Page Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Base Mounting Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line and Load Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional Line and Load Terminals . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Learn Online V4-T2-346 V4-T2-346 V4-T2-348 V4-T2-348 V4-T2-348 V4-T2-348 V4-T2-348 V4-T2-349 V4-T2-350 V4-T2-348 V4-T2-351 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Drawings Online 2 Definite Purpose Molded Case Circuit Breaker Family 2 2 Definite Purpose Molded Case Circuit Breakers 2 Optimized solution for HVAC/R and Pumping Applications. Product Overview GP, FP, KP, LP and MP Frames 15–800 Amperes NEMA 480 Vac Eaton’s Definite Purpose molded case circuit breakers are available in three-pole configurations, and are designed to meet the specific requirements of HVAC/R and pumping applications. As with other members of Eaton’s family of molded case circuit breakers, Definite Purpose breakers provide high quality, reliability, unmatched performance and outstanding value. Eaton’s Definite Purpose breakers are rated from 15– 800A and are available in five frame sizes. Each frame size has the same compact outside dimensions as Series C breakers. Additionally, Definite Purpose breakers have been rigorously tested to the UL 489 standard. They are assembled in an ISO certified facility. Trip Units and Terminals Definite Purpose breakers contain factory-sealed thermal-magnetic trip units. The GP-Frame breaker (15–100A) includes line and load terminals and breaker mounting hardware. FP (15–225A), KP (200– 400A), LP (450–600A) and MP (700–800A) Frames ship standard without mounting hardware. For line and load terminals, add “L” to the end of the catalog number or “W” for no terminals. External Accessories Definite Purpose breakers use the same external accessories as Series C breakers: handle mechanisms, motor operators, lock-off devices, busbar extensions and multiple terminal arrangements. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-345 2.4 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Definite Purpose Product Selection Guide Electrical Characteristics 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Breaker Type GPS FPS FPH KPS KPH Amperage range 15–100A 15–225A 15–225A 200–400A 200–400A Performance level Breaker capacity (kA rms) NEMA, UL, CSA Number of poles S S H S H 65 65 100 65 100 480 Vac 22 35 65 35 65 600 Vac — 18 25 25 35 3 3 3 3 3 240 Vac Maximum voltage (Vac) 480 600 600 600 600 Thermal-magnetic ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-346 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Definite Purpose 2.4 2 2 Electrical Characteristics, continued 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Breaker Type LPS LPH MPS MPH Amperage range 450–600A 450–600A 700–800A 700–800A Performance level S H S H Breaker capacity (kA rms) 240 Vac 65 100 65 100 NEMA, UL, CSA 480 Vac 35 65 50 65 600 Vac 25 35 25 35 3 3 3 3 Number of poles Maximum voltage (Vac) 600 600 600 600 Thermal-magnetic ■ ■ ■ ■ 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-347 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Definite Purpose 2 Features 2 Base Mounting Hardware English base mounting hardware is included with GP frame only. For all other frames, order base mounting hardware separately as per the table to the right. 2 Base Mounting Hardware Catalog Number Frame English Metric GP Included — FP BMH1 BMH1M KP BMH3 BMH3M 2 LP BMH4 BMH4M MP BMH5 BMH5M 2 Note: Base mounting hardware, is included with GP-Frame breakers. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 A separate catalog number is not required. Line and Load Terminals Both line and load terminals are included with GP-Frame Definite Purpose breakers. For all other frames, add “L” for line and load terminals to be included or“W” for no terminals. Line and Load Termination Breaker Termination Type Awg Wire Range Metric Wire Range (mm) Wire Type Bolt Size English Bolt Size Metric Torque Lb–In Torque Nm Catalog Number GP Wire #14–1/0 2.5–50 Cu only — — 45 5.1 Included Options Optional Line and Load Terminals Compression terminals with hardware are available for a wide range of conductors. Field installation only. 2 Optional Line and Load Terminals Breaker FP 2 2 2 KP 2 LP 2 MP 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Maximum Amperes Awg Wire Range End Cap Accessory Kit End caps for line and load conductor termination are optional with each breaker. End caps secure the conductor with a ring-type connector. The kit includes one end cap, three cap screws, three nuts and three lock washers. Catalog Number with Control Wire Termination 100 #14–#10 Cu/Al 3T100FB 1 — #8 Cu/Al 3T100FB 1 — 100 #6–#4 Cu/Al 3T100FB 1 — 100 #3–4/0 Cu/Al 3T100FB 1 — 200 #3–4/0 Cu only 3T150FB 1 — 225 #4–4/0 Cu/Al 3TA225FB 1 — 225 #6–300 Cu/Al 3TA225FDK 1 — 400 250–500 (1) Cu/Al TA350K — 400 3/0–250 (2) Cu/Al 3TA400K 1 3TA400KCW 500 250–350 (2) Cu/Al TA602LD TA602LDCW 600 400–500 (2) Cu/Al 3TA603LDK 1 3TA603LDKCW 800 3/0–400 (3) Cu/Al TA800MA2 TA800MA2CWT 800 500–750 (2) Cu/Al TA801MA TA801MACWT End Cap Accessory Kit Series C Accessories For internal accessories, see Page V4-T2-281. For external accessories, see Page V4-T2-312. V4-T2-348 Catalog Number 100 Note 1 Package of three terminals. Accessories Wire Type Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Definite Purpose 2.4 Catalog Number Selection 2 FP S 3 150 L Frame Size GP = GP-Frame FP = FP-Frame KP = KP-Frame LP = LP-Frame MP = LP-Frame GP-Frame 015 = 15A 020 = 20A 025 = 25A 030 = 30A 035 = 35A 040 = 40A 045 = 45A 050 = 50A 060 = 60A 070 = 70A 080 = 80A 090 = 80A 100 = 100A FP-Frame 015 = 15A 020 = 20A 025 = 25A 030 = 30A 035 = 35A 040 = 40A 045 = 45A 050 = 50A 060 = 60A 070 = 70A 080 = 80A 100 = 100A 110 = 110A 125 = 125A 150 = 150A 175 = 175A 200 = 200A 225 = 225A 2 2 Options Interrupting Rating S = Standard H = High 1 Number of Poles 3 = Three-pole Ampere Rating KP-Frame LP-Frame 450 = 450A 175 = 175A 500 = 500A 200 = 200A 600 = 600A 250 = 250A 300 = 300A 400 = 400A K = Molded case switch 2 L = Line and load terminals W = Without terminals or mounting hardware 1 2 2 2 MP-Frame 700 = 700A 800 = 800A 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Not available on GP-Frame. 2 When choosing a molded case switch, select the highest amperage rating for the frame and the standard interrupting rating. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-349 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Definite Purpose 2 Product Selection 2 Catalog Numbers When ordering Definite Purpose breakers, use the appropriate catalog numbers given below. 2 2 GP 100 GP-Frame/15–100A FP 225 FP-Frame/15–225A Three-Pole 2 2 Three-Pole Frame/ Ampere Rating Catalog Number Frame/ Ampere Rating Catalog Number GP/15–100A circuit breakers GPS3015 FP/15–225A circuit breakers FPS3015 2 GPS3020 FPS3020 GPS3025 FPS3025 2 GPS3030 FPS3030 2 GPS3035 FPS3035 GPS3040 FPS3040 2 GPS3045 FPS3045 GPS3050 FPS3050 2 GPS3060 FPS3060 GPS3070 FPS3070 2 GPS3080 FPS3080 2 GPS3090 FPS3090 GPS3100 FPS3100 GPS3100K FPS3110 2 GP/100A molded case switch Note: All GP frames come standard with line and load terminals FPS3125 2 and base mounting hardware. Not available without terminals. FPS3150 FPS3175 2 FPS3200 2 FPH3015 FPS3225 2 FPH3020 2 FPH3030 2 FPH3040 FPH3025 FPH3035 2 FPH3045 2 FPH3060 FPH3050 FPH3070 2 FPH3080 2 FPH3100 FPH3090 2 FPH3110 2 FPH3150 FPH3125 FPH3175 2 FPH3200 FPH3225 2 FP/225A molded case switch 2 Note: At the end of catalog number, add “L” for terminals or “W” for no terminals. 2 V4-T2-350 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com FPS3225K Molded Case Circuit Breakers Definite Purpose KP 250 KP-Frame/200–400A 2.4 Dimensions Three-Pole Frame/ Ampere Rating Catalog Number KP/175–400A circuit breakers KPS3175 KPS3200 2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) All dimensions are provided for guidance and should not be used for construction purposes unless approved. Contact Eaton for detailed outline drawings. GP, FP, KP, LP and MP Definite Purpose Frames 2 KPS3400 KPH3175 KPH3200 KPH3250 KPH3300 KPH3400 KP/400A molded case switch LP 400 Breaker Type GP Width 3.00 (76.2) FP KP LP MP 4.13 (104.9) 5.49 (139.4) 8.25 (209.6) 8.25 (209.6) Height 4.88 (124.0) 6.00 (152.4) 10.12 (257.0) 10.75 (273.1) 16.00 (406.4) Depth 2.63 (66.7) 3.38 (85.9) 4.31 (109.6) 3.81 (96.8) 4.06 (103.1) KPS3400K Frame/ Ampere Rating Catalog Number LP/450–600A circuit breakers LPS3450 2 2 2 LPS3500 2 LPS3600 2 LPH3450 LPH3500 2 LPH3600 LPS3600K 2 2 MP-Frame/700–800A Three-Pole Frame/ Ampere Rating Catalog Number MP/700–800A circuit breakers MPS3700 2 2 2 MPS3800 MPH3700 2 MPH3800 MP/800A molded case switch 2 2 Three-Pole MP 800 2 2 LP-Frame/450–600A LP/600A molded case switch 2 2 KPS3250 KPS3300 2 MPS3800K 2 2 Note: For KP, LP, MP frames above, add “L” for terminals or W” for no terminals to end of catalog number. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-351 2.5 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Metering and Communications Contents PM3 Modules Description 2 Page PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 Learn Online V4-T2-353 V4-T2-353 V4-T2-354 Drawings Online 2 2 2 2 2 Power Monitoring and Metering with Modbus RTU 2 PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module 2 Product Description Application Description The PM3 is the perfect solution for main, branch circuit and standalone monitoring/metering applications. With information at your fingertips, you can meter, monitor and communicate phase current and voltage with calculated power and energy. ● 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 The PM3 is versatile, as it connects to the load side of a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) and communicates easily to a local network or the Internet through Eaton Power Xpert® Gateways (PXGs). Cost of ownership is reduced through ease of installation. The PM3 is your ideal MCCB metering solution. 2 2 2 2 2 2 ● ● Communications via Modbus® and Eaton’s INCOM™ protocol; compatible with Eaton’s PXG for Web page and Ethernet capabilities Works in 240 Vac PM3, 480 Vac and 600 Vac applications ● 480 Vac PM3 has internal power supply to power electronics ● 600 Vac PM3 requires 24 Vdc auxiliary power Seamlessly integrates with thermal-magnetic or electronic trip units Features and Benefits ● ● ● ● ● Communicates electrical system data and circuit breaker status Calculates power and energy to an accuracy of 1.0% of reading Configurable with thermalmagnetic or electronic trip units Suitable for reverse-feed applications Easy to install PM3 Benefits When Combined with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit ● Alarming: high load and ground fault ● Zone selective interlocking ● Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System™ ● Cause-of-trip localized information through Digiview and TRIP-LED ● Modbus/INCOM communications ● HMI connectivity through PXG ● Current and voltage metering to 0.5% of reading ● Power and energy monitoring to 1.0% of reading ● Reduces cost of ownership 2 2 V4-T2-352 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Standards and Certifications ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Meets ANSI C12.1 revenue grade standard with a current and voltage accuracy of 0.5% of reading UL 489, Annex J IEC 61000-4-2—ESD IEC 61000-4-4—EFT IEC 61000-4-5—SURGE IEC 61000-4-6—EMC ANSI C12.1 (1% accuracy) UL/cUL/CE 2.5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Metering and Communications Product Selection 2 PM3 Modules Frame Catalog Number PM3 Power Monitoring and Communications Module Technical Specifications for Modbus RTU 2 480V Description 2 600V Specification Current Inputs Modbus 2 FD — PM3FM Pickup current 0.3A rms JG — PM3JM Maximum reported current FD/JG 250A rms KD and LG — PM3LM Accuracy 0.5% of reading 2 Line-to-neutral 30–366 Vac 2 INCOM FD PM3FI480 PM3FI600 Voltage Inputs JG PM3JI480 PM3JI600 Range KD and LG PM3LI480 2 KD/LD 630A rms Line-to-line 52–635 Vac PM3LI600 Supported systems 2 Three-element wye, three-element wye + neutral Two-element delta, four-wire delta systems Technical Data and Specifications Metered parameters ● IA, IB, IC ● VAB, VBC, VCA, Van, Vbn, Vcn ● Apparent Energy, Forward Real Energy, Reverse Real Energy, Net Real Energy, Lagging Reactive Energy, Leading Reactive Energy, Net Reactive Energy ● Apparent Power A, B, C; Apparent Power Total; Reactive Power A, B, C; Reactive Power Total; Real Power A, B, C; Real Power Total ● Frequency, Apparent Power Factor, Apparent PFA, Apparent PFB, Apparent PFC Input impedance 996 kiloohm/phase 2 Burden per phase 0.36 VA/phase max. at 600V; 0.014 VA at 120V 2 Phase voltage connections Internal via screw terminal to busbar For wye system, a neutral is required to be connected to the PM3 on the right Phoenix connector. 2 Neutral connection If neutral is not available, the meter will calculate a virtual neutral based on the phase-to-phase rms voltage. The system voltage must be balanced for this to be accurate. 2 2 Frequency Frequency 50/60 Hz Accuracy ± 0.1 Hz Resolution 0.1 Hz 2 2 Power and Energy Accuracy 2 1% of reading (ANSI C12.1) 2 Isolation All inputs and outputs are galvanically isolated to 2500V. 2 Environmental Ratings Operating temperature –20°C to +50°C Storage temperature –20°C to +50°C Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH noncondensing 2 Voltage, current True rms Sampling rate 13.02K samples per second 2 2 Sensing Method 2 Update Rate Watts, VAR and VA 1.03 sec at 60 Hz All other parameters 1.07 sec at 60 Hz 2 DC voltage 18–30 Vdc 2 Maximum current 30.0 mA at 24 Vdc Burden 0.72W Power Supply (External) 2 2 Standard Communication Format Connection type Three-wire RS-485 (A, B, Common) Com port baud rate 9600 or 19,200 bauds Modbus address range 01–247 Data format Selectable (8, N, 1 | 8, N, 2 | 8, Even, 1 | 8, Odd, 1) Protocols Modbus RTU Internal termination resistor selectable ON or OFF Via DIP switch Default: 19,200 bauds 2 Default: 8, N, 2 2 Default: Enabled Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-353 2 2 2.5 2 Metering and Communications Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) FD Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus 2 1.38 (35.1) 2 2 2.88 (73.2) 3.63 (92.2) 3.63 (92.2) On Off 6.00 (152.4) CL Handle 0.69 (17.5) Line End 7.00 (177.8) CL Handle O N O F F LED 5.50 (139.7) 3.95 (100.3) 11.00 (279.4) 10.50 (266.7) O N 12.00 (304.8) 1 2 3 4 5 6 123456789101112131415 2.06 (52.3) 3.34 (84.8) Load End 123456789101112131415 2.06 (52.3) 3.42 (86.9) 3.94 (100.1) 4.13 (104.9) 2 Load End KD Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus 2 1.72 (43.7) 2 2 0.86 (21.8) 2 LG Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus Line End 12.14 (308.4) CL Handle 10.13 (257.3) Power Monitoring/ Metering Module Tx ON O Rx Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 3 4 5 6 MODBUS COM EARTH 24 Vdc (+) 24 Vdc (–) 13.83 (351.3) Network Address Power Bell Alarm COM COM Aux. Alarm V Neutral 2.74 (69.6) 5.48 (139.2) Power Monitoring/ Metering Module Tx ON O Rx Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 3 4 5 6 STATUS Network Address N1 A B MODBUS COM EARTH 24 Vdc (+) Load End CL Handle 10.13 (257.3) See breaker for terminal information. See instruction sheet for high voltage tests. For use on Series G, L-Frame or Series C, K-Frame Circuit Breaker, Switch, Motor Circuit Protector. 2 3.98 (101.1) Power Bell Alarm COM COM Aux. Alarm V Neutral See breaker for terminal information. See instruction sheet for high voltage tests. For use on Series G, L-Frame or Series C, K-Frame Circuit Breaker, Switch, Motor Circuit Protector. 2.74 (69.6) 5.48 (139.2) 4.06 (103.1) 4.88 (124.0) 13.82 (351.0) Load End PM3 Dimensions and Shipping Weights Description Frame Weight in lbs (kg) FD 1.26 (0.57) JG 1.60 (0.73) KD/LG 2.25 (1.02) 2 2 5.58 (141.7) CL Handle 24 Vdc (–) 2 2 Line End 4.31 (109.5) 4.06 (103.1) 3.98 (101.1) 5.58 (141.7) 8.44 (214.4) 12.14 (308.4) STATUS N1 A 2 2 0.86 (21.8) 4.73 (120.1) 5.77 (146.6) CL Handle Off/O 8.44 (214.4) B 2 1.72 (43.7) On/I 2 2 4.31 (109.5) 4.06 (103.1) 3.81 (96.8) 5.77 (146.6) 4.92 (125.0) 3.34 (84.8) 3.42 (86.9) 4.41 (112.0) 4.13 (104.9) 2 2 LED 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 2 CL Handle PUSH TO TRIP FACTO O N 9.53 (242.1) 2 2 3.57 (90.7) 3.44 (87.4) 3.34 (84.8) 3.95 (100.3) 3.17 (80.5) CL Handle S RY EA 4.50 (114.3) 2 2 Line End 1.38 (35.1) FACTO 2 3.50 (88.9) 3.39 (86.1) 3.19 (81.0) 123456789101112131415 2 0.69 (17.5) JG Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus S RY EA 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Basic unit in inches (mm) Shipping container dimensions in inches (mm) V4-T2-354 Dimensions and Weights FD 4.13 W x 5.00 L x 3.39 H (104.9 x 127.0 x 86.1) JG 4.13 W x 5.00 L x 3.39 H (104.9 x 127.0 x 86.1) KD/LG 5.48 W x 3.70 L x 4.06 H (139.2 x 94.0 x 103.2) FD/JG 8.00 x 5.13 x 5.50 (203.2 x 130.3 x 139.7) KD/LG 6.25 x 8.25 x 7.00 (158.7 x 209.5 x 177.8) Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 3.98 (101.1) 4.06 (103.1) 5.43 (137.9) Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2.6 Contents Engine Generator Circuit Breakers Description Engine Generator Circuit Breakers Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Current Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2 Mining Service Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . Classic Mining Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR . . . . PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Learn Online Page 2 V4-T2-356 V4-T2-357 2 V4-T2-359 V4-T2-359 V4-T2-360 V4-T2-360 V4-T2-361 V4-T2-374 V4-T2-397 V4-T2-411 V4-T2-414 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Drawings Online 2 2 Engine Generator Circuit Breakers Product Description Application Description Standards and Certifications Eaton’s engine generator molded case circuit breakers are designed specifically for application on diesel engine powered standby generators where high interrupting circuit breakers are not required. The JG through NG breakers are equipped with a special trip unit, that includes standard thermal (overload) protection and special low magnetic pickup range (FG includes a fixed thermalmagnetic pickup). The standard thermal trip unit provides overload protection for conductors per the National Electrical Code®. The low magnetic pickup range is approximately two to five times the continuous rating and provides closer low-level short-circuit protection when applied on generators that have very low short-circuit capacity. This combination allows the user to customize the breaker to the generator output. Engine generator circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed application. Engine generator molded case circuit breakers are designed to conform with the following standards: ● ● ● 2 2 2 Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489, Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures File E7819 Canadian Standards Association Standard C22.2 No. 5, Service Entrance and Branch Circuit Breakers International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC 947-2, Circuit Breakers 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Conformance with these standards satisfies most local and international codes, assuming user acceptability and simplified application. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-355 2.6 2 2 2 2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Catalog Number Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers. ● FG breakers include both line and load side terminals ● ● JG, KG, LG and NG breakers with W catalog number suffix do not include any terminals JG, KG, LG and NG breakers without W catalog number suffix include both line and load terminals ● ● Contact Eaton for additional ratings and internal/external accessories Reverse feed Circuit Breakers FG, JG, KG, LG and NG FG 3 100 W 2 2 Frame FG 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Number of Poles 3 = Three-pole Trip Amperes 015 020 025 030 035 040 045 050 060 070 080 090 100 125 150 175 200 225 Suffix W = Without terminals JG 2 175 200 225 250 2 KG 300 350 400 2 2 LG 450 500 600 2 NG 700 800 900 1000 1200 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-356 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Product Selection The following table lists FG through NG engine generator breakers with the maximum generator kVA and kW rating. Engine generator breakers are applied at 115% of the 2 generator full load current rating (FLA). The maximum kW rating is based on threephase generators at 80% power factor. 2 2 2 Thermal-Magnetic Engine Generator Breaker 3 Maximum Generator Rating 60 Hz Magnetic Pickup Range 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac kVA 1 kW 2 kVA 1 kW 2 kVA 1 kW 2 Catalog Number Fixed 5 4 11 9 14 11 FG3015 4 Fixed 7 6 14 12 18 14 FG3020 4 Fixed 9 7 18 14 23 18 FG3025 4 Fixed 11 9 22 17 27 22 FG3030 4 Fixed 13 10 25 20 32 25 FG3035 4 Fixed 14 12 29 23 36 29 FG3040 4 Fixed 16 13 32 26 41 32 FG3045 4 Fixed 18 14 36 29 45 36 FG3050 4 Fixed 22 17 43 35 54 43 FG3060 4 Fixed 25 20 51 40 63 51 FG3070 4 Fixed 29 23 58 46 72 58 FG3080 4 4 Fixed 32 26 65 52 81 65 FG3090 Fixed 36 29 72 58 90 72 FG3100 4 Fixed 40 32 79 64 99 79 FG3110 4 Fixed 45 36 90 72 113 90 FG3125 4 Fixed 54 43 108 87 135 108 FG3150 4 4 Fixed 63 51 126 101 158 126 FG3175 Fixed 72 58 144 116 181 144 FG3200 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Fixed 81 65 162 130 203 162 FG3225 350–700 63 51 126 101 158 126 JG3175W 5 350–700 63 51 126 101 158 126 JG3175 4 350–700 72 58 144 116 181 144 JG3200W 5 350–700 72 58 144 116 181 144 JG3200 4 350–700 81 65 162 130 203 162 JG3225W 5 350–700 81 65 162 130 203 162 JG3225 4 350–700 90 72 181 144 226 181 JG3250W 5 350–700 90 72 181 144 226 181 JG3250 4 500–1000 108 87 217 173 271 217 KG3300W 5 500–1000 108 87 217 173 271 217 KG3300 4 500–1000 126 101 253 202 316 253 KG3350W 5 500–1000 126 101 253 202 316 253 KG3350 4 1000–2000 144 116 289 231 361 289 KG3400 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Breaker continuous current is based on 115% of the generator full load ampere rating. 2 Based on three-phase generators at 80% power factor. 3 FG, JG, KG include thermal-magnetic trip units, LG and NG include electronic trip units. 4 Breaker includes line and load terminals. 5 Without terminals. 2 2 2 The following catalog numbers have center tap studs for dual voltage applications: JG3070CT, JG3100CT, JG3125CT, KG3175CT, LG3300CTW. 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-357 2.6 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Electronic Engine Generator Breaker 3 Maximum Generator Rating 60 Hz Magnetic Pickup Range 240 Vac kVA 1 kW 2 kVA 1 kW 2 kVA 1 kW 2 Catalog Number 500–2500 162 130 325 260 406 325 LG3450 4 2 500–2500 181 144 361 289 451 361 LG3500 4 2 500–2500 217 173 433 347 542 433 LG3600 4 500–2500 253 202 505 404 632 505 NG3700 4 2 500–2500 289 231 578 462 722 578 NG3800 4 1250–5000 325 260 650 520 812 650 NG3900 4 2 1250–5000 361 289 722 578 903 722 NG31000 4 1250–5000 433 347 867 693 1083 867 NG31200 4 2 2 2 2 480 Vac 600 Vac Notes 1 Breaker continuous current is based on 115% of the generator full load ampere rating. 2 Based on three-phase generators at 80% power factor. 3 FG, JG, KG include thermal-magnetic trip units, LG and NG include electronic trip units. 4 Breaker includes line and load terminals. The following catalog numbers have center tap studs for dual voltage applications: JG3070CT, JG3100CT, JG3125CT, KG3175CT, LG3300CTW. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-358 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information Options and Accessories Enclosures Type 1 General Purpose Standard Terminals ● ● ● Surface or flush mounting 15–1200 ampere range 600 Vac, 500 Vdc Type 1 enclosed breakers are designed for use in commercial buildings, apartment buildings and other areas where a general purpose enclosure is applicable. The breaker is front operable and is capable of being padlocked in either the ON or OFF position. Ratings through 1200 amperes are listed with Underwriters Laboratories as approved for service entrance application. Both surface and flush mounted enclosures are available. Type 3R Rainproof Surface Mounting ● ● ● Interchangeable hubs (through 400 amperes) 15–1200 ampere range 600 Vac, 500 Vdc This general purpose outdoor service center employs a circuit breaker inside a weatherproof sheet steel breaker enclosure to serve as a main disconnect and protective device for feeder circuits. Ratings through 1200 amperes are listed by Underwriters Laboratories as suitable for service entrance application. Type 12 Dustproof Surface Mounting ● ● ● No knockouts or other openings 15–1200 ampere range 600 Vac, 500 Vdc The Type 12 enclosure is designed in line with specifications for special industry applications where unusually severe conditions involving oil, coolant, dust and other foreign materials exist in the operating atmosphere. The handle padlocks in the OFF position and the cover is interlocked with the handle mechanism to prevent opening the cover with the circuit breaker in the ON position. Ratings through 1200 amperes are listed by Underwriters Laboratories as suitable for service entrance application. Breaker Frame Amperes FG 15–225 JG 175–250 KG 300–400 LG 450–600 NG 700–1200 Enclosure Type Class Catalog Number Type 1 SFDN225 Type 3R RFDN225 Type 12 JFDN225 Type 1 SJDN250 Type 3R RJDN250 Type 12 JJDN250 Type 1 SKDN400 Type 3R RKDN400 Type 12 JKDN400 Type 1 SLDN600 Type 3R RLDN600 Type 12 JLDN600 Type 1 SNDN1200 Type 3R RNDN1200 Type 12 JNDN1200 2 Breaker Frame Max. Amp Rating AWG Wire Range Metric Wire Range mm2 Catalog Number FG 100 14–1/0 2.5–50 3T100FB 1 FG 150 4–4/0 25–95 3TA225FD 1 JG 250 4–350 kcmil 25–185 TA250KB KG 350 250–500 kcmil 120–240 TA350K KG 400 3/0–250 kcmil (2) 95–120 3TA400K 1 LG 600 250–500 kcmil (2) 120–240 3TA603LDK NG 700 1–500 kcmil (2) 50–300 TA700NB1 NG 1000 3/0–400 kcmil (3) 95–185 TA1000NB1 NG 1200 4/0–500 kcmil (4) 120–300 TA1200NB1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Neutral Kits, Insulated and Groundable Max. Enclosure Rating (Amperes) Main Lug Number Size Cu/Al Ground Lug Size Cu/Al Catalog Number 2 100 (1) 14–1/0 (1) 14–1/0 INK100 250 (1) 6–350 kcmil (1) 4–300 kcmil INK250 2 400 (1) 4–750 kcmil or (2) 1/0–250 kcmil (1) 4–300 kcmil INK400 2 600 (2) 250–500 kcmil (1) 4–300 kcmil INK600 1200 (3) 1/0 to 750 kcmil or (4) 1/0 to 750 kcmil (1) 6–250 kcmil INK1200 2 2 Auxiliary Switch 2 1A-1B Factory Mounted 2 2 Internal Accessories Breaker Frame Enclosure Selection Data 2.6 2A-2B Field Kit Catalog Number Factory Mounted Field Kit Catalog Number FG 3 A06 A1X1PK A13 A2X1RPK JG A06 A1X2PK A13 A2X2PK KG A06 A1X3PK A13 A2X3PK LG A06 A1X4PK A13 A2X4PK NG A06 A1X5PK A13 A2X5PK Shunt Trip 2 Breaker Frame Rating Factory Mounted Field Kit Catalog Number FG 3 12–24 Vdc S02 SNT1LP03K JG 12–24 Vdc S42 SNT2P04K KG 12–24 Vdc S42 SNT3P04K LG 12–24 Vdc S02 SNT4LP03K NG 12–24 Vdc S02 SNT5LP03K Notes 1 Package of three terminals. 2 Other accessories are available. Same as standard frame breakers. 3 Field installation on the FG Frame is not UL listed. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-359 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2 Technical Data and Specifications 2 UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) 240 18,000 480 14,000 2 600 10,000 2 IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) 220, 240 18,000/ 9,000 380, 415 14,000/ 7,000 660, 690 18,000/ 9,000 14,000/ 7,000 10,000/5,000 Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 Enclosure Selection Data 2 Breaker Frame Amperes 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Enclosure Type Class FG 15–225 JG 175–250 KG 300–400 LG 450–600 NG 700–1200 2 2 2 A B C D E Approx. Weight Lbs (kg) Conduit Sizes, Inches Type 1 23.25 (590.6) 8.41 (213.6) 6.28 (159.5) 18.75 (476.3) 1.20 (30.5) 15 (7) 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 1, 1.25, 1.50, 2, 2.50 SFDN225 Type 3R 25.66 (651.8) 8.84 (224.7) 9.31 (236.5) 24.28 (616.7) 1.70 (43.2) 19 (9) 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 1, 1.25, 1.50, 2, 2.50 RFDN225 Type 12 25.66 (651.8) 8.84 (224.7) 9.31 (236.5) 24.28 (616.7) 1.70 (43.2) 18 (8) — JFDN225 Type 1 34.70 (881.4) 10.92 (277.4) 7.20 (182.9) 30.00 (762.0) 1.88 (47.8) 31 (14) 0.25, 0.50, 2, 2.50, 3 SJDN250 Type 3R 37.50 (952.5) 11.56 (293.6) 10.22 (259.6) 35.77 (908.6) 1.94 (49.3) 40 (18) 0.25, 0.50, 2, 2.50, 3 RJDN250 Type 12 37.53 (953.3) 11.56 (293.6) 10.22 (259.6) 35.77 (908.6) 1.94 (49.3) 37 (17) — JJDN250 Type 1 38.81 (985.8) 11.06 (280.9) 10.94 (277.9) 34.00 (863.6) 2.28 (57.9) 53 (24) 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 1.50, 2, 2.50, 3, 3.50 SKDN400 Type 3R 41.69 (1058.9) 11.75 (298.5) 14.06 (357.1) 39.90 (1013.5) 1.97 (50.0) 60 (27) 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 2.50, 3, 3.50 RKDN400 Type 12 41.69 (1058.9) 11.75 (298.5) 14.06 (357.1) 39.90 (1013.5) 1.97 (50.0) 53 (24) — JKDN400 Type 1 45.88 (1165.4) 14.31 (363.5) 12.38 (314.5) 46.56 (1182.6) 1.91 (48.5) 81 (37) 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 3, 3.50, 4 SLDN600 Type 3R 48.31 (1227.1) 14.91 (378.7) 15.50 (393.7) 46.56 (1182.6) 1.92 (48.8) 84 (38) 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 3, 3.50, 4 RLDN600 Type 12 48.31 (1227.1) 14.91 (378.7) 15.50 (393.7) 46.56 (1182.6) 1.92 (48.8) 81 (37) — JLDN600 Type 1 61.22 (1555.0) 21.44 (544.6) 15.41 (391.4) 61.84 (1570.7) 1.97 (50.0) 178 (81) — SNDN1200 Type 3R 63.59 (1615.2) 22.00 (558.8) 17.63 (447.8) 61.84 (1570.7) 1.97 (50.0) 175 (79) — RNDN1200 Type 12 63.59 (1615.2) 22.00 (558.8) 17.63 (447.8) 61.84 (1570.7) 1.97 (50.0) 170 (77) — JNDN1200 Type 1 Surface Mounted Type 3R Rainproof E E B 2 2 Type 12, 12K Dustproof E C C 2 2 C ON A D 2 A D D ON OFF OFF A B B 2 V4-T2-360 Catalog Number Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2.6 Contents Direct Current Circuit Breakers Description Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Current Circuit Breakers Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2 Mining Service Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . Classic Mining Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR . . . . PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page V4-T2-355 V4-T2-363 V4-T2-364 V4-T2-371 V4-T2-372 V4-T2-373 V4-T2-374 V4-T2-397 V4-T2-411 V4-T2-414 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Direct Current Circuit Breakers 2 Product Description DC (direct current) systems and applications are becoming commonplace as alternative energy sources have expanded and the number of DC devices and data centers using DC power has swelled. Eaton offers molded case circuit breakers and switches to meet circuit protection and switching requirements for a host of different DC end use requirements. Applications include UPS battery supply circuits, solar systems and electric vehicle charging, as well as commercial and industrial distribution. Current ratings are available from 15 to 2500A, with a full scale of voltage and interrupting ratings to address needs ranging from standard to the highest performance. Optional internal accessories provide remote tripping and indication of breaker status. The DC breaker family is UL 489 listed and exceeds the requirements in UL 489 Supplement SC for UPS applications. Eaton breakers may be applied in both ungrounded and select grounded applications, with poles connected in series to operate at the maximum voltages shown on Page V4-T2-362. To use DC circuit breakers on 600V grounded systems, three poles in series must be connected on the ungrounded leg. The HFDDC through HMDLDC DC breakers use the same internal and external accessories as their Series C or Series G AC frame equivalents. NBDC and PBDC use the same internal and external accessories as standard NB and PB breakers. 2 2 2 2 2 Many of the Eaton AC molded case circuit breakers carry 250 Vdc ratings for ungrounded systems. Refer to Pages V4-T2-9 and V4-T2-123 for these interrupting tables. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-361 2.6 2 2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Quick Reference Direct Current Circuit Breakers UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings Interrupting Capacity (kA) Volts DC 1 Circuit Breaker Type Maximum Amperes 125 Poles in Series 250 2 Poles in Series 500 600 Poles in Series 750 2 Poles in Series EGEDC 100 10 1 35 2 35 — 3 — — 2 EGSDC 100 35 1 42 2 50 — 3 — — EGHDC 100 42 1 50 2 65 — 3 — — 2 HFDDC 225 42 1 50 2 — 42 3 42 4 2 JGEDC 250 35 1 35 2 — 35 3 — — JGSDC 250 42 1 42 2 — 50 3 — — 2 JGHDC 250 50 1 50 2 — 65 3 — — HJDDC 250 42 1 50 2 — 42 3 — — 2 HKDDC 400 42 1 50 2 — 42 3 — — LGEDC 600 22 1 22 2 — 35 3 — — 2 LGSDC 600 22 1 22 2 — 50 3 — — 2 LGHDC 600 50 1 50 2 — 65 3 — — HLDDC 600 42 1 50 2 — 35 3 — — 2 HLDDC 3 1200 42 1 50 2 — — — — — HMDLDC 800 42 1 50 2 — 35 3 — — 2 NBDC 1200 42 1 50 2 — 50 3 — — PBDC 2500 42 1 65 2 — 65 3 — — Ics Poles in Series Icu Ics Poles in Series Icu Ics 2 2 2 IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings Circuit Breaker Type Maximum Amperes 125 Volts DC Icu 250 Volts DC 600 Volts DC Poles in Series EGEDC 100 10 10 1 10 10 2 — — — EGSDC 100 35 35 1 35 35 2 — — — EGHDC 100 42 42 1 42 42 2 — — — 2 JGEDC 250 22 22 1 22 22 2 — — — 2 JGSDC 250 22 22 1 22 22 2 — — — JGHDC 250 42 42 1 42 42 2 — — — HJDDC 250 — — — — — — 20 10 3 LGEDC 600 22 22 1 22 22 2 — — — LGSDC 600 22 22 1 22 22 2 — — — LGHDC 600 42 42 1 42 42 2 — — — HLDDC 600 — — — — — — 20 10 3 HMDLDC 800 — — — — — — 20 10 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. Time constants per UL 489. 2 EGEDC through HMDLDC have been tested up to 300 Vdc to allow for battery charging voltages. 750 Vdc is common in transportation applications. HFDDC, four-pole 750 Vdc is available up to 150A maximum. 300 Vdc and 750 Vdc are not UL 489 listed voltage ratings. 3 Four-pole frame with two-poles connected in parallel. See Page V4-T2-372 for series connection diagrams. Use NEC rated cable to connect/short poles in series as shown. 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-362 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2.6 Catalog Number Selection 2 DC Circuit Breaker 2 HFDDC 3 150 W Frame EGEDC = Series G—E (100A max.) EGSDC = Series G—E (100A max.) EGHDC = Series G—E (100A max.) HFDDC = Series C—F (225A max.) JGEDC = Series G—J (250A max.) JGSDC = Series G—J (250A max.) JGHDC = Series G—J (250A max.) HJDDC = Series C—J (250A max.) HKDDC = Series C—K (400A max.) LGEDC = Series G—L (600A max.) LGSDC = Series G—L (600A max.) LGHDC = Series G—L (600A max.) HLDDC = Series C—L (1200A max.) HMDLDC = Series C—M (800A max.) NBDC = NB (1200A max.) PBDC = PB (2500A max.) Number of Poles 1 = Single-pole 2 = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole Trip Unit Ampere Rating 015 = 15A 020 = 20A 025 = 25A 030 = 30A 035 = 35A 040 = 40A 045 = 45A 050 = 50A 060 = 60A 070 = 70A 080 = 80A 090 = 90A 100 = 100A 110 = 110A 125 = 125A 150 = 150A 175 = 175A 200 = 200A 225 = 225A 250 = 250A 300 = 300A 350 = 350A 400 = 400A 450 = 450A 500 = 500A 600 = 600A 700 = 700A 800 = 800A 900 = 900A 1000 = 1000A 1200 = 1200A 1600 = 1600A 2000 = 2000A 2500 = 2500A 2 Suffix Series C, NB and PB Frames K = Molded case switch L = Line and load terminals, F-Frame MW = 135% magnetic trip unit, without terminals W = Without terminals Series G Frames FFG = Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic trip unit, with terminals FFW = Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic trip unit, without terminals FAG = Fixed thermal, adjustable magnetic trip unit, with terminals FAW = Fixed thermal, adjustable magnetic trip unit, without terminals KSG = Molded case switch, with terminals KSW = Molded case switch, without terminals 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-363 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2 Product Selection 2 Type EGEDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 500 Vdc 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Complete Circuit Breaker Complete Circuit Breaker with Terminals without Terminals Catalog Number 25 30 Type EGHDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 65 kAIC at 500 Vdc Complete Circuit Breaker Complete Circuit Breaker with Terminals without Terminals Catalog Number Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number EGEDC3025FFG EGEDC3025FFW 25 EGHDC3025FFG EGHDC3025FFW EGEDC3030FFG EGEDC3030FFW 30 EGHDC3030FFG EGHDC3030FFW 2 35 EGEDC3035FFG EGEDC3035FFW 35 EGHDC3035FFG EGHDC3035FFW 40 EGEDC3040FFG EGEDC3040FFW 40 EGHDC3040FFG EGHDC3040FFW 2 45 EGEDC3045FFG EGEDC3045FFW 45 EGHDC3045FFG EGHDC3045FFW 50 EGEDC3050FFG EGEDC3050FFW 50 EGHDC3050FFG EGHDC3050FFW 2 60 EGEDC3060FFG EGEDC3060FFW 60 EGHDC3060FFG EGHDC3060FFW 2 70 EGEDC3070FFG EGEDC3070FFW 70 EGHDC3070FFG EGHDC3070FFW 80 EGEDC3080FFG EGEDC3080FFW 80 EGHDC3080FFG EGHDC3080FFW 2 90 EGEDC3090FFG EGEDC3090FFW 90 EGHDC3090FFG EGHDC3090FFW 100 EGEDC3100FFG EGEDC3100FFW 100 EGHDC3100FFG EGHDC3100FFW 2 2 2 2 Type EGSDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 500 Vdc Complete Circuit Breaker Complete Circuit Breaker with Terminals without Terminals Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Catalog Number Catalog Number 25 EGSDC3025FFG EGSDC3025FFW 2 30 EGSDC3030FFG EGSDC3030FFW 35 EGSDC3035FFG EGSDC3035FFW 2 40 EGSDC3040FFG EGSDC3040FFW 2 45 EGSDC3045FFG EGSDC3045FFW 50 EGSDC3050FFG EGSDC3050FFW 2 60 EGSDC3060FFG EGSDC3060FFW 70 EGSDC3070FFG EGSDC3070FFW 2 80 EGSDC3080FFG EGSDC3080FFW 90 EGSDC3090FFG EGSDC3090FFW 100 EGSDC3100FFG EGSDC3100FFW 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-364 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers HFDDC Type HFDDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 42 kAIC at 600 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 Complete Circuit Breaker with Line and Load Terminals 1 2 Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 15 HFDDC1015L HFDDC2015L HFDDC3015L HFDDC4015L 20 HFDDC1020L HFDDC2020L HFDDC3020L HFDDC4020L 2 25 HFDDC1025L HFDDC2025L HFDDC3025L HFDDC4025L 30 HFDDC1030L HFDDC2030L HFDDC3030L HFDDC4030L 35 HFDDC1035L HFDDC2035L HFDDC3035L HFDDC4035L 40 HFDDC1040L HFDDC2040L HFDDC3040L HFDDC4040L 45 HFDDC1045L HFDDC2045L HFDDC3045L HFDDC4045L 50 HFDDC1050L HFDDC2050L HFDDC3050L HFDDC4050L 60 HFDDC1060L HFDDC2060L HFDDC3060L HFDDC4060L 70 HFDDC1070L HFDDC2070L HFDDC3070L HFDDC4070L 80 HFDDC1080L HFDDC2080L HFDDC3080L HFDDC4080L 90 HFDDC1090L HFDDC2090L HFDDC3090L HFDDC4090L 100 HFDDC1100L HFDDC2100L HFDDC3100L HFDDC4100L 110 HFDDC1110L HFDDC2110L HFDDC3110L HFDDC4110L 125 HFDDC1125L HFDDC2125L HFDDC3125L HFDDC4125L 150 HFDDC1150L HFDDC2150L HFDDC3150L HFDDC4150L 175 — HFDDC2175L HFDDC3175L — 200 — HFDDC2200L HFDDC3200L — 225 — HFDDC2225L HFDDC3225L — 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Type JGEDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 600 Vdc 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Complete Breaker Circuit Breaker Frame Only 2 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Standard Terminals Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 70 JGEDC3070FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3070FA T250FJ 90 JGEDC3090FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3090FA T250FJ 100 JGEDC3100FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3100FA T250FJ 125 JGEDC3125FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3125FA T250FJ 150 JGEDC3150FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3150FA T250FJ 175 JGEDC3175FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3175FA T250FJ 200 JGEDC3200FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3200FA T250FJ 225 JGEDC3225FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3225FA T250FJ 250 JGEDC3250FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3250FA T250FJ 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 For breaker without terminals, replace "L" with "W" at end of catalog number. 2 For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation. 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-365 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2 Type JGSDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 600 Vdc 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Complete Breaker Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Standard Terminals Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 70 JGSDC3070FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3070FA T250FJ 90 JGSDC3090FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3090FA T250FJ 2 100 JGSDC3100FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3100FA T250FJ 125 JGSDC3125FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3125FA T250FJ 2 150 JGSDC3150FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3150FA T250FJ 2 175 JGSDC3175FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3175FA T250FJ 200 JGSDC3200FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3200FA T250FJ 225 JGSDC3225FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3225FA T250FJ 250 JGSDC3250FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3250FA T250FJ 2 2 2 2 JGHDC3250NN Type JGHDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 65 kAIC at 600 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Complete Breaker Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Standard Terminals Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 70 JGHDC3070FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3070FA T250FJ 90 JGHDC3090FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3090FA T250FJ 2 100 JGHDC3100FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3100FA T250FJ 125 JGHDC3125FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3125FA T250FJ 2 150 JGHDC3150FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3150FA T250FJ 2 175 JGHDC3175FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3175FA T250FJ 200 JGHDC3200FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3200FA T250FJ 225 JGHDC3225FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3225FA T250FJ 250 JGHDC3250FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3250FA T250FJ 2 2 2 2 2 HJDDC3250 2 2 2 2 2 Type HJDDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 42 kAIC at 600 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Standard Terminals Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 70 HJDDC3250F JT3070T TA250KB 90 HJDDC3250F JT3090T TA250KB 100 HJDDC3250F JT3100T TA250KB 125 HJDDC3250F JT3125T TA250KB 150 HJDDC3250F JT3150T TA250KB TA250KB 175 HJDDC3250F JT3175T 200 HJDDC3250F JT3200T TA250KB 2 225 HJDDC3250F JT3225T TA250KB 250 HJDDC3250F JT3250T TA250KB 2 Note 1 For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation. 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-366 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers HKDDC3400 Type HKDDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 42 kAIC at 600 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Standard Terminals 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 100 HKDDC3400F KT3100T TA300K 125 HKDDC3400F KT3125T TA300K 2 150 HKDDC3400F KT3150T TA300K 175 HKDDC3400F KT3175T TA300K 200 HKDDC3400F KT3200T TA300K 225 HKDDC3400F KT3225T TA300K 250 HKDDC3400F KT3250T TA350K 300 HKDDC3400F KT3300T TA350K 350 HKDDC3400F KT3350T TA350K 400 LGEDC3630NN 2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1 HKDDC3400F KT3400T 3TA400K 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Type LGEDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 600 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Complete Breaker Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Standard Terminals Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 250 LGEDC3250FAG LGEDC3630NN LT3250FA TA350LK 300 LGEDC3300FAG LGEDC3630NN LT3300FA TA350LK 350 LGEDC3350FAG LGEDC3630NN LT3350FA TA350LK 400 LGEDC3400FAG LGEDC3630NN LT3400FA TA350LK 500 LGEDC3500FAG LGEDC3630NN LT4500FA 3TA632LK 2 600 LGEDC3600FAG LGEDC3630NN LT3600FA 3TA632LK 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Type LGSDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 600 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Complete Breaker Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Standard Terminals Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 250 LGSDC3250FAG LGSDC3630NN LT3250FA TA350LK 300 LGSDC3300FAG LGSDC3630NN LT3300FA TA350LK 350 LGSDC3350FAG LGSDC3630NN LT3350FA TA350LK 400 LGSDC3400FAG LGSDC3630NN LT3400FA TA350LK 500 LGSDC3500FAG LGSDC3630NN LT4500FA 3TA632LK 2 600 LGSDC3600FAG LGSDC3630NN LT3600FA 3TA632LK 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation. 2 Three-pole kit. 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-367 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2 Type LGHDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 65 kAIC at 600 Vdc 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Complete Breaker Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Standard Terminals Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 250 LGHDC3250FAG LGHDC3630NN LT3250FA TA350LK 300 LGHDC3300FAG LGHDC3630NN LT3300FA TA350LK 2 350 LGHDC3350FAG LGHDC3630NN LT3350FA TA350LK 400 LGHDC3400FAG LGHDC3630NN LT3400FA TA350LK 500 LGHDC3500FAG LGHDC3630NN LT4500FA 3TA632LK 2 600 LGHDC3600FAG LGHDC3630NN LT3600FA 3TA632LK 2 2 2 2 2 HLDDC 2 Type HLDDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 600 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Standard Terminals Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 300 HLDDC3600F LT3300T TA602LD 350 HLDDC3600F LT3350T TA602LD 2 400 HLDDC3600F LT3400T TA602LD 2 450 HLDDC3600F LT3450T TA602LD 500 HLDDC3600F LT3500T TA602LD 2 600 HLDDC3600F LT3600T 3TA603LDK 2 2 2 2 Type HLDDC DC Circuit Breakers— Two-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 250 Vdc 34 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Complete Breaker 600 HLDDC20600 2 700 HLDDC20700 800 HLDDC20800 2 900 HLDDC20900 1000 HLDDC21000 1200 HLDDC21200 2 2 2 Catalog Number Notes 1 For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation. 2 Three-pole kit. 3 Includes breaker frame, trip unit and terminals. 4 Four-pole breaker with two poles wired in parellel. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-368 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers HMDLDC3800F Type HMDLDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 600 Vdc 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Standard Terminals 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 300 HMDLDC3800F MT3300T TA700MA1 350 HMDLDC3800F MT3350T TA700MA1 2 400 HMDLDC3800F MT3400T TA700MA1 450 HMDLDC3800F MT3450T TA700MA1 500 HMDLDC3800F MT3500T TA700MA1 600 HMDLDC3800F MT3600T TA700MA1 700 HMDLDC3800F MT3700T TA700MA1 800 HMDLDC3800F MT3800T TA800MA2 2 2 2 2 2 Type NBDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 600 Vdc 2 Standard Terminals Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Complete Circuit Breaker Factory Assembled without Terminals 2 Catalog Number Includes Magnetic Trip Unit Calibrated at 135% Catalog Number 700 NBDC3700MW Included TA1000NB1 800 NBDC3800MW Included TA1000NB1 900 NBDC3900MW Included TA1000NB1 1000 NBDC31000MW Included TA1000NB1 1200 NBDC31200MW Included TA1200NB1 2 2 2 2 2 2 Type PBDC DC Circuit Breakers— Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 65 kAIC at 600 Vdc Complete Circuit Breaker Factory Assembled without Terminals 2 2 Standard Rear Connectors Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Catalog Number Includes Magnetic Trip Unit Calibrated at 135% Catalog Number 1600 PBDC31600W Included BA2000PB 2000 PBDC32000W Included BA2000PB 2500 PBDC32500W Included BA2500PB 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Includes frame and trip unit. Order terminals or connectors separately. 2 For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-369 2.6 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Specialty Breakers DC Breaker Terminal Wire Ranges Breaker Frame Maximum Breaker Ampacity Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG Wire Range/ Number of Conductors Metric Wire Range mm2 Number of Terminals Included Standard Terminal Catalog Number EGEDC, EGSDC, EGHDC 100 Aluminum Cu/Al 14–1/0 2.5–50 3 3TA125EF HFDDC 20 Steel Cu/Al 14–10 (1) 2.5–4 (1) 3 3T20FB 100 Steel Cu/Al 14–1/0 (1) 2.5–50 (1) 3 3T100FB 225 Aluminum Cu/Al 4–4/0 (1) 25–95 (1) 3 3TA225FD JGEDC, JGSDC, JGHDC 250 Stainless steel Cu 4–350 (1) 25–185 (1) 1 T250FJ HJDDC 250 Aluminum Cu/Al 4–350 kcmil (1) 25–185 (1) 1 TA250KB HKDDC 225 Aluminum Cu/Al 3–350 kcmil (1) 35–185 (1) 1 TA300K 350 Aluminum Cu/Al 250–500 kcmil (1) 120–240 (1) 1 TA350K 400 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–250 kcmil (2) 95–120 (1) 3 3TA400K 400 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 (1) 35–240 (1) 1 TA350LK 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers LGEDC, LGSDC, LGHDC HLDDC HMDLDC NBDC 2 2 630 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 kcmil (2) 35–240 (2) 1 TA632L 630 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 kcmil (2) 35–240 (2) 3 3TA632LK 500 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–350 kcmil (2) 95–150 (2) 1 TA602LD 600 Aluminum Cu/Al 400–500 kcmil (2) 185–240 (2) 3 3TA603LDK 600 Aluminum Cu/Al 1–500 kcmil (2) — 1 TA700MA1 800 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 kcmil (3) — 1 TA800MA2 700 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 kcmil (3) 95–185 (3) 1 TA1000NB1 800 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 kcmil (3) 95–185 (3) 1 TA1000NB1 900 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 kcmil (3) 95–185 (3) 1 TA1000NB1 1000 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 kcmil (3) 95–185 (3) 1 TA1000NB1 1200 Aluminum Cu/Al 4/0–500 kcmil (4) 120–240 (4) 1 TA1200NB1 2 2 2 2 2 Molded Case Switches Eaton’s DC molded case switches are used in applications requiring a compact, high-capacity disconnect. They are UL 489 listed and have automatic high instantaneous current protection. These devices do not provide overload protection. Molded Case Switches Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C With Line and Load Terminals Without Line and Load Terminals Interrupting Capacity (Volts DC) Poles in Series Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 600 Vdc Maximum 2 100 42 3 HFDDC3100KL HFDDC3100KW 150 42 3 HFDDC3150KL HFDDC3150KW 225 42 3 HFDDC3225KL HFDDC3225KW 250 65 3 JGKDC3250KSG JGKDC3250KSW 250 42 3 HJDDC3250K HJDDC3250KW 400 35 3 HKDDC3400K HKDDC3400KW 65 3 LGKDC3400KSG LGKDC3400KSW 65 3 LGKDC3630KSG LGKDC3630KSW 35 3 HLDDC3600K HLDDC3600WK 35 3 HMDLDC3800K HMDLDC3800WK 65 3 EGK3100KSG EGK3100KSW 2 2 2 2 2 600 800 500 Vdc Maximum 100 2 250 Vdc Maximum 2 100 50 2 HFDDC2100KL HFDDC2100KW 150 50 2 HFDDC2150KL HFDDC2150KW 225 50 2 HFDDC2225KL HFDDC2225KW 1200 50 1 HLDDC21200K 1 HLDDC21200WK 1 2 2 Note 1 Four-pole frame with two-pole connected in parallel. 2 2 V4-T2-370 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2.6 Accessories 2 Internal Accessories 2 Field Installation Kits 2 JGEDC, JGSDC, JGHDC Description Factory Installation (HFDDC) 2 HFDDC 1 EGEDC, EGSDC, EGHDC LGEDC, LGSDC, LGHDC HJDDC HKDDC HLDDC HMDLDC NBDC PBDC Right-Pole Mounting 2 2 Auxiliary switch 1A-1B A06 A1X1PK AUX1A1BPK AUX1A1BPK A1X2PK A1X3PK A1X4PK A1X4PK 4980D16G05 2602D32G14 2A-2B A13 A2X1RPK AUX2A2BPK AUX2A2BPK A2X2PK A2X3PK A2X4PK A2X4PK 4980D16G06 2602D32G15 2 B06 A1L1RPK ALM1M1BEPK ALM1M1BJPK A1L2RPK A1L3RPK A1L4RPK A1L4RPK — — 2 AAL1RPK AUXALRMEPK AUXALRMJPK AAL2RPK AAL3RPK AA114RPK AA114RPK — — 2 Alarm switch 1 make/1 break Auxiliary and alarm combo 1A-1B, 1 make/1 break C05 2 Left-Pole Mounting Shunt trip 12 Vdc S02 SNT1LP03K SNT012CPK SNT012CPK SNT2P04K SNT3P04K SNT4LP03K SNT4LP03K 2606D58G14 2606D59G28 24 Vdc S02 SNT1LP03K SNT060CPK SNT060CPK SNT2P04K SNT3P04K SNT4LP03K SNT4LP03K 2606D58G13 2606D59G27 48 Vdc S06 SNT1LP08K SNT060CPK SNT060CPK SNT2P06K SNT3P06K SNT4LP23K SNT4LP23K 2606D58G12 2606D59G26 60 Vdc S06 SNT1LP08K SNT060CPK SNT060CPK SNT2P06K SNT3P06K SNT4LP23K SNT4LP23K 2606D58G11 2606D59G25 125 Vdc S10 SNT1LP12K SNT120CPK SNT120CPK SNT2P11K SNT3P11K SNT4LP26K SNT4LP26K 2606D58G10 2606D59G24 250 Vdc S14 SNT1LP18K — — SNT2P14K SNT3P14K SNT4LP14K SNT4LP14K 2606D58G09 2606D59G23 120 Vac S06 SNT1LP12K SNT120CPK SNT120CPK SNT2P11K SNT3P11K SNT4LP11K SNT4LP11K 2060D58G05 2060D59G19 12 Vdc U30 UVH1LP20K UVR012DPK UVR012DPK UVH2LP20K UVH3LP20K UVH4LP20K UVH4LP20K 372D032G06 4976D85G11 24 Vdc U34 UVH1LP21K UVR024DPK UVR024DPK UVH2LP21K UVH3LP21K UVH4LP21K UVH4LP21K 372D032G07 4976D85G12 48 Vdc U38 UVH1LP22K UVR048DPK UVR048DPK UVH2LP22K UVH3LP22K UVH4LP22K UVH4LP22K 372D032G08 4976D85G13 125 Vdc U42 UVH1LP26K UVR125DPK UVR125DPK UVH2LP26K UVH3LP26K UVH4LP26K UVH4LP26K 372D032G09 4976D85G17 250 Vdc U46 UVH1LP28K UVR250DPK UVR250DPK UVH2LP28K UVH3LP28K UVH4LP28K UVH4LP28K 372D032G10 4976D85G18 120 Vac U14 UVH1LP08K UVR120APK UVR120APK UVH2LP08K UVH3LP08K UVH4LP08K UVH4LP08K 373D632G05 5674D29G01 Undervoltage release Note 1 F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 One accessory can be mounted per pole, per breaker. Factory installation of accessories is available. Contact Eaton for assistance with part number configuration. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-371 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2 Wiring Diagrams 2 Series Connection Diagrams for DC Application 12 2 250 Vdc Maximum—Two Poles in Series 2 2 2 2 Load 2 2 2 2 Load (A) Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded systems that have one end of load (A) connected to grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection. Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only. 500 Vdc or 600 Vdc Maximum—Three Poles in Series 2 Load 2 2 2 2 2 2 Load (A) Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded systems that have one end of load (A) connected to grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection. Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only. 2 2 750 Vdc Maximum—Four Poles in Series 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Load Load (A) Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded systems that have one end of load (A) connected to grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection. Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only. Notes 1 Poles in series connection is customer supplied. Use rated cable per NEC. 2 For grounded systems, all poles in series must be connected on non-grounded terminal, with load connected to grounded terminal. 2 2 V4-T2-372 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2.6 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 DC Breaker Dimensions 2 Frame Number of Poles Width Height Depth EGEDC, EGSDC, EGHDC 3 3.00 (76.2) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9) HFDDC 1 1.38 (35.1) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0) 2 2.75 (70.0) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0) 3 4.13 (105.0) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0) 4 5.50 (139.7) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0) JGEDC, JGSDC, JGHDC 3 4.13 (104.9) 7.00 (177.8) 3.57 (90.7) HJDDC 2, 3 4.13 (105.0) 10.00 (254.0) 4.06 (103.1) HKDDC 2, 3 5.50 (139.7) 10.13 (257.3) 4.10 (104.1) LGEDC, LGSDC, LGHDC 3 5.48 (139.2) 10.13 (257.3) 4.09 (103.9) 600A Max. HLDDC 2, 3 8.25 (209.6) 10.75 (273.1) 4.06 (103.1) 1200A Max. HLDDC 4 11.00 (279.4) 10.75 (273.1) 4.06 (103.1) HMDLDC 2, 3 8.25 (209.6) 16.00 (406.4) 4.06 (103.1) NBDC 3 8.25 (209.6) 16.00 (406.4) 5.50 (139.7) PBDC 3 12.06 (306.3) 22.06 (560.3) 9.06 (230.1) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-373 2.6 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Contents E2 Mining Service Breakers Description 2 Page Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Current Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2 Mining Service Breakers Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Classic Mining Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR . . . . PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-355 V4-T2-361 V4-T2-378 V4-T2-394 V4-T2-397 V4-T2-411 V4-T2-414 2 2 2 2 2 E2 Mining Service Breakers 2 Product Overview 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 State-of-the-art E2 mining service breakers incorporate the rigid specifications and testing procedures developed by a focus group led by engineers from several large coal companies and Eaton design engineers. Additionally, the performance of these breakers was proven and verified during hundreds of hours of field testing in harsh mine environments. E2 mining breakers are available in 600 Vac and l000Y/ 577 Vac. Interchangeable trip units can be used on either 600 or 1000 Vac frames. The E2 mining breaker family is designed especially for trailing cable application per MSHA 30 CFR 75. Field interchangeable electronic rms sensing trip units are available from 150 to 2000 amperes with instantaneous pickup settings conforming to the code of Federal Regulations 30 CFR 75.601-2. Electromechanical trip units are also available with a wide range of magnetic pickup ranges. 2 2 E2 electronic trip units are the first to provide the mining industry with true rms sensing, made possible by the custom ASIC microprocessor in each electronic trip unit. E2 breakers are designed to be physically and electrically interchangeable with Classic Mining Service Breakers and supersede Series C® Mining Service Breakers. The table to the right outlines direct replacements. 600 Vac Mining Breaker Replacement Chart 1000 Vac Mining Breaker Replacement Chart Classic Series C E2 FBM FDBM E2F HFM — E2FM HFBM FDM E2F — JDCM E2JM HFDM (mag. only) E2F HKAM KDCM E2KM JDM E2J HLAM LDCM E2LM KDM E2K HLCM LDCM E2LM KDM E2K HMAM — E2MM LDM E2L HMCM — E2MM LAMH LDM E2L HNBM — E2NM LCM LDM E2L HNBMH — E2NM LCMH LDM E2L HNCM — E2NM — E2M HLCLM — E2NM — E2M HPBM — E2RM 1 MCM — E2M MCMH — E2M NBM — E2N NBMH — E2N NCM — E2N NCMH — E2N — KAM KAMH LAM MAM MAMH Classic Series C E2M Additional Information on Mining Breakers Source Description TD01217001E E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Dimensional Data BR01217001E E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Brochure TC01217001E E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Time Current Curves www.eaton.com/mining Mining and Metals Note 1 E2R/E2RM is a new frame physically different than the HPBM. See DS29-170MS. 2 V4-T2-374 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Eaton’s mining service circuit breakers provide short circuit protection as specified in the code of Federal Regulations 30 CFR 75.601-2. E2 225/400 ampere K frame and 400/600 ampere L frame electronic trip units feature specifically designed instantaneous pickup settings to conform exactly with the code of 2.6 Federal Regulations 30 CFR 75.601-2. Electromechanical trip units are also available with a wide range of magnetic pickup ranges. 2 2 2 The tables below list the conductor size maximum allowable circuit breaker instantaneous setting and the E2 breaker that meets that setting. Interrupting Capacity Rating Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical kA) Vdc 1 Circuit Breaker Type Vac (50/60 Hz) 240 480 600 1000Y/577 250 E2F 65 25 18 — 10 E2J 65 35 18 — 10 2 2 Auxiliary Switch Electrical Rating Data 2 Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes 2 600 50/60 Hz 6.0 125 DC 0.5 (non-inductive load) 2 250 DC 0.25 (non-inductive load) 2 E2K 65 35 25 — 10 E2LME 100 65 35 — 42 Alarm (Signal/Lockout Switch) Electrical Rating Data 2 E2L 65 35 25 — 22 E2M 65 35 25 — 22 Maximum Voltage Maximum Current Amperes 2 E2N 65 50 25 — — 600 50/60 Hz 6.0 E2R 125 65 50 — — 125 DC 0.5 (non-inductive load) 2 E2FM 65 25 18 10 10 250 DC 0.25 (non-inductive load) E2JM 65 35 18 10 22 E2KM 65 35 25 14 10 E2LMZ 100 65 35 10 42 E2LM — 35 25 18 22 — 35 25 18 22 — 50 25 25 — — 65 50 25 — E2MM E2NM 2 E2RM Frequency 2 Notes 1 Two poles in series. DC rating applies to breakers with thermal-magnetic trip unit. Breakers with electronic trip units are not DC rated. 2 Series rated for application with Eaton’s E2KM and E2LM breakers. 2 2 2 2 2 Trailing Cable Setting Per 30 CFR 75 2 Conductor Size Maximum Breaker Instantaneous Setting Maximum Ampere 75°C Insulated Conductor E2/E2M Instantaneous Only Setting 14 50 15 E2K 150A A 12 75 20 E2K 150A B 10 150 30 E2K 150A C 8 200 50 E2K 225A A B 6 300 65 E2K 225A 4 500 85 E2K 225A/E2L 400A C/A 3 600 100 E2K 225A/E2L 400A D/B 2 800 115 E2K 225A/E2L 400A E/C 1 1000 130 E2K 225A/E2L 400A F/D 1/0 1250 150 E2K 225A/E2L 400A G/E 2/0 1500 175 E2K 225A/E2L 400A H/F G 3/0 2000 200 E2L 400A 4/0 2500 230 E2L 400A H H 250 2500 255 E2L 400A 300 2500 285 E2L 400A H 350 2500 310 E2L 400A H 400 2500 335 E2L 400A H 500 2500 380 E2L 400A H Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-375 2.6 2 2 2 Specialty Breakers Undervoltage Release Mechanism Electrical Rating Data Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Breaker Type Supply Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA E2F/E2FM 110 Vac 44.5 77 93.5 1.3 2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers 120 Vac 1.5 127 Vac 1.7 110 Vdc 1.5 120 Vdc 1.7 125 Vdc E2J/E2JM 110 Vac 1.9 44.5 77 93.5 1.8 2 120 Vac 2.1 127 Vac 2.4 2 110 Vdc 1.6 2 120 Vdc 1.9 125 Vdc 2 E2K/E2KM 2 2 2 2.2 44.5 77 93.5 E2LME/E2LMZ 2.1 127 Vac 2.4 110 Vdc 1.6 120 Vdc 1.9 110 Vac 2.2 44.5 77 93.5 120 Vac 110 Vdc 1.25 43.8 77 93.5 120 Vdc 2 110 Vac 0.94 1.12 125 Vdc E2L/E2LM/E2M/ E2MM 0.96 1.13 127 Vac 2 1.8 120 Vac 125 Vdc 2 2 110 Vac 1.21 44.5 77 93.5 1.8 120 Vac 2.1 2 127 Vac 2.4 2 110 Vdc 1.6 120 Vdc 1.9 2 125 Vdc E2N/E2NM 2 2 2 2 E2R/E2RM 110 Vac 2.2 44.5 77 93.5 1.8 120 Vac 2.1 127 Vac 2.4 110 Vdc 1.6 120 Vdc 1.9 125 Vdc 2.2 110 Vac 44.5 77 93.5 120 Vac 3.3 3.6 2 127 Vac 2 120 Vdc 3.6 125 Vdc 3.8 110 Vdc 2 3.8 43.8 77 93.5 2 2 2 V4-T2-376 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 3.3 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Shunt Trip Electrical Rating Data Operating Voltage 2 Operating Voltage Breaker Type Supply Voltage Minimum VA Breaker Type Supply Voltage Minimum VA E2F/E2FM 48 Vac 33.6 92 E2L/E2LM/E2M/ E2MM 48 Vac 34 830 60 Vac 140 110 Vac 480 110 Vac 120 Vac 570 120 Vac 640 127 Vac 180 48 Vdc 220 Vac 200 60 Vdc 230 Vac 240 110 Vdc 100 120 Vdc 130 160 125 Vdc 140 127 Vac 208 Vac 48 Vdc 146 33.6 60 Vdc 110 Vdc E2J/E2JM 77 110 Vac 60 100 710 77 60 110 120 127 Vac 140 66 110 Vdc 120 Vac 84 120 Vdc 130 127 Vac 102 125 Vdc 140 125 Vdc 110 Vac 60 120 Vac 127 Vac 110 Vdc 77 112 127 Vac 100 110 Vdc 120 120 Vdc 440 140 2 2 125 Vdc 480 390 2 430 77 370 2 2 2 2 41 18 60 Vac 2 139 210 60 2 83 120 Vac 92 127 Vac 117 24 Vdc 120 18 60 Vdc 110 Vdc 2 110 140 48 Vdc 2 330 150 130 110 Vac 60.5 120 Vac 125 Vdc 48 Vac 110 Vac 2 110 138 120 Vdc 24 Vac E2R/E2RM 77 2 100 120 Vac 77 2 1105 71 60.5 2 140 34 66 110 Vac 2 120 125 Vdc 120 Vdc E2LME/E2LMZ E2N/E2NM 2 1280 120 Vdc 110 Vdc E2K/E2KM 55 60 Vac 2 2 2 475 2 720 82 99 120 Vdc 120 125 Vdc 121 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-377 2.6 2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Product Selection E2F/E2FM Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers—Sealed Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit— Include Line/Load Terminals 2 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 25 kA at 480 Vac, Three-Pole 1 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Catalog Number 2 15 E2F3015 20 E2F3020 2 25 E2F3025 2 30 E2F3030 35 E2F3035 2 40 E2F3040 45 E2F3045 2 50 E2F305 60 E2F3060 70 E2F3070 2 80 E2F3080 90 E2F3090 2 100 E2F3100 125 E2F3125 2 150 E2F3150 2 2 2 E2F/E2FM 1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 10 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Catalog Number 2 15 — 2 20 E2FM3020 25 E2FM3025 2 30 — 35 — 2 40 E2FM3040 2 45 — 50 E2FM3050 2 60 E2FM3060 70 E2FM3070 2 80 E2FM3080 90 E2FM3090 2 100 E2FM3100 2 125 E2FM3125 150 E2FM3150 2 Note 1 For two-pole application, use outer poles. 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-378 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2.6 E2F/E2FM 2 Magnetic Only Circuit Breakers—Sealed Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit— Include Line/Load Terminals 2 2 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 25 kA at 480 Vac, Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number 3 9–30 E2F003AM 7 21–70 E2F007CM 15 45–150 E2F015EM 30 90–300 E2F030HM 50–150 E2F030EM 150–500 E2F050KM 66–190 E2F050YM 70 210–700 E2F070MM 100 150–500 E2F100KM 300–1000 E2F100RM 450–1500 E2F150TM 750–2500 E2F150UM 50 150 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 10 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number 3 9–30 — 7 21–70 — 15 45–150 — 30 90–300 — 50–150 — 50 150–500 E2FM050KM 66–190 E2FM050YM 70 210–700 E2FM070MM 100 150–500 E2FM100KM 300–1000 E2FM100RM 450–1500 E2FM150TM 750–2500 E2FM150UM 150 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-379 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2 E2J/E2JM 2 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 2 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 35 kA at 480 Vac, Three-Pole Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 70 300–650 E2J3070W E2J3250F E2J3070T 2 90 450–900 E2J3090W E2J3250F E2J3090T 2 100 500–1000 E2J3100W E2J3250F E2J3100T 125 625–1250 E2J3125W E2J3250F E2J3125T 2 150 750–1500 E2J3150W E2J3250F E2J3150T 175 875–1750 E2J3175W E2J3250F E2J3175T 2 200 1000–2000 E2J3200W E2J3250F E2J3200T 225 300–650 E2J3225AW E2J3250F E2J3225TA 2 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 2 250 500–1000 E2J3225DW E2J3250F E2J3225TD 1125–2250 E2J3225W E2J3250F E2J3225T 1250–2500 E2J3250W E2J3250F E2J3250T 2 2 E2J/E2JM 1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 10 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 2 Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 70 300–650 E2JM3070W E2JM3250F E2J3070T 90 450–900 E2JM3090W E2JM3250F E2J3090T 100 500–1000 E2JM3100W E2JM3250F E2J3100T 2 125 625–1250 E2JM3125W E2JM3250F E2J3125T 150 750–1500 E2JM3150W E2JM3250F E2J3150T 2 175 875–1750 E2JM3175W E2JM3250F E2J3175T 2 200 1000–2000 E2JM3200W E2JM3250F E2J3200T 225 300–650 E2JM3225AW E2JM3250F E2J3225TA 2 2 2 250 500–1000 E2JM3225DW E2JM3250F E2J3225TD 1125–2250 E2JM3225W E2JM3250F E2J3225T 1250–2500 E2JM3250W E2JM3250F E2J3250T 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-380 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2.6 E2J/E2JM 2 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Magnetic Only Trip Unit 2 2 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 25 kA at 480 Vac, Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 250 Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 300–650 E2J3250MAW E2J3250F E2J3250TMA 450–900 E2J3250MCW E2J3250F E2J3250TMC 500–1000 E2J3250MDW E2J3250F E2J3250TMD 625–1250 E2J3250MFW E2J3250F E2J3250TMF 750–1500 E2J3250MGW E2J3250F E2J3250TMG 875–1750 E2J3250MJW E2J3250F E2J3250TMJ 1000–2000 E2J3250MKW E2J3250F E2J3250TMK 1125–2250 E2J3250MLW E2J3250F E2J3250TML 1250–2500 E2J3250MW E2J3250F E2J3250TM 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 10 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 250 Magnetic Trip Range Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 2 300–650 E2JM3250MAW E2JM3250F E2J3250TMA 450–900 E2JM250MCW E2JM3250F E2J3250TMC 500–1000 E2JM3250MDW E2JM3250F E2J3250TMD 625–1250 E2JM3250MFW E2JM3250F E2J3250TMF 750–1500 E2JM3250MGW E2JM3250F E2J3250TMG 875–1750 E2JM3250MJW E2JM3250F E2J3250TMJ 1000–2000 E2JM3250MKW E2JM3250F E2J3250TMK 1125–2250 E2JM3250MLW E2JM3250F E2J3250TML 1250–2500 E2JM3250MW E2JM3250F E2J3250TM 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-381 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2 E2K/E2KM 2 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 2 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 35 kA at 480 Vac, Three-Pole Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 100 500–1000 E2K3100W E2K3400F E2K3100T 2 125 625–1250 E2K3125W E2K3400F E2K3125T 2 150 750–1500 E2K3150W E2K3400F E2K3150T 175 875–1750 E2K3175W E2K3400F E2K3175T 200 1000–2000 E2K3200W E2K3400F E2K3200T 225 300–650 E2K3225AW E2K3400F E2K3225TA 2 2 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 500–1000 E2K3225DW E2K3400F E2K3225TD 1125–2250 E2K3225W E2K3400F E2K3225T 250 1250–2500 E2K3250W E2K3400F E2K3250T 2 300 1500–3000 E2K3300W E2K3400F E2K3300T 350 1750–3500 E2K3350W E2K3400F E2K3350T 2 400 2000–4000 E2K3400W E2K3400F E2K3400T 2 2 E2K/E2KM 2 1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 14 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 100 500–1000 E2KM3100W E2KM3400F E2K3100T 125 625–1250 E2KM3125W E2KM3400F E2K3125T 2 150 750–1500 E2KM3150W E2KM3400F E2K3150T 175 875–1750 E2KM3175W E2KM3400F E2K3175T 2 200 1000–2000 E2KM3200W E2KM3400F E2K3200T 225 300–650 E2KM3225AW E2KM3400F E2K3225TA 500–1000 E2KM3225DW E2KM3400F E2K3225TD 1125–2250 E2KM3225W E2KM3400F E2K3225T 250 1250–2500 E2KM3250W E2KM3400F E2K3250T 300 1500–3000 E2KM3300W E2KM3400F E2K3300T 350 1750–3500 E2KM3350W E2KM3400F E2K3350T 400 2000–4000 E2KM3400W E2KM3400F E2K3400T 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-382 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2.6 E2K/E2KM 2 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Magnetic Only Trip Unit 2 2 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 35 kA at 480 Vac, Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 400 Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 300–650 E2K3400MAW E2K3400F E2K3400TMA 500–1000 E2K3400MDW E2K3400F E2K3400TMD 625–1250 E2K3400MFW E2K3400F E2K3400TMF 750–1500 E2K3400MGW E2K3400F E2K3400TMG 875–1750 E2K3400MJW E2K3400F E2K3400TMJ 1000–2000 E2K3400MKW E2K3400F E2K3400TMK 1125–2250 E2K3400MLW E2K3400F E2K3400TML 1250–2500 E2K3400MWW E2K3400F E2K3400TMW 1500–3000 E2K3400MNW E2K3400F E2K3400TMN 1750–3500 E2K3400MRW E2K3400F E2K3400TMR 2000–4000 E2K3400MW E2K3400F E2K3400TM 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 14 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 400 Magnetic Trip Range Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 2 300–650 E2KM3250MAW E2KM3400F E2K3400TMA 500–1000 E2KM3400MDW E2KM3400F E2K3400TMD 625–1250 E2KM3400MFW E2KM3400F E2K3400TMF 750–1500 E2KM3400MGW E2KM3400F E2K3400TMG 875–1750 E2KM3400MJW E2KM3400F E2K3400TMJ 1000–2000 E2KM3400MKW E2KM3400F E2K3400TMK 1125–2250 E2KM3400MLW E2KM3400F E2K3400TML 1250–2500 E2KM3400MWW E2KM3400F E2K3400TMW 1500–3000 E2KM3400MNW E2KM3400F E2K3400TMN 1750–3500 E2KM3400MRW E2KM3400F E2K3400TMR 2000–4000 E2KM3400MW E2KM3400F E2K3400TM 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-383 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2 E2K/E2KM 2 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Unit, Long/Instantaneous 2 600 Vac Maximum, 35 kA at 480 Vac, Three-Pole Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 100 50–800 E2KE3100W E2K3400F KEM3100T 2 125 50–800 E2KE3125W E2K3400F KEM3125T 2 150 50–800 E2KE3150W E2K3400F KEM3150T 200 200–1500 E2KE3200W E2K3400F KEM3200T 2 225 200–1500 E2KE3225W E2K3400F KEM3225T 500–2500 E2KE32252W E2K3400F KEM3225T2 2 400 200–1500 E2KE3400W E2K3400F KEM3400T 500–2500 E2KE34002W E2K3400F KEM3400T2 Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 14 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Magnetic Trip Range 100 50–800 E2KEM3100W E2KM3400F KEM3100T 125 50–800 E2KEM3125W E2KM3400F KEM3125T 150 50–800 E2KEM3150W E2KM3400F KEM3150T 200 200–1500 E2KEM3200W E2KM3400F KEM3200T 225 200–1500 E2KEM3225 E2KM3400F KEM3225T 500–2500 E2KEM32252W E2KM3400F KEM3225T2 200–1500 E2KEM3400W E2KM3400F KEM3400T 500–2500 E2KEM34002W E2KM3400F KEM3400T2 400 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-384 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2.6 E2K/E2KM 2 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Unit, Instantaneous Only 2 2 600 Vac Maximum, 35 kA at 480 Vac, Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 150 225 400 Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 50–800 E2KE3150MW E2K3400F KEM3150TM 200–1500 E2KE3225MW E2K3400F KEM3225TM 500–2500 E2KE3225M2W E2K3400F KEM3225TM2 200–1500 E2KE3400MW E2K3400F KEM3400TM 500–2500 E2KE3400M2W E2K3400F KEM3400TM2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 14 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 150 225 400 Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 50–800 E2KEM3150MW E2KM3400F KEM3150TM 200–1500 E2KEM3225MW E2KM3400F KEM3225TM 500–2500 E2KEM3225M2W E2KM3400F KEM3225TM2 200–1500 E2KEM3400MW E2KM3400F KEM3400TM 500–2500 E2KEM3400M2W E2KM3400F KEM3400TM2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-385 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2 E2LME/E2LMZ (Series G) 2 Circuit Breakers with Magnetic Only Trip Unit 2 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 65 kA at 480 Vac, Three-Pole 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 400 3600–4400 E2LME3400KMW E2LME3400NN LT3400KM 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 10 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 400 3600–4400 E2LMZ3400KMW E2LMZ3400NN LT3400KM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Unit 600 Vac Maximum, 65 kA at 480 Vac, Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 160 320–1920 E2LME340031W E2LME3400NN LT340031M 200 400–2400 E2LME340031W E2LME3400NN LT340031M 2 225 450–2700 E2LME340031W E2LME3400NN LT340031M 250 500–3000 E2LME340031W E2LME3400NN LT340031M 2 300 600–3600 E2LME340031W E2LME3400NN LT340031M 2 315 630–3780 E2LME340031W E2LME3400NN LT340031M 350 700–4200 E2LME340031W E2LME3400NN LT340031M 400 800–4800 E2LME340031W E2LME3400NN LT340031M 2 2 2 2 1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 10 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 160 320–1920 E2LMZ340031W E2LMZ3400NN LT340031M 2 200 400–2400 E2LMZ340031W E2LMZ3400NN LT340031M 225 450–2700 E2LMZ340031W E2LMZ3400NN LT340031M 2 250 500–3000 E2LMZ340031W E2LMZ3400NN LT340031M 2 300 600–3600 E2LMZ340031W E2LMZ3400NN LT340031M 315 630–3780 E2LMZ340031W E2LMZ3400NN LT340031M 2 350 700–4200 E2LMZ340031W E2LMZ3400NN LT340031M 400 800–4800 E2LMZ340031W E2LMZ3400NN LT340031M 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-386 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2.6 E2L/E2LM 2 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 2 2 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 35 kA at 480 Vac, Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 300 1500–3000 E2L3300W E2L3600F E2L3300T 350 1750–3500 E2L3350W E2L3600F E2L3350T 400 2000–4000 E2L3400W E2L3600F E2L3400T 450 2250–4500 E2L3450W E2L3600F E2L3450T 500 2500–5000 E2L3500W E2L3600F E2L3500T 600 3000–6000 E2L3600W E2L3600F E2L3600T 2 2 2 2 2 2 1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 18 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 300 1500–3000 E2LM3300W E2LM3600F E2L3300T 350 1750–3500 E2LM3350W E2LM3600F E2L3350T 400 2000–4000 E2LM3400W E2LM3600F E2L3400T 450 2250–4500 E2LM3450W E2LM3600F E2L3450T 500 2500–5000 E2LM3500W E2LM3600F E2L3500T 3000–6000 E2LM3600W E2LM3600F E2L3600T 1125–2250 — E2LM3600F E2L3600TL 1 600 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Note 1 600 ampere thermal 1125–2250 T.A. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-387 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2 E2L/E2LM 2 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Magnetic Only Trip Unit 2 2 2 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 35 kA at 480 Vac, Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 600 2 2 Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 1125–2250 E2L3600MLW E2L3600F E2L3600TML 1500–3000 E2L3600MNW E2L3600F E2L3600TMN 1750–3500 E2L3600MRW E2L3600F E2L3600TMR 2000–4000 E2L3600MXW E2L3600F E2L3600TMX 2 2250–4500 E2L3600MYW E2L3600F E2L3600TMY 2500–5000 E2L3600MPW E2L3600F E2L3600TMP 2 3000–6000 E2L3600MW E2L3600F E2L3600TM 2 2 2 2 1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 18 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Magnetic Trip Range 600 1125–2250 1500–3000 1750–3500 E2LM3600MRW E2LM3600F E2L3600TMR 2000–4000 E2LM3600MXW E2LM3600F E2L3600TMX 2 2 2 Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number E2LM3600MLW E2LM3600F E2L3600TML E2LM3600MNW E2LM3600F E2L3600TMN 2250–4500 E2LM3600MYW E2LM3600F E2L3600TMY 2500–5000 E2LM3600MPW E2LM3600F E2L3600TMP 3000–6000 E2LM3600MW E2LM3600F E2L3600TM 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-388 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2.6 E2L/E2LM 2 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Unit, Long/Instantaneous 2 2 600 Vac Maximum, 35 kA at 480 Vac, Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 300 500–2500 E2LE3300W E2L3600F LEM3300T 350 500–2500 E2LE3350W E2L3600F LEM3350T 400 500–2500 E2LE3400W E2L3600F LEM3400T 1000–4000 E2LE34002W E2L3600F LEM3400T2 500–2500 E2LE3600W E2L3600F LEM3600T 2500–5000 E2LE36002W E2L3600F LEM3600T2 600 2 2 2 2 2 2 1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 18 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 300 500–2500 E2LEM3300W E2LM3600F LEM3300T 350 500–2500 E2LEM3350W E2LM3600F LEM3350T 400 500–2500 E2LEM3400W E2LM3600F LEM3400T 1000–4000 E2LEM34002W E2LM3600F LEM3400T2 500–2500 E2LEM3600W E2LM3600F LEM3600T 2500–5000 E2LEM36002W E2LM3600F LEM3600T2 600 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Unit, Instantaneous Only 2 2 600 Vac Maximum, 35 kA at 480 Vac, Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 400 600 Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 500–2500 E2LE3400MW E2L3600F LEM3400TM 1000–4000 E2LE3400M2W E2L3600F LEM3400TM2 500–2500 E2LE3600MW E2L3600F LEM3600TM 2500–5000 E2LE3600M2W E2L3600F LEM3600TM2 2 2 2 2 2 1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 18 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 400 600 Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only 2 Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 500–2500 E2LEM3400MW E2LM3600F LEM3400TM 1000–4000 E2LEM3400M2W E2LM3600F LEM3400TM2 2 500–2500 E2LEM3600MW E2LM3600F LEM3600TM 2500–5000 E2LEM3600M2W E2LM3600F LEM3600TM2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-389 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2 E2M/E2MM 2 Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 2 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 35 kA at 480 Vac, Three-Pole 2 2 2 2 2 E2M/E2MM 2 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 600 1500–3000 E2M3600W E2M3800F E2M3600TN 800 2000–4000 E2M3800W E2M3800F E2M3800TX 1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 18 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 600 1500–3000 E2MM3600W E2MM3800F E2M3600TN 800 2000–4000 E2MM3800W E2MM3800F E2M3800TX 2 2 2 2 Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Magnetic Only Trip Unit 2 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 35 kA at 480 Vac, Three-Pole 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 800 2 2 Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 1500–3000 E2M3800MNW E2M3800F E2M3800TMN 2000–4000 E2M3800MXW E2M3800F E2M3800TMX 2500–5000 E2M3800MPW E2M3800F E2M3800TMP 3000–6000 E2M3800MWW E2M3800F E2M3800TMW 2 2 1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 18 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 2 2 800 Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 1500–3000 E2MM3800MNW E2MM3800F E2M3800TMN 2 2000–4000 E2MM3800MXW E2MM3800F E2M3800TMX 2500–5000 E2MM3800MPW E2MM3800F E2M3800TMP 2 3000–6000 E2MM3800MWW E2MM3800F E2M3800TMW 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-390 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2.6 E2M/E2MM 2 Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Unit, Long/Instantaneous 2 2 600 Vac Maximum, 35 kA at 480 Vac, Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 800 Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 500–2500 E2ME3800W E2M3800F MEM3800T 1000–4000 E2ME38002W E2M3800F MEM3800T2 2 2 2 2 1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 18 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 800 Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only 2 Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 500–2500 E2MEM3800W E2MM3800F MEM3800T 1000–4000 E2MEM38002W E2MM3800F MEM3800T2 2 2 2 Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Unit, Instantaneous Only 2 600 Vac Maximum, 35 kA at 480 Vac, Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 800 Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only 2 Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 500–2500 E2ME3800MW E2M3800F MEM3800TM 2 1000–4000 E2ME3800M2W E2M3800F MEM3800TM2 2 2 1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 18 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C 800 Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only 2 Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2 500–2500 E2MEM3800MW E2MM3800F MEM3800TM 1000–4000 E2MEM3800M2W E2MM3800F MEM3800TM2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-391 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2 E2N/E2NM 2 Circuit Breakers with Electronic Trip Unit, Long/Instantaneous 2 600 Vac Maximum, 50 kA at 480 Vac, Three-Pole Frame 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number 2 400 500–2500 E2N3400W 500 500–2500 E2N3500W 2 600 500–2500 E2N3600W 700 500–2500 E2N3700W 2 800 500–2500 E2N3800W 2 900 1250–5000 E2N3900W 1000 1250–5000 E2N310W 1200 1250–5000 E2N312W 2 2 1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 25 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole Frame 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number 2 400 500–2500 E2NM3400W 500 500–2500 E2NM3500W 2 600 500–2500 E2NM3600W 2 700 500–2500 E2NM3700W 800 500–2500 E2NM3800W 900 1250–5000 E2NM3900W 1000 1250–5000 E2NM310W 1200 1250–5000 E2NM312W 2 2 2 Circuit Breakers with Electronic Trip Unit, Instantaneous Only 2 2 2 2 600 Vac Maximum, 50 kA at 480 Vac, Three-Pole Frame Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number 800 500–2500 E2N3800MW 1200 1250–5000 E2N312MW 2 1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 25 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole Frame 2 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number 2 800 500–2500 E2NM3800MW 1200 1250–5000 E2NM312MW 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-392 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2.6 E2R/E2RM 2 Circuit Breakers with Electronic Trip Unit, Long/Instantaneous (Does Not Include Rating Plugs) 1 2 2 600 Vac Maximum, 50 kA at 480 Vac, Three-Pole Frame Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number 1600 2–8 x In E2R316T33W 2000 2–8 x In E2R320T33W 1600 2–8 x In E2R316T32W 2000 2–8 x In E2R320T32W 2 LS 2 2 LSI 2 2 2 1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 25 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole Frame Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Magnetic Trip Range Catalog Number 1600 2–8 x In E2RM316T33W 2000 2–8 x In E2RM320T33W 1600 2–8 x In E2RM316T32W 2000 2–8 x In E2RM320T32W 2 LS 2 2 LSI 2 2 Note 1 Rating plugs: 1600 amperes 16RES16T; 2000 amperes 20RES20T. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-393 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2 Accessories 2 Line and Load Terminals 2 2 2 Breaker Type Maximum Breaker Amperes E2F/E2FM 2 2 AWG Wire Range (No. Conductors) Catalog Number 100 Cu/AI #14–1/0 (1) 3T100FB (package of three) 150 Cu #4–4/0 (1) 3T150FB (package of three) E2J/E2JM 250 Cu #4–350 (1) T250KB E2K/E2KM 225 Cu #3–350 (1) T300K 350 Cu 250–500 (1) T350K 3T400K (three-pole kit) 2 2 Wire Type 400 Cu 2/0–250 (2) E2LME/E2LMZ 400 Cu/AI 500–750 (1) 3TA631LK E2L/E2LM 400 Cu/AI 4/0–600 (1) 3TA401LDK (three-pole kit) 600 Cu 250–350 (2) T602LD E2M/E2MM 600 Cu (2) 2/0–500 kcmil T600MA1 600 Cu/AI (2) 1–500 kcmil TA700MA1 800 std. Cu/AI (3) 3/0–400 kcmil TA800MA2 800 Cu/AI (2) 500–750 kcmil TA801MA 800 Cu (3) 3/0–300 kcmil T800MA1 700 Cu 2/0–500 (2) T700NB1 1000 Cu 3/0–500 (3) T1000NB1 2 1200 Cu 3/0–400 (4) T1200NB3 1600 Cu/AI 500–1000 (4) TA1600RD 2 2000 Cu/AI 2–600 (6) TA2000RD 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 E2N/E2NM End Cap Terminals—For Use with Ring Type Terminals Breaker Type Maximum Breaker Amperes Catalog Number Metric Catalog Number E2F/E2FM 150 KPEK1 KPEMK1 — E2J/E2JM 250 KPEK2 KPEMK2 — E2K/E2KM 400 KPEK3 KPEMK3 — E2LME/E2LMZ 400 — L3RTWK — E2L/E2LM 600 KPEK4 KPEMK4 — Imperial External Accessories Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Breaker Type Catalog Number E2F/E2FM PLK1 E2J/E2JM PLK3 E2K/E2KM PLK3 E2LME/E2LMZ LPHL E2L/E2LM HLK4 E2M/E2MM HLK4 E2N/E2NM PLK5 E2R/E2RM HLK6 2 2 2 V4-T2-394 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Internal Accessories 2 Undervoltage Release 1 Breaker Type UVR Type Voltage Rating Mounting Location Catalog Number E2F/E2FM Handle reset 208–240 Vac Left pole UVH1LP11K (thermal/magnetic only) 2 U18 2 U42 E2J/E2JM E2K/E2KM E2LME/E2LMZ E2L/E2LM/E2M/E2MM E2N/E2NM E2R/E2RM Factory Modification Code Handle reset 110–127 Vdc Left pole UVH1LP26K (thermal/magnetic only) Handle reset 110–127 Vac Left pole UVH2LP08K 2 U18 Handle reset 208–240 Vac Left pole UVH2LP11K 2 U22 Handle reset 110–125 Vdc Left pole UVH2LP26K 2 T14 120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Left pole UVM3LP08K 23 24 120 Vac Left pole UVM3LP08KT Handle reset 110–127 Vac Left pole UVH3LP08K 2 U18 2 2 2 U22 2 U68 Handle reset 208–240 Vac Left pole UVH3LP11K Handle reset 110–125 Vdc Left pole UVH3LP26K 2 T14 Handle reset 110–127 Vac Left pole UVR120APK U5 Handle reset 110–125 Vdc Left pole UVR125DPK U6 120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Left pole UVM4LP08K 23 U66 120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Left pole UVM4LP08KT 24 U68 Handle reset 110–127 Vac Left pole UVH4LP08K 2 U18 Handle reset 208–240 Vac Left pole UVH4LP11K 2 U22 Handle reset 110–125 Vdc Left pole UVH4LP26K 2 T14 120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Left pole UVM5LP08K 3 U66 120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Left pole UVM5LT08K 4 U68 Handle reset 110–127 Vac Left pole UVH5LP08K 2 U18 Handle reset 208–240 Vac Left pole UVH5LP11K 2 U22 Handle reset 110–125 Vdc Left pole UVH5LP26K 2 T14 120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Right pole UVM6RP08K 35 U58 Handle reset 110–127 Vac Right pole UVH6RP08K 5 U49 Handle reset 208–240 Vac Right pole UVH6RP11K 5 U53 Handle reset 110–125 Vdc Right pole UVH6RP26K 5 T33 2 2 U66 120 volt handle reset with LED 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Contact Eaton for internal accessory voltage ratings not listed. 2 LH (RH also available). 3 Pigtail leads. 4 Terminal blocks. 5 RH only. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-395 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2 Shunt Trip 1 2 Breaker Type Voltage Rating Mounting Location Catalog Number Factory Modification Code 2 E2F/E2FM 48–127 Vac or 48–60 Vdc Left pole SNT1LP08K 2 S06 208–230 Vac or 110–127 Vdc Left pole SNT1LP12K 2 S10 E2J/E2JM 110–240 Vac or 110–125 Vdc Left pole SNT2P11K 3 S10 E2K/E2KM 110–240 Vac or 110–125 Vdc Left pole SNT3P11K 3 S10 24–60 Vac/dc Left pole SNT060CPK 110–240 Vac/dc Left pole SNT120CPK 2 2 2 2 2 Alarm (Signal/Lockout Switch) E2LME/E2LMZ E2L/E2LM/E2M/E2MM 2 2 E2N/E2NM 2 E2R/E2RM 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Breaker Type Number of Sets of Contacts (Make and Break) E2F/E2FM 1 Right A1L1LPK/A1L1RPK B06 2 Right A2L1LPK/A2L1RPK B13 E2J/E2JM 1 Right A1L2LPK/A1L2RPK B06 E2K/E2KM 1 Right A1L3LPK/A1L3RPK B06 2 Right A2L3LPK/A2L3RPK B13 1 Right ALM1M1BJPK B1 S1 2 Right ALM2M2BJPK B3 S2 E2L/E2LM/E2M/E2MM 1 Right A1L4LPK/A1L4RPK B06 2 Right A2L4LPK/A2L4RPK B13 E2LME/E2LMZ 2 S06 48–60 Vac Left pole SNT4LP05K 48–60 Vdc Left pole SNT4LP23K 2 S86 110–240 Vac Left pole SNT4LP11K 2 S10 110–125 Vdc Left pole SNT4LP26K 2 S42 110–240 Vac Left pole SNT5LP11K 2 S10 110–125 Vdc Left pole SNT5LP26K 2 S42 110–240 Vac Right pole SNT6P11K 4 S29 110–125 Vdc Right pole SNT6P26K 4 S45 E2N/E2NM E2R/E2RM Number of Sets of Contacts Mounting (1A and 1B) Location Catalog Number Factory Modification Code E2F/E2FM 1 Right A1X1PK A06 2 Right A2X1RPK A13 1 Right A1X2PK A06 2 Right A2X2PK A13 1 Right A1X3PK A06 2 Right A2X3PK A13 1 Right AUX1A1BPK A1 E2J/E2JM E2K/E2KM E2LME/E2LMZ 2 Right AUX2A2BPK A2 2 E2L/E2LM/E2M/E2MM 1 Right A1X4PK A06 2 Right A2X4PK A13 2 E2N/E2NM 1 Right A1X5PK A06 2 2 Right A2X5PK A13 E2R/E2RM 2 Right A2X6RPK A12 4 Right A4X6RPK A19 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-396 Catalog Number Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Factory Modification Code 1 Right A1L5LPK/A1L5RPK B06 2 Right A2L5LPK/A2L5RPK B13 1 Right A1L6RPK B05 2 Right A2L6RPK B12 Notes 1 Contact Eaton for internal accessory voltage ratings not listed. 2 LH (RH also available). 3 LH or RH. 4 RH only. Auxiliary Switch Breaker Type Mounting Location Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2.6 Contents Description Page E2 Mining Service Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Classic Mining Breakers Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-374 V4-T2-399 V4-T2-404 V4-T2-406 V4-T2-414 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Classic Mining Breakers 2 Product Overview Classic mining service circuit breakers continue to be manufactured and are primarily applied to achieve an exact physical and electronic replacement of previously Cutler-Hammer installed Westinghouse equipment. To upgrade to the current offering of E2 mining circuit breakers, consult the cross reference information on Page V4-T2-406. 2 2 2 2 AC Interrupting Capacity, Symmetrical Amperes 2 Breaker Type HLAM 2 All Other 1000 Volt Breakers 2 2 — — — 30,000 — — — 2 22,000 22,000 — — — — — 10,000 12,000 14,000 60 Hz AC Volts KAM LAM, MAM, NBM HKAM 240 25,000 42,000 480 22,000 600 1000 1 2 2 2 Special DC Interrupting Capacity Interrupting Capacity (Amperes) at 300–330 Vdc 2 Two Poles in Series 4 Single-Pole Breaker Type Maximum Ampere Rating 0.0–0.15 mH Inductance 3 0.15–0.5 mH Inductance 0.5–0.9 mH Inductance 2.4 mH Inductance KAM 225 15,000 10,000 15,000 5000 LAM 400/600 15,000 10,000 15,000 5000 MAM 800 15,000 10,000 15,000 5000 NBM 1200 15,000 10,000 15,000 5000 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Based on circuit power factor of 50% or greater. 2 HLAM must be rear stud connected. If front connected, interrupting capacity rating is 10,000 amperes. 3 Resistive circuit. 4 Two poles in electrical series in ungrounded leg of circuit. 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-397 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2 Classic Circuit Breakers For Mining Service 2 Undervoltage Release Data Undervoltage releases are calibrated to pick up at 72 to 85% of rated voltage dropout between 35 to 70% of rated voltage. 2 2 Volts KAM, HKAM 1 480/60 0.021 10,000 10.1 240/60 0.019 — 4.6 0.021 — 2.5 2 120/60 2 2 Line Amperes 0.13 — 15.6 480/60 0.033 12,000 3 15.9 240/60 0.028 6,000 6.7 120/60 0.029 — 3.5 120/60 2 0.13 — 15.6 120/60 LAM, HLAM, MAM, HMAM, NBM, HNBM 1 2 2 Series Resistors 1 2 2 2 2 Shunt Trip Coil Data Breaker Type KAM, HKAM, LAM, HLAM, MAM, HMAM, NBM, HNBM 2 2 2 Total VA Breaker Type Volts Amperes VA 480/60 0.085 40.8 240/60 1.7 408 120/60 0.88 105.6 48 DC 8.0 384 Notes 1 Supplied for external customer mounting. 2 New design electrical reset UVR. 3 16,000 for Type MAM and HMAM. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-398 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Product Selection For reference only. Replace these frames with E2 Series. See Cross-Reference information beginning on Page V4-T2-406. 2 Classic Mining Service Circuit Breakers 2 Accessories (Included in Frame) Magnetic Trip Range, Amperes 3 2 M None 200–400 M UVR 4 200–400 2 M Standard shunt trip 3 200–400 225 TM UVR 4 300–700 2 225 TM UVR 4 500–1000 2609D60G67 3 180 M None 200–400 1291C26G08 3 180 M UVR 4 200–400 2609D60G69 3 180 M Standard shunt trip 3 200–400 5685D48G75 3 225 TM None 300–700 5685D48G74 3 225 TM None 500–1000 Breaker Type Frame Style Numbers 12 Poles Amperes KAM 2609D60G64 2 180 1291C26G07 2 180 2609D60G66 2 180 1291C26G01 2 1291C26G02 LAM Trip Type 4 3 225 TM UVR 3 225 TM UVR 4 500–1000 2609D60G01 3 225 TM Standard shunt trip 3 300–700 2609D60G02 3 225 TM Standard shunt trip 3 500–1000 2609D60G40 3 225 M None 300–700 2609D60G41 3 225 M None 500–700 1291C26G05 3 225 M UVR 4 300–700 4 500–1000 500–1000 3 225 M UVR 1291C32G01 2 400 TM UVR 4 2 2 2 2 2 300–700 1291C26G03 1291C26G04 1291C26G06 2 2609D60G61 2 400 M Shunt trip (48 Vdc) 750–1500 1291C32G03 3 400 TM UVR 4 500–1000 5685D48G73 3 400 TM None 800–1600 1291C32G02 3 400 TM UVR 4 800–1600 2609D60G03 3 400 TM Standard shunt trip 3 800–1600 2609D60G44 3 400 M None 800–1600 1291C32G04 3 400 M UVR 4 800–1600 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Terminals not included in style number. 2 All breakers listed are complete with accessories indicated. 3 Rated 120 volts/60 Hz: undervoltage release is handle reset type. 4 UVR is auto-reset type, 120 Vac. 2 2 M = magnetic only; TM = thermal-magnetic. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-399 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2 For reference only. Replace these frames with E2 Series. See Cross-Reference information beginning on Page V4-T2-406. 2 Classic Mining Service Circuit Breakers, continued 2 Breaker Type Frame Style Numbers 12 Poles Amperes Trip Type Accessories (Included in Frame) Magnetic Trip Range, Amperes 3 2609D60G17 2 600 TM UVR 3 750–1500 2 2609D60G18 2 800 TM UVR 3 1000–2000 2 2609D60G63 3 400 TM UVR 3 2000–4000 5685D48G72 3 600 TM None 1500–3000 MAM 3 1500–3000 2 2609D60G19 3 600 TM UVR 2609D60G04 3 600 TM Standard shunt trip 3 1500–3000 2 2609D60G05 3 800 TM Standard shunt trip 3 2000–4000 5685D48G71 3 800 TM None 2000–4000 2 2609D60G20 3 800 TM UVR 3 2000–4000 2 2609D60G46 3 800 M None 1500–3000 2609D60G47 3 800 M UVR 3 1500–3000 2609D60G48 3 800 M None 2000–4000 2 3 2000–4000 2609D60G49 3 800 M UVR 1229C37G13 2 1000 TM UVR 4 1500–3000 1229C37G14 2 1200 TM UVR 4 2000–4000 2 1227C36G10 3 1000 TM None 2500–5000 2 1229C37G15 3 1000 TM UVR 4 2500–5000 1227C36G13 3 1000 TM Standard shunt trip 3 2500–5000 2 1227C36G14 3 1200 TM Standard shunt trip 3 2500–5000 1227C36G09 3 1200 TM None 2500–5000 2 NBM 2 2 2 2 2 2500–5000 1229C37G16 3 1200 TM UVR 1227C36G19 3 1200 M None 2500–5000 1229C37G17 3 1200 M UVR 4 2500–5000 Notes 1 Terminals not included in style number. 2 All breakers listed are complete with accessories indicated. 3 Rated 120 volts/60 Hz: undervoltage release is handle reset type. 4 UVR is auto-reset type, 120 Vac. M = magnetic only; TM = thermal-magnetic. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-400 4 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2.6 1000 Volt Classic Mining Service Circuit Breakers HKAM Breaker Type Frame Style Numbers Poles Amperes Trip Type Accessories (Included in Frame) Magnetic Trip Range, Amperes 1 HKAM 2609D60G70 3 180 M None 200–400 2 1291C26G16 3 180 M UVR 5685D48G87 3 225 TM None 1291C26G12 3 225 TM UVR 2 300–700 5685D48G86 3 225 TM None 500–1000 1291C26G13 3 225 TM UVR 2 500–1000 1291C26G14 3 225 M UVR 2 300–700 1291C26G15 3 225 M UVR 2 500–1000 5685D48G85 3 400 TM None 800–1600 1291C32G07 3 400 TM UVR 2 800–1600 2 800–1600 2 2 2 200–400 300–700 2 2 2 2 HLAM HLAM 1291C32G09 3 400 M UVR 2 2 2 2 HMAM HMAM 5685D48G84 3 600 TM None 1500–3000 2609D60G28 3 600 TM UVR 3 1500–3000 5685D48G83 3 800 TM None 2000–4000 2609D60G29 3 800 TM UVR 3 2000–4000 2609D60G57 3 800 M UVR 3 1500–3000 2609D60G58 3 800 M UVR 3 2000–4000 2 2 2 2 2 2 HNAM HNBM 1227C36G12 3 1000 TM None 2500–5000 1229C37G19 3 1000 TM UVR 2 2500–5000 1227C36G11 3 1200 TM None 2500–5000 2 2500–5000 2500–5000 1229C37G20 3 1200 TM UVR 1229C37G18 3 1200 M UVR 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 The magnetic trip range does not change when rating plug is changed. 2 120 volt, 60 Hz electrical reset type. 3 Rated 120 volts, 60 Hz; undervoltage release is handle reset type. 2 2 M = magnetic only; TM = thermal-magnetic. 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-401 2.6 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Classic Mining Service Breaker Frames Only Breaker Type Frame Size, Amperes Number of Poles Style Numbers Breaker Type Frame Size, Amperes Number of Poles Style Numbers KAM 1 225 2 2602D86G11 MAM 2 800 2 2600D43G11 225 3 2602D86G12 800 3 2600D43G12 KAMH 1 225 2 2602D86G13 MAMH 2 800 2 2600D43G13 225 3 2602D86G14 800 3 2600D43G14 HKAM 1 225 3 1264C99G05 HMAM 2 800 3 1264C99G03 LAM 2 400 2 2602D99G05 NBM 2 1200 2 2610D64G07 400 3 2602D99G06 1200 3 2610D64G08 1200 2 2610D64G09 1200 3 2610D64G10 1200 3 2610D64G13 LAMH 2 400 2 2602D99G07 400 3 2602D99G08 HLAM 2 400 3 1264C99G02 LAM3600F 600 3 2603D48G07 LAMH3600F 600 3 2603D48G08 HLAM3600F 600 3 2603D48G09 NBMH 2 HNBM 2 2 2 Trip Units for Classic Mining Circuit Breakers Thermal-Magnetic Magnetic Only 2 Breaker Type Conductor Size Magnetic Trip Range, Amperes Maximum Continuous Amperes Three-Pole 3 Style Numbers Three-Pole Style Numbers 2 HKAM #6 150–400 180 — 2609D99G22 #4–#3 300–700 225 5685D48G40 2611D75G01 #4–#1 500–1000 225 5685D48G34 2611D75G02 #4–#1 750–1500 400 5685D48G97 2609D99G21 #2–#2/0 800–1600 400 5685D48G28 2611D75G03 #2–2/0 750–1500 600 2609D99G20 — 2/0–500 kcmil 1500–3000 600 2609D99G19 — #2–#2/0 750–1500 600 — — 2/0–500 kcmil 1500–3000 600 5685D48G22 2611D75G04 4 #1–3/0 1000–2000 800 — — 3/0–500 kcmil 2000–4000 800 5685D48G16 2611D75G05 2/0–500 kcmil 1500–3000 1000 — — 2 2 HLAM 2 HLAM600 2 HMAM 2 2 HNBM 2 2 2 2 4/0–500 kcmil 2500–5000 1000 5685D48G10 — 3/0–500 kcmil 2000–4000 1200 — — 4/0–500 kcmil 2500–5000 1200 5685D48G04 2611D75G07 Notes 1 Frame modified for left-hand mounting of UVR attachment. 2 Frame modified for right-hand mounting of UVR attachment. 3 Three-pole trip units only are suitable for replacement in 1000 volt mining service circuit breakers. 4 800 amperes. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-402 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2.6 Terminals For Classic Mining Service Breakers Terminals are UL listed for wire type and range listed below. When used with aluminum conductors, use joint compound. 2 Breaker Type Terminal Type Maximum Amperes Package of 3 Line Terminals Style Number Wire Range, Type FBM, HFBM Style pressure type terminals 100 624B100G02 #14–1/0 Al/Cu 50 624B100G10 #14–#4 Al/Cu 100 624B100G17 # 4–4/0 Al/Cu Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals 2 2 2 2 2 Terminals For Mining Service Breakers Breaker Type Terminal Type Maximum Amperes Terminal Catalog Number Wire Range, Type Number of Cables KAM, HKAM Standard pressure terminals (copper only) 225 T225LA (1) #6–350 kcmil Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals 225 TA225LA1 (1) #6–350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4–350 kcmil Al Standard copper pressure terminals 225 T225LA (1) #6–350 kcmil Cu 400 T401LA (1) #4–250 kcmil Cu plus (1) 3/0–600 kcmil Cu 225 TA225LA1 (1) #6–350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4–350 kcmil Al 400 TA400LA1 (1) #4–250 kcmil Al/Cu, plus (1) 3/0–600 kcmil Al/Cu 400 TA401LA (1) 600–750 kcmil Al 600 T600LA (2) 250–500 kcmil Cu Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals 600 TA600LA (2) 250–500 kcmil Al/Cu Standard copper pressure terminals 350 T350MA (1) #1–600 kcmil Cu 600 T600MA1 (2) 2/0–500 kcmil Cu 800 T800MA1 (3) 3/0–300 kcmil Cu 600 TA700MA1 (2) #1–500 kcmil Al/Cu 800 TA800MA2 (3) 3/0–400 kcmil Al/Cu 800 TA801MA (2) 500–750 kcmil Al/Cu 1000 T1000NB1 (3) 3/0–500 kcmil Cu 1200 T1200NB1 (4) 3/0–400 kcmil Cu 1000 TA1000NB1 (3) 3/0–400 kcmil Al/Cu 1200 TA1200NB1 (4) 4/0–500 kcmil Al/Cu 1200 TA1201NB1 (3) 500–750 kcmil Al/Cu LAM Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals LAM-600, LAMH-600, HLAM-600 MAM, HMAM, MAMH Standard copper pressure terminals Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals NBM, HNBM, NBMH Standard copper pressure terminals Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-403 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2 Accessories 2 Classic Mining Circuit Breakers 2 2 2 2 2 Rear Connected Studs 1 For complete stud assembly, order a stud and tube based on thickness of customer’s mounting panel. A short stud must be assembled adjacent to a long stud to maintain Mounting Panel Thickness In Inches (mm) Stud Length Rear Connected Studs For Insulated Panels Only: Two Per Pole clearances required by Underwriters Laboratories.2 Two studs required per pole. For List Prices, see Eaton’s Price and Availability Digest. Extension Back of Breaker In Inches (mm) Stud Style Numbers 0.50 (12.7)–13 3.22 (81.8) 1241 345 0.50 (12.7)–13 6.28 (159.5) 1241 346 225 34 0.50 (12.7)–13 4.97 (126.2) 1241 392 400 3 0.75 (19.1)–16 5.47 (138.9) 05B7383G22 0.75 (19.1)–16 7.97 (202.4) 05B7383G23 0.75 (19.1)–16 10.47 (265.9) 05B7383G24 1.00 (25.4)–12 5.91 (150.1) 314C960G16 456D983H06 1.00 (25.4)–12 8.41 (213.6) 314C960G17 456D983H09 1.00 (25.4)–12 10.91 (277.1) 314C960G18 Tube Style Numbers Length In Inches (mm) Style Numbers 2 KAM, HKAM Breakers 0.75 (19.1)–1.00 (25.4) Short 656D565G01 0.84 (21.3) 456D983H05 2 Long 656D565G02 3.78 (96.0) 456D983H08 2 2 0.50 (12.7)–0.75 (19.1) Short Long 0.25 (6.4)–0.50 (12.7) 2 2 656D565G01 656D565G02 1.09 (27.7) 4.03 (102.4) Short 656D565G01 1.34 (34.0) 456D983H07 Long 656D565G02 4.28 (108.7) 456D983H10 Stud Ampere Number LAM, HLAM Breakers 225 3 600 MAM, HMAM, MAMH Breakers 225 0.50 (12.7)–13 3.66 (93.0) 314C960G01 400 0.75 (19.1)–16 5.91 (150.1) 314C960G04 0.75 (19.1)–16 8.41 (213.6) 314C960G05 0.75 (19.1)–16 10.91 (277.1) 314C960G06 1.00 (25.4)–12 5.91 (150.1) 314C960G07 1.00 (25.4)–12 8.41 (213.6) 314C960G08 1.00 (25.4)–12 10.91 (277.1) 314C960G09 1.13 (28.7)–12 4.91 (124.7) 314C960G10 1.13 (28.7)–12 8.41 (213.6) 314C960G11 1.13 (28.7)–12 10.91 (277.1) 314C960G12 600 2 2 Diameter, In Inches (mm) and Thread 800 2 2 NBM, HNBM, NBMH Breakers 1.13 (28.7)–12 5.50 (139.7) 623B222G01 2 1.13 (28.7)–12 8.00 (203.2) 623B222G02 1.13 (28.7)–12 10.50 (266.7) 623B222G03 1.25 (31.8)–12 5.50 (139.7) 373B375G04 1.25 (31.8)–12 10.50 (266.7) 373B375G03 800 2 1200 2 2 Line and Load Terminal Shields 5 2 2 Breaker Type Description Style Numbers KAM Line terminals 1261C93G01 Load terminals 1262C46G01 Line terminals 1261C95G01 Load terminals 1262C48G01 Line terminals 1261C97G01 Load terminals 1261C97G02 LAM-400 2 2 MAM 2 Notes 1 Not UL Iisted. 2 400 ampere LA studs of the same length have sufficient clearance; however, customer connections may make it necessary to use a short stud adjacent to a long stud. 3 150, 300 and 400 ampere frames only. 4 This is a special stud that includes six contact nuts for use where bus contact nuts must be used. 5 For breakers used with terminals and cable connections. Sold in packages of 10. 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-404 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Standard Handle Reset Undervoltage Release For Classic breakers field when voltage drops below mountable on special frames 35 to 70% of coil rating. Picks listed on Page V4-T2-406, or up and seals in at 72 to 85% replacement on breakers of coil rating. For line voltages originally equipped with this up to 250 Vdc or 600 Vac. type UVR. Externally mounted resistors are supplied for certain ratings. For undervoltage protection. Standard leads extend 18.00 A solenoid device mounts inches (457.2 mm) outside of within breaker case. Coil breaker. Longer leads may must be energized before be specified. closing breaker. Trips breaker Shunt Trips For tripping breaker from a remote point. A solenoid device mounts within breaker case. Breaker trips when coil is energized. A cutoff switch breaks the circuit to the momentary rated coil when breaker opens. Available for Breaker Type KAM, HKAM Volts Style Numbers 120 Vac 4995D12G11 LAM, HLAM Breaker Type MAM, HMAM, MAMH NBM, HNBM, NBMH Volts (50–60 Hz) Style Numbers 480 Vac 2605D15G16 240 Vac 2605D15G17 120 Vac 2605D15G19 480 Vac 2606D56G16 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 120 Vac 1 1228C76G03 240 Vac 2606D56G17 240 Vac 4995D12G13 120 Vac 2606D56G19 480 Vac 4995D12G14 48 Vdc 2606D56G07 125 Vdc 4995D12G09 480 Vac 2606D57G16 240 Vac 2606D57G17 120 Vac 2606D57G19 480 Vac 2606D58G16 240 Vac 2606D58G17 120 Vac 2606D58G19 2 2 120 Vac 120 Vac 5672D69G11 1 MAM, HMAM, MAMH — 240 Vac 5672D69G13 NBM, HNBM, NBMH 480 Vac 5672D69G14 120 Vac 4995D11G11 120 Vac 1 1229C35G03 Left-Hand Mounting 240 Vac 4995D11G13 KAM, HKAM 480 Vac 4995D11G14 120 Vac 4995D10G01 120 Vac 1 240 Vac 480 Vac 4995D10G04 480 Vac 2605D15G02 240 Vac 2605D15G03 120 Vac 2605D15G05 480 Vac 2606D56G02 1228C76G03 240 Vac 2606D56G03 4995D10G03 120 Vac 2606D56G05 480 Vac 2606D57G02 240 Vac 2606D57G03 120 Vac 2606D57G05 480 Vac 2606D58G02 240 Vac 2606D58G03 120 Vac 2606D58G05 Left-Hand Mounting KAM, HKAM control voltages up to 250 Vdc or 600 Vac. Voltage and frequency must be specified. Standard leads extend 18.00 inches (457.2 mm) outside of breaker. Longer leads may be specified. Right-Hand Mounting Right-Hand Mounting LAM, HLAM 2.6 LAM, HLAM MAM, HMAM, MAMH NBM, HNBM, NBMH 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Electrical reset UVR. 2 Auto reset type. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-405 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2 Reference Information 2 E2 Cross-Reference Series C Mining Superseded by E2 Mining Series C Mining Superseded by E2 Mining 1491D72G31 E2J3070T FDBM3040 E2F3040 2 1491D72G32 E2J3090T FDBM3045 E2F3045 1491D72G33 E2J3100T FDBM3050 E2F3050 2 1491D72G37 E2J3200T FDBM3050U62 E2F3050U62 6622C87G27 E2K3225AWU66 FDBM3050WU62 E2F3050WU62 2 6622C87G28 E2K3225DWU66 FDBM3060 E2F3060 2 6622C87G32 E2K3400GWU66 FDBM3070 E2F3070 E2KM3100 E2KEM3100W FDBM3070WU62 E2F3070WU62 2 E2KM3100U66 E2KEM3100WU66 FDBM3080 E2F3080 E2KM3125 E2KEM3125W FDBM3090 E2F3090 2 E2KM3125U66 E2KEM3125WU66 FDBM3100 E2F3100 E2KM3150 E2KEM3150W FDBM3100LM04U62 E2F3100M04U62 2 E2KM3150MU66 E2KEM3150WU66 FDBM3125 E2F3125 2 E2KM3150TM E2KEM3150MW FDBM3150 E2F3150 E2KM3150U66 E2KEM3150MWU66 FDBM3150L E2F3150L 2 E2KM3200 E2KEM3200W FDM3015 E2F3015 E2KM3200U66 E2KEM3200WU66 FDM3015L E2F3015L 2 E2KM3225 E2KEM3225W FDM3015LU62 E2F3015LU62 E2KM3225F E2KM3400F FDM3020 E2F3020 2 E2KM3225FUV E2KM3400F FDM3020LU62 E2F3020LU62 2 E2KM3225MU66 E2KEM3225MWU66 FDM3025 E2F3025 E2KM3225TM E2KEM3225TM FDM3025L E2F3025L 2 E2KM3225U66 E2KEM3225WU66 FDM3025LS22 E2F3025LS22 E2LM3300U66 E2LEM3300WU66 FDM3025LU62 E2F3025LU62 2 E2LM3350U66 E2LEM3350WU66 FDM3030 E2F3030 2 E2LM34002U66 E2LEM34002WU66 FDM3030LS22 E2F3030LS22 E2LM3400F E2LM3600F FDM3040 E2F3040 2 2 E2LM3400FUV E2LM3600F FDM3040L E2F3040L E2LM3400M2U66 E2LEM3400M2WU66 FDM3040LU62 E2F3040LU62 2 E2LM3400MU66 E2LEM3400MWU66 FDM3050 E2F3050 E2LM3400U66 E2LEM3400WU66 FDM3050LU62 E2F3050LU62 2 FDBM3015 E2F3015 FDM3050U62 E2F3050U62 2 FDBM3015WU62 E2F3015WU62 FDM3060 E2F3060 FDBM3020 E2F3020 FDM3060LU62 E2F3060LU62 2 FDBM3025 E2F3025 FDM3070 E2F3070 FDBM3025U62 E2F3025U62 FDM3070A02U62 E2F3070A02U62 2 FDBM3030 E2F3030 FDM3080 E2F3080 FDBM3030U62 E2F3030WU62 FDM3090 E2F3090 2 FDBM3030WU62 E2F3030WU62 FDM3100 E2F3100 FDBM3035 E2F3035 FDM3100LS22 E2F3100LS22 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-406 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2.6 E2 Cross-Reference, continued Superseded by E2 Mining Series C Mining Superseded by E2 Mining FDM3100LU62 E2FLU62 JDCM3150W E2JM3150W FDM3125 E2F3125 JDCM3175W E2JM3175W FDM3125LU62 E2F3125LU62 JDCM3200W E2JM3200W FDM3150 E2F3150 JDCM3225A5W E2JM3225AW HFDM003AM E2F003AM JDCM3225D5W E2JM3225DW HFDM003AMLU62 E2F003AMLU62 JDCM3225W E2JM3225W HFDM007CM E2F007CM JDCM3250A5MW E2JM3250MAW HFDM007CMU62 E2F007CMU62 JDCM3250A5MWU18 E2JM3250MAWU18 HFDM015EM E2F015EM JDCM3250A5W E2JM3250AW HFDM015EMA02 E2F015EMA02 JDCM3250C5MW E2JM3250MCW HFDM015EMLU62 E2F015EMLU62 JDCM3250D5MW E2JM3250MDW HFDM015EMU62 E2F015EMU62 JDCM3250D5MWA06 E2JM3250MDWA06 HFDM030HM E2F030HM JDCM3250D5W E2JM3250DW HFDM030HMLU62 E2F030HMLU62 JDCM3250D5WS10 E2JM3250DWS10 HFDM030HMU62 E2F030HMU62 JDCM3250F E2JM3250F HFDM050KM E2F050KM JDCM3250F5MD01 E2JM3250MFD01 HFDM050KML E2F050KML JDCM3250F5MW E2JM3250MFW HFDM050KMLU62 E2F050KMLU62 JDCM3250G5MW E2JM3250MGW HFDM050KMU62 E2F050KMU62 JDCM3250G5WA02D01 E2JM3250MGA02D01 HFDM070MM E2F070MM JDCM3250J5MW E2JM3250MJW HFDM070MMU62 E2F070MMU62 JDCM3250J5MWA02 E2JM3250MJA02 HFDM1001M E2F1001M JDCM3250J5WA02D01 E2JM3250MJA02D01 HFDM1001MS22 E2F1001MS22 JDCM3250J5WD01 E2JM3250MJD01 HFDM100LM E2F100LM JDCM3250K5MW E2JM3250MKW HFDM100LMA02 E2F100LMA02 JDCM3250L5MW E2JM3250MLW HFDM100LMU62 E2F100LMU62 JDCM3250MW E2JM3250MW HFDM 100RM E2F100RM JDCM3250W E2JM3250W HFDM100RML E2F100RML JDCMAA2D1 E2JM3250MM02D01 HFDM100RMS22 E2F100RMS22 JDCMDD1S30 E2JM3250MDS30D01 HFDM100RMU62 E2F100RMU62 JDCMFD01 E2JM3250MFD01 HFDM150TM E2F150TM JDCMGA02D1 E2JM3250MGA02D01 HFDM150TML E2F150TML JDCMJA2D1 E2JM3250MJA02D01 HFDM150TMU62 E2F150TMU62 JDCMJD01 E2JM3250MJD01 HFDM150UM E2F150UM JDM2250F E2JM3250F JCDA2D1S30 E2JM250MDA2D1S30 JDM3070W E2J3070W JCMA2D1S30 E2JM250MFA2D1S30 JDM3090W E2J3090W JDCM3070W E2JM3070W JDM3100W E2J3100W JDCM3090W E2JM3090W JDM3125W E2J3125W JDCM3100W E2JM3100W JDM3150W E2J3150W JDCM3125W E2JM3125W JDM3150WU18 E2J3150WU18 Series C Mining 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-407 2.6 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers E2 Cross-Reference, continued Series C Mining Superseded by E2 Mining Series C Mining 2 JDM3175W E2J3175W JM3250TL5M_1125-2250 E2J3250TML 2 JDM3200W E2J3200W JM3250TM E2J3250TM JDM3200WA06 E2J3200WA06 KDCM3100W E2KM3100W 2 JDM3225A5W E2J3225AW KDCM3125W E2KM3125W JDM3225D5W E2J3225DW KDCM3150W E2KM3150W 2 JDM3225W E2J3225W KDCM3175W E2KM3175W JDM3250A5MW E2J3250MAW KDCM3200W E2KM3200W JDM3250A5W E2J3250AW KDCM3225A5MW E2KM3200MAW 2 JDM3250C5MW E2J3250CW KDCM3225D5MW E2KM3200MDW JDM3250D5MW E2J3250MDW KDCM3225W E2KM3225W 2 JDM3250D5W E2J3250DW KDCM3250W E2KM3250W JDM3250F E2J3250F KDCM3250WU18 E2KM3250WU18 2 JDM3250F5MW E2J3250MFW KDCM3300W E2KM3300W 2 JDM3250G5MW E2J3250MGW KDCM3350W E2KM3350W JDM3250J5MW E2J3250MJW KDCM3400D5MA02D09H04 E2KM3400MDA02D09H04 2 Superseded by E2 Mining 2 JDM3250K5MW E2J3250MKW KDCM3400D5MW E2KM3400MDW JDM3250L5MW E2J3250MLW KDCM3400D5MWA02D07 E2KM3400MDA02D07 2 JDM3250MW E2J3250MW KDCM3400D5W E2KM3400DW JDM3250W E2J3250W KDCM3400D5WD09 E2KM3400DD09 2 JDM3250WS10 E2J3250WS10 KDCM3400F E2KM3400F 2 JM2225T1125-2250 E2J3225T KDCM3400F5MW E2KM3400MFW JM3070T E2J3070T KDCM3400FD09G04 E2KM3400MFD09G04 2 JM3090T E2J3090T KDCM3400G5MW E2KM3400MGD09G05 JM3100T E2J3100T KDCM3400G5MWD09H04 E2KM3400MGD09H04 2 JM3125T E2J3125T KDCM3400G5W E2KM3400MGW JM3150T E2J3150T KDCM3400G5WD07 E2KM3400MGD07 2 JM3175T E2J3175T KDCM3400J5MA02D09 E2KM3400MJA02D09 2 JM3200T E2J3200T KDCM3400J5MA2D9G4S30 E2KM3400MJA2D9G4S30 JM3225T E2J3225T KDCM3400J5MD09 E2KM3400MJD09 2 JM3225TA5 E2J3225TA KDCM3400J5MD09H04S30 E2KM3400MJD09H04S30 JM3225TD5 E2J3225TD KDCM3400J5MW E2KM3400MJW 2 JM3250T E2J3250T KDCM3400J5MWA02D07 E2KM3400MJA02D07 2 JM3250TA5 E2J3250TA KDCM3400J5MWA06 E2KM3400MJWA06 JM3250TA5M_350-700 E2J3250TMA KDCM3400J5MWD07S30 E2KM3400MJD07S30 2 JM3250TC5M E2J3250TMC KDCM3400J5WD07 E2KM3400MJD07 JM3250TD5_500-1000 E2J3250TMD KDCM3400K5MW E2KM3400MKW 2 JM3250TF5M_625-1250 E2J3250TMF KDCM3400K5MWS10 E2KM3400MKWS10 JM3250TG5M_750-1500 E2J3250TMG KDCM3400K5MWU18 E2KM3400MKWU18 JM3250TJ5M_875-1750 E2J3250TMJ KDCM3400L5MW E2KM3400MLW JM3250TK5M_1000-2000 E2J3250TMK KDCM3400L5MWD09H04 E2KM3400MLD09H04 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-408 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2.6 E2 Cross-Reference, continued Series C Mining Superseded by E2 Mining Series C Mining KDCM3400L5MWS10 E2KM3400MLWS10 KDM3300WS10 E2K3300WS10 KDCM3400L5WD07 E2KM3400MLD07 KDM3350W E2K3350W KDCM3400MW E2KM3400MW KDM3400D5MW E2K3400MDW KDCM3400N5MW E2KM3400MNW KDM3400D5W E2K3400DW KDCM3400N5MWA06 E2KM3400MNWA06 KDM3400D5WU18 E2K3400DWU18 KDCM3400N5WA02D07 E2KM3400MNA02D07 KDM3400F E2K3400F KDCM3400R5MW E2KM3400MRW KDM3400F5MW E2K3400MFW KDCM3400W E2KM3400W KDM3400FK37A06D09D18 E2KE3400A06D09D18 KDCM3400W5MW E2KM3400MWW KDM3400G5A06D09U18 E2K3400GA06D09U18 KDCMDMD07 E2KM3400MDD07 KDM3400G5A13D09U18 E2K3400GA13D09U18 KDCMNA2D7 E2KM3400MNA02D07 KDM3400G5MW E2K3400MGW KDM2400F E2K2400F KDM3400G5W E2K3400GW KDM2400G5MS50 E2K2400MGWS50 KDM3400G5WA06 E2K3400GWS10 KDM2400G5MW E2K2400MGW KDM3400G5WS10 E2K3400GWS10 KDM2400W5MW E2K2400MWW KDM3400G5WU18 E2K3400GWU18 KDM2400W5MWA06D07S10 E2K2400MWA06D07S10 KDM3400J5MW E2K3400MJW KDM2400W5MWA06D10S10 E2K2400MWA06D10S10 KDM3400K5MS54 E2K3400MKWS54 KDM2400W5MWD07 E2K2400MWD07 KDM3400K5MW E2K3400MKW KDM2400W5MWD07S10 E2K2400MWD07S10 KDM3400L5MW E2K3400MLW KDM2400W5MWD10 E2K2400MWD10 KDM3400MW E2K3400MW KDM2400W5MWD10S10 E2K2400MWD10S10 KDM3400MWA06U18 E2K3400MWA06U18 KDM2400W5MWS10 E2K2400MWWS10 KDM3400N5MW E2K3400MNW KDM3100W E2K3100W KDM3400R5MW E2K3400MRW KDM3125W E2K3125W KDM3400W E2K3400W KDM3150W E2K3150W KDM3400W5MW E2K3400MWW KDM3150WA06 E2K3150WA06 KEM3100T KEM3100T KDM3175W E2K3175W KEM3125T KEM3125T KDM3200W E2K3200W KEM3150T KEM3150T KDM3225A5W E2K3225AW KEM3150TM KEM3150TM KDM3225D5A13D09U18 E2K3225DA13D09U18 KEM3200T KEM3200T KDM3225D5MW E2K3400MDW KEM3225T KEM3225T KDM3225D5W E2K3225DW KEM3225T2 KEM3225T2 KDM3225F E2K3400F KEM3225TM KEM3225TM KDM3225W E2K3225W KEM3225TM2 KEM3225TM2 KDM3225WK37 E2KE3225W KM2225TA5 E2K2225TA KDM3225WK37U18 E2KE3225WU18 KM2225TA5M E2K2400TMA KDM3225WK38 E2KE3225MW KM2225TD5 E2K2225TD KDM3250W E2K3250W KM2225TD5M E2K2400TMD KDM3300W E2K3300W KM2400TD5 E2K2400TD KDM3300WA06U18 E2K3300WA06U18 KM2400TD5M E2K2400TMD 2 Superseded by E2 Mining 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-409 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2 E2 Cross-Reference, continued 2 Series C Mining Superseded by E2 Mining Series C Mining KM2400TG5M E2K2400TMG LEM3300T LEM3300T 2 KM2400TN5M E2K2400TMN LEM3350T LEM3350T 2 KM2400TW5M E2K2400TMW LEM3400T LEM3400T KM3100T E2K3100T LEM3400T2 LEM3400T2 2 KM3125T E2K3125T LEM3400TM LEM3400TM KM3150T E2K3150T LEM3400TM2 LEM3400TM2 2 KM3175T E2K3175T LEM3600T LEM3600T KM3200T E2K3200T LEM3600TM LEM3600TM 2 KM3225T E2K3225T LM3600TL6M E2L3600TML 2 KM3225TA5 E2K3225TA LM3600TN6M E2L3600TMN KM3225TA5M E2K3400TMA LM3600TP6M E2L3600TMP 2 KM3225TD5 E2K3225TD LM3600TR6M E2L3600TMR KM3225TD5M E2K3400TMD LM3600TS6M E2L3600TM 2 KM3250T E2K3250T LM3600TX6M E2L3600TMX KM3300T E2K3300T UVE3LP08K UVE3LP08K KM3350T E2K3350T UVE4LP08K UVE4LP08K 2 KM3400T E2K3400T KM3400TD5 E2K3400TD Additional Information on Mining Breakers 2 KM3400TF5M E2K3400TMF Source Description KM3400TG5M E2K3400TMG 2 TD01217001E E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Dimensional Data KM3400TJ5M E2K3400TMJ KM3400TK5M E2K3400TMK KM3400TL5M E2K3400TML 2 KM3400TM E2K3400TM KM3400TN5M E2K3400TMN 2 KM3400TR5M E2K3400TMR KM3400TW5M E2K3400TMW 2 LDCM3600EMA05W E2LEM3600MA05W 2 LDCM3600F E2LM3600F LDM3600F E2L3600F 2 2 BR01217001E E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Brochure TC01217001E E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Time Current Curves www.eaton.com/mining Mining and Metals 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-410 Superseded by E2 Mining Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2.6 Contents GFR Relay Description Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Current Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2 Mining Service Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . Classic Mining Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page V4-T2-355 V4-T2-361 V4-T2-374 V4-T2-397 V4-T2-412 V4-T2-413 V4-T2-413 V4-T2-414 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR Product Description A Type GFR ground fault protection system, when properly installed on a grounded electrical system, will sense phase-to-ground fault currents. When the level of fault current is in excess of the pre-selected current pickup and time delay settings, the GFR relay will initiate a trip action of a disconnect device, which will open the faulted circuit and clear the fault. 2 Standards and Certifications The GFR devices are UL Class I devices designed to protect electrical equipment against extensive damage from arcing ground faults. A basic Type GFR ground fault protection system consists of a ground fault relay, a ground fault current sensor and a disconnect device equipped with a shunt trip device. This disconnect device can be a molded case circuit breaker, a power circuit breaker, a bolted pressure switch or other fusible disconnect device, suitable for application with UL Class I ground fault sensing and relaying equipment. Eaton’s GFR ground fault relays, current sensors, test panels and accessory devices are UL listed by Underwriters Laboratories in accordance with their standard for ground fault sensing and relaying equipment, UL 1053, under File E48381. 2 2 2 2 2 Note: Relays are also listed with CSA under their file number 43357. 2 2 2 2 2 Note: Suitable for either surface or semi-flush mounting. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-411 2.6 2 Each installation requires: ● 2 ● 2 Specialty Breakers Product Selection 2 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers One relay unit (select trip ampere as required) One current sensor (select configuration required) GFR Relay ● ● One circuit breaker or disconnect device with shunt trip, or a shunt trip attachment for mounting in existing breaker Test panel (optional) GFR Relay 2 Ground Fault Pickup Amperes 1–12 5–60 100–1200 Catalog Number 1 Catalog Number 1 Catalog Number 1 GFR1200EI 2 GFR Relay Types 2 For 120 Volt 50/60 Hz Control Electrical reset with zone interlocking GFR12EI GFR60EI 2 Electrical reset without zone interlocking GFR12E GFR60E GFR1200E 2 Mechanical reset with zone interlocking GFR12MI GFR60MI GFR1200MI Mechanical reset without zone interlocking GFR12M GFR60M GFR1200M GFR1200EID 2 For 120 Vdc Control Electrical reset with zone interlocking — — 2 Electrical reset without zone interlocking — — GFR1200ED Mechanical reset with zone interlocking — — GFR1200MID Mechanical reset without zone interlocking — — GFR1200MD 2 2 2 Typical Current Sensor Current Sensor Window Size in Inches (mm) 2 Catalog Number Used with Relays Rated 1–12 Amperes 2 5.50 (139.7) I.D. 1283C45G01 2 2.50 (63.5) I.D. 5.50 (139.7) I.D. 1256C13G01 2 7.81 x 11.00 (198.4 x 279.4) Rect. 2 1257C88G04 3.31 x 24.94 (84.1 x 760.5) Rect. 2 1257C92G03 Used with Relays Rated 5–60 Amperes 2 179C768G01 Used with Relays Rated 100–1200 Amperes 2 2.50 (63.5) I.D. 179C768G02 5.50 (139.7) I.D. 1256C13G02 2 8.25 (209.6). I.D. 179C767G02 7.81 x 11.00 (198.4 x 279.4) Rect. 2 1257C88G03 2 9.94 x 16.94 (252.5 x 430.3) Rect. 2 1257C90G02 2 9.94 x 23.94 (252.5 x 608.1) Rect. 2 1257C91G02 15.94 x 19.94 (404.9 x 506.4) Rect. 2 1257C89G02 3.31 x 24.94 (84.1 x 633.5) Rect. 2 1257C92G04 2 6.75 x 29.64 (171.5 x 752.9) Rect. 2 2 Notes 1 Suitable for either surface or semi-flush mounting. 2 One end removable for installation. 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-412 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 1255C39G03 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Accessories Options Additional optional equipment can be added to the protection system to meet the requirements of the specifying engineer, including: ● ● ● Ground fault test panel Ground fault warning indicator relay Ground fault indicating ammeter GFR relays are available with zone selective interlocking circuitry to interlock several relays within the same system. This allows the relay which detects a ground fault to instantly clear the fault by tripping the disconnect device. The relay simultaneously sends a signal to relay units “upstream” from the fault to time delay or to block their operation completely. Current sensors in various designs provide a range of “window” sizes to accommodate standard bus and cable arrangements. Shunt trip attachments may be ordered for field mounting in Eaton’s molded case circuit breakers, or may be ordered factory installed in the breaker. Test Panel (120 Vac) Used to test the ground fault system, to give an indication the relay has tripped the breaker, and to reset the relay after tripping. These functions may be separately mounted pilot devices. Note: When a mechanically reset relay is used with a test panel, both the relay and test panel must be reset following either a simulated ground fault test or actual ground fault. Not UL listed. Test 120 Volt 50/60 Hz 120 Volt 50/60 Hz Ammeter Kit 2 Sensor 2 ● Catalog Number 1–12 ampere 752B820G01 5–60 ampere 752B820G02 GFRTP 100–1200 ampere 752B820G03 Shunt Trip Attachments Use 120 Vac shunt trips. Faceplate Recommended when these relays are semi-flush mounted, to close the door cutout opening. 600 volt, 50/60 Hz maximum system voltage ● ● Ground fault detection ranges: ● 1 to 12, 5 to 60 or 100 to 1200 amperes Output contacts: ● 240 volt, 50/60 Hz: 3.0 amperes ● 120 volt, 50/60 Hz: 6.0 amperes ● 28 Vdc: 3.0 amperes ● 125 Vdc: 0.5 amperes Control power requirements: ● 120 volt, 50/60 Hz or 125 Vdc (optional) Catalog Number Manual reset 1234C67G01 Self-resetting 1234C67G02 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Face Plate Description Catalog Number 2 Faceplate 752B410G01 2 2 Ground Fault Warning Indicator Description 2 2 Electrical Ratings GFR Relay ● Kit Catalog Number Ground Fault Warning Indicator This is an accessory item for use with GFR relays with interlocking circuitry. At approximately 30–50% of the relay pickup setting, the indicator switches separate 120 Vac control power to a lamp or relay, (not included) to give an indication of a ground fault. The indicator is rated 110/120 Vac 50/60 Hz for a maximum indicator load of 0.5 amperes. Technical Data and Specifications Note: Not UL listed. GFR System Used with Optional Test Panel Control Indicating Ammeter The optional indicating ammeter connects to the sensor terminals through a momentary contact pushbutton, and will indicate (in amperes) any ground fault current flowing through the sensor. Kit includes the ammeter and pushbutton. 2.6 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-413 2.6 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Contents PVGard Solar Photovoltaic Circuit Breakers Description 2 Page Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Current Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2 Mining Service Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . Classic Mining Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR . . . . PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-355 V4-T2-361 V4-T2-374 V4-T2-397 V4-T2-411 V4-T2-415 V4-T2-415 V4-T2-416 V4-T2-417 2 2 2 2 PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers 2 Product Description 2 2 2 2 2 ● ● ● ● Thermal-magnetic circuit breakers Designed to meet UL 489B for solar photovoltaic circuit protection Rated for 100% continuous current at 50°C ambient temperature Requires poles in series connection 2 2 Application Description Features Standards and Certifications Photovoltaic (PV) systems convert the energy of the sun into electrical power that is fed directly into the electric grid. The DC circuit breaker is a key component in the solar installation. PVGard DC circuit breakers are used to protect the wiring from the modules to the combiner box or inverter from overcurrents. Each breaker has its own handle for disconnecting means. One circuit breaker is used per 1000 Vdc load. PVGard breakers are uniquely designed with these features: ● ● ● Meets the higher voltage and lower fault current levels of solar systems Tested to extreme ambient conditions from –40ºC to +90ºC Eaton offers a complete line of 600 Vdc circuit breakers, as well as protection for the AC side of the inverter. Refer to Page V4-T2-361 for 600 Vdc breakers and Page V4-T2-6 for AC breaker selection. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-414 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com UL File E350638, Category Control Number DIUR Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2.6 Quick Reference PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers 2 UL 489B Interrupting Capacity (kA) 1000 Vdc Circuit Breaker Type Minimum Amps Maximum Amps kA HFD-PV 30 100 3 4 HKD-PV 125 250 3 4 2 Poles in Series LGH-PV 250 400 5 4 HMDL-PV 300 600 7.5 3 2 2 2 2 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 PVCGard Solar Circuit Breakers Frame Number of Poles Width Height Depth HFD-PV 4 5.50 (139.7) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0) HKD-PV 4 7.22 (183.4) 10.13 (257.3) 4.10 (104.1) LGH-PV 4 7.22 (183.4) 10.13 (257.3) 4.09 (103.9) HMDL-PV 3 8.25 (209.6) 16.00 (406.4) 4.06 (103.1) 2 2 2 2 2 Wiring Diagrams Series Connection Diagrams for DC Application 2 12 2 HFD-PV, HKD-PV, LGH-PV—1000 Vdc Maximum—Four Poles in Series 2 2 2 2 Load Load 2 (A) Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded systems that have one end of load (A) connected to grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection. Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only. 2 2 HMDL-PV—1000 Vdc Maximum—Three Poles in Series 2 Load 2 2 2 Load 2 (A) Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded systems that have one end of load (A) connected to grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection. 2 Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only. 2 Notes 1 Poles in series connection is customer supplied. Use rated cable per NEC. 2 For grounded systems, all poles in series must be connected on non-grounded terminal, with load connected to grounded terminal. 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-415 2.6 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Product Selection Catalog number includes breaker frame and trip unit. Order terminals separately. See Page V4-T2-419. 2 2 HFD-PV Frame HFD-PV Frame, 100A Maximum, 1000 Vdc, 3 kA 1 Current Rating Amperes Poles in Series Trip Unit Catalog Number 30 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic HFDPV4030W 2 40 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic HFDPV4040W 50 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic HFDPV4050W 2 60 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic HFDPV4060W 70 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic HFDPV4070W 2 80 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic HFDPV4080W 2 90 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic HFDPV4090W 100 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic HFDPV4100W 2 2 2 HKD-PV Frame HKD-PV Frame, 250A Maximum, 1000 Vdc, 3 kA 1 Current Rating Amperes Poles in Series Trip Unit Catalog Number 125 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic HKDPV4125W 150 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic HKDPV4150W 2 175 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic HKDPV4175W 2 200 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic HKDPV4200W 225 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic HKDPV4225W 250 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic HKDPV4250W 2 2 2 LGH-PV Frame 2 LGH-PV Frame, 400A Maximum, 1000 Vdc, 5 kA 1 Current Rating Amperes Poles in Series Trip Unit Catalog Number 250 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic LGHPV4250FFW 2 300 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic LGHPV4300FFW 2 350 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic LGHPV4350FFW 400 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic LGHPV4400FFW Trip Unit Catalog Number 2 2 HMDL-PV Frame HMDL-PV Frame, 600A Maximum, 1000 Vdc, 7.5 kA 1 Current Rating Amperes 2 2 2 2 Poles in Series 300 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic HMDLPV3300W 350 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic HMDLPV3350W 400 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic HMDLPV3400W 450 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic HMDLPV3450W 500 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic HMDLPV3500W 600 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic HMDLPV3600W Note 1 Terminals not included with frames. 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-416 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 2.6 Accessories 2 External Accessories Description 2 Frame Catalog Number 0.164-32 x 1.5-inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers HFDPV BMH1 0.250-20 x 1.5 inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers HKDPV BMH3 — LGHPV N/A 0.3125-18 x 1.25 inch filister-head steel screws and lockwashers and flat washers HMDLPV BMH5 M4–0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers HFDPV BMH1M M6–0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers HKDPV BMH3M — LGHPV Included M8-1.25 x 35 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers HMDLPV BMH5M 2 HFDPV IPB1 2 HKDPV IPB3 LGHPV IPB3 HMDLPV IPB4 HFDPV LKD1 HKDPV LKD3 LGHPV N/A HMDLPV LKD4 2 HFDPV PLK1 2 HKDPV PLK3 LGHPV LPHL HMDLPV HLK4 2 Imperial Base Mounting Hardware 2 2 2 Metric Base Mounting Hardware 2 Interphase Barriers 2 2 Non-Padlockable Handle Block 2 2 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp 1 Factory Modifications—Freeze Testing to –40ºC Frame 2 2 2 2 Modification Code HFD-PV F01 HKD-PV F01 LGH-PV F01 HMDL-PV F01 2 2 2 Special calibration—contact Eaton for availability 2 Notes 1 Locks in ON and OFF position. 2 Add 20% to list price. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-417 2.6 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Internal Accessories—Right Pole Mounting HFDPV 1 2 2 2 HKDPV LGHPV HMDLPV Factory Modification Code Field Kit Catalog Number Factory Modification Code Field Kit Catalog Number Factory Modification Code Field Kit Catalog Number Factory Modification Code Field Kit Catalog Number 1A-1B A06 A1X1PK A06 A1X3PK A1 AUX1A1BPK A06 A1X4PK 2A-2B A13 A2X1RPK A13 A2X3PK A2 AUX2A2BPK A13 A2X4PK B06 A1L1RPK B06 A1L3RPK B1 ALM1M1BJPK B06 A1L4RPK AAL1RPK C05 AAL3RPK B2 AUXALRMJPK C05 AA114RPK Field Kit Catalog Number Factory Modification Code Field Kit Catalog Number Factory Modification Code Auxiliary Switch 2 Alarm Switch 2 Auxiliary and Alarm Combo 1 make/1 break 2 1A-1B, 1 make/1 break C05 2 Internal Accessories—Left Pole Mounting HFDPV 1 Factory Modification Code 2 HKDPV Field Kit Catalog Number Factory Modification Code LGHPV HMDLPV Field Kit Catalog Number 2 Shunt Trip 2 12 Vdc S02 SNT1LP03K S42 SNT3P04K S4 SNT012CPK S02 SNT4LP03K 24 Vdc S02 SNT1LP03K S42 SNT3P04K S1 SNT060CPK S02 SNT4LP03K 2 48 Vdc S06 SNT1LP08K S50 SNT3P06K S1 SNT060CPK S86 SNT4LP23K 60 Vdc S06 SNT1LP08K S50 SNT3P06K S1 SNT060CPK S86 SNT4LP23K 125 Vdc S10 SNT1LP12K S10 SNT3P11K S2 SNT120CPK S42 SNT4LP26K 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 250 Vdc S14 SNT1LP18K S14 SNT3P14K — — S14 SNT4LP14K 120 Vac S10 SNT1LP12K S10 SNT3P11K S2 SNT120CPK S10 SNT4LP11K Undervoltage Release 12 Vdc U30 UVH1LP20K T02 UVH3LP20K U1 UVR012DPK T02 UVH4LP20K 24 Vdc U34 UVH1LP21K T02 UVH3LP21K U2 UVR024DPK T06 UVH4LP21K 48 Vdc U38 UVH1LP22K T10 UVH3LP22K U4 UVR048DPK T10 UVH4LP22K 125 Vdc U42 UVH1LP26K T14 UVH3LP26K U6 UVR125DPK T14 UVH4LP26K 250 Vdc U46 UVH1LP28K T18 UVH3LP28K U8 UVR250DPK T18 UVH4LP28K 120 Vac U14 UVH1LP08K U18 UVH3LP08K U5 UVR120APK U18 UVH4LP08K Notes 1 Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories for the HFD-PV be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected. One accessory can be mounted per pole, per breaker. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V4-T2-418 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers PVGard Solar Circuit Breaker Terminal Offering Breaker Frame HFD-PV HKD-PV LGH-PV HMDL-PV Maximum Breaker Ampacity Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG Wire Range/ Number of Conductors Metric Wire Range mm2 Number of Terminals Included Standard Terminal Catalog Number 2 2 Comments 2 50 Steel Cu/Al 14–4 (1) 2.5–25 (1) 3 3TA50FB 100 Aluminum Cu/Al 6–300 kcmil (1) 16–150 (1) 3 3TA225FDK 100 Copper Cu 4–4/0 (1) 25–95 (1) 3 3T225FD 225 Aluminum Cu/Al 3–350 kcmil (1) 35–185 (1) 1 TA300K 250 Aluminum Cu/Al 250–500 kcmil (1) 120–240 (1) 1 TA350K 250 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–250 kcmil (2) 95–120 (1) 4 4TA400K 250 Aluminum Cu/Al 2/0–250 kcmil (2) or 2/0–500 kcmil (1) 70–240 (2) 4 4TA401K 225 Copper Cu 3–350 kcmil (1) 35–185 (1) 1 T300K 250 Copper Cu 250–500 kcmil (1) 120–240 (1) 1 T350K 250 Copper Cu 3/0–250 kcmil (2) 95–120 (1) 4 4T400K Contains interphase barriers Includes 4P terminal cover 400 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 kcmil (2) 35–240 (2) 4 4TA632LK 250 Copper Cu 2–500 kcmil (1) 35–240 (1) 1 T350LK 400 Copper Cu 2–500 kcmil (2) 35–240 (2) 4 4T632LK 300 Aluminum Cu/Al 1–500 kcmil (2) — 1 TA700MA1 600 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 kcmil (3) — 1 TA800MA2 Includes 3P terminal cover 2 Contains interphase barriers Includes 4P terminal cover Number of Poles Thread Type Thread Size Catalog Number HFD-PV 4 Imperial 10–32 KPEK14 4 Metric M–5 KPEKM14 4 Imperial 0.312–18 KPEK34 4 Metric M–8 KPEKM34 4 Imperial — N/A 4 Metric M-10 L4RTWK HMDL-PV 2 2 2 2 2 Breaker Frame LGH-PV 2 2 Endcap Kits HKD-PV 2 3 Imperial — — 3 Metric — — 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V4-T2-419
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : No Author : Zoltun Design Create Date : 2012:02:03 08:14:29-06:00 Modify Date : 2013:03:27 08:56:28-04:00 Subject : Molded Case Circuit Breakers Has XFA : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26 Metadata Date : 2013:03:27 08:56:28-04:00 Format : application/pdf Title : Volume 4 Tab 02 Description : Molded Case Circuit Breakers Creator : Zoltun Design Document ID : uuid:102369f8-7f2b-ba4c-ae0b-a8c6657924e1 Instance ID : uuid:72c74b6d-a136-4944-b2ed-0f320373b4ee Producer : Acrobat Distiller 9.5.0 (Macintosh) Page Count : 419EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools